/******************************************************************************
** This file is an amalgamation of many separate C source files from SQLite
-** version 3.6.23.1. By combining all the individual C code files into this
+** version 3.6.23.1. By combining all the individual C code files into this
** single large file, the entire code can be compiled as a one translation
** unit. This allows many compilers to do optimizations that would not be
** possible if the files were compiled separately. Performance improvements
**
** This file is all you need to compile SQLite. To use SQLite in other
** programs, you need this file and the "sqlite3.h" header file that defines
-** the programming interface to the SQLite library. (If you do not have
+** the programming interface to the SQLite library. (If you do not have
** the "sqlite3.h" header file at hand, you will find a copy embedded within
** the text of this file. Search for "Begin file sqlite3.h" to find the start
** of the embedded sqlite3.h header file.) Additional code files may be needed
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
-**
+**
** This file defines various limits of what SQLite can process.
*/
#endif
/*
-** The maximum depth of an expression tree. This is limited to
-** some extent by SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH. But sometime you might
-** want to place more severe limits on the complexity of an
+** The maximum depth of an expression tree. This is limited to
+** some extent by SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH. But sometime you might
+** want to place more severe limits on the complexity of an
** expression.
**
** A value of 0 used to mean that the limit was not enforced.
**
** If this limit is changed, then the compiled library is technically
** incompatible with an SQLite library compiled with a different limit. If
-** a process operating on a database with a page-size of 65536 bytes
-** crashes, then an instance of SQLite compiled with the default page-size
+** a process operating on a database with a page-size of 65536 bytes
+** crashes, then an instance of SQLite compiled with the default page-size
** limit will not be able to rollback the aborted transaction. This could
** lead to database corruption.
*/
** Maximum depth of recursion for triggers.
**
** A value of 1 means that a trigger program will not be able to itself
-** fire any triggers. A value of 0 means that no trigger programs at all
+** fire any triggers. A value of 0 means that no trigger programs at all
** may be executed.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_MAX_TRIGGER_DEPTH
#endif
/*
-** The number of samples of an index that SQLite takes in order to
+** The number of samples of an index that SQLite takes in order to
** construct a histogram of the table content when running ANALYZE
** and with SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT2
*/
** to the next, so we have developed the following set of #if statements
** to generate appropriate macros for a wide range of compilers.
**
-** The correct "ANSI" way to do this is to use the intptr_t type.
+** The correct "ANSI" way to do this is to use the intptr_t type.
** Unfortunately, that typedef is not available on all compilers, or
** if it is available, it requires an #include of specific headers
** that very from one machine to the next.
/*
** The SQLITE_DEFAULT_MEMSTATUS macro must be defined as either 0 or 1.
-** It determines whether or not the features related to
+** It determines whether or not the features related to
** SQLITE_CONFIG_MEMSTATUS are available by default or not. This value can
** be overridden at runtime using the sqlite3_config() API.
*/
** option is set. Thus NDEBUG becomes an opt-in rather than an opt-out
** feature.
*/
-#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
+#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
# define NDEBUG 1
#endif
/*
-** The testcase() macro is used to aid in coverage testing. When
+** The testcase() macro is used to aid in coverage testing. When
** doing coverage testing, the condition inside the argument to
** testcase() must be evaluated both true and false in order to
** get full branch coverage. The testcase() macro is inserted
#endif
/*
-** The ALWAYS and NEVER macros surround boolean expressions which
+** The ALWAYS and NEVER macros surround boolean expressions which
** are intended to always be true or false, respectively. Such
** expressions could be omitted from the code completely. But they
** are included in a few cases in order to enhance the resilience
** function is provided for use in DLLs since DLL users usually do not have
** direct access to string constants within the DLL. ^The
** sqlite3_libversion_number() function returns an integer equal to
-** [SQLITE_VERSION_NUMBER]. ^The sqlite3_sourceid() function returns
-** a pointer to a string constant whose value is the same as the
+** [SQLITE_VERSION_NUMBER]. ^The sqlite3_sourceid() function returns
+** a pointer to a string constant whose value is the same as the
** [SQLITE_SOURCE_ID] C preprocessor macro.
**
** See also: [sqlite_version()] and [sqlite_source_id()].
/*
** CAPI3REF: Run-Time Library Compilation Options Diagnostics
**
-** ^The sqlite3_compileoption_used() function returns 0 or 1
-** indicating whether the specified option was defined at
-** compile time. ^The SQLITE_ prefix may be omitted from the
-** option name passed to sqlite3_compileoption_used().
+** ^The sqlite3_compileoption_used() function returns 0 or 1
+** indicating whether the specified option was defined at
+** compile time. ^The SQLITE_ prefix may be omitted from the
+** option name passed to sqlite3_compileoption_used().
**
** ^The sqlite3_compileoption_get() function allows interating
** over the list of options that were defined at compile time by
** returning the N-th compile time option string. ^If N is out of range,
-** sqlite3_compileoption_get() returns a NULL pointer. ^The SQLITE_
-** prefix is omitted from any strings returned by
+** sqlite3_compileoption_get() returns a NULL pointer. ^The SQLITE_
+** prefix is omitted from any strings returned by
** sqlite3_compileoption_get().
**
** ^Support for the diagnostic functions sqlite3_compileoption_used()
-** and sqlite3_compileoption_get() may be omitted by specifing the
+** and sqlite3_compileoption_get() may be omitted by specifing the
** [SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS] option at compile time.
**
** See also: SQL functions [sqlite_compileoption_used()] and
** SQLite can be compiled with or without mutexes. When
** the [SQLITE_THREADSAFE] C preprocessor macro is 1 or 2, mutexes
** are enabled and SQLite is threadsafe. When the
-** [SQLITE_THREADSAFE] macro is 0,
+** [SQLITE_THREADSAFE] macro is 0,
** the mutexes are omitted. Without the mutexes, it is not safe
** to use SQLite concurrently from more than one thread.
**
**
** ^The sqlite3_int64 and sqlite_int64 types can store integer values
** between -9223372036854775808 and +9223372036854775807 inclusive. ^The
-** sqlite3_uint64 and sqlite_uint64 types can store integer values
+** sqlite3_uint64 and sqlite_uint64 types can store integer values
** between 0 and +18446744073709551615 inclusive.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_INT64_TYPE
** pointer or an [sqlite3] object pointer obtained
** from [sqlite3_open()], [sqlite3_open16()], or
** [sqlite3_open_v2()], and not previously closed.
-** ^Calling sqlite3_close() with a NULL pointer argument is a
+** ^Calling sqlite3_close() with a NULL pointer argument is a
** harmless no-op.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_close(sqlite3 *);
** The sqlite3_exec() interface is a convenience wrapper around
** [sqlite3_prepare_v2()], [sqlite3_step()], and [sqlite3_finalize()],
** that allows an application to run multiple statements of SQL
-** without having to use a lot of C code.
+** without having to use a lot of C code.
**
** ^The sqlite3_exec() interface runs zero or more UTF-8 encoded,
** semicolon-separate SQL statements passed into its 2nd argument,
** from [sqlite3_column_name()].
**
** ^If the 2nd parameter to sqlite3_exec() is a NULL pointer, a pointer
-** to an empty string, or a pointer that contains only whitespace and/or
+** to an empty string, or a pointer that contains only whitespace and/or
** SQL comments, then no SQL statements are evaluated and the database
** is not changed.
**
/*
** CAPI3REF: OS Interface Open File Handle
**
-** An [sqlite3_file] object represents an open file in the
+** An [sqlite3_file] object represents an open file in the
** [sqlite3_vfs | OS interface layer]. Individual OS interface
** implementations will
** want to subclass this object by appending additional fields
** This object defines the methods used to perform various operations
** against the open file represented by the [sqlite3_file] object.
**
-** If the xOpen method sets the sqlite3_file.pMethods element
+** If the xOpen method sets the sqlite3_file.pMethods element
** to a non-NULL pointer, then the sqlite3_io_methods.xClose method
** may be invoked even if the xOpen reported that it failed. The
** only way to prevent a call to xClose following a failed xOpen
** the [sqlite3_file] can safely store a pointer to the
** filename if it needs to remember the filename for some reason.
** If the zFilename parameter is xOpen is a NULL pointer then xOpen
-** must invent its own temporary name for the file. Whenever the
+** must invent its own temporary name for the file. Whenever the
** xFilename parameter is NULL it will also be the case that the
** flags parameter will include [SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE].
**
** The flags argument to xOpen() includes all bits set in
** the flags argument to [sqlite3_open_v2()]. Or if [sqlite3_open()]
** or [sqlite3_open16()] is used, then flags includes at least
-** [SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE] | [SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE].
+** [SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE] | [SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE].
** If xOpen() opens a file read-only then it sets *pOutFlags to
** include [SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY]. Other bits in *pOutFlags may be set.
**
** The [SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE] flag is always used in conjunction
** with the [SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE] flag, which are both directly
** analogous to the O_EXCL and O_CREAT flags of the POSIX open()
-** API. The SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE flag, when paired with the
+** API. The SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE flag, when paired with the
** SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE, is used to indicate that file should always
** be created, and that it is an error if it already exists.
-** It is <i>not</i> used to indicate the file should be opened
+** It is <i>not</i> used to indicate the file should be opened
** for exclusive access.
**
** At least szOsFile bytes of memory are allocated by SQLite
** [database connection] (specified in the first argument). The
** sqlite3_db_config() interface should only be used immediately after
** the database connection is created using [sqlite3_open()],
-** [sqlite3_open16()], or [sqlite3_open_v2()].
+** [sqlite3_open16()], or [sqlite3_open_v2()].
**
** The second argument to sqlite3_db_config(D,V,...) is the
** configuration verb - an integer code that indicates what
** This object is used in only one place in the SQLite interface.
** A pointer to an instance of this object is the argument to
** [sqlite3_config()] when the configuration option is
-** [SQLITE_CONFIG_MALLOC] or [SQLITE_CONFIG_GETMALLOC].
+** [SQLITE_CONFIG_MALLOC] or [SQLITE_CONFIG_GETMALLOC].
** By creating an instance of this object
** and passing it to [sqlite3_config]([SQLITE_CONFIG_MALLOC])
** during configuration, an application can specify an alternative
** allocators round up memory allocations at least to the next multiple
** of 8. Some allocators round up to a larger multiple or to a power of 2.
** Every memory allocation request coming in through [sqlite3_malloc()]
-** or [sqlite3_realloc()] first calls xRoundup. If xRoundup returns 0,
+** or [sqlite3_realloc()] first calls xRoundup. If xRoundup returns 0,
** that causes the corresponding memory allocation to fail.
**
** The xInit method initializes the memory allocator. (For example,
** by a single thread. ^If SQLite is compiled with
** the [SQLITE_THREADSAFE | SQLITE_THREADSAFE=0] compile-time option then
** it is not possible to change the [threading mode] from its default
-** value of Single-thread and so [sqlite3_config()] will return
+** value of Single-thread and so [sqlite3_config()] will return
** [SQLITE_ERROR] if called with the SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD
** configuration option.</dd>
**
** tracks memory usage, for example. </dd>
**
** <dt>SQLITE_CONFIG_MEMSTATUS</dt>
-** <dd> ^This option takes single argument of type int, interpreted as a
-** boolean, which enables or disables the collection of memory allocation
-** statistics. ^(When memory allocation statistics are disabled, the
+** <dd> ^This option takes single argument of type int, interpreted as a
+** boolean, which enables or disables the collection of memory allocation
+** statistics. ^(When memory allocation statistics are disabled, the
** following SQLite interfaces become non-operational:
** <ul>
** <li> [sqlite3_memory_used()]
** ^SQLite will use no more than one scratch buffer per thread. So
** N should be set to the expected maximum number of threads. ^SQLite will
** never require a scratch buffer that is more than 6 times the database
-** page size. ^If SQLite needs needs additional scratch memory beyond
-** what is provided by this configuration option, then
+** page size. ^If SQLite needs needs additional scratch memory beyond
+** what is provided by this configuration option, then
** [sqlite3_malloc()] will be used to obtain the memory needed.</dd>
**
** <dt>SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE</dt>
** <dd> ^This option specifies a static memory buffer that SQLite can use for
-** the database page cache with the default page cache implemenation.
+** the database page cache with the default page cache implemenation.
** This configuration should not be used if an application-define page
** cache implementation is loaded using the SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE option.
** There are three arguments to this option: A pointer to 8-byte aligned
** memory needs for the first N pages that it adds to cache. ^If additional
** page cache memory is needed beyond what is provided by this option, then
** SQLite goes to [sqlite3_malloc()] for the additional storage space.
-** ^The implementation might use one or more of the N buffers to hold
+** ^The implementation might use one or more of the N buffers to hold
** memory accounting information. The pointer in the first argument must
** be aligned to an 8-byte boundary or subsequent behavior of SQLite
** will be undefined.</dd>
#define SQLITE_CONFIG_MEMSTATUS 9 /* boolean */
#define SQLITE_CONFIG_MUTEX 10 /* sqlite3_mutex_methods* */
#define SQLITE_CONFIG_GETMUTEX 11 /* sqlite3_mutex_methods* */
-/* previously SQLITE_CONFIG_CHUNKALLOC 12 which is now unused. */
+/* previously SQLITE_CONFIG_CHUNKALLOC 12 which is now unused. */
#define SQLITE_CONFIG_LOOKASIDE 13 /* int int */
#define SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE 14 /* sqlite3_pcache_methods* */
#define SQLITE_CONFIG_GETPCACHE 15 /* sqlite3_pcache_methods* */
**
** <dl>
** <dt>SQLITE_DBCONFIG_LOOKASIDE</dt>
-** <dd> ^This option takes three additional arguments that determine the
+** <dd> ^This option takes three additional arguments that determine the
** [lookaside memory allocator] configuration for the [database connection].
** ^The first argument (the third parameter to [sqlite3_db_config()] is a
** pointer to an memory buffer to use for lookaside memory.
** mechanisms do not count as direct row changes.)^
**
** A "trigger context" is a scope of execution that begins and
-** ends with the script of a [CREATE TRIGGER | trigger].
+** ends with the script of a [CREATE TRIGGER | trigger].
** Most SQL statements are
** evaluated outside of any trigger. This is the "top level"
** trigger context. If a trigger fires from the top level, a
** the count does not include changes used to implement [REPLACE] constraints,
** do rollbacks or ABORT processing, or [DROP TABLE] processing. The
** count does not include rows of views that fire an [INSTEAD OF trigger],
-** though if the INSTEAD OF trigger makes changes of its own, those changes
+** though if the INSTEAD OF trigger makes changes of its own, those changes
** are counted.)^
** ^The sqlite3_total_changes() function counts the changes as soon as
** the statement that makes them is completed (when the statement handle
**
** ^The sqlite3_interrupt(D) call is in effect until all currently running
** SQL statements on [database connection] D complete. ^Any new SQL statements
-** that are started after the sqlite3_interrupt() call and before the
+** that are started after the sqlite3_interrupt() call and before the
** running statements reaches zero are interrupted as if they had been
** running prior to the sqlite3_interrupt() call. ^New SQL statements
** that are started after the running statement count reaches zero are
** ^These routines do not parse the SQL statements thus
** will not detect syntactically incorrect SQL.
**
-** ^(If SQLite has not been initialized using [sqlite3_initialize()] prior
+** ^(If SQLite has not been initialized using [sqlite3_initialize()] prior
** to invoking sqlite3_complete16() then sqlite3_initialize() is invoked
** automatically by sqlite3_complete16(). If that initialization fails,
** then the return value from sqlite3_complete16() will be non-zero
** The busy callback should not take any actions which modify the
** database connection that invoked the busy handler. Any such actions
** result in undefined behavior.
-**
+**
** A busy handler must not close the database connection
** or [prepared statement] that invoked the busy handler.
*/
** requested is ok. ^When the callback returns [SQLITE_DENY], the
** [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] or equivalent call that triggered the
** authorizer will fail with an error message explaining that
-** access is denied.
+** access is denied.
**
** ^The first parameter to the authorizer callback is a copy of the third
** parameter to the sqlite3_set_authorizer() interface. ^The second parameter
** database connections for the meaning of "modify" in this paragraph.
**
** ^When [sqlite3_prepare_v2()] is used to prepare a statement, the
-** statement might be re-prepared during [sqlite3_step()] due to a
+** statement might be re-prepared during [sqlite3_step()] due to a
** schema change. Hence, the application should ensure that the
** correct authorizer callback remains in place during the [sqlite3_step()].
**
** except that it accepts two additional parameters for additional control
** over the new database connection. ^(The flags parameter to
** sqlite3_open_v2() can take one of
-** the following three values, optionally combined with the
+** the following three values, optionally combined with the
** [SQLITE_OPEN_NOMUTEX], [SQLITE_OPEN_FULLMUTEX], [SQLITE_OPEN_SHAREDCACHE],
** and/or [SQLITE_OPEN_PRIVATECACHE] flags:)^
**
** associated with a [database connection]. If a prior API call failed
** but the most recent API call succeeded, the return value from
** sqlite3_errcode() is undefined. ^The sqlite3_extended_errcode()
-** interface is the same except that it always returns the
+** interface is the same except that it always returns the
** [extended result code] even when extended result codes are
** disabled.
**
** new limit for that construct. The function returns the old limit.)^
**
** ^If the new limit is a negative number, the limit is unchanged.
-** ^(For the limit category of SQLITE_LIMIT_XYZ there is a
+** ^(For the limit category of SQLITE_LIMIT_XYZ there is a
** [limits | hard upper bound]
-** set by a compile-time C preprocessor macro named
+** set by a compile-time C preprocessor macro named
** [limits | SQLITE_MAX_XYZ].
** (The "_LIMIT_" in the name is changed to "_MAX_".))^
** ^Attempts to increase a limit above its hard upper bound are
** <li>
** ^If the value of a [parameter | host parameter] in the WHERE clause might
** change the query plan for a statement, then the statement may be
-** automatically recompiled (as if there had been a schema change) on the first
-** [sqlite3_step()] call following any change to the
-** [sqlite3_bind_text | bindings] of the [parameter].
+** automatically recompiled (as if there had been a schema change) on the first
+** [sqlite3_step()] call following any change to the
+** [sqlite3_bind_text | bindings] of the [parameter].
** </li>
** </ol>
*/
** sqlite3_value object but no mutex is held for an unprotected
** sqlite3_value object. If SQLite is compiled to be single-threaded
** (with [SQLITE_THREADSAFE=0] and with [sqlite3_threadsafe()] returning 0)
-** or if SQLite is run in one of reduced mutex modes
+** or if SQLite is run in one of reduced mutex modes
** [SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD] or [SQLITE_CONFIG_MULTITHREAD]
** then there is no distinction between protected and unprotected
** sqlite3_value objects and they can be used interchangeably. However,
** nArg parameter is a better match than a function implementation with
** a negative nArg. ^A function where the preferred text encoding
** matches the database encoding is a better
-** match than a function where the encoding is different.
+** match than a function where the encoding is different.
** ^A function where the encoding difference is between UTF16le and UTF16be
** is a closer match than a function where the encoding difference is
** between UTF8 and UTF16.
** ^Built-in functions may be overloaded by new application-defined functions.
** ^The first application-defined function with a given name overrides all
** built-in functions in the same [database connection] with the same name.
-** ^Subsequent application-defined functions of the same name only override
+** ^Subsequent application-defined functions of the same name only override
** prior application-defined functions that are an exact match for the
** number of parameters and preferred encoding.
**
** DEPRECATED
**
** These functions are [deprecated]. In order to maintain
-** backwards compatibility with older code, these functions continue
+** backwards compatibility with older code, these functions continue
** to be supported. However, new applications should avoid
** the use of these functions. To help encourage people to avoid
** using these functions, we are not going to tell you what they do.
** Implementions of aggregate SQL functions use this
** routine to allocate memory for storing their state.
**
-** ^The first time the sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine is called
+** ^The first time the sqlite3_aggregate_context(C,N) routine is called
** for a particular aggregate function, SQLite
** allocates N of memory, zeroes out that memory, and returns a pointer
** to the new memory. ^On second and subsequent calls to
** the same aggregate function instance will not resize the memory
** allocation.)^
**
-** ^SQLite automatically frees the memory allocated by
+** ^SQLite automatically frees the memory allocated by
** sqlite3_aggregate_context() when the aggregate query concludes.
**
** The first parameter must be a copy of the
** See also: [sqlite3_collation_needed()] and [sqlite3_collation_needed16()].
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation(
- sqlite3*,
- const char *zName,
- int eTextRep,
+ sqlite3*,
+ const char *zName,
+ int eTextRep,
void*,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
);
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation_v2(
- sqlite3*,
- const char *zName,
- int eTextRep,
+ sqlite3*,
+ const char *zName,
+ int eTextRep,
void*,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*),
void(*xDestroy)(void*)
);
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation16(
- sqlite3*,
+ sqlite3*,
const void *zName,
- int eTextRep,
+ int eTextRep,
void*,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
);
** [sqlite3_create_collation_v2()].
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed(
- sqlite3*,
- void*,
+ sqlite3*,
+ void*,
void(*)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const char*)
);
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed16(
- sqlite3*,
+ sqlite3*,
void*,
void(*)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const void*)
);
);
/*
-** Specify the activation key for a SEE database. Unless
+** Specify the activation key for a SEE database. Unless
** activated, none of the SEE routines will work.
*/
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_activate_see(
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_CEROD
/*
-** Specify the activation key for a CEROD database. Unless
+** Specify the activation key for a CEROD database. Unless
** activated, none of the CEROD routines will work.
*/
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_activate_cerod(
** ^The [temp_store_directory pragma] may modify this variable and cause
** it to point to memory obtained from [sqlite3_malloc]. ^Furthermore,
** the [temp_store_directory pragma] always assumes that any string
-** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from
+** that this variable points to is held in memory obtained from
** [sqlite3_malloc] and the pragma may attempt to free that memory
** using [sqlite3_free].
** Hence, if this variable is modified directly, either it should be
** interfaces.
*/
SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_update_hook(
- sqlite3*,
+ sqlite3*,
void(*)(void *,int ,char const *,char const *,sqlite3_int64),
void*
);
** KEYWORDS: sqlite3_module {virtual table module}
** EXPERIMENTAL
**
-** This structure, sometimes called a a "virtual table module",
-** defines the implementation of a [virtual tables].
+** This structure, sometimes called a a "virtual table module",
+** defines the implementation of a [virtual tables].
** This structure consists mostly of methods for the module.
**
** ^A virtual table module is created by filling in a persistent
** preexisting [virtual table] for the module.
**
** ^The module name is registered on the [database connection] specified
-** by the first parameter. ^The name of the module is given by the
+** by the first parameter. ^The name of the module is given by the
** second parameter. ^The third parameter is a pointer to
** the implementation of the [virtual table module]. ^The fourth
** parameter is an arbitrary client data pointer that is passed through
** EXPERIMENTAL
**
** ^(Virtual tables can provide alternative implementations of functions
-** using the [xFindFunction] method of the [virtual table module].
+** using the [xFindFunction] method of the [virtual table module].
** But global versions of those functions
** must exist in order to be overloaded.)^
**
**
** ^If the flags parameter is non-zero, then the BLOB is opened for read
** and write access. ^If it is zero, the BLOB is opened for read access.
-** ^It is not possible to open a column that is part of an index or primary
-** key for writing. ^If [foreign key constraints] are enabled, it is
+** ^It is not possible to open a column that is part of an index or primary
+** key for writing. ^If [foreign key constraints] are enabled, it is
** not possible to open a column that is part of a [child key] for writing.
**
** ^Note that the database name is not the filename that contains
/*
** CAPI3REF: Return The Size Of An Open BLOB
**
-** ^Returns the size in bytes of the BLOB accessible via the
+** ^Returns the size in bytes of the BLOB accessible via the
** successfully opened [BLOB handle] in its only argument. ^The
** incremental blob I/O routines can only read or overwriting existing
** blob content; they cannot change the size of a blob.
/*
** CAPI3REF: Retrieve the mutex for a database connection
**
-** ^This interface returns a pointer the [sqlite3_mutex] object that
+** ^This interface returns a pointer the [sqlite3_mutex] object that
** serializes access to the [database connection] given in the argument
** when the [threading mode] is Serialized.
** ^If the [threading mode] is Single-thread or Multi-thread then this
** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request
** handed to [sqlite3_malloc()] or [sqlite3_realloc()] (or their
** internal equivalents). Only the value returned in the
-** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.
+** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.
** The value written into the *pCurrent parameter is undefined.</dd>)^
**
** ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_USED</dt>
** <dd>This parameter returns the number of pages used out of the
-** [pagecache memory allocator] that was configured using
+** [pagecache memory allocator] that was configured using
** [SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE]. The
** value returned is in pages, not in bytes.</dd>)^
**
** ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PAGECACHE_SIZE</dt>
** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request
** handed to [pagecache memory allocator]. Only the value returned in the
-** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.
+** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.
** The value written into the *pCurrent parameter is undefined.</dd>)^
**
** ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_USED</dt>
** ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_SCRATCH_SIZE</dt>
** <dd>This parameter records the largest memory allocation request
** handed to [scratch memory allocator]. Only the value returned in the
-** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.
+** *pHighwater parameter to [sqlite3_status()] is of interest.
** The value written into the *pCurrent parameter is undefined.</dd>)^
**
** ^(<dt>SQLITE_STATUS_PARSER_STACK</dt>
** CAPI3REF: Database Connection Status
** EXPERIMENTAL
**
-** ^This interface is used to retrieve runtime status information
+** ^This interface is used to retrieve runtime status information
** about a single [database connection]. ^The first argument is the
** database connection object to be interrogated. ^The second argument
** is the parameter to interrogate. ^Currently, the only allowed value
** statements. For example, if the number of table steps greatly exceeds
** the number of table searches or result rows, that would tend to indicate
** that the prepared statement is using a full table scan rather than
-** an index.
+** an index.
**
** ^(This interface is used to retrieve and reset counter values from
** a [prepared statement]. The first argument is the prepared statement
** <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_FULLSCAN_STEP</dt>
** <dd>^This is the number of times that SQLite has stepped forward in
** a table as part of a full table scan. Large numbers for this counter
-** may indicate opportunities for performance improvement through
+** may indicate opportunities for performance improvement through
** careful use of indices.</dd>
**
** <dt>SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_SORT</dt>
** EXPERIMENTAL
**
** ^(The [sqlite3_config]([SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE], ...) interface can
-** register an alternative page cache implementation by passing in an
-** instance of the sqlite3_pcache_methods structure.)^ The majority of the
-** heap memory used by SQLite is used by the page cache to cache data read
-** from, or ready to be written to, the database file. By implementing a
-** custom page cache using this API, an application can control more
-** precisely the amount of memory consumed by SQLite, the way in which
-** that memory is allocated and released, and the policies used to
-** determine exactly which parts of a database file are cached and for
+** register an alternative page cache implementation by passing in an
+** instance of the sqlite3_pcache_methods structure.)^ The majority of the
+** heap memory used by SQLite is used by the page cache to cache data read
+** from, or ready to be written to, the database file. By implementing a
+** custom page cache using this API, an application can control more
+** precisely the amount of memory consumed by SQLite, the way in which
+** that memory is allocated and released, and the policies used to
+** determine exactly which parts of a database file are cached and for
** how long.
**
** ^(The contents of the sqlite3_pcache_methods structure are copied to an
** (usually only once during the lifetime of the process). ^(The xInit()
** method is passed a copy of the sqlite3_pcache_methods.pArg value.)^
** ^The xInit() method can set up up global structures and/or any mutexes
-** required by the custom page cache implementation.
+** required by the custom page cache implementation.
**
-** ^The xShutdown() method is called from within [sqlite3_shutdown()],
-** if the application invokes this API. It can be used to clean up
+** ^The xShutdown() method is called from within [sqlite3_shutdown()],
+** if the application invokes this API. It can be used to clean up
** any outstanding resources before process shutdown, if required.
**
** ^SQLite holds a [SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE] mutex when it invokes
**
** ^The xPagecount() method should return the number of pages currently
** stored in the cache.
-**
-** ^The xFetch() method is used to fetch a page and return a pointer to it.
+**
+** ^The xFetch() method is used to fetch a page and return a pointer to it.
** ^A 'page', in this context, is a buffer of szPage bytes aligned at an
** 8-byte boundary. ^The page to be fetched is determined by the key. ^The
-** mimimum key value is 1. After it has been retrieved using xFetch, the page
+** mimimum key value is 1. After it has been retrieved using xFetch, the page
** is considered to be "pinned".
**
** ^If the requested page is already in the page cache, then the page cache
**
** ^xUnpin() is called by SQLite with a pointer to a currently pinned page
** as its second argument. ^(If the third parameter, discard, is non-zero,
-** then the page should be evicted from the cache. In this case SQLite
+** then the page should be evicted from the cache. In this case SQLite
** assumes that the next time the page is retrieved from the cache using
** the xFetch() method, it will be zeroed.)^ ^If the discard parameter is
** zero, then the page is considered to be unpinned. ^The cache implementation
** may choose to evict unpinned pages at any time.
**
-** ^(The cache is not required to perform any reference counting. A single
-** call to xUnpin() unpins the page regardless of the number of prior calls
+** ^(The cache is not required to perform any reference counting. A single
+** call to xUnpin() unpins the page regardless of the number of prior calls
** to xFetch().)^
**
** ^The xRekey() method is used to change the key value associated with the
**
** The backup API copies the content of one database into another.
** It is useful either for creating backups of databases or
-** for copying in-memory databases to or from persistent files.
+** for copying in-memory databases to or from persistent files.
**
** See Also: [Using the SQLite Online Backup API]
**
-** ^Exclusive access is required to the destination database for the
+** ^Exclusive access is required to the destination database for the
** duration of the operation. ^However the source database is only
** read-locked while it is actually being read; it is not locked
** continuously for the entire backup operation. ^Thus, the backup may be
** performed on a live source database without preventing other users from
** reading or writing to the source database while the backup is underway.
-**
-** ^(To perform a backup operation:
+**
+** ^(To perform a backup operation:
** <ol>
** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_init()</b> is called once to initialize the
-** backup,
-** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b> is called one or more times to transfer
+** backup,
+** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b> is called one or more times to transfer
** the data between the two databases, and finally
-** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b> is called to release all resources
-** associated with the backup operation.
+** <li><b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b> is called to release all resources
+** associated with the backup operation.
** </ol>)^
** There should be exactly one call to sqlite3_backup_finish() for each
** successful call to sqlite3_backup_init().
**
** <b>sqlite3_backup_init()</b>
**
-** ^The D and N arguments to sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) are the
-** [database connection] associated with the destination database
+** ^The D and N arguments to sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) are the
+** [database connection] associated with the destination database
** and the database name, respectively.
** ^The database name is "main" for the main database, "temp" for the
** temporary database, or the name specified after the AS keyword in
** an [ATTACH] statement for an attached database.
-** ^The S and M arguments passed to
+** ^The S and M arguments passed to
** sqlite3_backup_init(D,N,S,M) identify the [database connection]
** and database name of the source database, respectively.
** ^The source and destination [database connections] (parameters S and D)
** ^A successful call to sqlite3_backup_init() returns a pointer to an
** [sqlite3_backup] object.
** ^The [sqlite3_backup] object may be used with the sqlite3_backup_step() and
-** sqlite3_backup_finish() functions to perform the specified backup
+** sqlite3_backup_finish() functions to perform the specified backup
** operation.
**
** <b>sqlite3_backup_step()</b>
**
-** ^Function sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) will copy up to N pages between
+** ^Function sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) will copy up to N pages between
** the source and destination databases specified by [sqlite3_backup] object B.
-** ^If N is negative, all remaining source pages are copied.
+** ^If N is negative, all remaining source pages are copied.
** ^If sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) successfully copies N pages and there
** are still more pages to be copied, then the function resturns [SQLITE_OK].
** ^If sqlite3_backup_step(B,N) successfully finishes copying all pages
**
** ^If sqlite3_backup_step() cannot obtain a required file-system lock, then
** the [sqlite3_busy_handler | busy-handler function]
-** is invoked (if one is specified). ^If the
-** busy-handler returns non-zero before the lock is available, then
+** is invoked (if one is specified). ^If the
+** busy-handler returns non-zero before the lock is available, then
** [SQLITE_BUSY] is returned to the caller. ^In this case the call to
** sqlite3_backup_step() can be retried later. ^If the source
** [database connection]
** is called, then [SQLITE_LOCKED] is returned immediately. ^Again, in this
** case the call to sqlite3_backup_step() can be retried later on. ^(If
** [SQLITE_IOERR_ACCESS | SQLITE_IOERR_XXX], [SQLITE_NOMEM], or
-** [SQLITE_READONLY] is returned, then
-** there is no point in retrying the call to sqlite3_backup_step(). These
-** errors are considered fatal.)^ The application must accept
-** that the backup operation has failed and pass the backup operation handle
+** [SQLITE_READONLY] is returned, then
+** there is no point in retrying the call to sqlite3_backup_step(). These
+** errors are considered fatal.)^ The application must accept
+** that the backup operation has failed and pass the backup operation handle
** to the sqlite3_backup_finish() to release associated resources.
**
** ^The first call to sqlite3_backup_step() obtains an exclusive lock
-** on the destination file. ^The exclusive lock is not released until either
-** sqlite3_backup_finish() is called or the backup operation is complete
+** on the destination file. ^The exclusive lock is not released until either
+** sqlite3_backup_finish() is called or the backup operation is complete
** and sqlite3_backup_step() returns [SQLITE_DONE]. ^Every call to
** sqlite3_backup_step() obtains a [shared lock] on the source database that
** lasts for the duration of the sqlite3_backup_step() call.
** through the backup process. ^If the source database is modified by an
** external process or via a database connection other than the one being
** used by the backup operation, then the backup will be automatically
-** restarted by the next call to sqlite3_backup_step(). ^If the source
+** restarted by the next call to sqlite3_backup_step(). ^If the source
** database is modified by the using the same database connection as is used
** by the backup operation, then the backup database is automatically
** updated at the same time.
**
** <b>sqlite3_backup_finish()</b>
**
-** When sqlite3_backup_step() has returned [SQLITE_DONE], or when the
+** When sqlite3_backup_step() has returned [SQLITE_DONE], or when the
** application wishes to abandon the backup operation, the application
** should destroy the [sqlite3_backup] by passing it to sqlite3_backup_finish().
** ^The sqlite3_backup_finish() interfaces releases all
-** resources associated with the [sqlite3_backup] object.
+** resources associated with the [sqlite3_backup] object.
** ^If sqlite3_backup_step() has not yet returned [SQLITE_DONE], then any
** active write-transaction on the destination database is rolled back.
** The [sqlite3_backup] object is invalid
** connections, then the source database connection may be used concurrently
** from within other threads.
**
-** However, the application must guarantee that the destination
-** [database connection] is not passed to any other API (by any thread) after
+** However, the application must guarantee that the destination
+** [database connection] is not passed to any other API (by any thread) after
** sqlite3_backup_init() is called and before the corresponding call to
** sqlite3_backup_finish(). SQLite does not currently check to see
** if the application incorrectly accesses the destination [database connection]
** If running in [shared cache mode], the application must
** guarantee that the shared cache used by the destination database
** is not accessed while the backup is running. In practice this means
-** that the application must guarantee that the disk file being
+** that the application must guarantee that the disk file being
** backed up to is not accessed by any connection within the process,
** not just the specific connection that was passed to sqlite3_backup_init().
**
-** The [sqlite3_backup] object itself is partially threadsafe. Multiple
+** The [sqlite3_backup] object itself is partially threadsafe. Multiple
** threads may safely make multiple concurrent calls to sqlite3_backup_step().
** However, the sqlite3_backup_remaining() and sqlite3_backup_pagecount()
** APIs are not strictly speaking threadsafe. If they are invoked at the
** ^When running in shared-cache mode, a database operation may fail with
** an [SQLITE_LOCKED] error if the required locks on the shared-cache or
** individual tables within the shared-cache cannot be obtained. See
-** [SQLite Shared-Cache Mode] for a description of shared-cache locking.
-** ^This API may be used to register a callback that SQLite will invoke
+** [SQLite Shared-Cache Mode] for a description of shared-cache locking.
+** ^This API may be used to register a callback that SQLite will invoke
** when the connection currently holding the required lock relinquishes it.
** ^This API is only available if the library was compiled with the
** [SQLITE_ENABLE_UNLOCK_NOTIFY] C-preprocessor symbol defined.
** See Also: [Using the SQLite Unlock Notification Feature].
**
** ^Shared-cache locks are released when a database connection concludes
-** its current transaction, either by committing it or rolling it back.
+** its current transaction, either by committing it or rolling it back.
**
** ^When a connection (known as the blocked connection) fails to obtain a
** shared-cache lock and SQLITE_LOCKED is returned to the caller, the
** identity of the database connection (the blocking connection) that
-** has locked the required resource is stored internally. ^After an
+** has locked the required resource is stored internally. ^After an
** application receives an SQLITE_LOCKED error, it may call the
-** sqlite3_unlock_notify() method with the blocked connection handle as
+** sqlite3_unlock_notify() method with the blocked connection handle as
** the first argument to register for a callback that will be invoked
** when the blocking connections current transaction is concluded. ^The
** callback is invoked from within the [sqlite3_step] or [sqlite3_close]
**
** ^If the blocked connection is attempting to obtain a write-lock on a
** shared-cache table, and more than one other connection currently holds
-** a read-lock on the same table, then SQLite arbitrarily selects one of
+** a read-lock on the same table, then SQLite arbitrarily selects one of
** the other connections to use as the blocking connection.
**
-** ^(There may be at most one unlock-notify callback registered by a
+** ^(There may be at most one unlock-notify callback registered by a
** blocked connection. If sqlite3_unlock_notify() is called when the
** blocked connection already has a registered unlock-notify callback,
** then the new callback replaces the old.)^ ^If sqlite3_unlock_notify() is
** called with a NULL pointer as its second argument, then any existing
-** unlock-notify callback is cancelled. ^The blocked connections
+** unlock-notify callback is cancelled. ^The blocked connections
** unlock-notify callback may also be canceled by closing the blocked
** connection using [sqlite3_close()].
**
**
** <b>Callback Invocation Details</b>
**
-** When an unlock-notify callback is registered, the application provides a
+** When an unlock-notify callback is registered, the application provides a
** single void* pointer that is passed to the callback when it is invoked.
** However, the signature of the callback function allows SQLite to pass
** it an array of void* context pointers. The first argument passed to
** same callback function, then instead of invoking the callback function
** multiple times, it is invoked once with the set of void* context pointers
** specified by the blocked connections bundled together into an array.
-** This gives the application an opportunity to prioritize any actions
+** This gives the application an opportunity to prioritize any actions
** related to the set of unblocked database connections.
**
** <b>Deadlock Detection</b>
**
-** Assuming that after registering for an unlock-notify callback a
+** Assuming that after registering for an unlock-notify callback a
** database waits for the callback to be issued before taking any further
** action (a reasonable assumption), then using this API may cause the
** application to deadlock. For example, if connection X is waiting for
**
** <b>The "DROP TABLE" Exception</b>
**
-** When a call to [sqlite3_step()] returns SQLITE_LOCKED, it is almost
+** When a call to [sqlite3_step()] returns SQLITE_LOCKED, it is almost
** always appropriate to call sqlite3_unlock_notify(). There is however,
** one exception. When executing a "DROP TABLE" or "DROP INDEX" statement,
** SQLite checks if there are any currently executing SELECT statements
** One way around this problem is to check the extended error code returned
** by an sqlite3_step() call. ^(If there is a blocking connection, then the
** extended error code is set to SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE. Otherwise, in
-** the special "DROP TABLE/INDEX" case, the extended error code is just
+** the special "DROP TABLE/INDEX" case, the extended error code is just
** SQLITE_LOCKED.)^
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_unlock_notify(
**
** ^The [sqlite3_strnicmp()] API allows applications and extensions to
** compare the contents of two buffers containing UTF-8 strings in a
-** case-indendent fashion, using the same definition of case independence
+** case-indendent fashion, using the same definition of case independence
** that SQLite uses internally when comparing identifiers.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_strnicmp(const char *, const char *, int);
** element pointed to plus the next _ht.count-1 elements in the list.
**
** Hash.htsize and Hash.ht may be zero. In that case lookup is done
-** by a linear search of the global list. For small tables, the
+** by a linear search of the global list. For small tables, the
** Hash.ht table is never allocated because if there are few elements
** in the table, it is faster to do a linear search than to manage
** the hash table.
} *ht;
};
-/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following
+/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following
** structure. All elements are stored on a single doubly-linked list.
**
** Again, this structure is intended to be opaque, but it can't really
/*
** OMIT_TEMPDB is set to 1 if SQLITE_OMIT_TEMPDB is defined, or 0
-** afterward. Having this macro allows us to cause the C compiler
+** afterward. Having this macro allows us to cause the C compiler
** to omit code used by TEMP tables without messy #ifndef statements.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_TEMPDB
#define LARGEST_INT64 (0xffffffff|(((i64)0x7fffffff)<<32))
#define SMALLEST_INT64 (((i64)-1) - LARGEST_INT64)
-/*
+/*
** Round up a number to the next larger multiple of 8. This is used
** to force 8-byte alignment on 64-bit architectures.
*/
/*
** An instance of the following structure is used to store the busy-handler
-** callback for a given sqlite handle.
+** callback for a given sqlite handle.
**
** The sqlite.busyHandler member of the sqlite struct contains the busy
** callback for the database handle. Each pager opened via the sqlite
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wsd_init(int N, int J);
SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_wsd_find(void *K, int L);
#else
- #define SQLITE_WSD
+ #define SQLITE_WSD
#define GLOBAL(t,v) v
#define sqlite3GlobalConfig sqlite3Config
#endif
/*
** The following macros are used to suppress compiler warnings and to
-** make it clear to human readers when a function parameter is deliberately
+** make it clear to human readers when a function parameter is deliberately
** left unused within the body of a function. This usually happens when
-** a function is called via a function pointer. For example the
+** a function is called via a function pointer. For example the
** implementation of an SQL aggregate step callback may not use the
** parameter indicating the number of arguments passed to the aggregate,
** if it knows that this is enforced elsewhere.
typedef struct WhereLevel WhereLevel;
/*
-** Defer sourcing vdbe.h and btree.h until after the "u8" and
+** Defer sourcing vdbe.h and btree.h until after the "u8" and
** "BusyHandler" typedefs. vdbe.h also requires a few of the opaque
** pointer types (i.e. FuncDef) defined above.
*/
/*
** The second parameter to sqlite3BtreeGetMeta or sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta
-** should be one of the following values. The integer values are assigned
+** should be one of the following values. The integer values are assigned
** to constants so that the offset of the corresponding field in an
** SQLite database header may be found using the following formula:
**
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeEnter(Btree*);
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeEnterAll(sqlite3*);
#else
-# define sqlite3BtreeEnter(X)
+# define sqlite3BtreeEnter(X)
# define sqlite3BtreeEnterAll(X)
#endif
#define P4_KEYINFO_STATIC (-17)
/*
-** The Vdbe.aColName array contains 5n Mem structures, where n is the
+** The Vdbe.aColName array contains 5n Mem structures, where n is the
** number of columns of data returned by the statement.
*/
#define COLNAME_NAME 0
/*
** The following macro converts a relative address in the p2 field
-** of a VdbeOp structure into a negative number so that
+** of a VdbeOp structure into a negative number so that
** sqlite3VdbeAddOpList() knows that the address is relative. Calling
** the macro again restores the address.
*/
#define _PAGER_H_
/*
-** Default maximum size for persistent journal files. A negative
-** value means no limit. This value may be overridden using the
+** Default maximum size for persistent journal files. A negative
+** value means no limit. This value may be overridden using the
** sqlite3PagerJournalSizeLimit() API. See also "PRAGMA journal_size_limit".
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_DEFAULT_JOURNAL_SIZE_LIMIT
/*
** Page number PAGER_MJ_PGNO is never used in an SQLite database (it is
** reserved for working around a windows/posix incompatibility). It is
-** used in the journal to signify that the remainder of the journal file
+** used in the journal to signify that the remainder of the journal file
** is devoted to storing a master journal name - there are no more pages to
-** roll back. See comments for function writeMasterJournal() in pager.c
+** roll back. See comments for function writeMasterJournal() in pager.c
** for details.
*/
#define PAGER_MJ_PGNO(x) ((Pgno)((PENDING_BYTE/((x)->pageSize))+1))
/*
** The remainder of this file contains the declarations of the functions
-** that make up the Pager sub-system API. See source code comments for
+** that make up the Pager sub-system API. See source code comments for
** a detailed description of each routine.
*/
-/* Open and close a Pager connection. */
+/* Open and close a Pager connection. */
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen(
sqlite3_vfs*,
Pager **ppPager,
SQLITE_PRIVATE i64 sqlite3PagerJournalSizeLimit(Pager *, i64);
SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_backup **sqlite3PagerBackupPtr(Pager*);
-/* Functions used to obtain and release page references. */
+/* Functions used to obtain and release page references. */
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerAcquire(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno, DbPage **ppPage, int clrFlag);
#define sqlite3PagerGet(A,B,C) sqlite3PagerAcquire(A,B,C,0)
SQLITE_PRIVATE DbPage *sqlite3PagerLookup(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno);
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(DbPage*);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager*,DbPage*,Pgno,int);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(DbPage*);
-SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetData(DbPage *);
-SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *);
+SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetData(DbPage *);
+SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *);
/* Functions used to manage pager transactions and savepoints. */
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerPagecount(Pager*, int*);
**
*************************************************************************
** This header file defines the interface that the sqlite page cache
-** subsystem.
+** subsystem.
*/
#ifndef _PCACHE_H_
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheSize(void);
/* One release per successful fetch. Page is pinned until released.
-** Reference counted.
+** Reference counted.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheFetch(PCache*, Pgno, int createFlag, PgHdr**);
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheRelease(PgHdr*);
#if defined(SQLITE_CHECK_PAGES) || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
/* Iterate through all dirty pages currently stored in the cache. This
-** interface is only available if SQLITE_CHECK_PAGES is defined when the
+** interface is only available if SQLITE_CHECK_PAGES is defined when the
** library is built.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheIterateDirty(PCache *pCache, void (*xIter)(PgHdr *));
/*
** Figure out if we are dealing with Unix, Windows, or some other
** operating system. After the following block of preprocess macros,
-** all of SQLITE_OS_UNIX, SQLITE_OS_WIN, SQLITE_OS_OS2, and SQLITE_OS_OTHER
-** will defined to either 1 or 0. One of the four will be 1. The other
+** all of SQLITE_OS_UNIX, SQLITE_OS_WIN, SQLITE_OS_OS2, and SQLITE_OS_OTHER
+** will defined to either 1 or 0. One of the four will be 1. The other
** three will be 0.
*/
#if defined(SQLITE_OS_OTHER)
** 2006-10-31: The default prefix used to be "sqlite_". But then
** Mcafee started using SQLite in their anti-virus product and it
** started putting files with the "sqlite" name in the c:/temp folder.
-** This annoyed many windows users. Those users would then do a
+** This annoyed many windows users. Those users would then do a
** Google search for "sqlite", find the telephone numbers of the
** developers and call to wake them up at night and complain.
-** For this reason, the default name prefix is changed to be "sqlite"
+** For this reason, the default name prefix is changed to be "sqlite"
** spelled backwards. So the temp files are still identified, but
** anybody smart enough to figure out the code is also likely smart
** enough to know that calling the developer will not help get rid
** UnlockFile().
**
** LockFile() prevents not just writing but also reading by other processes.
-** A SHARED_LOCK is obtained by locking a single randomly-chosen
-** byte out of a specific range of bytes. The lock byte is obtained at
-** random so two separate readers can probably access the file at the
+** A SHARED_LOCK is obtained by locking a single randomly-chosen
+** byte out of a specific range of bytes. The lock byte is obtained at
+** random so two separate readers can probably access the file at the
** same time, unless they are unlucky and choose the same lock byte.
** An EXCLUSIVE_LOCK is obtained by locking all bytes in the range.
** There can only be one writer. A RESERVED_LOCK is obtained by locking
** The following #defines specify the range of bytes used for locking.
** SHARED_SIZE is the number of bytes available in the pool from which
** a random byte is selected for a shared lock. The pool of bytes for
-** shared locks begins at SHARED_FIRST.
+** shared locks begins at SHARED_FIRST.
**
** The same locking strategy and
** byte ranges are used for Unix. This leaves open the possiblity of having
** that all locks will fit on a single page even at the minimum page size.
** PENDING_BYTE defines the beginning of the locks. By default PENDING_BYTE
** is set high so that we don't have to allocate an unused page except
-** for very large databases. But one should test the page skipping logic
+** for very large databases. But one should test the page skipping logic
** by setting PENDING_BYTE low and running the entire regression suite.
**
** Changing the value of PENDING_BYTE results in a subtly incompatible
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsInit(void);
-/*
-** Functions for accessing sqlite3_file methods
+/*
+** Functions for accessing sqlite3_file methods
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsClose(sqlite3_file*);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsRead(sqlite3_file*, void*, int amt, i64 offset);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsSectorSize(sqlite3_file *id);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(sqlite3_file *id);
-/*
-** Functions for accessing sqlite3_vfs methods
+/*
+** Functions for accessing sqlite3_vfs methods
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsOpen(sqlite3_vfs *, const char *, sqlite3_file*, int, int *);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsDelete(sqlite3_vfs *, const char *, int);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsCurrentTime(sqlite3_vfs *, double*);
/*
-** Convenience functions for opening and closing files using
+** Convenience functions for opening and closing files using
** sqlite3_malloc() to obtain space for the file-handle structure.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(sqlite3_vfs *, const char *, sqlite3_file **, int,int*);
**
** If there are no virtual tables configured in this schema, the
** Schema.db variable is set to NULL. After the first virtual table
-** has been added, it is set to point to the database connection
+** has been added, it is set to point to the database connection
** used to create the connection. Once a virtual table has been
-** added to the Schema structure and the Schema.db variable populated,
-** only that database connection may use the Schema to prepare
+** added to the Schema structure and the Schema.db variable populated,
+** only that database connection may use the Schema to prepare
** statements.
*/
struct Schema {
};
/*
-** These macros can be used to test, set, or clear bits in the
+** These macros can be used to test, set, or clear bits in the
** Db.pSchema->flags field.
*/
#define DbHasProperty(D,I,P) (((D)->aDb[I].pSchema->flags&(P))==(P))
void *pTraceArg; /* Argument to the trace function */
void (*xProfile)(void*,const char*,u64); /* Profiling function */
void *pProfileArg; /* Argument to profile function */
- void *pCommitArg; /* Argument to xCommitCallback() */
+ void *pCommitArg; /* Argument to xCommitCallback() */
int (*xCommitCallback)(void*); /* Invoked at every commit. */
- void *pRollbackArg; /* Argument to xRollbackCallback() */
+ void *pRollbackArg; /* Argument to xRollbackCallback() */
void (*xRollbackCallback)(void*); /* Invoked at every commit. */
void *pUpdateArg;
void (*xUpdateCallback)(void*,int, const char*,const char*,sqlite_int64);
i64 nDeferredCons; /* Net deferred constraints this transaction. */
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_UNLOCK_NOTIFY
- /* The following variables are all protected by the STATIC_MASTER
- ** mutex, not by sqlite3.mutex. They are used by code in notify.c.
+ /* The following variables are all protected by the STATIC_MASTER
+ ** mutex, not by sqlite3.mutex. They are used by code in notify.c.
**
** When X.pUnlockConnection==Y, that means that X is waiting for Y to
** unlock so that it can proceed.
#define SQLITE_SqlTrace 0x00004000 /* Debug print SQL as it executes */
#define SQLITE_VdbeListing 0x00008000 /* Debug listings of VDBE programs */
#define SQLITE_WriteSchema 0x00010000 /* OK to update SQLITE_MASTER */
-#define SQLITE_NoReadlock 0x00020000 /* Readlocks are omitted when
+#define SQLITE_NoReadlock 0x00020000 /* Readlocks are omitted when
** accessing read-only databases */
#define SQLITE_IgnoreChecks 0x00040000 /* Do not enforce check constraints */
#define SQLITE_ReadUncommitted 0x0080000 /* For shared-cache mode */
** used to create the initializers for the FuncDef structures.
**
** FUNCTION(zName, nArg, iArg, bNC, xFunc)
-** Used to create a scalar function definition of a function zName
+** Used to create a scalar function definition of a function zName
** implemented by C function xFunc that accepts nArg arguments. The
** value passed as iArg is cast to a (void*) and made available
-** as the user-data (sqlite3_user_data()) for the function. If
+** as the user-data (sqlite3_user_data()) for the function. If
** argument bNC is true, then the SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL flag is set.
**
** AGGREGATE(zName, nArg, iArg, bNC, xStep, xFinal)
** FUNCTION().
**
** LIKEFUNC(zName, nArg, pArg, flags)
-** Used to create a scalar function definition of a function zName
-** that accepts nArg arguments and is implemented by a call to C
+** Used to create a scalar function definition of a function zName
+** that accepts nArg arguments and is implemented by a call to C
** function likeFunc. Argument pArg is cast to a (void *) and made
** available as the function user-data (sqlite3_user_data()). The
** FuncDef.flags variable is set to the value passed as the flags
**
** These used to have mnemonic name like 'i' for SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER and
** 't' for SQLITE_AFF_TEXT. But we can save a little space and improve
-** the speed a little by numbering the values consecutively.
+** the speed a little by numbering the values consecutively.
**
** But rather than start with 0 or 1, we begin with 'a'. That way,
** when multiple affinity types are concatenated into a string and
/*
** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK values masks off the significant bits of an
-** affinity value.
+** affinity value.
*/
#define SQLITE_AFF_MASK 0x67
/*
** An object of this type is created for each virtual table present in
-** the database schema.
+** the database schema.
**
** If the database schema is shared, then there is one instance of this
** structure for each database connection (sqlite3*) that uses the shared
** schema. This is because each database connection requires its own unique
-** instance of the sqlite3_vtab* handle used to access the virtual table
-** implementation. sqlite3_vtab* handles can not be shared between
-** database connections, even when the rest of the in-memory database
+** instance of the sqlite3_vtab* handle used to access the virtual table
+** implementation. sqlite3_vtab* handles can not be shared between
+** database connections, even when the rest of the in-memory database
** schema is shared, as the implementation often stores the database
** connection handle passed to it via the xConnect() or xCreate() method
** during initialization internally. This database connection handle may
-** then used by the virtual table implementation to access real tables
-** within the database. So that they appear as part of the callers
-** transaction, these accesses need to be made via the same database
+** then used by the virtual table implementation to access real tables
+** within the database. So that they appear as part of the callers
+** transaction, these accesses need to be made via the same database
** connection as that used to execute SQL operations on the virtual table.
**
** All VTable objects that correspond to a single table in a shared
** sqlite3_vtab* handle in the compiled query.
**
** When an in-memory Table object is deleted (for example when the
-** schema is being reloaded for some reason), the VTable objects are not
-** deleted and the sqlite3_vtab* handles are not xDisconnect()ed
+** schema is being reloaded for some reason), the VTable objects are not
+** deleted and the sqlite3_vtab* handles are not xDisconnect()ed
** immediately. Instead, they are moved from the Table.pVTable list to
** another linked list headed by the sqlite3.pDisconnect member of the
-** corresponding sqlite3 structure. They are then deleted/xDisconnected
+** corresponding sqlite3 structure. They are then deleted/xDisconnected
** next time a statement is prepared using said sqlite3*. This is done
** to avoid deadlock issues involving multiple sqlite3.mutex mutexes.
** Refer to comments above function sqlite3VtabUnlockList() for an
** explanation as to why it is safe to add an entry to an sqlite3.pDisconnect
** list without holding the corresponding sqlite3.mutex mutex.
**
-** The memory for objects of this type is always allocated by
-** sqlite3DbMalloc(), using the connection handle stored in VTable.db as
+** The memory for objects of this type is always allocated by
+** sqlite3DbMalloc(), using the connection handle stored in VTable.db as
** the first argument.
*/
struct VTable {
** in sqlite.aDb[]. 0 is for the main database and 1 is for the file that
** holds temporary tables and indices. If TF_Ephemeral is set
** then the table is stored in a file that is automatically deleted
-** when the VDBE cursor to the table is closed. In this case Table.tnum
+** when the VDBE cursor to the table is closed. In this case Table.tnum
** refers VDBE cursor number that holds the table open, not to the root
** page number. Transient tables are used to hold the results of a
-** sub-query that appears instead of a real table name in the FROM clause
+** sub-query that appears instead of a real table name in the FROM clause
** of a SELECT statement.
*/
struct Table {
** key is set to NULL. CASCADE means that a DELETE or UPDATE of the
** referenced table row is propagated into the row that holds the
** foreign key.
-**
+**
** The following symbolic values are used to record which type
** of action to take.
*/
/*
** An instance of the following structure is passed as the first
-** argument to sqlite3VdbeKeyCompare and is used to control the
+** argument to sqlite3VdbeKeyCompare and is used to control the
** comparison of the two index keys.
*/
struct KeyInfo {
** In the Table structure describing Ex1, nCol==3 because there are
** three columns in the table. In the Index structure describing
** Ex2, nColumn==2 since 2 of the 3 columns of Ex1 are indexed.
-** The value of aiColumn is {2, 0}. aiColumn[0]==2 because the
+** The value of aiColumn is {2, 0}. aiColumn[0]==2 because the
** first column to be indexed (c3) has an index of 2 in Ex1.aCol[].
** The second column to be indexed (c1) has an index of 0 in
** Ex1.aCol[], hence Ex2.aiColumn[1]==0.
** The Index.onError field determines whether or not the indexed columns
** must be unique and what to do if they are not. When Index.onError=OE_None,
** it means this is not a unique index. Otherwise it is a unique index
-** and the value of Index.onError indicate the which conflict resolution
+** and the value of Index.onError indicate the which conflict resolution
** algorithm to employ whenever an attempt is made to insert a non-unique
** element.
*/
};
/*
-** Each sample stored in the sqlite_stat2 table is represented in memory
+** Each sample stored in the sqlite_stat2 table is represented in memory
** using a structure of this type.
*/
struct IndexSample {
** to represent the greater-than-or-equal-to operator in the expression
** tree.
**
-** If the expression is an SQL literal (TK_INTEGER, TK_FLOAT, TK_BLOB,
+** If the expression is an SQL literal (TK_INTEGER, TK_FLOAT, TK_BLOB,
** or TK_STRING), then Expr.token contains the text of the SQL literal. If
-** the expression is a variable (TK_VARIABLE), then Expr.token contains the
+** the expression is a variable (TK_VARIABLE), then Expr.token contains the
** variable name. Finally, if the expression is an SQL function (TK_FUNCTION),
** then Expr.token contains the name of the function.
**
** a CASE expression or an IN expression of the form "<lhs> IN (<y>, <z>...)".
** Expr.x.pSelect is used if the expression is a sub-select or an expression of
** the form "<lhs> IN (SELECT ...)". If the EP_xIsSelect bit is set in the
-** Expr.flags mask, then Expr.x.pSelect is valid. Otherwise, Expr.x.pList is
+** Expr.flags mask, then Expr.x.pSelect is valid. Otherwise, Expr.x.pList is
** valid.
**
** An expression of the form ID or ID.ID refers to a column in a table.
** value is also stored in the Expr.iAgg column in the aggregate so that
** it can be accessed after all aggregates are computed.
**
-** If the expression is an unbound variable marker (a question mark
-** character '?' in the original SQL) then the Expr.iTable holds the index
+** If the expression is an unbound variable marker (a question mark
+** character '?' in the original SQL) then the Expr.iTable holds the index
** number for that variable.
**
** If the expression is a subquery then Expr.iColumn holds an integer
/* If the EP_TokenOnly flag is set in the Expr.flags mask, then no
** space is allocated for the fields below this point. An attempt to
- ** access them will result in a segfault or malfunction.
+ ** access them will result in a segfault or malfunction.
*********************************************************************/
Expr *pLeft; /* Left subnode */
#endif
/*
-** These macros can be used to test, set, or clear bits in the
+** These macros can be used to test, set, or clear bits in the
** Expr.flags field.
*/
#define ExprHasProperty(E,P) (((E)->flags&(P))==(P))
#define ExprClearProperty(E,P) (E)->flags&=~(P)
/*
-** Macros to determine the number of bytes required by a normal Expr
-** struct, an Expr struct with the EP_Reduced flag set in Expr.flags
+** Macros to determine the number of bytes required by a normal Expr
+** struct, an Expr struct with the EP_Reduced flag set in Expr.flags
** and an Expr struct with the EP_TokenOnly flag set.
*/
#define EXPR_FULLSIZE sizeof(Expr) /* Full size */
#define EXPR_TOKENONLYSIZE offsetof(Expr,pLeft) /* Fewer features */
/*
-** Flags passed to the sqlite3ExprDup() function. See the header comment
+** Flags passed to the sqlite3ExprDup() function. See the header comment
** above sqlite3ExprDup() for details.
*/
#define EXPRDUP_REDUCE 0x0001 /* Used reduced-size Expr nodes */
** pEList corresponds to the result set of a SELECT and is NULL for
** other statements.
**
-** NameContexts can be nested. When resolving names, the inner-most
+** NameContexts can be nested. When resolving names, the inner-most
** context is searched first. If no match is found, the next outer
** context is checked. If there is still no match, the next context
** is checked. This process continues until either a match is found
** or all contexts are check. When a match is found, the nRef member of
-** the context containing the match is incremented.
+** the context containing the match is incremented.
**
** Each subquery gets a new NameContext. The pNext field points to the
** NameContext in the parent query. Thus the process of scanning the
};
/*
-** During code generation of statements that do inserts into AUTOINCREMENT
+** During code generation of statements that do inserts into AUTOINCREMENT
** tables, the following information is attached to the Table.u.autoInc.p
** pointer of each autoincrement table to record some side information that
** the code generator needs. We have to keep per-table autoincrement
#endif
/*
-** At least one instance of the following structure is created for each
+** At least one instance of the following structure is created for each
** trigger that may be fired while parsing an INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE
** statement. All such objects are stored in the linked list headed at
** Parse.pTriggerPrg and deleted once statement compilation has been
** values for both pTrigger and orconf.
**
** The TriggerPrg.aColmask[0] variable is set to a mask of old.* columns
-** accessed (or set to 0 for triggers fired as a result of INSERT
+** accessed (or set to 0 for triggers fired as a result of INSERT
** statements). Similarly, the TriggerPrg.aColmask[1] variable is set to
** a mask of new.* columns used by the program.
*/
** is constant but the second part is reset at the beginning and end of
** each recursion.
**
-** The nTableLock and aTableLock variables are only used if the shared-cache
+** The nTableLock and aTableLock variables are only used if the shared-cache
** feature is enabled (if sqlite3Tsd()->useSharedData is true). They are
** used to store the set of table-locks required by the statement being
** compiled. Function sqlite3TableLock() is used to add entries to the
/*
* Each trigger present in the database schema is stored as an instance of
- * struct Trigger.
+ * struct Trigger.
*
* Pointers to instances of struct Trigger are stored in two ways.
- * 1. In the "trigHash" hash table (part of the sqlite3* that represents the
+ * 1. In the "trigHash" hash table (part of the sqlite3* that represents the
* database). This allows Trigger structures to be retrieved by name.
* 2. All triggers associated with a single table form a linked list, using the
* pNext member of struct Trigger. A pointer to the first element of the
/*
** A trigger is either a BEFORE or an AFTER trigger. The following constants
-** determine which.
+** determine which.
**
** If there are multiple triggers, you might of some BEFORE and some AFTER.
** In that cases, the constants below can be ORed together.
/*
* An instance of struct TriggerStep is used to store a single SQL statement
- * that is a part of a trigger-program.
+ * that is a part of a trigger-program.
*
* Instances of struct TriggerStep are stored in a singly linked list (linked
- * using the "pNext" member) referenced by the "step_list" member of the
+ * using the "pNext" member) referenced by the "step_list" member of the
* associated struct Trigger instance. The first element of the linked list is
* the first step of the trigger-program.
- *
+ *
* The "op" member indicates whether this is a "DELETE", "INSERT", "UPDATE" or
- * "SELECT" statement. The meanings of the other members is determined by the
+ * "SELECT" statement. The meanings of the other members is determined by the
* value of "op" as follows:
*
* (op == TK_INSERT)
* target -> A token holding the quoted name of the table to insert into.
* pExprList -> If this is an INSERT INTO ... VALUES ... statement, then
* this stores values to be inserted. Otherwise NULL.
- * pIdList -> If this is an INSERT INTO ... (<column-names>) VALUES ...
+ * pIdList -> If this is an INSERT INTO ... (<column-names>) VALUES ...
* statement, then this stores the column-names to be
* inserted into.
*
* target -> A token holding the quoted name of the table to delete from.
* pWhere -> The WHERE clause of the DELETE statement if one is specified.
* Otherwise NULL.
- *
+ *
* (op == TK_UPDATE)
* target -> A token holding the quoted name of the table to update rows of.
* pWhere -> The WHERE clause of the UPDATE statement if one is specified.
* pExprList -> A list of the columns to update and the expressions to update
* them to. See sqlite3Update() documentation of "pChanges"
* argument.
- *
+ *
*/
struct TriggerStep {
u8 op; /* One of TK_DELETE, TK_UPDATE, TK_INSERT, TK_SELECT */
/*
** The following structure contains information used by the sqliteFix...
** routines as they walk the parse tree to make database references
-** explicit.
+** explicit.
*/
typedef struct DbFixer DbFixer;
struct DbFixer {
#ifdef SQLITE_USE_ALLOCA
# define sqlite3StackAllocRaw(D,N) alloca(N)
# define sqlite3StackAllocZero(D,N) memset(alloca(N), 0, N)
-# define sqlite3StackFree(D,P)
+# define sqlite3StackFree(D,P)
#else
# define sqlite3StackAllocRaw(D,N) sqlite3DbMallocRaw(D,N)
# define sqlite3StackAllocZero(D,N) sqlite3DbMallocZero(D,N)
** Routines to read and write variable-length integers. These used to
** be defined locally, but now we use the varint routines in the util.c
** file. Code should use the MACRO forms below, as the Varint32 versions
-** are coded to assume the single byte case is already handled (which
+** are coded to assume the single byte case is already handled (which
** the MACRO form does).
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PutVarint(unsigned char*, u64);
SQLITE_PRIVATE const void *sqlite3ValueText(sqlite3_value*, u8);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ValueBytes(sqlite3_value*, u8);
-SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ValueSetStr(sqlite3_value*, int, const void *,u8,
+SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ValueSetStr(sqlite3_value*, int, const void *,u8,
void(*)(void*));
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ValueFree(sqlite3_value*);
SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_value *sqlite3ValueNew(sqlite3 *);
SQLITE_PRIVATE Schema *sqlite3SchemaGet(sqlite3 *, Btree *);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SchemaToIndex(sqlite3 *db, Schema *);
SQLITE_PRIVATE KeyInfo *sqlite3IndexKeyinfo(Parse *, Index *);
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(sqlite3 *, const char *, int, int, void *,
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(sqlite3 *, const char *, int, int, void *,
void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **),
void (*)(sqlite3_context*,int,sqlite3_value **), void (*)(sqlite3_context*));
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ApiExit(sqlite3 *db, int);
# define sqlite3VtabRollback(X)
# define sqlite3VtabCommit(X)
# define sqlite3VtabInSync(db) 0
-# define sqlite3VtabLock(X)
+# define sqlite3VtabLock(X)
# define sqlite3VtabUnlock(X)
# define sqlite3VtabUnlockList(X)
#else
** no-op macros if OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY is defined. In this case no foreign
** key functionality is available. If OMIT_TRIGGER is defined but
** OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY is not, only some of the functions are no-oped. In
-** this case foreign keys are parsed, but no other functionality is
+** this case foreign keys are parsed, but no other functionality is
** provided (enforcement of FK constraints requires the triggers sub-system).
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER)
/*
** If the SQLITE_ENABLE IOTRACE exists then the global variable
** sqlite3IoTrace is a pointer to a printf-like routine used to
-** print I/O tracing messages.
+** print I/O tracing messages.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_IOTRACE
# define IOTRACE(A) if( sqlite3IoTrace ){ sqlite3IoTrace A; }
*/
/* An array to map all upper-case characters into their corresponding
-** lower-case character.
+** lower-case character.
**
** SQLite only considers US-ASCII (or EBCDIC) characters. We do not
** handle case conversions for the UTF character set since the tables
** Standard function tolower() is implemented using the sqlite3UpperToLower[]
** array. tolower() is used more often than toupper() by SQLite.
**
-** Bit 0x40 is set if the character non-alphanumeric and can be used in an
+** Bit 0x40 is set if the character non-alphanumeric and can be used in an
** SQLite identifier. Identifiers are alphanumerics, "_", "$", and any
** non-ASCII UTF character. Hence the test for whether or not a character is
** part of an identifier is 0x46.
** Properties of opcodes. The OPFLG_INITIALIZER macro is
** created by mkopcodeh.awk during compilation. Data is obtained
** from the comments following the "case OP_xxxx:" statements in
-** the vdbe.c file.
+** the vdbe.c file.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE const unsigned char sqlite3OpcodeProperty[] = OPFLG_INITIALIZER;
/*
-** An array of names of all compile-time options. This array should
+** An array of names of all compile-time options. This array should
** be sorted A-Z.
**
** This array looks large, but in a typical installation actually uses
**
*************************************************************************
** This file contains the C functions that implement date and time
-** functions for SQLite.
+** functions for SQLite.
**
** There is only one exported symbol in this file - the function
** sqlite3RegisterDateTimeFunctions() found at the bottom of the file.
** SQLite processes all times and dates as Julian Day numbers. The
** dates and times are stored as the number of days since noon
** in Greenwich on November 24, 4714 B.C. according to the Gregorian
-** calendar system.
+** calendar system.
**
** 1970-01-01 00:00:00 is JD 2440587.5
** 2000-01-01 00:00:00 is JD 2451544.5
/*
** On recent Windows platforms, the localtime_s() function is available
-** as part of the "Secure CRT". It is essentially equivalent to
-** localtime_r() available under most POSIX platforms, except that the
+** as part of the "Secure CRT". It is essentially equivalent to
+** localtime_r() available under most POSIX platforms, except that the
** order of the parameters is reversed.
**
** See http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/a442x3ye(VS.80).aspx.
**
** If the user has not indicated to use localtime_r() or localtime_s()
-** already, check for an MSVC build environment that provides
+** already, check for an MSVC build environment that provides
** localtime_s().
*/
#if !defined(HAVE_LOCALTIME_R) && !defined(HAVE_LOCALTIME_S) && \
** The following are acceptable forms for the input string:
**
** YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS.FFF +/-HH:MM
-** DDDD.DD
+** DDDD.DD
** now
**
** In the first form, the +/-HH:MM is always optional. The fractional
** as there is a year and date.
*/
static int parseDateOrTime(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- const char *zDate,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ const char *zDate,
DateTime *p
){
int isRealNum; /* Return from sqlite3IsNumber(). Not used */
** then assume a default value of "now" for argv[0].
*/
static int isDate(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- int argc,
- sqlite3_value **argv,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ int argc,
+ sqlite3_value **argv,
DateTime *p
){
int i;
** So we test the effects of a malloc() failing and the sqlite3OsXXX()
** function returning SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM using the DO_OS_MALLOC_TEST macro.
**
-** The following functions are instrumented for malloc() failure
+** The following functions are instrumented for malloc() failure
** testing:
**
** sqlite3OsOpen()
** VFS methods.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsOpen(
- sqlite3_vfs *pVfs,
- const char *zPath,
- sqlite3_file *pFile,
- int flags,
+ sqlite3_vfs *pVfs,
+ const char *zPath,
+ sqlite3_file *pFile,
+ int flags,
int *pFlagsOut
){
int rc;
return pVfs->xDelete(pVfs, zPath, dirSync);
}
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsAccess(
- sqlite3_vfs *pVfs,
- const char *zPath,
- int flags,
+ sqlite3_vfs *pVfs,
+ const char *zPath,
+ int flags,
int *pResOut
){
DO_OS_MALLOC_TEST(0);
return pVfs->xAccess(pVfs, zPath, flags, pResOut);
}
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsFullPathname(
- sqlite3_vfs *pVfs,
- const char *zPath,
- int nPathOut,
+ sqlite3_vfs *pVfs,
+ const char *zPath,
+ int nPathOut,
char *zPathOut
){
zPathOut[0] = 0;
}
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(
- sqlite3_vfs *pVfs,
- const char *zFile,
- sqlite3_file **ppFile,
+ sqlite3_vfs *pVfs,
+ const char *zFile,
+ sqlite3_file **ppFile,
int flags,
int *pOutFlags
){
**
*************************************************************************
**
-** This file contains code to support the concept of "benign"
+** This file contains code to support the concept of "benign"
** malloc failures (when the xMalloc() or xRealloc() method of the
** sqlite3_mem_methods structure fails to allocate a block of memory
-** and returns 0).
+** and returns 0).
**
** Most malloc failures are non-benign. After they occur, SQLite
** abandons the current operation and returns an error code (usually
** SQLITE_NOMEM) to the user. However, sometimes a fault is not necessarily
-** fatal. For example, if a malloc fails while resizing a hash table, this
-** is completely recoverable simply by not carrying out the resize. The
-** hash table will continue to function normally. So a malloc failure
+** fatal. For example, if a malloc fails while resizing a hash table, this
+** is completely recoverable simply by not carrying out the resize. The
+** hash table will continue to function normally. So a malloc failure
** during a hash table resize is a benign fault.
*/
** when this module is combined with other in the amalgamation.
*/
static struct {
-
+
/*
** Mutex to control access to the memory allocation subsystem.
*/
*/
struct MemBlockHdr *pFirst;
struct MemBlockHdr *pLast;
-
+
/*
** The number of levels of backtrace to save in new allocations.
*/
int nTitle; /* Bytes of zTitle to save. Includes '\0' and padding */
char zTitle[100]; /* The title text */
- /*
+ /*
** sqlite3MallocDisallow() increments the following counter.
** sqlite3MallocAllow() decrements it.
*/
pU8 = (u8*)pAllocation;
assert( pInt[nReserve/sizeof(int)]==(int)REARGUARD );
/* This checks any of the "extra" bytes allocated due
- ** to rounding up to an 8 byte boundary to ensure
+ ** to rounding up to an 8 byte boundary to ensure
** they haven't been overwritten.
*/
while( nReserve-- > p->iSize ) assert( pU8[nReserve]==0x65 );
p = (void*)pInt;
}
sqlite3_mutex_leave(mem.mutex);
- return p;
+ return p;
}
/*
struct MemBlockHdr *pHdr;
void **pBt;
char *z;
- assert( sqlite3GlobalConfig.bMemstat || sqlite3GlobalConfig.bCoreMutex==0
+ assert( sqlite3GlobalConfig.bMemstat || sqlite3GlobalConfig.bCoreMutex==0
|| mem.mutex!=0 );
pHdr = sqlite3MemsysGetHeader(pPrior);
pBt = (void**)pHdr;
randomFill(z, sizeof(void*)*pHdr->nBacktraceSlots + sizeof(*pHdr) +
pHdr->iSize + sizeof(int) + pHdr->nTitle);
free(z);
- sqlite3_mutex_leave(mem.mutex);
+ sqlite3_mutex_leave(mem.mutex);
}
/*
** Change the size of an existing memory allocation.
**
** For this debugging implementation, we *always* make a copy of the
-** allocation into a new place in memory. In this way, if the
-** higher level code is using pointer to the old allocation, it is
+** allocation into a new place in memory. In this way, if the
+** higher level code is using pointer to the old allocation, it is
** much more likely to break and we are much more liking to find
** the error.
*/
}
/*
-** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory
+** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory
** allocations into that log.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemdebugDump(const char *zFilename){
for(pHdr=mem.pFirst; pHdr; pHdr=pHdr->pNext){
char *z = (char*)pHdr;
z -= pHdr->nBacktraceSlots*sizeof(void*) + pHdr->nTitle;
- fprintf(out, "**** %lld bytes at %p from %s ****\n",
+ fprintf(out, "**** %lld bytes at %p from %s ****\n",
pHdr->iSize, &pHdr[1], pHdr->nTitle ? z : "???");
if( pHdr->nBacktrace ){
fflush(out);
fprintf(out, "COUNTS:\n");
for(i=0; i<NCSIZE-1; i++){
if( mem.nAlloc[i] ){
- fprintf(out, " %5d: %10d %10d %10d\n",
+ fprintf(out, " %5d: %10d %10d %10d\n",
i*8, mem.nAlloc[i], mem.nCurrent[i], mem.mxCurrent[i]);
}
}
**
*************************************************************************
** This file contains the C functions that implement a memory
-** allocation subsystem for use by SQLite.
+** allocation subsystem for use by SQLite.
**
** This version of the memory allocation subsystem omits all
** use of malloc(). The SQLite user supplies a block of memory
** before calling sqlite3_initialize() from which allocations
-** are made and returned by the xMalloc() and xRealloc()
+** are made and returned by the xMalloc() and xRealloc()
** implementations. Once sqlite3_initialize() has been called,
** the amount of memory available to SQLite is fixed and cannot
** be changed.
#define N_HASH 61
/*
-** A memory allocation (also called a "chunk") consists of two or
-** more blocks where each block is 8 bytes. The first 8 bytes are
+** A memory allocation (also called a "chunk") consists of two or
+** more blocks where each block is 8 bytes. The first 8 bytes are
** a header that is not returned to the user.
**
** A chunk is two or more blocks that is either checked out or
**
** The second block of free chunks is of the form u.list. The
** two fields form a double-linked list of chunks of related sizes.
-** Pointers to the head of the list are stored in mem3.aiSmall[]
+** Pointers to the head of the list are stored in mem3.aiSmall[]
** for smaller chunks and mem3.aiHash[] for larger chunks.
**
-** The second block of a chunk is user data if the chunk is checked
+** The second block of a chunk is user data if the chunk is checked
** out. If a chunk is checked out, the user data may extend into
** the u.hdr.prevSize value of the following chunk.
*/
** True if we are evaluating an out-of-memory callback.
*/
int alarmBusy;
-
+
/*
** Mutex to control access to the memory allocation subsystem.
*/
sqlite3_mutex *mutex;
-
+
/*
** The minimum amount of free space that we have seen.
*/
u32 szMaster;
/*
- ** Array of lists of free blocks according to the block size
+ ** Array of lists of free blocks according to the block size
** for smaller chunks, or a hash on the block size for larger
** chunks.
*/
}
/*
-** Unlink the chunk at index i from
+** Unlink the chunk at index i from
** whatever list is currently a member of.
*/
static void memsys3Unlink(u32 i){
/*
-** Chunk i is a free chunk that has been unlinked. Adjust its
-** size parameters for check-out and return a pointer to the
+** Chunk i is a free chunk that has been unlinked. Adjust its
+** size parameters for check-out and return a pointer to the
** user portion of the chunk.
*/
static void *memsys3Checkout(u32 i, u32 nBlock){
/*
** *pRoot is the head of a list of free chunks of the same size
** or same size hash. In other words, *pRoot is an entry in either
-** mem3.aiSmall[] or mem3.aiHash[].
+** mem3.aiSmall[] or mem3.aiHash[].
**
** This routine examines all entries on the given list and tries
-** to coalesce each entries with adjacent free chunks.
+** to coalesce each entries with adjacent free chunks.
**
-** If it sees a chunk that is larger than mem3.iMaster, it replaces
+** If it sees a chunk that is larger than mem3.iMaster, it replaces
** the current mem3.iMaster with the new larger chunk. In order for
** this mem3.iMaster replacement to work, the master chunk must be
** linked into the hash tables. That is not the normal state of
}
- /* STEP 3:
+ /* STEP 3:
** Loop through the entire memory pool. Coalesce adjacent free
** chunks. Recompute the master chunk as the largest free chunk.
** Then try again to satisfy the allocation by carving a piece off
memsys3Enter();
p = memsys3MallocUnsafe(nBytes);
memsys3Leave();
- return (void*)p;
+ return (void*)p;
}
/*
/*
-** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory
+** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory
** allocations into that log.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys3Dump(const char *zFilename){
fprintf(out, " %p(%d)", &mem3.aPool[j],
(mem3.aPool[j-1].u.hdr.size4x/4)*8-8);
}
- fprintf(out, "\n");
+ fprintf(out, "\n");
}
for(i=0; i<N_HASH; i++){
if( mem3.aiHash[i]==0 ) continue;
fprintf(out, " %p(%d)", &mem3.aPool[j],
(mem3.aPool[j-1].u.hdr.size4x/4)*8-8);
}
- fprintf(out, "\n");
+ fprintf(out, "\n");
}
fprintf(out, "master=%d\n", mem3.iMaster);
fprintf(out, "nowUsed=%d\n", mem3.nPool*8 - mem3.szMaster*8);
}
/*
-** This routine is the only routine in this file with external
+** This routine is the only routine in this file with external
** linkage.
**
** Populate the low-level memory allocation function pointers in
**
*************************************************************************
** This file contains the C functions that implement a memory
-** allocation subsystem for use by SQLite.
+** allocation subsystem for use by SQLite.
**
** This version of the memory allocation subsystem omits all
** use of malloc(). The application gives SQLite a block of memory
** before calling sqlite3_initialize() from which allocations
-** are made and returned by the xMalloc() and xRealloc()
+** are made and returned by the xMalloc() and xRealloc()
** implementations. Once sqlite3_initialize() has been called,
** the amount of memory available to SQLite is fixed and cannot
** be changed.
** This algorithm is described in: J. M. Robson. "Bounds for Some Functions
** Concerning Dynamic Storage Allocation". Journal of the Association for
** Computing Machinery, Volume 21, Number 8, July 1974, pages 491-499.
-**
+**
** Let n be the size of the largest allocation divided by the minimum
** allocation size (after rounding all sizes up to a power of 2.) Let M
** be the maximum amount of memory ever outstanding at one time. Let
** N be the total amount of memory available for allocation. Robson
-** proved that this memory allocator will never breakdown due to
+** proved that this memory allocator will never breakdown due to
** fragmentation as long as the following constraint holds:
**
** N >= M*(1 + log2(n)/2) - n + 1
*/
/*
-** This version of the memory allocator is used only when
+** This version of the memory allocator is used only when
** SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMSYS5 is defined.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMSYS5
int szAtom; /* Smallest possible allocation in bytes */
int nBlock; /* Number of szAtom sized blocks in zPool */
u8 *zPool; /* Memory available to be allocated */
-
+
/*
** Mutex to control access to the memory allocation subsystem.
*/
u32 maxOut; /* Maximum instantaneous currentOut */
u32 maxCount; /* Maximum instantaneous currentCount */
u32 maxRequest; /* Largest allocation (exclusive of internal frag) */
-
+
/*
** Lists of free blocks. aiFreelist[0] is a list of free blocks of
** size mem5.szAtom. aiFreelist[1] holds blocks of size szAtom*2.
/*
** Find the first entry on the freelist iLogsize. Unlink that
-** entry and return its index.
+** entry and return its index.
*/
static int memsys5UnlinkFirst(int iLogsize){
int i;
u32 size, iLogsize;
int iBlock;
- /* Set iBlock to the index of the block pointed to by pOld in
+ /* Set iBlock to the index of the block pointed to by pOld in
** the array of mem5.szAtom byte blocks pointed to by mem5.zPool.
*/
iBlock = ((u8 *)pOld-mem5.zPool)/mem5.szAtom;
p = memsys5MallocUnsafe(nBytes);
memsys5Leave();
}
- return (void*)p;
+ return (void*)p;
}
/*
assert( pPrior!=0 );
memsys5Enter();
memsys5FreeUnsafe(pPrior);
- memsys5Leave();
+ memsys5Leave();
}
/*
** Change the size of an existing memory allocation.
**
** The outer layer memory allocator prevents this routine from
-** being called with pPrior==0.
+** being called with pPrior==0.
**
** nBytes is always a value obtained from a prior call to
** memsys5Round(). Hence nBytes is always a non-negative power
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
/*
-** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory
+** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory
** allocations into that log.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys5Dump(const char *zFilename){
#endif
/*
-** This routine is the only routine in this file with external
+** This routine is the only routine in this file with external
** linkage. It returns a pointer to a static sqlite3_mem_methods
** struct populated with the memsys5 methods.
*/
/*
** Initialize the mutex system.
*/
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MutexInit(void){
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MutexInit(void){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.bCoreMutex ){
if( !sqlite3GlobalConfig.mutex.xMutexAlloc ){
/* If the xMutexAlloc method has not been set, then the user did not
- ** install a mutex implementation via sqlite3_config() prior to
+ ** install a mutex implementation via sqlite3_config() prior to
** sqlite3_initialize() being called. This block copies pointers to
** the default implementation into the sqlite3GlobalConfig structure.
*/
/*
** The sqlite3_mutex_leave() routine exits a mutex that was previously
-** entered by the same thread. The behavior is undefined if the mutex
+** entered by the same thread. The behavior is undefined if the mutex
** is not currently entered. If a NULL pointer is passed as an argument
** this function is a no-op.
*/
/*
** The sqlite3_mutex_alloc() routine allocates a new
** mutex and returns a pointer to it. If it returns NULL
-** that means that a mutex could not be allocated.
+** that means that a mutex could not be allocated.
*/
static sqlite3_mutex *debugMutexAlloc(int id){
static sqlite3_mutex aStatic[6];
/*
** The sqlite3_mutex_alloc() routine allocates a new
** mutex and returns a pointer to it. If it returns NULL
-** that means that a mutex could not be allocated.
+** that means that a mutex could not be allocated.
** SQLite will unwind its stack and return an error. The argument
** to sqlite3_mutex_alloc() is one of these integer constants:
**
** there might be race conditions that can cause these routines to
** deliver incorrect results. In particular, if pthread_equal() is
** not an atomic operation, then these routines might delivery
-** incorrect results. On most platforms, pthread_equal() is a
+** incorrect results. On most platforms, pthread_equal() is a
** comparison of two integers and is therefore atomic. But we are
** told that HPUX is not such a platform. If so, then these routines
** will not always work correctly on HPUX.
**
** Note that if one of the dynamic mutex parameters (SQLITE_MUTEX_FAST
** or SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE) is used then sqlite3_mutex_alloc()
-** returns a different mutex on every call. But for the static
+** returns a different mutex on every call. But for the static
** mutex types, the same mutex is returned on every call that has
** the same type number.
*/
** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self
** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values
** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place.
- ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
+ ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
** separate processes cannot read different values from the same
** address at the same time. If either of these two conditions
** are not met, then the mutexes will fail and problems will result.
** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self
** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values
** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place.
- ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
+ ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
** separate processes cannot read different values from the same
** address at the same time. If either of these two conditions
** are not met, then the mutexes will fail and problems will result.
** the LockFileEx() API.
**
** mutexIsNT() is only used for the TryEnterCriticalSection() API call,
-** which is only available if your application was compiled with
+** which is only available if your application was compiled with
** _WIN32_WINNT defined to a value >= 0x0400. Currently, the only
-** call to TryEnterCriticalSection() is #ifdef'ed out, so #ifdef
+** call to TryEnterCriticalSection() is #ifdef'ed out, so #ifdef
** this out as well.
*/
#if 0
return p->nRef==0 || p->owner!=tid;
}
static int winMutexNotheld(sqlite3_mutex *p){
- DWORD tid = GetCurrentThreadId();
+ DWORD tid = GetCurrentThreadId();
return winMutexNotheld2(p, tid);
}
#endif
*/
static long winMutex_lock = 0;
-static int winMutexInit(void){
+static int winMutexInit(void){
/* The first to increment to 1 does actual initialization */
if( InterlockedCompareExchange(&winMutex_lock, 1, 0)==0 ){
int i;
Sleep(1);
}
}
- return SQLITE_OK;
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}
-static int winMutexEnd(void){
- /* The first to decrement to 0 does actual shutdown
+static int winMutexEnd(void){
+ /* The first to decrement to 0 does actual shutdown
** (which should be the last to shutdown.) */
if( InterlockedCompareExchange(&winMutex_lock, 0, 1)==1 ){
if( winMutex_isInit==1 ){
winMutex_isInit = 0;
}
}
- return SQLITE_OK;
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
**
** Note that if one of the dynamic mutex parameters (SQLITE_MUTEX_FAST
** or SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE) is used then sqlite3_mutex_alloc()
-** returns a different mutex on every call. But for the static
+** returns a different mutex on every call. But for the static
** mutex types, the same mutex is returned on every call that has
** the same type number.
*/
case SQLITE_MUTEX_FAST:
case SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE: {
p = sqlite3MallocZero( sizeof(*p) );
- if( p ){
+ if( p ){
p->id = iType;
InitializeCriticalSection(&p->mutex);
}
** more than once, the behavior is undefined.
*/
static void winMutexEnter(sqlite3_mutex *p){
- DWORD tid = GetCurrentThreadId();
+ DWORD tid = GetCurrentThreadId();
assert( p->id==SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE || winMutexNotheld2(p, tid) );
EnterCriticalSection(&p->mutex);
- p->owner = tid;
+ p->owner = tid;
p->nRef++;
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
if( p->trace ){
}
static int winMutexTry(sqlite3_mutex *p){
#ifndef NDEBUG
- DWORD tid = GetCurrentThreadId();
+ DWORD tid = GetCurrentThreadId();
#endif
int rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
assert( p->id==SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE || winMutexNotheld2(p, tid) );
/*
** The sqlite3_mutex_try() routine is very rarely used, and when it
** is used it is merely an optimization. So it is OK for it to always
- ** fail.
+ ** fail.
**
** The TryEnterCriticalSection() interface is only available on WinNT.
** And some windows compilers complain if you try to use it without
** limit.
*/
static void softHeapLimitEnforcer(
- void *NotUsed,
+ void *NotUsed,
sqlite3_int64 NotUsed2,
int allocSize
){
}
/*
-** Set the soft heap-size limit for the library. Passing a zero or
+** Set the soft heap-size limit for the library. Passing a zero or
** negative value indicates no limit.
*/
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_soft_heap_limit(int n){
#endif
/*
-** Trigger the alarm
+** Trigger the alarm
*/
static void sqlite3MallocAlarm(int nByte){
void (*xCallback)(void*,sqlite3_int64,int);
if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.szScratch<n ){
goto scratch_overflow;
- }else{
+ }else{
sqlite3_mutex_enter(mem0.mutex);
if( mem0.nScratchFree==0 ){
sqlite3_mutex_leave(mem0.mutex);
#if SQLITE_THREADSAFE==0 && !defined(NDEBUG)
scratchAllocOut = p!=0;
#endif
- return p;
+ return p;
}
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ScratchFree(void *p){
if( p ){
}else if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.bMemstat ){
sqlite3_mutex_enter(mem0.mutex);
sqlite3StatusSet(SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_SIZE, nBytes);
- if( sqlite3StatusValue(SQLITE_STATUS_MEMORY_USED)+nNew-nOld >=
+ if( sqlite3StatusValue(SQLITE_STATUS_MEMORY_USED)+nNew-nOld >=
mem0.alarmThreshold ){
sqlite3MallocAlarm(nNew-nOld);
}
/*
** Allocate and zero memory.
-*/
+*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3MallocZero(int n){
void *p = sqlite3Malloc(n);
if( p ){
}
/*
-** Make a copy of a string in memory obtained from sqliteMalloc(). These
+** Make a copy of a string in memory obtained from sqliteMalloc(). These
** functions call sqlite3MallocRaw() directly instead of sqliteMalloc(). This
-** is because when memory debugging is turned on, these two functions are
+** is because when memory debugging is turned on, these two functions are
** called via macros that record the current file and line number in the
** ThreadData structure.
*/
/*
-** This function must be called before exiting any API function (i.e.
+** This function must be called before exiting any API function (i.e.
** returning control to the user) that has called sqlite3_malloc or
** sqlite3_realloc.
**
** The returned value is normally a copy of the second argument to this
** function. However, if a malloc() failure has occurred since the previous
-** invocation SQLITE_NOMEM is returned instead.
+** invocation SQLITE_NOMEM is returned instead.
**
** If the first argument, db, is not NULL and a malloc() error has occurred,
** then the connection error-code (the value returned by sqlite3_errcode())
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ApiExit(sqlite3* db, int rc){
/* If the db handle is not NULL, then we must hold the connection handle
- ** mutex here. Otherwise the read (and possible write) of db->mallocFailed
+ ** mutex here. Otherwise the read (and possible write) of db->mallocFailed
** is unsafe, as is the call to sqlite3Error().
*/
assert( !db || sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
break;
}
/* Find out what flags are present */
- flag_leftjustify = flag_plussign = flag_blanksign =
+ flag_leftjustify = flag_plussign = flag_blanksign =
flag_alternateform = flag_altform2 = flag_zeropad = 0;
done = 0;
do{
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
-** This file contains routines used to translate between UTF-8,
+** This file contains routines used to translate between UTF-8,
** UTF-16, UTF-16BE, and UTF-16LE.
**
** Notes on UTF-8:
** loop over all entries of the Btree. You can also insert new BTree
** entries or retrieve the key or data from the entry that the cursor
** is currently pointing to.
-**
+**
** Every cursor that the virtual machine has open is represented by an
** instance of the following structure.
**
sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor; /* The cursor for a virtual table */
const sqlite3_module *pModule; /* Module for cursor pVtabCursor */
- /* Result of last sqlite3BtreeMoveto() done by an OP_NotExists or
+ /* Result of last sqlite3BtreeMoveto() done by an OP_NotExists or
** OP_IsUnique opcode on this cursor. */
int seekResult;
** When a sub-program is executed (OP_Program), a structure of this type
** is allocated to store the current value of the program counter, as
** well as the current memory cell array and various other frame specific
-** values stored in the Vdbe struct. When the sub-program is finished,
+** values stored in the Vdbe struct. When the sub-program is finished,
** these values are copied back to the Vdbe from the VdbeFrame structure,
** restoring the state of the VM to as it was before the sub-program
** began executing.
** If the MEM_Str flag is set then Mem.z points at a string representation.
** Usually this is encoded in the same unicode encoding as the main
** database (see below for exceptions). If the MEM_Term flag is also
-** set, then the string is nul terminated. The MEM_Int and MEM_Real
+** set, then the string is nul terminated. The MEM_Int and MEM_Real
** flags may coexist with the MEM_Str flag.
**
** Multiple of these values can appear in Mem.flags. But only one
** set to 2 for xDestroy method calls and 1 for all other methods. This
** variable is used for two purposes: to allow xDestroy methods to execute
** "DROP TABLE" statements and to prevent some nasty side effects of
-** malloc failure when SQLite is invoked recursively by a virtual table
+** malloc failure when SQLite is invoked recursively by a virtual table
** method function.
*/
struct Vdbe {
/*
** If the TRANSLATE_TRACE macro is defined, the value of each Mem is
** printed on stderr on the way into and out of sqlite3VdbeMemTranslate().
-*/
+*/
/* #define TRANSLATE_TRACE 1 */
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
}
#endif
- /* If the translation is between UTF-16 little and big endian, then
+ /* If the translation is between UTF-16 little and big endian, then
** all that is required is to swap the byte order. This case is handled
** differently from the others.
*/
if( pMem->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE ){
/* UTF-16 Little-endian -> UTF-8 */
while( zIn<zTerm ){
- READ_UTF16LE(zIn, zIn<zTerm, c);
+ READ_UTF16LE(zIn, zIn<zTerm, c);
WRITE_UTF8(z, c);
}
}else{
/* UTF-16 Big-endian -> UTF-8 */
while( zIn<zTerm ){
- READ_UTF16BE(zIn, zIn<zTerm, c);
+ READ_UTF16BE(zIn, zIn<zTerm, c);
WRITE_UTF8(z, c);
}
}
}
/*
-** This routine checks for a byte-order mark at the beginning of the
+** This routine checks for a byte-order mark at the beginning of the
** UTF-16 string stored in *pMem. If one is present, it is removed and
** the encoding of the Mem adjusted. This routine does not do any
** byte-swapping, it just sets Mem.enc appropriately.
bom = SQLITE_UTF16LE;
}
}
-
+
if( bom ){
rc = sqlite3VdbeMemMakeWriteable(pMem);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
** pZ is a UTF-8 encoded unicode string. If nByte is less than zero,
** return the number of unicode characters in pZ up to (but not including)
** the first 0x00 byte. If nByte is not less than zero, return the
-** number of unicode characters in the first nByte of pZ (or up to
+** number of unicode characters in the first nByte of pZ (or up to
** the first 0x00, whichever comes first).
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Utf8CharLen(const char *zIn, int nByte){
return r;
}
-/* This test function is not currently used by the automated test-suite.
+/* This test function is not currently used by the automated test-suite.
** Hence it is only available in debug builds.
*/
#if defined(SQLITE_TEST) && defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
** is set to the length of the returned string in bytes. The call should
** arrange to call sqlite3DbFree() on the returned pointer when it is
** no longer required.
-**
+**
** If a malloc failure occurs, NULL is returned and the db.mallocFailed
** flag set.
*/
int c;
unsigned char const *z = zIn;
int n = 0;
-
+
if( SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE==SQLITE_UTF16BE ){
while( n<nChar ){
READ_UTF16BE(z, 1, c);
**
** This option [-ffast-math] should never be turned on by any
** -O option since it can result in incorrect output for programs
- ** which depend on an exact implementation of IEEE or ISO
+ ** which depend on an exact implementation of IEEE or ISO
** rules/specifications for math functions.
**
** Under MSVC, this NaN test may fail if compiled with a floating-
- ** point precision mode other than /fp:precise. From the MSDN
+ ** point precision mode other than /fp:precise. From the MSDN
** documentation:
**
- ** The compiler [with /fp:precise] will properly handle comparisons
- ** involving NaN. For example, x != x evaluates to true if x is NaN
+ ** The compiler [with /fp:precise] will properly handle comparisons
+ ** involving NaN. For example, x != x evaluates to true if x is NaN
** ...
*/
#ifdef __FAST_MATH__
result *= 1.0e+308;
}
}else{
- /* 1.0e+22 is the largest power of 10 than can be
+ /* 1.0e+22 is the largest power of 10 than can be
** represented exactly. */
while( e%22 ) { scale *= 1.0e+1; e -= 1; }
while( e>0 ) { scale *= 1.0e+22; e -= 22; }
v >>= 7;
}
return 9;
- }
+ }
n = 0;
do{
buf[n++] = (u8)((v & 0x7f) | 0x80);
** If the varint stored in p[0] is larger than can fit in a 32-bit unsigned
** integer, then set *v to 0xffffffff.
**
-** A MACRO version, getVarint32, is provided which inlines the
-** single-byte case. All code should use the MACRO version as
+** A MACRO version, getVarint32, is provided which inlines the
+** single-byte case. All code should use the MACRO version as
** this function assumes the single-byte case has already been handled.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE u8 sqlite3GetVarint32(const unsigned char *p, u32 *v){
** argument. The zType is a word like "NULL" or "closed" or "invalid".
*/
static void logBadConnection(const char *zType){
- sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
+ sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
"API call with %s database connection pointer",
zType
);
count = pH->count;
}
while( count-- && ALWAYS(elem) ){
- if( elem->nKey==nKey && sqlite3StrNICmp(elem->pKey,pKey,nKey)==0 ){
+ if( elem->nKey==nKey && sqlite3StrNICmp(elem->pKey,pKey,nKey)==0 ){
return elem;
}
elem = elem->next;
){
struct _ht *pEntry;
if( elem->prev ){
- elem->prev->next = elem->next;
+ elem->prev->next = elem->next;
}else{
pH->first = elem->next;
}
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_PERFORMANCE_TRACE
-/*
-** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing
+/*
+** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing
** high-performance timing routines.
*/
/************** Include hwtime.h in the middle of os_common.h ****************/
__asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val));
return val;
}
-
+
#elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__))
__inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){
char *zNameCp;
char zTmpname[CCHMAXPATH+1]; /* Buffer to hold name of temp file */
- /* If the second argument to this function is NULL, generate a
- ** temporary file name to use
+ /* If the second argument to this function is NULL, generate a
+ ** temporary file name to use
*/
if( !zName ){
int rc = getTempname(CCHMAXPATH+1, zTmpname);
** Styles 4, 5, and 7 are only available of SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
** is defined to 1. The SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE also enables automatic
** selection of the appropriate locking style based on the filesystem
-** where the database is located.
+** where the database is located.
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE)
# if defined(__APPLE__)
#endif
/*
-** Define the OS_VXWORKS pre-processor macro to 1 if building on
+** Define the OS_VXWORKS pre-processor macro to 1 if building on
** vxworks, or 0 otherwise.
*/
#ifndef OS_VXWORKS
#define MAX_PATHNAME 512
/*
-** Only set the lastErrno if the error code is a real error and not
+** Only set the lastErrno if the error code is a real error and not
** a normal expected return code of SQLITE_BUSY or SQLITE_OK
*/
#define IS_LOCK_ERROR(x) ((x != SQLITE_OK) && (x != SQLITE_BUSY))
** whenever any part of the database changes. An assertion fault will
** occur if a file is updated without also updating the transaction
** counter. This test is made to avoid new problems similar to the
- ** one described by ticket #3584.
+ ** one described by ticket #3584.
*/
unsigned char transCntrChng; /* True if the transaction counter changed */
unsigned char dbUpdate; /* True if any part of database file changed */
unsigned char inNormalWrite; /* True if in a normal write operation */
#endif
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
- /* In test mode, increase the size of this structure a bit so that
+ /* In test mode, increase the size of this structure a bit so that
** it is larger than the struct CrashFile defined in test6.c.
*/
char aPadding[32];
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_PERFORMANCE_TRACE
-/*
-** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing
+/*
+** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing
** high-performance timing routines.
*/
/************** Include hwtime.h in the middle of os_common.h ****************/
__asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val));
return val;
}
-
+
#elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__))
__inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){
/*
** Helper functions to obtain and relinquish the global mutex. The
** global mutex is used to protect the unixOpenCnt, unixLockInfo and
-** vxworksFileId objects used by this file, all of which may be
+** vxworksFileId objects used by this file, all of which may be
** shared by multiple threads.
**
-** Function unixMutexHeld() is used to assert() that the global mutex
-** is held when required. This function is only used as part of assert()
+** Function unixMutexHeld() is used to assert() that the global mutex
+** is held when required. This function is only used as part of assert()
** statements. e.g.
**
** unixEnterMutex()
** This routine translates a standard POSIX errno code into something
** useful to the clients of the sqlite3 functions. Specifically, it is
** intended to translate a variety of "try again" errors into SQLITE_BUSY
-** and a variety of "please close the file descriptor NOW" errors into
+** and a variety of "please close the file descriptor NOW" errors into
** SQLITE_IOERR
-**
+**
** Errors during initialization of locks, or file system support for locks,
** should handle ENOLCK, ENOTSUP, EOPNOTSUPP separately.
*/
static int sqliteErrorFromPosixError(int posixError, int sqliteIOErr) {
switch (posixError) {
- case 0:
+ case 0:
return SQLITE_OK;
-
+
case EAGAIN:
case ETIMEDOUT:
case EBUSY:
case EINTR:
- case ENOLCK:
- /* random NFS retry error, unless during file system support
+ case ENOLCK:
+ /* random NFS retry error, unless during file system support
* introspection, in which it actually means what it says */
return SQLITE_BUSY;
-
- case EACCES:
+
+ case EACCES:
/* EACCES is like EAGAIN during locking operations, but not any other time*/
- if( (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK) ||
- (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK) ||
+ if( (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK) ||
+ (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK) ||
(sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK) ||
(sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK) ){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
/* else fall through */
- case EPERM:
+ case EPERM:
return SQLITE_PERM;
-
+
case EDEADLK:
return SQLITE_IOERR_BLOCKED;
-
+
#if EOPNOTSUPP!=ENOTSUP
- case EOPNOTSUPP:
- /* something went terribly awry, unless during file system support
+ case EOPNOTSUPP:
+ /* something went terribly awry, unless during file system support
* introspection, in which it actually means what it says */
#endif
#ifdef ENOTSUP
- case ENOTSUP:
- /* invalid fd, unless during file system support introspection, in which
+ case ENOTSUP:
+ /* invalid fd, unless during file system support introspection, in which
* it actually means what it says */
#endif
case EIO:
case ESTALE:
case ENOSYS:
/* these should force the client to close the file and reconnect */
-
- default:
+
+ default:
return sqliteIOErr;
}
}
**
** A pointer to an instance of the following structure can be used as a
** unique file ID in VxWorks. Each instance of this structure contains
-** a copy of the canonical filename. There is also a reference count.
+** a copy of the canonical filename. There is also a reference count.
** The structure is reclaimed when the number of pointers to it drops to
** zero.
**
};
#if OS_VXWORKS
-/*
+/*
** All unique filenames are held on a linked list headed by this
** variable:
*/
*/
unixEnterMutex();
for(pCandidate=vxworksFileList; pCandidate; pCandidate=pCandidate->pNext){
- if( pCandidate->nName==n
+ if( pCandidate->nName==n
&& memcmp(pCandidate->zCanonicalName, pNew->zCanonicalName, n)==0
){
sqlite3_free(pNew);
** cnt>0 means there are cnt shared locks on the file.
**
** Any attempt to lock or unlock a file first checks the locking
-** structure. The fcntl() system call is only invoked to set a
+** structure. The fcntl() system call is only invoked to set a
** POSIX lock if the internal lock structure transitions between
** a locked and an unlocked state.
**
** another as long as we are running on a system that supports threads
** overriding each others locks (which is now the most common behavior)
** or if no locks are held. But the unixFile.pLock field needs to be
-** recomputed because its key includes the thread-id. See the
+** recomputed because its key includes the thread-id. See the
** transferOwnership() function below for additional information
*/
#if SQLITE_THREADSAFE && defined(__linux__)
** by the main thread in testThreadLockingBehavior() conflicts with a
** hypothetical write-lock obtained by this thread on the same file.
**
-** The write-lock is not actually acquired, as this is not possible if
+** The write-lock is not actually acquired, as this is not possible if
** the file is open in read-only mode (see ticket #3472).
-*/
+*/
static void *threadLockingTest(void *pArg){
struct threadTestData *pData = (struct threadTestData*)pArg;
pData->result = fcntl(pData->fd, F_GETLK, &pData->lock);
#if SQLITE_THREADSAFE && defined(__linux__)
/*
** This procedure attempts to determine whether or not threads
-** can override each others locks then sets the
+** can override each others locks then sets the
** threadsOverrideEachOthersLocks variable appropriately.
*/
static void testThreadLockingBehavior(int fd_orig){
}
}
#endif
-
+
unixLeaveMutex();
OSTRACE4("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (unix)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved);
**
** A process may only obtain a RESERVED lock after it has a SHARED lock.
** A RESERVED lock is implemented by grabbing a write-lock on the
- ** 'reserved byte'.
+ ** 'reserved byte'.
**
** A process may only obtain a PENDING lock after it has obtained a
** SHARED lock. A PENDING lock is implemented by obtaining a write-lock
** implemented by obtaining a write-lock on the entire 'shared byte
** range'. Since all other locks require a read-lock on one of the bytes
** within this range, this ensures that no other locks are held on the
- ** database.
+ ** database.
**
** The reason a single byte cannot be used instead of the 'shared byte
** range' is that some versions of windows do not support read-locks. By
/* If some thread using this PID has a lock via a different unixFile*
** handle that precludes the requested lock, return BUSY.
*/
- if( (pFile->locktype!=pLock->locktype &&
+ if( (pFile->locktype!=pLock->locktype &&
(pLock->locktype>=PENDING_LOCK || locktype>SHARED_LOCK))
){
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
** has a SHARED or RESERVED lock, then increment reference counts and
** return SQLITE_OK.
*/
- if( locktype==SHARED_LOCK &&
+ if( locktype==SHARED_LOCK &&
(pLock->locktype==SHARED_LOCK || pLock->locktype==RESERVED_LOCK) ){
assert( locktype==SHARED_LOCK );
assert( pFile->locktype==0 );
*/
lock.l_len = 1L;
lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET;
- if( locktype==SHARED_LOCK
+ if( locktype==SHARED_LOCK
|| (locktype==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK && pFile->locktype<PENDING_LOCK)
){
lock.l_type = (locktype==SHARED_LOCK?F_RDLCK:F_WRLCK);
if( fcntl(pFile->h, F_SETLK, &lock)!=0 ){
if( s != -1 ){
/* This could happen with a network mount */
- tErrno = errno;
- rc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK);
+ tErrno = errno;
+ rc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK);
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(rc) ){
pFile->lastErrno = tErrno;
}
}
}
}
-
+
#ifndef NDEBUG
/* Set up the transaction-counter change checking flags when
end_lock:
unixLeaveMutex();
- OSTRACE4("LOCK %d %s %s (unix)\n", pFile->h, locktypeName(locktype),
+ OSTRACE4("LOCK %d %s %s (unix)\n", pFile->h, locktypeName(locktype),
rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed");
return rc;
}
** cleared and SQLITE_OK returned.
**
** Otherwise, if an error occurs, then successfully closed file descriptor
-** entries are removed from the list, and SQLITE_IOERR_CLOSE returned.
+** entries are removed from the list, and SQLITE_IOERR_CLOSE returned.
** not deleted and SQLITE_IOERR_CLOSE returned.
-*/
+*/
static int closePendingFds(unixFile *pFile){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
struct unixOpenCnt *pOpen = pFile->pOpen;
**
** If the locking level of the file descriptor is already at or below
** the requested locking level, this routine is a no-op.
-**
+**
** If handleNFSUnlock is true, then on downgrading an EXCLUSIVE_LOCK to SHARED
** the byte range is divided into 2 parts and the first part is unlocked then
-** set to a read lock, then the other part is simply unlocked. This works
-** around a bug in BSD NFS lockd (also seen on MacOSX 10.3+) that fails to
+** set to a read lock, then the other part is simply unlocked. This works
+** around a bug in BSD NFS lockd (also seen on MacOSX 10.3+) that fails to
** remove the write lock on a region when a read lock is set.
*/
static int _posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int locktype, int handleNFSUnlock){
/* downgrading to a shared lock on NFS involves clearing the write lock
** before establishing the readlock - to avoid a race condition we downgrade
- ** the lock in 2 blocks, so that part of the range will be covered by a
+ ** the lock in 2 blocks, so that part of the range will be covered by a
** write lock until the rest is covered by a read lock:
** 1: [WWWWW]
** 2: [....W]
if( locktype==SHARED_LOCK ){
if( handleNFSUnlock ){
off_t divSize = SHARED_SIZE - 1;
-
+
lock.l_type = F_UNLCK;
lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET;
lock.l_start = SHARED_FIRST;
}
}
}
-
+
end_unlock:
unixLeaveMutex();
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) pFile->locktype = locktype;
}
/*
-** This function performs the parts of the "close file" operation
+** This function performs the parts of the "close file" operation
** common to all locking schemes. It closes the directory and file
** handles, if they are valid, and sets all fields of the unixFile
** structure to 0.
if( pFile->pOpen && pFile->pOpen->nLock ){
/* If there are outstanding locks, do not actually close the file just
** yet because that would clear those locks. Instead, add the file
- ** descriptor to pOpen->pUnused list. It will be automatically closed
+ ** descriptor to pOpen->pUnused list. It will be automatically closed
** when the last lock is cleared.
*/
setPendingFd(pFile);
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-
+
assert( pFile );
/* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */
#endif
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* grab an exclusive lock */
fd = open(zLockFile,O_RDONLY|O_CREAT|O_EXCL,0600);
if( fd<0 ){
}
}
return rc;
- }
+ }
if( close(fd) ){
pFile->lastErrno = errno;
rc = SQLITE_IOERR_CLOSE;
}
-
+
/* got it, set the type and return ok */
pFile->locktype = locktype;
return rc;
OSTRACE5("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (dotlock)\n", pFile->h, locktype,
pFile->locktype, getpid());
assert( locktype<=SHARED_LOCK );
-
+
/* no-op if possible */
if( pFile->locktype==locktype ){
return SQLITE_OK;
pFile->locktype = SHARED_LOCK;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* To fully unlock the database, delete the lock file */
assert( locktype==NO_LOCK );
if( unlink(zLockFile) ){
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(rc) ){
pFile->lastErrno = tErrno;
}
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
pFile->locktype = NO_LOCK;
return SQLITE_OK;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
int reserved = 0;
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
-
+
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-
+
assert( pFile );
-
+
/* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */
if( pFile->locktype>SHARED_LOCK ){
reserved = 1;
}
-
+
/* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */
if( !reserved ){
/* attempt to get the lock */
if ( lrc ) {
int tErrno = errno;
/* unlock failed with an error */
- lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK);
+ lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK);
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc) ){
pFile->lastErrno = tErrno;
rc = lrc;
int tErrno = errno;
reserved = 1;
/* someone else might have it reserved */
- lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK);
+ lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK);
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc) ){
pFile->lastErrno = tErrno;
rc = lrc;
assert( pFile );
- /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
+ /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
** Just adjust level and punt on outta here. */
if (pFile->locktype > NO_LOCK) {
pFile->locktype = locktype;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* grab an exclusive lock */
-
+
if (flock(pFile->h, LOCK_EX | LOCK_NB)) {
int tErrno = errno;
/* didn't get, must be busy */
/* got it, set the type and return ok */
pFile->locktype = locktype;
}
- OSTRACE4("LOCK %d %s %s (flock)\n", pFile->h, locktypeName(locktype),
+ OSTRACE4("LOCK %d %s %s (flock)\n", pFile->h, locktypeName(locktype),
rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed");
#ifdef SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS
if( (rc & SQLITE_IOERR) == SQLITE_IOERR ){
*/
static int flockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int locktype) {
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
-
+
assert( pFile );
OSTRACE5("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (flock)\n", pFile->h, locktype,
pFile->locktype, getpid());
assert( locktype<=SHARED_LOCK );
-
+
/* no-op if possible */
if( pFile->locktype==locktype ){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* shared can just be set because we always have an exclusive */
if (locktype==SHARED_LOCK) {
pFile->locktype = locktype;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* no, really, unlock. */
int rc = flock(pFile->h, LOCK_UN);
if (rc) {
r = SQLITE_BUSY;
}
#endif /* SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS */
-
+
return r;
} else {
pFile->locktype = NO_LOCK;
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-
+
assert( pFile );
/* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */
if( pFile->locktype>SHARED_LOCK ){
reserved = 1;
}
-
+
/* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */
if( !reserved ){
sem_t *pSem = pFile->pOpen->pSem;
sem_t *pSem = pFile->pOpen->pSem;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
- /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
+ /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
** Just adjust level and punt on outta here. */
if (pFile->locktype > NO_LOCK) {
pFile->locktype = locktype;
rc = SQLITE_OK;
goto sem_end_lock;
}
-
+
/* lock semaphore now but bail out when already locked. */
if( sem_trywait(pSem)==-1 ){
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
OSTRACE5("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (sem)\n", pFile->h, locktype,
pFile->locktype, getpid());
assert( locktype<=SHARED_LOCK );
-
+
/* no-op if possible */
if( pFile->locktype==locktype ){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* shared can just be set because we always have an exclusive */
if (locktype==SHARED_LOCK) {
pFile->locktype = locktype;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* no, really unlock. */
if ( sem_post(pSem)==-1 ) {
int rc, tErrno = errno;
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(rc) ){
pFile->lastErrno = tErrno;
}
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
pFile->locktype = NO_LOCK;
return SQLITE_OK;
/*
** This is a utility for setting or clearing a bit-range lock on an
** AFP filesystem.
-**
+**
** Return SQLITE_OK on success, SQLITE_BUSY on failure.
*/
static int afpSetLock(
){
struct ByteRangeLockPB2 pb;
int err;
-
+
pb.unLockFlag = setLockFlag ? 0 : 1;
pb.startEndFlag = 0;
pb.offset = offset;
- pb.length = length;
+ pb.length = length;
pb.fd = pFile->h;
-
- OSTRACE6("AFPSETLOCK [%s] for %d%s in range %llx:%llx\n",
+
+ OSTRACE6("AFPSETLOCK [%s] for %d%s in range %llx:%llx\n",
(setLockFlag?"ON":"OFF"), pFile->h, (pb.fd==-1?"[testval-1]":""),
offset, length);
err = fsctl(path, afpfsByteRangeLock2FSCTL, &pb, 0);
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
int reserved = 0;
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
-
+
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-
+
assert( pFile );
afpLockingContext *context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext;
if( context->reserved ){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
unixEnterMutex(); /* Because pFile->pLock is shared across threads */
-
+
/* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */
if( pFile->pLock->locktype>SHARED_LOCK ){
reserved = 1;
}
-
+
/* Otherwise see if some other process holds it.
*/
if( !reserved ){
/* lock the RESERVED byte */
- int lrc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1);
+ int lrc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1);
if( SQLITE_OK==lrc ){
/* if we succeeded in taking the reserved lock, unlock it to restore
** the original state */
rc=lrc;
}
}
-
+
unixLeaveMutex();
OSTRACE4("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (afp)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved);
-
+
*pResOut = reserved;
return rc;
}
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
struct unixLockInfo *pLock = pFile->pLock;
afpLockingContext *context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext;
-
+
assert( pFile );
OSTRACE7("LOCK %d %s was %s(%s,%d) pid=%d (afp)\n", pFile->h,
locktypeName(locktype), locktypeName(pFile->locktype),
assert( pFile->locktype!=NO_LOCK || locktype==SHARED_LOCK );
assert( locktype!=PENDING_LOCK );
assert( locktype!=RESERVED_LOCK || pFile->locktype==SHARED_LOCK );
-
+
/* This mutex is needed because pFile->pLock is shared across threads
*/
unixEnterMutex();
/* If some thread using this PID has a lock via a different unixFile*
** handle that precludes the requested lock, return BUSY.
*/
- if( (pFile->locktype!=pLock->locktype &&
+ if( (pFile->locktype!=pLock->locktype &&
(pLock->locktype>=PENDING_LOCK || locktype>SHARED_LOCK))
){
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
goto afp_end_lock;
}
-
+
/* If a SHARED lock is requested, and some thread using this PID already
** has a SHARED or RESERVED lock, then increment reference counts and
** return SQLITE_OK.
*/
- if( locktype==SHARED_LOCK &&
+ if( locktype==SHARED_LOCK &&
(pLock->locktype==SHARED_LOCK || pLock->locktype==RESERVED_LOCK) ){
assert( locktype==SHARED_LOCK );
assert( pFile->locktype==0 );
pFile->pOpen->nLock++;
goto afp_end_lock;
}
-
+
/* A PENDING lock is needed before acquiring a SHARED lock and before
** acquiring an EXCLUSIVE lock. For the SHARED lock, the PENDING will
** be released.
*/
- if( locktype==SHARED_LOCK
+ if( locktype==SHARED_LOCK
|| (locktype==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK && pFile->locktype<PENDING_LOCK)
){
int failed;
goto afp_end_lock;
}
}
-
+
/* If control gets to this point, then actually go ahead and make
** operating system calls for the specified lock.
*/
if( locktype==SHARED_LOCK ){
int lrc1, lrc2, lrc1Errno;
long lk, mask;
-
+
assert( pLock->cnt==0 );
assert( pLock->locktype==0 );
-
+
mask = (sizeof(long)==8) ? LARGEST_INT64 : 0x7fffffff;
/* Now get the read-lock SHARED_LOCK */
/* note that the quality of the randomness doesn't matter that much */
- lk = random();
+ lk = random();
pLock->sharedByte = (lk & mask)%(SHARED_SIZE - 1);
- lrc1 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
+ lrc1 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
SHARED_FIRST+pLock->sharedByte, 1, 1);
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc1) ){
lrc1Errno = pFile->lastErrno;
}
/* Drop the temporary PENDING lock */
lrc2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 0);
-
+
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc1) ) {
pFile->lastErrno = lrc1Errno;
rc = lrc1;
}
if (!failed && locktype == EXCLUSIVE_LOCK) {
/* Acquire an EXCLUSIVE lock */
-
- /* Remove the shared lock before trying the range. we'll need to
+
+ /* Remove the shared lock before trying the range. we'll need to
** reestablish the shared lock if we can't get the afpUnlock
*/
if( !(failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST +
pLock->sharedByte, 1, 0)) ){
int failed2 = SQLITE_OK;
/* now attemmpt to get the exclusive lock range */
- failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST,
+ failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST,
SHARED_SIZE, 1);
- if( failed && (failed2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
+ if( failed && (failed2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
SHARED_FIRST + pLock->sharedByte, 1, 1)) ){
/* Can't reestablish the shared lock. Sqlite can't deal, this is
** a critical I/O error
*/
- rc = ((failed & SQLITE_IOERR) == SQLITE_IOERR) ? failed2 :
+ rc = ((failed & SQLITE_IOERR) == SQLITE_IOERR) ? failed2 :
SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
goto afp_end_lock;
- }
+ }
}else{
- rc = failed;
+ rc = failed;
}
}
if( failed ){
rc = failed;
}
}
-
+
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
pFile->locktype = locktype;
pLock->locktype = locktype;
pFile->locktype = PENDING_LOCK;
pLock->locktype = PENDING_LOCK;
}
-
+
afp_end_lock:
unixLeaveMutex();
- OSTRACE4("LOCK %d %s %s (afp)\n", pFile->h, locktypeName(locktype),
+ OSTRACE4("LOCK %d %s %s (afp)\n", pFile->h, locktypeName(locktype),
rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed");
return rc;
}
SimulateIOErrorBenign(1);
SimulateIOError( h=(-1) )
SimulateIOErrorBenign(0);
-
+
#ifndef NDEBUG
/* When reducing a lock such that other processes can start
** reading the database file again, make sure that the
|| pFile->transCntrChng==1 );
pFile->inNormalWrite = 0;
#endif
-
+
if( pFile->locktype==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ){
rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST, SHARED_SIZE, 0);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (locktype==SHARED_LOCK || pLock->cnt>1) ){
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->locktype>=PENDING_LOCK ){
rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 0);
- }
+ }
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->locktype>=RESERVED_LOCK && context->reserved ){
rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1, 0);
- if( !rc ){
- context->reserved = 0;
+ if( !rc ){
+ context->reserved = 0;
}
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (locktype==SHARED_LOCK || pLock->cnt>1)){
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
struct unixOpenCnt *pOpen = pFile->pOpen;
-
+
pOpen->nLock--;
assert( pOpen->nLock>=0 );
if( pOpen->nLock==0 ){
}
}
}
-
+
unixLeaveMutex();
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) pFile->locktype = locktype;
return rc;
}
/*
-** Close a file & cleanup AFP specific locking context
+** Close a file & cleanup AFP specific locking context
*/
static int afpClose(sqlite3_file *id) {
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
/*
** The code above is the NFS lock implementation. The code is specific
** to MacOSX and does not work on other unix platforms. No alternative
-** is available.
+** is available.
**
********************* End of the NFS lock implementation **********************
******************************************************************************/
/******************************************************************************
**************** Non-locking sqlite3_file methods *****************************
**
-** The next division contains implementations for all methods of the
+** The next division contains implementations for all methods of the
** sqlite3_file object other than the locking methods. The locking
** methods were defined in divisions above (one locking method per
** division). Those methods that are common to all locking modes
*/
/*
-** Seek to the offset passed as the second argument, then read cnt
+** Seek to the offset passed as the second argument, then read cnt
** bytes into pBuf. Return the number of bytes actually read.
**
** NB: If you define USE_PREAD or USE_PREAD64, then it might also
if( newOffset == -1 ){
((unixFile*)id)->lastErrno = errno;
}else{
- ((unixFile*)id)->lastErrno = 0;
+ ((unixFile*)id)->lastErrno = 0;
}
return -1;
}
** wrong.
*/
static int unixRead(
- sqlite3_file *id,
- void *pBuf,
+ sqlite3_file *id,
+ void *pBuf,
int amt,
sqlite3_int64 offset
){
** file), the bytes in the locking range should never be read or written. */
assert( pFile->pUnused==0
|| offset>=PENDING_BYTE+512
- || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
+ || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
);
got = seekAndRead(pFile, offset, pBuf, amt);
if( newOffset == -1 ){
((unixFile*)id)->lastErrno = errno;
}else{
- ((unixFile*)id)->lastErrno = 0;
+ ((unixFile*)id)->lastErrno = 0;
}
return -1;
}
** or some other error code on failure.
*/
static int unixWrite(
- sqlite3_file *id,
- const void *pBuf,
+ sqlite3_file *id,
+ const void *pBuf,
int amt,
- sqlite3_int64 offset
+ sqlite3_int64 offset
){
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
int wrote = 0;
** file), the bytes in the locking range should never be read or written. */
assert( pFile->pUnused==0
|| offset>=PENDING_BYTE+512
- || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
+ || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
);
#ifndef NDEBUG
**
** SQLite sets the dataOnly flag if the size of the file is unchanged.
** The idea behind dataOnly is that it should only write the file content
-** to disk, not the inode. We only set dataOnly if the file size is
-** unchanged since the file size is part of the inode. However,
+** to disk, not the inode. We only set dataOnly if the file size is
+** unchanged since the file size is part of the inode. However,
** Ted Ts'o tells us that fdatasync() will also write the inode if the
** file size has changed. The only real difference between fdatasync()
** and fsync(), Ted tells us, is that fdatasync() will not flush the
int rc;
/* The following "ifdef/elif/else/" block has the same structure as
- ** the one below. It is replicated here solely to avoid cluttering
+ ** the one below. It is replicated here solely to avoid cluttering
** up the real code with the UNUSED_PARAMETER() macros.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_NO_SYNC
UNUSED_PARAMETER(dataOnly);
#endif
- /* Record the number of times that we do a normal fsync() and
+ /* Record the number of times that we do a normal fsync() and
** FULLSYNC. This is used during testing to verify that this procedure
** gets called with the correct arguments.
*/
rc = 1;
}
/* If the FULLFSYNC failed, fall back to attempting an fsync().
- ** It shouldn't be possible for fullfsync to fail on the local
+ ** It shouldn't be possible for fullfsync to fail on the local
** file system (on OSX), so failure indicates that FULLFSYNC
- ** isn't supported for this file system. So, attempt an fsync
- ** and (for now) ignore the overhead of a superfluous fcntl call.
- ** It'd be better to detect fullfsync support once and avoid
+ ** isn't supported for this file system. So, attempt an fsync
+ ** and (for now) ignore the overhead of a superfluous fcntl call.
+ ** It'd be better to detect fullfsync support once and avoid
** the fcntl call every time sync is called.
*/
if( rc ) rc = fsync(fd);
** so currently we default to the macro that redefines fdatasync to fsync
*/
rc = fsync(fd);
-#else
+#else
rc = fdatasync(fd);
#if OS_VXWORKS
if( rc==-1 && errno==ENOTSUP ){
#endif
#if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
-/*
-** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy
+/*
+** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy
** for the database file "filePath". It then returns the sqlite3_io_methods
** object that implements that strategy.
**
}
/* Default case. Handles, amongst others, "nfs".
- ** Test byte-range lock using fcntl(). If the call succeeds,
- ** assume that the file-system supports POSIX style locks.
+ ** Test byte-range lock using fcntl(). If the call succeeds,
+ ** assume that the file-system supports POSIX style locks.
*/
lockInfo.l_len = 1;
lockInfo.l_start = 0;
return &dotlockIoMethods;
}
}
-static const sqlite3_io_methods
+static const sqlite3_io_methods
*(*const autolockIoFinder)(const char*,unixFile*) = autolockIoFinderImpl;
#endif /* defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */
#if OS_VXWORKS && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
-/*
-** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy
+/*
+** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy
** for the database file "filePath". It then returns the sqlite3_io_methods
** object that implements that strategy.
**
return &semIoMethods;
}
}
-static const sqlite3_io_methods
+static const sqlite3_io_methods
*(*const autolockIoFinder)(const char*,unixFile*) = autolockIoFinderImpl;
#endif /* OS_VXWORKS && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */
assert( pNew->pLock==NULL );
assert( pNew->pOpen==NULL );
- /* Parameter isDelete is only used on vxworks. Express this explicitly
+ /* Parameter isDelete is only used on vxworks. Express this explicitly
** here to prevent compiler warnings about unused parameters.
*/
UNUSED_PARAMETER(isDelete);
- OSTRACE3("OPEN %-3d %s\n", h, zFilename);
+ OSTRACE3("OPEN %-3d %s\n", h, zFilename);
pNew->h = h;
pNew->dirfd = dirfd;
SET_THREADID(pNew);
close(h);
h = -1;
}
- unixLeaveMutex();
+ unixLeaveMutex();
}
}
#endif
else if( pLockingStyle == &dotlockIoMethods ){
/* Dotfile locking uses the file path so it needs to be included in
- ** the dotlockLockingContext
+ ** the dotlockLockingContext
*/
char *zLockFile;
int nFilename;
unixLeaveMutex();
}
#endif
-
+
pNew->lastErrno = 0;
#if OS_VXWORKS
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
/* It's odd to simulate an io-error here, but really this is just
** using the io-error infrastructure to test that SQLite handles this
- ** function failing.
+ ** function failing.
*/
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR );
if (NULL == azDirs[1]) {
azDirs[1] = getenv("TMPDIR");
}
-
+
for(i=0; i<sizeof(azDirs)/sizeof(azDirs[0]); i++){
if( azDirs[i]==0 ) continue;
if( stat(azDirs[i], &buf) ) continue;
break;
}
- /* Check that the output buffer is large enough for the temporary file
+ /* Check that the output buffer is large enough for the temporary file
** name. If it is not, return SQLITE_ERROR.
*/
if( (strlen(zDir) + strlen(SQLITE_TEMP_FILE_PREFIX) + 17) >= (size_t)nBuf ){
#endif
/*
-** Search for an unused file descriptor that was opened on the database
+** Search for an unused file descriptor that was opened on the database
** file (not a journal or master-journal file) identified by pathname
** zPath with SQLITE_OPEN_XXX flags matching those passed as the second
** argument to this function.
** but the associated file descriptor could not be closed because some
** other file descriptor open on the same file is holding a file-lock.
** Refer to comments in the unixClose() function and the lengthy comment
-** describing "Posix Advisory Locking" at the start of this file for
+** describing "Posix Advisory Locking" at the start of this file for
** further details. Also, ticket #4018.
**
** If a suitable file descriptor is found, then it is returned. If no
/* Do not search for an unused file descriptor on vxworks. Not because
** vxworks would not benefit from the change (it might, we're not sure),
- ** but because no way to test it is currently available. It is better
- ** not to risk breaking vxworks support for the sake of such an obscure
+ ** but because no way to test it is currently available. It is better
+ ** not to risk breaking vxworks support for the sake of such an obscure
** feature. */
#if !OS_VXWORKS
struct stat sStat; /* Results of stat() call */
/*
** Open the file zPath.
-**
+**
** Previously, the SQLite OS layer used three functions in place of this
** one:
**
** These calls correspond to the following combinations of flags:
**
** ReadWrite() -> (READWRITE | CREATE)
-** ReadOnly() -> (READONLY)
+** ReadOnly() -> (READONLY)
** OpenExclusive() -> (READWRITE | CREATE | EXCLUSIVE)
**
** The old OpenExclusive() accepted a boolean argument - "delFlag". If
** true, the file was configured to be automatically deleted when the
-** file handle closed. To achieve the same effect using this new
-** interface, add the DELETEONCLOSE flag to those specified above for
+** file handle closed. To achieve the same effect using this new
+** interface, add the DELETEONCLOSE flag to those specified above for
** OpenExclusive().
*/
static int unixOpen(
** a file-descriptor on the directory too. The first time unixSync()
** is called the directory file descriptor will be fsync()ed and close()d.
*/
- int isOpenDirectory = (isCreate &&
+ int isOpenDirectory = (isCreate &&
(eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL)
);
char zTmpname[MAX_PATHNAME+1];
const char *zName = zPath;
- /* Check the following statements are true:
+ /* Check the following statements are true:
**
- ** (a) Exactly one of the READWRITE and READONLY flags must be set, and
+ ** (a) Exactly one of the READWRITE and READONLY flags must be set, and
** (b) if CREATE is set, then READWRITE must also be set, and
** (c) if EXCLUSIVE is set, then CREATE must also be set.
** (d) if DELETEONCLOSE is set, then CREATE must also be set.
assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL );
/* Assert that the upper layer has set one of the "file-type" flags. */
- assert( eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB
- || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL
- || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL
+ assert( eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB
+ || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL
+ || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL
|| eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB
);
/* Determine the value of the flags parameter passed to POSIX function
** open(). These must be calculated even if open() is not called, as
- ** they may be stored as part of the file handle and used by the
+ ** they may be stored as part of the file handle and used by the
** 'conch file' locking functions later on. */
if( isReadonly ) openFlags |= O_RDONLY;
if( isReadWrite ) openFlags |= O_RDWR;
noLock = eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB;
-
+
#if defined(__APPLE__) || SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
struct statfs fsInfo;
if( fstatfs(fd, &fsInfo) == -1 ){
((unixFile*)pFile)->fsFlags |= SQLITE_FSFLAGS_IS_MSDOS;
}
#endif
-
+
#if SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
#if SQLITE_PREFER_PROXY_LOCKING
isAutoProxy = 1;
char *envforce = getenv("SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING");
int useProxy = 0;
- /* SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING==1 means force always use proxy, 0 means
+ /* SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING==1 means force always use proxy, 0 means
** never use proxy, NULL means use proxy for non-local files only. */
if( envforce!=NULL ){
useProxy = atoi(envforce)>0;
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = proxyTransformUnixFile((unixFile*)pFile, ":auto:");
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
- /* Use unixClose to clean up the resources added in fillInUnixFile
- ** and clear all the structure's references. Specifically,
- ** pFile->pMethods will be NULL so sqlite3OsClose will be a no-op
+ /* Use unixClose to clean up the resources added in fillInUnixFile
+ ** and clear all the structure's references. Specifically,
+ ** pFile->pMethods will be NULL so sqlite3OsClose will be a no-op
*/
unixClose(pFile);
return rc;
}
}
#endif
-
+
rc = fillInUnixFile(pVfs, fd, dirfd, pFile, zPath, noLock, isDelete);
open_finished:
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
/*
** Turn a relative pathname into a full pathname. The relative path
** is stored as a nul-terminated string in the buffer pointed to by
-** zPath.
+** zPath.
**
-** zOut points to a buffer of at least sqlite3_vfs.mxPathname bytes
+** zOut points to a buffer of at least sqlite3_vfs.mxPathname bytes
** (in this case, MAX_PATHNAME bytes). The full-path is written to
** this buffer before returning.
*/
unixLeaveMutex();
}
static void (*unixDlSym(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, void *p, const char*zSym))(void){
- /*
+ /*
** GCC with -pedantic-errors says that C90 does not allow a void* to be
** cast into a pointer to a function. And yet the library dlsym() routine
** returns a void* which is really a pointer to a function. So how do we
** parameters void* and const char* and returning a pointer to a function.
** We initialize x by assigning it a pointer to the dlsym() function.
** (That assignment requires a cast.) Then we call the function that
- ** x points to.
+ ** x points to.
**
** This work-around is unlikely to work correctly on any system where
** you really cannot cast a function pointer into void*. But then, on the
** address in the shared range is taken for a SHARED lock, the entire
** shared range is taken for an EXCLUSIVE lock):
**
-** PENDING_BYTE 0x40000000
+** PENDING_BYTE 0x40000000
** RESERVED_BYTE 0x40000001
** SHARED_RANGE 0x40000002 -> 0x40000200
**
** To address the performance and cache coherency issues, proxy file locking
** changes the way database access is controlled by limiting access to a
** single host at a time and moving file locks off of the database file
-** and onto a proxy file on the local file system.
+** and onto a proxy file on the local file system.
**
**
** Using proxy locks
** actual proxy file name is generated from the name and path of the
** database file. For example:
**
-** For database path "/Users/me/foo.db"
+** For database path "/Users/me/foo.db"
** The lock path will be "<tmpdir>/sqliteplocks/_Users_me_foo.db:auto:")
**
** Once a lock proxy is configured for a database connection, it can not
** be removed, however it may be switched to a different proxy path via
** the above APIs (assuming the conch file is not being held by another
-** connection or process).
+** connection or process).
**
**
** How proxy locking works
** -----------------------
**
-** Proxy file locking relies primarily on two new supporting files:
+** Proxy file locking relies primarily on two new supporting files:
**
** * conch file to limit access to the database file to a single host
** at a time
** host (the conch ensures that they all use the same local lock file).
**
** Requesting the lock proxy does not immediately take the conch, it is
-** only taken when the first request to lock database file is made.
+** only taken when the first request to lock database file is made.
** This matches the semantics of the traditional locking behavior, where
** opening a connection to a database file does not take a lock on it.
-** The shared lock and an open file descriptor are maintained until
-** the connection to the database is closed.
+** The shared lock and an open file descriptor are maintained until
+** the connection to the database is closed.
**
** The proxy file and the lock file are never deleted so they only need
** to be created the first time they are used.
** automatically configured for proxy locking, lock files are
** named automatically using the same logic as
** PRAGMA lock_proxy_file=":auto:"
-**
+**
** SQLITE_PROXY_DEBUG
**
** Enables the logging of error messages during host id file
**
** Permissions to use when creating a directory for storing the
** lock proxy files, only used when LOCKPROXYDIR is not set.
-**
-**
+**
+**
** As mentioned above, when compiled with SQLITE_PREFER_PROXY_LOCKING,
** setting the environment variable SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING to 1 will
** force proxy locking to be used for every database file opened, and 0
*/
/*
-** Proxy locking is only available on MacOSX
+** Proxy locking is only available on MacOSX
*/
#if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
/*
-** The proxyLockingContext has the path and file structures for the remote
+** The proxyLockingContext has the path and file structures for the remote
** and local proxy files in it
*/
typedef struct proxyLockingContext proxyLockingContext;
sqlite3_io_methods const *pOldMethod; /* Original I/O methods for close */
};
-/*
-** The proxy lock file path for the database at dbPath is written into lPath,
+/*
+** The proxy lock file path for the database at dbPath is written into lPath,
** which must point to valid, writable memory large enough for a maxLen length
-** file path.
+** file path.
*/
static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){
int len;
lPath, errno, getpid());
return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
}
- len = strlcat(lPath, "sqliteplocks", maxLen);
+ len = strlcat(lPath, "sqliteplocks", maxLen);
}
# else
len = strlcpy(lPath, "/tmp/", maxLen);
if( lPath[len-1]!='/' ){
len = strlcat(lPath, "/", maxLen);
}
-
+
/* transform the db path to a unique cache name */
dbLen = (int)strlen(dbPath);
for( i=0; i<dbLen && (i+len+7)<maxLen; i++){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-/*
+/*
** Creates the lock file and any missing directories in lockPath
*/
static int proxyCreateLockPath(const char *lockPath){
int i, len;
char buf[MAXPATHLEN];
int start = 0;
-
+
assert(lockPath!=NULL);
/* try to create all the intermediate directories */
len = (int)strlen(lockPath);
for( i=1; i<len; i++ ){
if( lockPath[i] == '/' && (i - start > 0) ){
/* only mkdir if leaf dir != "." or "/" or ".." */
- if( i-start>2 || (i-start==1 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start] != '/')
+ if( i-start>2 || (i-start==1 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start] != '/')
|| (i-start==2 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start+1] != '.') ){
buf[i]='\0';
if( mkdir(buf, SQLITE_DEFAULT_PROXYDIR_PERMISSIONS) ){
switch (terrno) {
case EACCES:
return SQLITE_PERM;
- case EIO:
+ case EIO:
return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK; /* even though it is the conch */
default:
return SQLITE_CANTOPEN_BKPT;
}
}
-
+
pNew = (unixFile *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(*pNew));
if( pNew==NULL ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
pUnused->fd = fd;
pUnused->flags = openFlags;
pNew->pUnused = pUnused;
-
+
rc = fillInUnixFile(&dummyVfs, fd, dirfd, (sqlite3_file*)pNew, path, 0, 0);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
*ppFile = pNew;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-end_create_proxy:
+end_create_proxy:
close(fd); /* silently leak fd if error, we're already in error */
sqlite3_free(pNew);
sqlite3_free(pUnused);
#define PROXY_HOSTIDLEN 16 /* conch file host id length */
-/* get the host ID via gethostuuid(), pHostID must point to PROXY_HOSTIDLEN
+/* get the host ID via gethostuuid(), pHostID must point to PROXY_HOSTIDLEN
** bytes of writable memory.
*/
static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){
struct timespec timeout = {1, 0}; /* 1 sec timeout */
-
+
assert(PROXY_HOSTIDLEN == sizeof(uuid_t));
memset(pHostID, 0, PROXY_HOSTIDLEN);
if( gethostuuid(pHostID, &timeout) ){
pHostID[0] = (char)(pHostID[0] + (char)(sqlite3_hostid_num & 0xFF));
}
#endif
-
+
return SQLITE_OK;
}
#define PROXY_PATHINDEX (PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN)
#define PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN (PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN+MAXPATHLEN)
-/*
-** Takes an open conch file, copies the contents to a new path and then moves
+/*
+** Takes an open conch file, copies the contents to a new path and then moves
** it back. The newly created file's file descriptor is assigned to the
-** conch file structure and finally the original conch file descriptor is
+** conch file structure and finally the original conch file descriptor is
** closed. Returns zero if successful.
*/
static int proxyBreakConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID){
- proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
+ proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
char tPath[MAXPATHLEN];
char buf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
/* create a new path by replace the trailing '-conch' with '-break' */
pathLen = strlcpy(tPath, cPath, MAXPATHLEN);
- if( pathLen>MAXPATHLEN || pathLen<6 ||
+ if( pathLen>MAXPATHLEN || pathLen<6 ||
(strlcpy(&tPath[pathLen-5], "break", 6) != 5) ){
sprintf(errmsg, "path error (len %d)", (int)pathLen);
goto end_breaklock;
return rc;
}
-/* Take the requested lock on the conch file and break a stale lock if the
+/* Take the requested lock on the conch file and break a stale lock if the
** host id matches.
*/
static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){
- proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
+ proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
int nTries = 0;
struct timespec conchModTime;
-
+
do {
rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, lockType);
nTries ++;
if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){
/* If the lock failed (busy):
- * 1st try: get the mod time of the conch, wait 0.5s and try again.
- * 2nd try: fail if the mod time changed or host id is different, wait
+ * 1st try: get the mod time of the conch, wait 0.5s and try again.
+ * 2nd try: fail if the mod time changed or host id is different, wait
* 10 sec and try again
* 3rd try: break the lock unless the mod time has changed.
*/
pFile->lastErrno = errno;
return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
}
-
+
if( nTries==1 ){
conchModTime = buf.st_mtimespec;
usleep(500000); /* wait 0.5 sec and try the lock again*/
- continue;
+ continue;
}
assert( nTries>1 );
- if( conchModTime.tv_sec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_sec ||
+ if( conchModTime.tv_sec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_sec ||
conchModTime.tv_nsec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_nsec ){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
-
- if( nTries==2 ){
+
+ if( nTries==2 ){
char tBuf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
int len = pread(conchFile->h, tBuf, PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN, 0);
if( len<0 ){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
usleep(10000000); /* wait 10 sec and try the lock again */
- continue;
+ continue;
}
-
+
assert( nTries==3 );
if( 0==proxyBreakConchLock(pFile, myHostID) ){
rc = SQLITE_OK;
if( lockType==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ){
- rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, SHARED_LOCK);
+ rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, SHARED_LOCK);
}
if( !rc ){
rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, lockType);
}
}
} while( rc==SQLITE_BUSY && nTries<3 );
-
+
return rc;
}
-/* Takes the conch by taking a shared lock and read the contents conch, if
-** lockPath is non-NULL, the host ID and lock file path must match. A NULL
-** lockPath means that the lockPath in the conch file will be used if the
-** host IDs match, or a new lock path will be generated automatically
+/* Takes the conch by taking a shared lock and read the contents conch, if
+** lockPath is non-NULL, the host ID and lock file path must match. A NULL
+** lockPath means that the lockPath in the conch file will be used if the
+** host IDs match, or a new lock path will be generated automatically
** and written to the conch file.
*/
static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
- proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
-
+ proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
+
if( pCtx->conchHeld!=0 ){
return SQLITE_OK;
}else{
int readLen = 0;
int tryOldLockPath = 0;
int forceNewLockPath = 0;
-
+
OSTRACE4("TAKECONCH %d for %s pid=%d\n", conchFile->h,
(pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"), getpid());
pFile->lastErrno = conchFile->lastErrno;
rc = SQLITE_IOERR_READ;
goto end_takeconch;
- }else if( readLen<=(PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) ||
+ }else if( readLen<=(PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) ||
readBuf[0]!=(char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION ){
- /* a short read or version format mismatch means we need to create a new
- ** conch file.
+ /* a short read or version format mismatch means we need to create a new
+ ** conch file.
*/
createConch = 1;
}
/* if the host id matches and the lock path already exists in the conch
- ** we'll try to use the path there, if we can't open that path, we'll
- ** retry with a new auto-generated path
+ ** we'll try to use the path there, if we can't open that path, we'll
+ ** retry with a new auto-generated path
*/
do { /* in case we need to try again for an :auto: named lock file */
if( !createConch && !forceNewLockPath ){
- hostIdMatch = !memcmp(&readBuf[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID,
+ hostIdMatch = !memcmp(&readBuf[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID,
PROXY_HOSTIDLEN);
/* if the conch has data compare the contents */
if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){
*/
if( hostIdMatch ){
size_t pathLen = (readLen - PROXY_PATHINDEX);
-
+
if( pathLen>=MAXPATHLEN ){
pathLen=MAXPATHLEN-1;
}
readLen-PROXY_PATHINDEX)
){
/* conch host and lock path match */
- goto end_takeconch;
+ goto end_takeconch;
}
}
-
+
/* if the conch isn't writable and doesn't match, we can't take it */
if( (conchFile->openFlags&O_RDWR) == 0 ){
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
goto end_takeconch;
}
-
+
/* either the conch didn't match or we need to create a new one */
if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){
proxyGetLockPath(pCtx->dbPath, lockPath, MAXPATHLEN);
tempLockPath = lockPath;
/* create a copy of the lock path _only_ if the conch is taken */
}
-
+
/* update conch with host and path (this will fail if other process
** has a shared lock already), if the host id matches, use the big
** stick.
/* We are trying for an exclusive lock but another thread in this
** same process is still holding a shared lock. */
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
- } else {
+ } else {
rc = proxyConchLock(pFile, myHostID, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK);
}
}else{
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
char writeBuffer[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
int writeSize = 0;
-
+
writeBuffer[0] = (char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION;
memcpy(&writeBuffer[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID, PROXY_HOSTIDLEN);
if( pCtx->lockProxyPath!=NULL ){
ftruncate(conchFile->h, writeSize);
rc = unixWrite((sqlite3_file *)conchFile, writeBuffer, writeSize, 0);
fsync(conchFile->h);
- /* If we created a new conch file (not just updated the contents of a
- ** valid conch file), try to match the permissions of the database
+ /* If we created a new conch file (not just updated the contents of a
+ ** valid conch file), try to match the permissions of the database
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && createConch ){
struct stat buf;
}
}else{
int code = errno;
- fprintf(stderr, "STAT FAILED[%d] with %d %s\n",
+ fprintf(stderr, "STAT FAILED[%d] with %d %s\n",
err, code, strerror(code));
#endif
}
}
}
conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, SHARED_LOCK);
-
+
end_takeconch:
OSTRACE2("TRANSPROXY: CLOSE %d\n", pFile->h);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->openFlags ){
rc = proxyCreateUnixFile(path, &pCtx->lockProxy, 1);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK && rc!=SQLITE_NOMEM && tryOldLockPath ){
/* we couldn't create the proxy lock file with the old lock file path
- ** so try again via auto-naming
+ ** so try again via auto-naming
*/
forceNewLockPath = 1;
tryOldLockPath = 0;
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
pCtx->conchHeld = 1;
-
+
if( pCtx->lockProxy->pMethod == &afpIoMethods ){
afpLockingContext *afpCtx;
afpCtx = (afpLockingContext *)pCtx->lockProxy->lockingContext;
pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
OSTRACE4("RELEASECONCH %d for %s pid=%d\n", conchFile->h,
- (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"),
+ (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"),
getpid());
if( pCtx->conchHeld>0 ){
rc = conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, NO_LOCK);
char *conchPath; /* buffer in which to construct conch name */
/* Allocate space for the conch filename and initialize the name to
- ** the name of the original database file. */
+ ** the name of the original database file. */
*pConchPath = conchPath = (char *)sqlite3_malloc(len + 8);
if( conchPath==0 ){
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
memcpy(conchPath, dbPath, len+1);
-
+
/* now insert a "." before the last / character */
for( i=(len-1); i>=0; i-- ){
if( conchPath[i]=='/' ){
/* Takes a fully configured proxy locking-style unix file and switches
-** the local lock file path
+** the local lock file path
*/
static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext*)pFile->lockingContext;
if( pFile->locktype!=NO_LOCK ){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
- }
+ }
/* nothing to do if the path is NULL, :auto: or matches the existing path */
if( !path || path[0]=='\0' || !strcmp(path, ":auto:") ||
sqlite3_free(oldPath);
pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, path);
}
-
+
return rc;
}
static int proxyGetDbPathForUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, char *dbPath){
#if defined(__APPLE__)
if( pFile->pMethod == &afpIoMethods ){
- /* afp style keeps a reference to the db path in the filePath field
+ /* afp style keeps a reference to the db path in the filePath field
** of the struct */
assert( (int)strlen((char*)pFile->lockingContext)<=MAXPATHLEN );
strlcpy(dbPath, ((afpLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext)->dbPath, MAXPATHLEN);
}
/*
-** Takes an already filled in unix file and alters it so all file locking
+** Takes an already filled in unix file and alters it so all file locking
** will be performed on the local proxy lock file. The following fields
-** are preserved in the locking context so that they can be restored and
+** are preserved in the locking context so that they can be restored and
** the unix structure properly cleaned up at close time:
** ->lockingContext
** ->pMethod
char dbPath[MAXPATHLEN+1]; /* Name of the database file */
char *lockPath=NULL;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-
+
if( pFile->locktype!=NO_LOCK ){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
}else{
lockPath=(char *)path;
}
-
+
OSTRACE4("TRANSPROXY %d for %s pid=%d\n", pFile->h,
(lockPath ? lockPath : ":auto:"), getpid());
rc = SQLITE_OK;
}
}
- }
+ }
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && lockPath ){
pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, lockPath);
}
}
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
- /* all memory is allocated, proxys are created and assigned,
+ /* all memory is allocated, proxys are created and assigned,
** switch the locking context and pMethod then return.
*/
pCtx->oldLockingContext = pFile->lockingContext;
pCtx->pOldMethod = pFile->pMethod;
pFile->pMethod = &proxyIoMethods;
}else{
- if( pCtx->conchFile ){
+ if( pCtx->conchFile ){
pCtx->conchFile->pMethod->xClose((sqlite3_file *)pCtx->conchFile);
sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFile);
}
sqlite3_free(pCtx->lockProxyPath);
- sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFilePath);
+ sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFilePath);
sqlite3_free(pCtx);
}
OSTRACE3("TRANSPROXY %d %s\n", pFile->h,
}else{
const char *proxyPath = (const char *)pArg;
if( isProxyStyle ){
- proxyLockingContext *pCtx =
+ proxyLockingContext *pCtx =
(proxyLockingContext*)pFile->lockingContext;
- if( !strcmp(pArg, ":auto:")
+ if( !strcmp(pArg, ":auto:")
|| (pCtx->lockProxyPath &&
!strncmp(pCtx->lockProxyPath, proxyPath, MAXPATHLEN))
){
unixFile *lockProxy = pCtx->lockProxy;
unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-
+
if( lockProxy ){
rc = lockProxy->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)lockProxy, NO_LOCK);
if( rc ) return rc;
** The proxy locking style is intended for use with AFP filesystems.
** And since AFP is only supported on MacOSX, the proxy locking is also
** restricted to MacOSX.
-**
+**
**
******************* End of the proxy lock implementation **********************
******************************************************************************/
** necessarily been initialized when this routine is called, and so they
** should not be used.
*/
-SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){
- /*
+SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){
+ /*
** The following macro defines an initializer for an sqlite3_vfs object.
** The name of the VFS is NAME. The pAppData is a pointer to a pointer
** to the "finder" function. (pAppData is a pointer to a pointer because
**
** Most finders simply return a pointer to a fixed sqlite3_io_methods
** object. But the "autolockIoFinder" available on MacOSX does a little
- ** more than that; it looks at the filesystem type that hosts the
+ ** more than that; it looks at the filesystem type that hosts the
** database file and tries to choose an locking method appropriate for
** that filesystem time.
*/
for(i=0; i<(sizeof(aVfs)/sizeof(sqlite3_vfs)); i++){
sqlite3_vfs_register(&aVfs[i], i==0);
}
- return SQLITE_OK;
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
** to release dynamically allocated objects. But not on unix.
** This routine is a no-op for unix.
*/
-SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){
- return SQLITE_OK;
+SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
#endif /* SQLITE_OS_UNIX */
/************** End of os_unix.c *********************************************/
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_PERFORMANCE_TRACE
-/*
-** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing
+/*
+** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing
** high-performance timing routines.
*/
/************** Include hwtime.h in the middle of os_common.h ****************/
__asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val));
return val;
}
-
+
#elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__))
__inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){
** Some microsoft compilers lack this definition.
*/
#ifndef INVALID_FILE_ATTRIBUTES
-# define INVALID_FILE_ATTRIBUTES ((DWORD)-1)
+# define INVALID_FILE_ATTRIBUTES ((DWORD)-1)
#endif
/*
DWORD sectorSize; /* Sector size of the device file is on */
#if SQLITE_OS_WINCE
WCHAR *zDeleteOnClose; /* Name of file to delete when closing */
- HANDLE hMutex; /* Mutex used to control access to shared lock */
+ HANDLE hMutex; /* Mutex used to control access to shared lock */
HANDLE hShared; /* Shared memory segment used for locking */
winceLock local; /* Locks obtained by this instance of winFile */
winceLock *shared; /* Global shared lock memory for the file */
#endif /* SQLITE_OS_WINCE */
/*
-** Convert a UTF-8 string to microsoft unicode (UTF-16?).
+** Convert a UTF-8 string to microsoft unicode (UTF-16?).
**
** Space to hold the returned string is obtained from malloc.
*/
/*
** Convert an ansi string to microsoft unicode, based on the
** current codepage settings for file apis.
-**
+**
** Space to hold the returned string is obtained
** from malloc.
*/
}
/*
-** Convert UTF-8 to multibyte character string. Space to hold the
+** Convert UTF-8 to multibyte character string. Space to hold the
** returned string is obtained from malloc().
*/
static char *utf8ToMbcs(const char *zFilename){
/* Acquire the mutex before continuing */
winceMutexAcquire(pFile->hMutex);
-
- /* Since the names of named mutexes, semaphores, file mappings etc are
+
+ /* Since the names of named mutexes, semaphores, file mappings etc are
** case-sensitive, take advantage of that by uppercasing the mutex name
** and using that as the shared filemapping name.
*/
CharUpperW(zName);
pFile->hShared = CreateFileMappingW(INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE, NULL,
PAGE_READWRITE, 0, sizeof(winceLock),
- zName);
+ zName);
- /* Set a flag that indicates we're the first to create the memory so it
+ /* Set a flag that indicates we're the first to create the memory so it
** must be zero-initialized */
if (GetLastError() == ERROR_ALREADY_EXISTS){
bInit = FALSE;
/* If we succeeded in making the shared memory handle, map it. */
if (pFile->hShared){
- pFile->shared = (winceLock*)MapViewOfFile(pFile->hShared,
+ pFile->shared = (winceLock*)MapViewOfFile(pFile->hShared,
FILE_MAP_READ|FILE_MAP_WRITE, 0, 0, sizeof(winceLock));
/* If mapping failed, close the shared memory handle and erase it */
if (!pFile->shared){
pFile->hMutex = NULL;
return FALSE;
}
-
+
/* Initialize the shared memory if we're supposed to */
if (bInit) {
ZeroMemory(pFile->shared, sizeof(winceLock));
CloseHandle(pFile->hShared);
/* Done with the mutex */
- winceMutexRelease(pFile->hMutex);
+ winceMutexRelease(pFile->hMutex);
CloseHandle(pFile->hMutex);
pFile->hMutex = NULL;
}
}
-/*
+/*
** An implementation of the LockFile() API of windows for wince
*/
static BOOL winceLockFile(
int cnt = 0;
while(
DeleteFileW(pFile->zDeleteOnClose)==0
- && GetFileAttributesW(pFile->zDeleteOnClose)!=0xffffffff
+ && GetFileAttributesW(pFile->zDeleteOnClose)!=0xffffffff
&& cnt++ < WINCE_DELETION_ATTEMPTS
){
Sleep(100); /* Wait a little before trying again */
ovlp.hEvent = 0;
res = LockFileEx(pFile->h, LOCKFILE_FAIL_IMMEDIATELY,
0, SHARED_SIZE, 0, &ovlp);
-/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
+/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
*/
#if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==0
}else{
int res;
if( isNT() ){
res = UnlockFile(pFile->h, SHARED_FIRST, 0, SHARED_SIZE, 0);
-/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
+/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
*/
#if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==0
}else{
void *zConverted = 0;
if( isNT() ){
zConverted = utf8ToUnicode(zFilename);
-/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
+/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
*/
#if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==0
}else{
}else{
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
-/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
+/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
** Since the ASCII version of these Windows API do not exist for WINCE,
** it's important to not reference them for WINCE builds.
*/
}
zBuf[j] = 0;
OSTRACE2("TEMP FILENAME: %s\n", zBuf);
- return SQLITE_OK;
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
/* free the system buffer allocated by FormatMessage */
LocalFree(zTempWide);
}
-/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
+/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
** Since the ASCII version of these Windows API do not exist for WINCE,
** it's important to not reference them for WINCE builds.
*/
assert( id!=0 );
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVfs);
- /* If the second argument to this function is NULL, generate a
- ** temporary file name to use
+ /* If the second argument to this function is NULL, generate a
+ ** temporary file name to use
*/
if( !zUtf8Name ){
int rc = getTempname(MAX_PATH+1, zTmpname);
}else{
dwDesiredAccess = GENERIC_READ;
}
- /* SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE is used to make sure that a new file is
- ** created. SQLite doesn't use it to indicate "exclusive access"
+ /* SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE is used to make sure that a new file is
+ ** created. SQLite doesn't use it to indicate "exclusive access"
** as it is usually understood.
*/
assert(!(flags & SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE) || (flags & SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE));
dwFlagsAndAttributes,
NULL
);
-/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
+/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
** Since the ASCII version of these Windows API do not exist for WINCE,
** it's important to not reference them for WINCE builds.
*/
if( h==INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE ){
free(zConverted);
if( flags & SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE ){
- return winOpen(pVfs, zName, id,
+ return winOpen(pVfs, zName, id,
((flags|SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY)&~SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE), pOutFlags);
}else{
return SQLITE_CANTOPEN_BKPT;
|| ((error = GetLastError()) == ERROR_ACCESS_DENIED))
&& (++cnt < MX_DELETION_ATTEMPTS)
&& (Sleep(100), 1) );
-/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
+/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
** Since the ASCII version of these Windows API do not exist for WINCE,
** it's important to not reference them for WINCE builds.
*/
}
free(zConverted);
OSTRACE2("DELETE \"%s\"\n", zFilename);
- return ( (rc == INVALID_FILE_ATTRIBUTES)
+ return ( (rc == INVALID_FILE_ATTRIBUTES)
&& (error == ERROR_FILE_NOT_FOUND)) ? SQLITE_OK : SQLITE_IOERR_DELETE;
}
}
if( isNT() ){
attr = GetFileAttributesW((WCHAR*)zConverted);
-/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
+/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
** Since the ASCII version of these Windows API do not exist for WINCE,
** it's important to not reference them for WINCE builds.
*/
int nFull, /* Size of output buffer in bytes */
char *zFull /* Output buffer */
){
-
+
#if defined(__CYGWIN__)
UNUSED_PARAMETER(nFull);
cygwin_conv_to_full_win32_path(zRelative, zFull);
free(zConverted);
zOut = unicodeToUtf8(zTemp);
free(zTemp);
-/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
+/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
** Since the ASCII version of these Windows API do not exist for WINCE,
** it's important to not reference them for WINCE builds.
*/
}
}
#endif
- return (int) bytesPerSector;
+ return (int) bytesPerSector;
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_LOAD_EXTENSION
}
if( isNT() ){
h = LoadLibraryW((WCHAR*)zConverted);
-/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
+/* isNT() is 1 if SQLITE_OS_WINCE==1, so this else is never executed.
** Since the ASCII version of these Windows API do not exist for WINCE,
** it's important to not reference them for WINCE builds.
*/
*/
int winCurrentTime(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs, double *prNow){
FILETIME ft;
- /* FILETIME structure is a 64-bit value representing the number of
- 100-nanosecond intervals since January 1, 1601 (= JD 2305813.5).
+ /* FILETIME structure is a 64-bit value representing the number of
+ 100-nanosecond intervals since January 1, 1601 (= JD 2305813.5).
*/
sqlite3_int64 timeW; /* Whole days */
sqlite3_int64 timeF; /* Fractional Days */
/* Number of 100-nanosecond intervals in a single day */
- static const sqlite3_int64 ntuPerDay =
+ static const sqlite3_int64 ntuPerDay =
10000000*(sqlite3_int64)86400;
/* Number of 100-nanosecond intervals in half of a day */
- static const sqlite3_int64 ntuPerHalfDay =
+ static const sqlite3_int64 ntuPerHalfDay =
10000000*(sqlite3_int64)43200;
/* 2^32 - to avoid use of LL and warnings in gcc */
- static const sqlite3_int64 max32BitValue =
+ static const sqlite3_int64 max32BitValue =
(sqlite3_int64)2000000000 + (sqlite3_int64)2000000000 + (sqlite3_int64)294967296;
#if SQLITE_OS_WINCE
0, /* pNext */
"win32", /* zName */
0, /* pAppData */
-
+
winOpen, /* xOpen */
winDelete, /* xDelete */
winAccess, /* xAccess */
};
sqlite3_vfs_register(&winVfs, 1);
- return SQLITE_OK;
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}
-SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){
+SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
** property. Usually only a few pages are meet either condition.
** So the bitmap is usually sparse and has low cardinality.
** But sometimes (for example when during a DROP of a large table) most
-** or all of the pages in a database can get journalled. In those cases,
-** the bitmap becomes dense with high cardinality. The algorithm needs
+** or all of the pages in a database can get journalled. In those cases,
+** the bitmap becomes dense with high cardinality. The algorithm needs
** to handle both cases well.
**
** The size of the bitmap is fixed when the object is created.
/* Size of the Bitvec structure in bytes. */
#define BITVEC_SZ (sizeof(void*)*128) /* 512 on 32bit. 1024 on 64bit */
-/* Round the union size down to the nearest pointer boundary, since that's how
+/* Round the union size down to the nearest pointer boundary, since that's how
** it will be aligned within the Bitvec struct. */
#define BITVEC_USIZE (((BITVEC_SZ-(3*sizeof(u32)))/sizeof(Bitvec*))*sizeof(Bitvec*))
-/* Type of the array "element" for the bitmap representation.
-** Should be a power of 2, and ideally, evenly divide into BITVEC_USIZE.
+/* Type of the array "element" for the bitmap representation.
+** Should be a power of 2, and ideally, evenly divide into BITVEC_USIZE.
** Setting this to the "natural word" size of your CPU may improve
** performance. */
#define BITVEC_TELEM u8
/* Number of u32 values in hash table. */
#define BITVEC_NINT (BITVEC_USIZE/sizeof(u32))
-/* Maximum number of entries in hash table before
+/* Maximum number of entries in hash table before
** sub-dividing and re-hashing. */
#define BITVEC_MXHASH (BITVEC_NINT/2)
/* Hashing function for the aHash representation.
-** Empirical testing showed that the *37 multiplier
-** (an arbitrary prime)in the hash function provided
+** Empirical testing showed that the *37 multiplier
+** (an arbitrary prime)in the hash function provided
** no fewer collisions than the no-op *1. */
#define BITVEC_HASH(X) (((X)*1)%BITVEC_NINT)
/*
** Create a new bitmap object able to handle bits between 0 and iSize,
-** inclusive. Return a pointer to the new object. Return NULL if
+** inclusive. Return a pointer to the new object. Return NULL if
** malloc fails.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitvec *sqlite3BitvecCreate(u32 iSize){
break;
}
case 3:
- case 4:
+ case 4:
default: {
nx = 2;
sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(i), &i);
/*************************************************** General Interfaces ******
**
-** Initialize and shutdown the page cache subsystem. Neither of these
+** Initialize and shutdown the page cache subsystem. Neither of these
** functions are threadsafe.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheInitialize(void){
/*
** Create a new PCache object. Storage space to hold the object
-** has already been allocated and is passed in as the p pointer.
-** The caller discovers how much space needs to be allocated by
+** has already been allocated and is passed in as the p pointer.
+** The caller discovers how much space needs to be allocated by
** calling sqlite3PcacheSize().
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheOpen(
if( !pPage && eCreate==1 ){
PgHdr *pPg;
- /* Find a dirty page to write-out and recycle. First try to find a
+ /* Find a dirty page to write-out and recycle. First try to find a
** page that does not require a journal-sync (one with PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
- ** cleared), but if that is not possible settle for any other
+ ** cleared), but if that is not possible settle for any other
** unreferenced dirty page.
*/
expensive_assert( pcacheCheckSynced(pCache) );
- for(pPg=pCache->pSynced;
- pPg && (pPg->nRef || (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC));
+ for(pPg=pCache->pSynced;
+ pPg && (pPg->nRef || (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC));
pPg=pPg->pDirtyPrev
);
pCache->pSynced = pPg;
}
/*
-** Change the page number of page p to newPgno.
+** Change the page number of page p to newPgno.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheMove(PgHdr *p, Pgno newPgno){
PCache *pCache = p->pCache;
}
}
-/*
+/*
** Discard the contents of the cache.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheClear(PCache *pCache){
return pcacheSortDirtyList(pCache->pDirty);
}
-/*
+/*
** Return the total number of referenced pages held by the cache.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheRefCount(PCache *pCache){
return p->nRef;
}
-/*
+/*
** Return the total number of pages in the cache.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcachePagecount(PCache *pCache){
typedef struct PgHdr1 PgHdr1;
typedef struct PgFreeslot PgFreeslot;
-/* Pointers to structures of this type are cast and returned as
+/* Pointers to structures of this type are cast and returned as
** opaque sqlite3_pcache* handles
*/
struct PCache1 {
/* Cache configuration parameters. Page size (szPage) and the purgeable
- ** flag (bPurgeable) are set when the cache is created. nMax may be
+ ** flag (bPurgeable) are set when the cache is created. nMax may be
** modified at any time by a call to the pcache1CacheSize() method.
** The global mutex must be held when accessing nMax.
*/
unsigned int nMax; /* Configured "cache_size" value */
/* Hash table of all pages. The following variables may only be accessed
- ** when the accessor is holding the global mutex (see pcache1EnterMutex()
+ ** when the accessor is holding the global mutex (see pcache1EnterMutex()
** and pcache1LeaveMutex()).
*/
unsigned int nRecyclable; /* Number of pages in the LRU list */
};
/*
-** Each cache entry is represented by an instance of the following
-** structure. A buffer of PgHdr1.pCache->szPage bytes is allocated
-** directly before this structure in memory (see the PGHDR1_TO_PAGE()
+** Each cache entry is represented by an instance of the following
+** structure. A buffer of PgHdr1.pCache->szPage bytes is allocated
+** directly before this structure in memory (see the PGHDR1_TO_PAGE()
** macro below).
*/
struct PgHdr1 {
/******** Page Allocation/SQLITE_CONFIG_PCACHE Related Functions **************/
/*
-** This function is called during initialization if a static buffer is
+** This function is called during initialization if a static buffer is
** supplied to use for the page-cache by passing the SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE
** verb to sqlite3_config(). Parameter pBuf points to an allocation large
** enough to contain 'n' buffers of 'sz' bytes each.
/*
** Malloc function used within this file to allocate space from the buffer
-** configured using sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE) option. If no
-** such buffer exists or there is no space left in it, this function falls
+** configured using sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE) option. If no
+** such buffer exists or there is no space left in it, this function falls
** back to sqlite3Malloc().
*/
static void *pcache1Alloc(int nByte){
}else{
/* Allocate a new buffer using sqlite3Malloc. Before doing so, exit the
- ** global pcache mutex and unlock the pager-cache object pCache. This is
- ** so that if the attempt to allocate a new buffer causes the the
+ ** global pcache mutex and unlock the pager-cache object pCache. This is
+ ** so that if the attempt to allocate a new buffer causes the the
** configured soft-heap-limit to be breached, it will be possible to
** reclaim memory from this pager-cache.
*/
}
/*
-** This function is used internally to remove the page pPage from the
+** This function is used internally to remove the page pPage from the
** global LRU list, if is part of it. If pPage is not part of the global
** LRU list, then this function is a no-op.
**
/*
-** Remove the page supplied as an argument from the hash table
+** Remove the page supplied as an argument from the hash table
** (PCache1.apHash structure) that it is currently stored in.
**
** The global mutex must be held when this function is called.
}
/*
-** Discard all pages from cache pCache with a page number (key value)
-** greater than or equal to iLimit. Any pinned pages that meet this
+** Discard all pages from cache pCache with a page number (key value)
+** greater than or equal to iLimit. Any pinned pages that meet this
** criteria are unpinned before they are discarded.
**
** The global mutex must be held when this function is called.
*/
static void pcache1TruncateUnsafe(
- PCache1 *pCache,
- unsigned int iLimit
+ PCache1 *pCache,
+ unsigned int iLimit
){
TESTONLY( unsigned int nPage = 0; ) /* Used to assert pCache->nPage is correct */
unsigned int h;
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pcache1.mutex) );
for(h=0; h<pCache->nHash; h++){
- PgHdr1 **pp = &pCache->apHash[h];
+ PgHdr1 **pp = &pCache->apHash[h];
PgHdr1 *pPage;
while( (pPage = *pp)!=0 ){
if( pPage->iKey>=iLimit ){
/*
** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShutdown method.
-** Note that the static mutex allocated in xInit does
+** Note that the static mutex allocated in xInit does
** not need to be freed.
*/
static void pcache1Shutdown(void *NotUsed){
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xCachesize method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xCachesize method.
**
** Configure the cache_size limit for a cache.
*/
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xPagecount method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xPagecount method.
*/
static int pcache1Pagecount(sqlite3_pcache *p){
int n;
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xFetch method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xFetch method.
**
** Fetch a page by key value.
**
** Whether or not a new page may be allocated by this function depends on
** the value of the createFlag argument. 0 means do not allocate a new
-** page. 1 means allocate a new page if space is easily available. 2
+** page. 1 means allocate a new page if space is easily available. 2
** means to try really hard to allocate a new page.
**
** For a non-purgeable cache (a cache used as the storage for an in-memory
** There are three different approaches to obtaining space for a page,
** depending on the value of parameter createFlag (which may be 0, 1 or 2).
**
-** 1. Regardless of the value of createFlag, the cache is searched for a
+** 1. Regardless of the value of createFlag, the cache is searched for a
** copy of the requested page. If one is found, it is returned.
**
** 2. If createFlag==0 and the page is not already in the cache, NULL is
** (a) the number of pages pinned by the cache is greater than
** PCache1.nMax, or
** (b) the number of pages pinned by the cache is greater than
-** the sum of nMax for all purgeable caches, less the sum of
-** nMin for all other purgeable caches.
+** the sum of nMax for all purgeable caches, less the sum of
+** nMin for all other purgeable caches.
**
** 4. If none of the first three conditions apply and the cache is marked
** as purgeable, and if one of the following is true:
**
-** (a) The number of pages allocated for the cache is already
+** (a) The number of pages allocated for the cache is already
** PCache1.nMax, or
**
** (b) The number of pages allocated for all purgeable caches is
**
** then attempt to recycle a page from the LRU list. If it is the right
** size, return the recycled buffer. Otherwise, free the buffer and
-** proceed to step 5.
+** proceed to step 5.
**
** 5. Otherwise, allocate and return a new page buffer.
*/
}
}
- /* Step 5. If a usable page buffer has still not been found,
- ** attempt to allocate a new one.
+ /* Step 5. If a usable page buffer has still not been found,
+ ** attempt to allocate a new one.
*/
if( !pPage ){
pPage = pcache1AllocPage(pCache);
static void pcache1Unpin(sqlite3_pcache *p, void *pPg, int reuseUnlikely){
PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
PgHdr1 *pPage = PAGE_TO_PGHDR1(pCache, pPg);
-
+
assert( pPage->pCache==pCache );
pcache1EnterMutex();
- /* It is an error to call this function if the page is already
+ /* It is an error to call this function if the page is already
** part of the global LRU list.
*/
assert( pPage->pLruPrev==0 && pPage->pLruNext==0 );
pcache1FreePage(pPage);
}else{
/* Add the page to the global LRU list. Normally, the page is added to
- ** the head of the list (last page to be recycled). However, if the
+ ** the head of the list (last page to be recycled). However, if the
** reuseUnlikely flag passed to this function is true, the page is added
** to the tail of the list (first page to be recycled).
*/
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xRekey method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xRekey method.
*/
static void pcache1Rekey(
sqlite3_pcache *p,
PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
PgHdr1 *pPage = PAGE_TO_PGHDR1(pCache, pPg);
PgHdr1 **pp;
- unsigned int h;
+ unsigned int h;
assert( pPage->iKey==iOld );
assert( pPage->pCache==pCache );
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xTruncate method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xTruncate method.
**
** Discard all unpinned pages in the cache with a page number equal to
** or greater than parameter iLimit. Any pinned pages with a page number
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xDestroy method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xDestroy method.
**
** Destroy a cache allocated using pcache1Create().
*/
** by the current thread may be sqlite3_free()ed.
**
** nReq is the number of bytes of memory required. Once this much has
-** been released, the function returns. The return value is the total number
+** been released, the function returns. The return value is the total number
** of bytes of memory released.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheReleaseMemory(int nReq){
** extracts the least value from the RowSet.
**
** The INSERT primitive might allocate additional memory. Memory is
-** allocated in chunks so most INSERTs do no allocation. There is an
+** allocated in chunks so most INSERTs do no allocation. There is an
** upper bound on the size of allocated memory. No memory is freed
** until DESTROY.
**
/*
** Each entry in a RowSet is an instance of the following object.
*/
-struct RowSetEntry {
+struct RowSetEntry {
i64 v; /* ROWID value for this entry */
struct RowSetEntry *pRight; /* Right subtree (larger entries) or list */
struct RowSetEntry *pLeft; /* Left subtree (smaller entries) */
**
** It must be the case that N is sufficient to make a Rowset. If not
** an assertion fault occurs.
-**
+**
** If N is larger than the minimum, use the surplus as an initial
** allocation of entries available to be filled.
*/
/*
** Merge two lists of RowSetEntry objects. Remove duplicates.
**
-** The input lists are connected via pRight pointers and are
+** The input lists are connected via pRight pointers and are
** assumed to each already be in sorted order.
*/
static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetMerge(
/*
** Sort all elements on the pEntry list of the RowSet into ascending order.
-*/
+*/
static void rowSetSort(RowSet *p){
unsigned int i;
struct RowSetEntry *pEntry;
** 0 if the RowSet is already empty.
**
** After this routine has been called, the sqlite3RowSetInsert()
-** routine may not be called again.
+** routine may not be called again.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RowSetNext(RowSet *p, i64 *pRowid){
rowSetToList(p);
**
*************************************************************************
** This is the implementation of the page cache subsystem or "pager".
-**
+**
** The pager is used to access a database disk file. It implements
** atomic commit and rollback through the use of a journal file that
** is separate from the database file. The pager also implements file
/*
** The following two macros are used within the PAGERTRACE() macros above
-** to print out file-descriptors.
+** to print out file-descriptors.
**
** PAGERID() takes a pointer to a Pager struct as its argument. The
** associated file-descriptor is returned. FILEHANDLEID() takes an sqlite3_file
** The page cache as a whole is always in one of the following
** states:
**
-** PAGER_UNLOCK The page cache is not currently reading or
+** PAGER_UNLOCK The page cache is not currently reading or
** writing the database file. There is no
** data held in memory. This is the initial
** state.
** after all dirty pages have been written to the
** database file and the file has been synced to
** disk. All that remains to do is to remove or
-** truncate the journal file and the transaction
+** truncate the journal file and the transaction
** will be committed.
**
** The page cache comes up in PAGER_UNLOCK. The first time a
#endif
/*
-** The maximum allowed sector size. 64KiB. If the xSectorsize() method
+** The maximum allowed sector size. 64KiB. If the xSectorsize() method
** returns a value larger than this, then MAX_SECTOR_SIZE is used instead.
** This could conceivably cause corruption following a power failure on
** such a system. This is currently an undocumented limit.
**
** When a savepoint is created, the PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset field is
** set to 0. If a journal-header is written into the main journal while
-** the savepoint is active, then iHdrOffset is set to the byte offset
+** the savepoint is active, then iHdrOffset is set to the byte offset
** immediately following the last journal record written into the main
** journal before the journal-header. This is required during savepoint
** rollback (see pagerPlaybackSavepoint()).
**
** changeCountDone
**
-** This boolean variable is used to make sure that the change-counter
-** (the 4-byte header field at byte offset 24 of the database file) is
-** not updated more often than necessary.
+** This boolean variable is used to make sure that the change-counter
+** (the 4-byte header field at byte offset 24 of the database file) is
+** not updated more often than necessary.
**
-** It is set to true when the change-counter field is updated, which
+** It is set to true when the change-counter field is updated, which
** can only happen if an exclusive lock is held on the database file.
-** It is cleared (set to false) whenever an exclusive lock is
+** It is cleared (set to false) whenever an exclusive lock is
** relinquished on the database file. Each time a transaction is committed,
** The changeCountDone flag is inspected. If it is true, the work of
** updating the change-counter is omitted for the current transaction.
**
-** This mechanism means that when running in exclusive mode, a connection
+** This mechanism means that when running in exclusive mode, a connection
** need only update the change-counter once, for the first transaction
** committed.
**
**
** journalStarted
**
-** This flag is set whenever the the main journal is synced.
+** This flag is set whenever the the main journal is synced.
**
-** The point of this flag is that it must be set after the
+** The point of this flag is that it must be set after the
** first journal header in a journal file has been synced to disk.
-** After this has happened, new pages appended to the database
+** After this has happened, new pages appended to the database
** do not need the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag set, as they do not need
** to wait for a journal sync before they can be written out to
** the database file (see function pager_write()).
-**
+**
** setMaster
**
** This variable is used to ensure that the master journal file name
** then attempts to upgrade to an exclusive lock. If this attempt
** fails, then SQLITE_BUSY may be returned to the user and the user
** may attempt to commit the transaction again later (calling
-** CommitPhaseOne() again). This flag is used to ensure that the
+** CommitPhaseOne() again). This flag is used to ensure that the
** master journal name is only written to the journal file the first
** time CommitPhaseOne() is called.
**
/* The following block contains those class members that are dynamically
** modified during normal operations. The other variables in this structure
** are either constant throughout the lifetime of the pager, or else
- ** used to store configuration parameters that affect the way the pager
+ ** used to store configuration parameters that affect the way the pager
** operates.
**
** The 'state' variable is described in more detail along with the
** descriptions of the values it may take - PAGER_UNLOCK etc. Many of the
- ** other variables in this block are described in the comment directly
+ ** other variables in this block are described in the comment directly
** above this class definition.
*/
u8 state; /* PAGER_UNLOCK, _SHARED, _RESERVED, etc. */
#define JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager) ((pPager->pageSize) + 8)
/*
-** The journal header size for this pager. This is usually the same
+** The journal header size for this pager. This is usually the same
** size as a single disk sector. See also setSectorSize().
*/
#define JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) (pPager->sectorSize)
*/
#define PAGER_MAX_PGNO 2147483647
-#ifndef NDEBUG
+#ifndef NDEBUG
/*
** Usage:
**
/*
** When this is called the journal file for pager pPager must be open.
-** This function attempts to read a master journal file name from the
-** end of the file and, if successful, copies it into memory supplied
+** This function attempts to read a master journal file name from the
+** end of the file and, if successful, copies it into memory supplied
** by the caller. See comments above writeMasterJournal() for the format
** used to store a master journal file name at the end of a journal file.
**
** nul-terminator byte is appended to the buffer following the master
** journal file name.
**
-** If it is determined that no master journal file name is present
+** If it is determined that no master journal file name is present
** zMaster[0] is set to 0 and SQLITE_OK returned.
**
** If an error occurs while reading from the journal file, an SQLite
if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pJrnl, &szJ))
|| szJ<16
|| SQLITE_OK!=(rc = read32bits(pJrnl, szJ-16, &len))
- || len>=nMaster
+ || len>=nMaster
|| SQLITE_OK!=(rc = read32bits(pJrnl, szJ-12, &cksum))
|| SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsRead(pJrnl, aMagic, 8, szJ-8))
|| memcmp(aMagic, aJournalMagic, 8)
len = 0;
}
zMaster[len] = '\0';
-
+
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
-** Return the offset of the sector boundary at or immediately
-** following the value in pPager->journalOff, assuming a sector
+** Return the offset of the sector boundary at or immediately
+** following the value in pPager->journalOff, assuming a sector
** size of pPager->sectorSize bytes.
**
** i.e for a sector size of 512:
** 512 512
** 100 512
** 2000 2048
-**
+**
*/
static i64 journalHdrOffset(Pager *pPager){
i64 offset = 0;
**
** If doTruncate is non-zero or the Pager.journalSizeLimit variable is
** set to 0, then truncate the journal file to zero bytes in size. Otherwise,
-** zero the 28-byte header at the start of the journal file. In either case,
-** if the pager is not in no-sync mode, sync the journal file immediately
+** zero the 28-byte header at the start of the journal file. In either case,
+** if the pager is not in no-sync mode, sync the journal file immediately
** after writing or truncating it.
**
** If Pager.journalSizeLimit is set to a positive, non-zero value, and
-** following the truncation or zeroing described above the size of the
+** following the truncation or zeroing described above the size of the
** journal file in bytes is larger than this value, then truncate the
** journal file to Pager.journalSizeLimit bytes. The journal file does
** not need to be synced following this operation.
rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY|pPager->sync_flags);
}
- /* At this point the transaction is committed but the write lock
- ** is still held on the file. If there is a size limit configured for
+ /* At this point the transaction is committed but the write lock
+ ** is still held on the file. If there is a size limit configured for
** the persistent journal and the journal file currently consumes more
** space than that limit allows for, truncate it now. There is no need
** to sync the file following this operation.
** - 4 bytes: Initial database page count.
** - 4 bytes: Sector size used by the process that wrote this journal.
** - 4 bytes: Database page size.
-**
+**
** Followed by (JOURNAL_HDR_SZ - 28) bytes of unused space.
*/
static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
nHeader = JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager);
}
- /* If there are active savepoints and any of them were created
- ** since the most recent journal header was written, update the
+ /* If there are active savepoints and any of them were created
+ ** since the most recent journal header was written, update the
** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset fields now.
*/
for(ii=0; ii<pPager->nSavepoint; ii++){
pPager->journalHdr = pPager->journalOff = journalHdrOffset(pPager);
- /*
+ /*
** Write the nRec Field - the number of page records that follow this
** journal header. Normally, zero is written to this value at this time.
- ** After the records are added to the journal (and the journal synced,
+ ** After the records are added to the journal (and the journal synced,
** if in full-sync mode), the zero is overwritten with the true number
** of records (see syncJournal()).
**
*/
assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->noSync );
if( (pPager->noSync) || (pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY)
- || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND)
+ || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND)
){
memcpy(zHeader, aJournalMagic, sizeof(aJournalMagic));
put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)], 0xffffffff);
memset(zHeader, 0, sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4);
}
- /* The random check-hash initialiser */
+ /* The random check-hash initialiser */
sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(pPager->cksumInit), &pPager->cksumInit);
put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4], pPager->cksumInit);
/* The initial database size */
memset(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+20], 0,
nHeader-(sizeof(aJournalMagic)+20));
- /* In theory, it is only necessary to write the 28 bytes that the
- ** journal header consumes to the journal file here. Then increment the
- ** Pager.journalOff variable by JOURNAL_HDR_SZ so that the next
+ /* In theory, it is only necessary to write the 28 bytes that the
+ ** journal header consumes to the journal file here. Then increment the
+ ** Pager.journalOff variable by JOURNAL_HDR_SZ so that the next
** record is written to the following sector (leaving a gap in the file
** that will be implicitly filled in by the OS).
**
- ** However it has been discovered that on some systems this pattern can
+ ** However it has been discovered that on some systems this pattern can
** be significantly slower than contiguously writing data to the file,
- ** even if that means explicitly writing data to the block of
+ ** even if that means explicitly writing data to the block of
** (JOURNAL_HDR_SZ - 28) bytes that will not be used. So that is what
- ** is done.
+ ** is done.
**
- ** The loop is required here in case the sector-size is larger than the
+ ** The loop is required here in case the sector-size is larger than the
** database page size. Since the zHeader buffer is only Pager.pageSize
** bytes in size, more than one call to sqlite3OsWrite() may be required
** to populate the entire journal header sector.
- */
+ */
for(nWrite=0; rc==SQLITE_OK&&nWrite<JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager); nWrite+=nHeader){
IOTRACE(("JHDR %p %lld %d\n", pPager, pPager->journalHdr, nHeader))
rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->jfd, zHeader, nHeader, pPager->journalOff);
/* Check that the values read from the page-size and sector-size fields
** are within range. To be 'in range', both values need to be a power
- ** of two greater than or equal to 512 or 32, and not greater than their
+ ** of two greater than or equal to 512 or 32, and not greater than their
** respective compile time maximum limits.
*/
if( iPageSize<512 || iSectorSize<32
|| iPageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE || iSectorSize>MAX_SECTOR_SIZE
- || ((iPageSize-1)&iPageSize)!=0 || ((iSectorSize-1)&iSectorSize)!=0
+ || ((iPageSize-1)&iPageSize)!=0 || ((iSectorSize-1)&iSectorSize)!=0
){
- /* If the either the page-size or sector-size in the journal-header is
- ** invalid, then the process that wrote the journal-header must have
- ** crashed before the header was synced. In this case stop reading
+ /* If the either the page-size or sector-size in the journal-header is
+ ** invalid, then the process that wrote the journal-header must have
+ ** crashed before the header was synced. In this case stop reading
** the journal file here.
*/
return SQLITE_DONE;
}
- /* Update the page-size to match the value read from the journal.
- ** Use a testcase() macro to make sure that malloc failure within
+ /* Update the page-size to match the value read from the journal.
+ ** Use a testcase() macro to make sure that malloc failure within
** PagerSetPagesize() is tested.
*/
iPageSize16 = (u16)iPageSize;
testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK );
assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || iPageSize16==(u16)iPageSize );
- /* Update the assumed sector-size to match the value used by
+ /* Update the assumed sector-size to match the value used by
** the process that created this journal. If this journal was
** created by a process other than this one, then this routine
** is being called from within pager_playback(). The local value
** The master journal page checksum is the sum of the bytes in the master
** journal name, where each byte is interpreted as a signed 8-bit integer.
**
-** If zMaster is a NULL pointer (occurs for a single database transaction),
+** If zMaster is a NULL pointer (occurs for a single database transaction),
** this call is a no-op.
*/
static int writeMasterJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){
u32 cksum = 0; /* Checksum of string zMaster */
if( !zMaster || pPager->setMaster
- || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
- || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
+ || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
pPager->journalOff += (nMaster+20);
pPager->needSync = !pPager->noSync;
- /* If the pager is in peristent-journal mode, then the physical
+ /* If the pager is in peristent-journal mode, then the physical
** journal-file may extend past the end of the master-journal name
- ** and 8 bytes of magic data just written to the file. This is
+ ** and 8 bytes of magic data just written to the file. This is
** dangerous because the code to rollback a hot-journal file
- ** will not be able to find the master-journal name to determine
- ** whether or not the journal is hot.
+ ** will not be able to find the master-journal name to determine
+ ** whether or not the journal is hot.
**
- ** Easiest thing to do in this scenario is to truncate the journal
+ ** Easiest thing to do in this scenario is to truncate the journal
** file to the required size.
- */
+ */
if( SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pPager->jfd, &jrnlSize))
&& jrnlSize>pPager->journalOff
){
/*
** Find a page in the hash table given its page number. Return
-** a pointer to the page or NULL if the requested page is not
+** a pointer to the page or NULL if the requested page is not
** already in memory.
*/
static PgHdr *pager_lookup(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
}
/*
-** Set the bit number pgno in the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint
+** Set the bit number pgno in the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint
** bitvecs of all open savepoints. Return SQLITE_OK if successful
** or SQLITE_NOMEM if a malloc failure occurs.
*/
** Unlock the database file. This function is a no-op if the pager
** is in exclusive mode.
**
-** If the pager is currently in error state, discard the contents of
+** If the pager is currently in error state, discard the contents of
** the cache and reset the Pager structure internal state. If there is
** an open journal-file, then the next time a shared-lock is obtained
** on the pager file (by this or any other process), it will be
/*
** This function should be called when an IOERR, CORRUPT or FULL error
-** may have occurred. The first argument is a pointer to the pager
-** structure, the second the error-code about to be returned by a pager
-** API function. The value returned is a copy of the second argument
-** to this function.
+** may have occurred. The first argument is a pointer to the pager
+** structure, the second the error-code about to be returned by a pager
+** API function. The value returned is a copy of the second argument
+** to this function.
**
** If the second argument is SQLITE_IOERR, SQLITE_CORRUPT, or SQLITE_FULL
** the error becomes persistent. Until the persisten error is cleared,
-** subsequent API calls on this Pager will immediately return the same
+** subsequent API calls on this Pager will immediately return the same
** error code.
**
-** A persistent error indicates that the contents of the pager-cache
-** cannot be trusted. This state can be cleared by completely discarding
+** A persistent error indicates that the contents of the pager-cache
+** cannot be trusted. This state can be cleared by completely discarding
** the contents of the pager-cache. If a transaction was active when
** the persistent error occurred, then the rollback journal may need
** to be replayed to restore the contents of the database file (as if
}
/*
-** Execute a rollback if a transaction is active and unlock the
-** database file.
+** Execute a rollback if a transaction is active and unlock the
+** database file.
**
-** If the pager has already entered the error state, do not attempt
+** If the pager has already entered the error state, do not attempt
** the rollback at this time. Instead, pager_unlock() is called. The
** call to pager_unlock() will discard all in-memory pages, unlock
** the database file and clear the error state. If this means that
** roll it back.
**
** If the pager has not already entered the error state, but an IO or
-** malloc error occurs during a rollback, then this will itself cause
+** malloc error occurs during a rollback, then this will itself cause
** the pager to enter the error state. Which will be cleared by the
** call to pager_unlock(), as described above.
*/
}
/*
-** This routine ends a transaction. A transaction is usually ended by
-** either a COMMIT or a ROLLBACK operation. This routine may be called
+** This routine ends a transaction. A transaction is usually ended by
+** either a COMMIT or a ROLLBACK operation. This routine may be called
** after rollback of a hot-journal, or if an error occurs while opening
** the journal file or writing the very first journal-header of a
** database transaction.
-**
+**
** If the pager is in PAGER_SHARED or PAGER_UNLOCK state when this
** routine is called, it is a no-op (returns SQLITE_OK).
**
** Otherwise, any active savepoints are released.
**
-** If the journal file is open, then it is "finalized". Once a journal
-** file has been finalized it is not possible to use it to roll back a
+** If the journal file is open, then it is "finalized". Once a journal
+** file has been finalized it is not possible to use it to roll back a
** transaction. Nor will it be considered to be a hot-journal by this
** or any other database connection. Exactly how a journal is finalized
** depends on whether or not the pager is running in exclusive mode and
** the current journal-mode (Pager.journalMode value), as follows:
**
** journalMode==MEMORY
-** Journal file descriptor is simply closed. This destroys an
+** Journal file descriptor is simply closed. This destroys an
** in-memory journal.
**
** journalMode==TRUNCATE
**
** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs. If an error occurs during
** any of the IO operations to finalize the journal file or unlock the
-** database then the IO error code is returned to the user. If the
+** database then the IO error code is returned to the user. If the
** operation to finalize the journal file fails, then the code still
** tries to unlock the database file if not in exclusive mode. If the
** unlock operation fails as well, then the first error code related
}
pPager->journalOff = 0;
pPager->journalStarted = 0;
- }else if( pPager->exclusiveMode
+ }else if( pPager->exclusiveMode
|| pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
){
rc = zeroJournalHdr(pPager, hasMaster);
** a hot-journal was just rolled back. In this case the journal
** file should be closed and deleted. If this connection writes to
** the database file, it will do so using an in-memory journal. */
- assert( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
- || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
+ assert( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
+ || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
);
sqlite3OsClose(pPager->jfd);
if( !pPager->tempFile ){
pPager->needSync = 0;
pPager->dbModified = 0;
- /* TODO: Is this optimal? Why is the db size invalidated here
+ /* TODO: Is this optimal? Why is the db size invalidated here
** when the database file is not unlocked? */
pPager->dbOrigSize = 0;
sqlite3PcacheTruncate(pPager->pPCache, pPager->dbSize);
/*
** Parameter aData must point to a buffer of pPager->pageSize bytes
-** of data. Compute and return a checksum based ont the contents of the
+** of data. Compute and return a checksum based ont the contents of the
** page of data and the current value of pPager->cksumInit.
**
-** This is not a real checksum. It is really just the sum of the
+** This is not a real checksum. It is really just the sum of the
** random initial value (pPager->cksumInit) and every 200th byte
** of the page data, starting with byte offset (pPager->pageSize%200).
** Each byte is interpreted as an 8-bit unsigned integer.
** Changing the formula used to compute this checksum results in an
** incompatible journal file format.
**
-** If journal corruption occurs due to a power failure, the most likely
-** scenario is that one end or the other of the record will be changed.
+** If journal corruption occurs due to a power failure, the most likely
+** scenario is that one end or the other of the record will be changed.
** It is much less likely that the two ends of the journal record will be
** correct and the middle be corrupt. Thus, this "checksum" scheme,
** though fast and simple, catches the mostly likely kind of corruption.
** is successfully read from the (sub-)journal file but appears to be
** corrupted, SQLITE_DONE is returned. Data is considered corrupted in
** two circumstances:
-**
+**
** * If the record page-number is illegal (0 or PAGER_MJ_PGNO), or
** * If the record is being rolled back from the main journal file
** and the checksum field does not match the record content.
}else if( !isMainJrnl && pPg==0 ){
/* If this is a rollback of a savepoint and data was not written to
** the database and the page is not in-memory, there is a potential
- ** problem. When the page is next fetched by the b-tree layer, it
- ** will be read from the database file, which may or may not be
- ** current.
+ ** problem. When the page is next fetched by the b-tree layer, it
+ ** will be read from the database file, which may or may not be
+ ** current.
**
** There are a couple of different ways this can happen. All are quite
- ** obscure. When running in synchronous mode, this can only happen
+ ** obscure. When running in synchronous mode, this can only happen
** if the page is on the free-list at the start of the transaction, then
** populated, then moved using sqlite3PagerMovepage().
**
** The solution is to add an in-memory page to the cache containing
- ** the data just read from the sub-journal. Mark the page as dirty
- ** and if the pager requires a journal-sync, then mark the page as
+ ** the data just read from the sub-journal. Mark the page as dirty
+ ** and if the pager requires a journal-sync, then mark the page as
** requiring a journal-sync before it is written.
*/
assert( isSavepnt );
memcpy(pData, (u8*)aData, pPager->pageSize);
pPager->xReiniter(pPg);
if( isMainJrnl && (!isSavepnt || *pOffset<=pPager->journalHdr) ){
- /* If the contents of this page were just restored from the main
- ** journal file, then its content must be as they were when the
+ /* If the contents of this page were just restored from the main
+ ** journal file, then its content must be as they were when the
** transaction was first opened. In this case we can mark the page
** as clean, since there will be no need to write it out to the.
**
** There is one exception to this rule. If the page is being rolled
- ** back as part of a savepoint (or statement) rollback from an
+ ** back as part of a savepoint (or statement) rollback from an
** unsynced portion of the main journal file, then it is not safe
** to mark the page as clean. This is because marking the page as
** clean will clear the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag. Since the page is
** This routine checks if it is possible to delete the master journal file,
** and does so if it is.
**
-** Argument zMaster may point to Pager.pTmpSpace. So that buffer is not
+** Argument zMaster may point to Pager.pTmpSpace. So that buffer is not
** available for use within this function.
**
-** When a master journal file is created, it is populated with the names
-** of all of its child journals, one after another, formatted as utf-8
-** encoded text. The end of each child journal file is marked with a
+** When a master journal file is created, it is populated with the names
+** of all of its child journals, one after another, formatted as utf-8
+** encoded text. The end of each child journal file is marked with a
** nul-terminator byte (0x00). i.e. the entire contents of a master journal
** file for a transaction involving two databases might be:
**
** "/home/bill/a.db-journal\x00/home/bill/b.db-journal\x00"
**
-** A master journal file may only be deleted once all of its child
+** A master journal file may only be deleted once all of its child
** journals have been rolled back.
**
-** This function reads the contents of the master-journal file into
+** This function reads the contents of the master-journal file into
** memory and loops through each of the child journal names. For
** each child journal, it checks if:
**
** * if the child journal exists, and if so
-** * if the child journal contains a reference to master journal
+** * if the child journal contains a reference to master journal
** file zMaster
**
** If a child journal can be found that matches both of the criteria
**
** If an IO error within this function, an error code is returned. This
** function allocates memory by calling sqlite3Malloc(). If an allocation
-** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. Otherwise, if no IO or malloc errors
+** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. Otherwise, if no IO or malloc errors
** occur, SQLITE_OK is returned.
**
** TODO: This function allocates a single block of memory to load
** the entire contents of the master journal file. This could be
-** a couple of kilobytes or so - potentially larger than the page
+** a couple of kilobytes or so - potentially larger than the page
** size.
*/
static int pager_delmaster(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){
int nMasterPtr = pVfs->mxPathname+1;
/* Load the entire master journal file into space obtained from
- ** sqlite3_malloc() and pointed to by zMasterJournal.
+ ** sqlite3_malloc() and pointed to by zMasterJournal.
*/
zMasterJournal = sqlite3Malloc((int)nMasterJournal + nMasterPtr + 1);
if( !zMasterJournal ){
zJournal += (sqlite3Strlen30(zJournal)+1);
}
}
-
+
rc = sqlite3OsDelete(pVfs, zMaster, 0);
delmaster_out:
if( zMasterJournal ){
sqlite3_free(zMasterJournal);
- }
+ }
if( pMaster ){
sqlite3OsClose(pMaster);
assert( !isOpen(pJournal) );
/*
-** This function is used to change the actual size of the database
+** This function is used to change the actual size of the database
** file in the file-system. This only happens when committing a transaction,
** or rolling back a transaction (including rolling back a hot-journal).
**
** on disk is currently larger than nPage pages, then use the VFS
** xTruncate() method to truncate it.
**
-** Or, it might might be the case that the file on disk is smaller than
-** nPage pages. Some operating system implementations can get confused if
-** you try to truncate a file to some size that is larger than it
-** currently is, so detect this case and write a single zero byte to
+** Or, it might might be the case that the file on disk is smaller than
+** nPage pages. Some operating system implementations can get confused if
+** you try to truncate a file to some size that is larger than it
+** currently is, so detect this case and write a single zero byte to
** the end of the new file instead.
**
** If successful, return SQLITE_OK. If an IO error occurs while modifying
/*
** Set the value of the Pager.sectorSize variable for the given
** pager based on the value returned by the xSectorSize method
-** of the open database file. The sector size will be used used
-** to determine the size and alignment of journal header and
+** of the open database file. The sector size will be used used
+** to determine the size and alignment of journal header and
** master journal pointers within created journal files.
**
** For temporary files the effective sector size is always 512 bytes.
/*
** Playback the journal and thus restore the database file to
-** the state it was in before we started making changes.
+** the state it was in before we started making changes.
**
-** The journal file format is as follows:
+** The journal file format is as follows:
**
** (1) 8 byte prefix. A copy of aJournalMagic[].
** (2) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the number of valid page records
** in the journal. If this value is 0xffffffff, then compute the
** number of page records from the journal size.
-** (3) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the initial value for the
+** (3) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the initial value for the
** sanity checksum.
** (4) 4 byte integer which is the number of pages to truncate the
** database to during a rollback.
** from the file size. This value is used when the user selects the
** no-sync option for the journal. A power failure could lead to corruption
** in this case. But for things like temporary table (which will be
-** deleted when the power is restored) we don't care.
+** deleted when the power is restored) we don't care.
**
** If the file opened as the journal file is not a well-formed
** journal file then all pages up to the first corrupted page are rolled
** and an error code is returned.
**
** The isHot parameter indicates that we are trying to rollback a journal
-** that might be a hot journal. Or, it could be that the journal is
+** that might be a hot journal. Or, it could be that the journal is
** preserved because of JOURNALMODE_PERSIST or JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE.
** If the journal really is hot, reset the pager cache prior rolling
** back any content. If the journal is merely persistent, no reset is
pPager->journalOff = 0;
needPagerReset = isHot;
- /* This loop terminates either when a readJournalHdr() or
- ** pager_playback_one_page() call returns SQLITE_DONE or an IO error
- ** occurs.
+ /* This loop terminates either when a readJournalHdr() or
+ ** pager_playback_one_page() call returns SQLITE_DONE or an IO error
+ ** occurs.
*/
while( 1 ){
int isUnsync = 0;
** This indicates nothing more needs to be rolled back.
*/
rc = readJournalHdr(pPager, isHot, szJ, &nRec, &mxPg);
- if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
+ if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){
rc = SQLITE_OK;
}
** chunk of the journal contains zero pages to be rolled back. But
** when doing a ROLLBACK and the nRec==0 chunk is the last chunk in
** the journal, it means that the journal might contain additional
- ** pages that need to be rolled back and that the number of pages
+ ** pages that need to be rolled back and that the number of pages
** should be computed based on the journal file size.
*/
if( nRec==0 && !isHot &&
pPager->dbSize = mxPg;
}
- /* Copy original pages out of the journal and back into the
+ /* Copy original pages out of the journal and back into the
** database file and/or page cache.
*/
for(u=0; u<nRec; u++){
sqlite3OsFileControl(pPager->fd,SQLITE_FCNTL_DB_UNCHANGED,0)>=SQLITE_OK
);
- /* If this playback is happening automatically as a result of an IO or
- ** malloc error that occurred after the change-counter was updated but
- ** before the transaction was committed, then the change-counter
- ** modification may just have been reverted. If this happens in exclusive
+ /* If this playback is happening automatically as a result of an IO or
+ ** malloc error that occurred after the change-counter was updated but
+ ** before the transaction was committed, then the change-counter
+ ** modification may just have been reverted. If this happens in exclusive
** mode, then subsequent transactions performed by the connection will not
** update the change-counter at all. This may lead to cache inconsistency
** problems for other processes at some point in the future. So, just
/*
** Playback savepoint pSavepoint. Or, if pSavepoint==NULL, then playback
-** the entire master journal file. The case pSavepoint==NULL occurs when
-** a ROLLBACK TO command is invoked on a SAVEPOINT that is a transaction
+** the entire master journal file. The case pSavepoint==NULL occurs when
+** a ROLLBACK TO command is invoked on a SAVEPOINT that is a transaction
** savepoint.
**
-** When pSavepoint is not NULL (meaning a non-transaction savepoint is
+** When pSavepoint is not NULL (meaning a non-transaction savepoint is
** being rolled back), then the rollback consists of up to three stages,
** performed in the order specified:
**
** * Pages are played back from the main journal starting at byte
-** offset PagerSavepoint.iOffset and continuing to
+** offset PagerSavepoint.iOffset and continuing to
** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset, or to the end of the main journal
** file if PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset is zero.
**
** * If PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset is not zero, then pages are played
-** back starting from the journal header immediately following
+** back starting from the journal header immediately following
** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset to the end of the main journal file.
**
** * Pages are then played back from the sub-journal file, starting
** journal file. There is no need for a bitvec in this case.
**
** In either case, before playback commences the Pager.dbSize variable
-** is reset to the value that it held at the start of the savepoint
+** is reset to the value that it held at the start of the savepoint
** (or transaction). No page with a page-number greater than this value
** is played back. If one is encountered it is simply skipped.
*/
}
}
- /* Set the database size back to the value it was before the savepoint
+ /* Set the database size back to the value it was before the savepoint
** being reverted was opened.
*/
pPager->dbSize = pSavepoint ? pSavepoint->nOrig : pPager->dbOrigSize;
** test is related to ticket #2565. See the discussion in the
** pager_playback() function for additional information.
*/
- if( nJRec==0
+ if( nJRec==0
&& pPager->journalHdr+JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager)==pPager->journalOff
){
nJRec = (u32)((szJ - pPager->journalOff)/JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager));
/*
** The following global variable is incremented whenever the library
** attempts to open a temporary file. This information is used for
-** testing and analysis only.
+** testing and analysis only.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_opentemp_count = 0;
/*
** Open a temporary file.
**
-** Write the file descriptor into *pFile. Return SQLITE_OK on success
-** or some other error code if we fail. The OS will automatically
+** Write the file descriptor into *pFile. Return SQLITE_OK on success
+** or some other error code if we fail. The OS will automatically
** delete the temporary file when it is closed.
**
** The flags passed to the VFS layer xOpen() call are those specified
/*
** Set the busy handler function.
**
-** The pager invokes the busy-handler if sqlite3OsLock() returns
+** The pager invokes the busy-handler if sqlite3OsLock() returns
** SQLITE_BUSY when trying to upgrade from no-lock to a SHARED lock,
-** or when trying to upgrade from a RESERVED lock to an EXCLUSIVE
+** or when trying to upgrade from a RESERVED lock to an EXCLUSIVE
** lock. It does *not* invoke the busy handler when upgrading from
** SHARED to RESERVED, or when upgrading from SHARED to EXCLUSIVE
** (which occurs during hot-journal rollback). Summary:
** SHARED_LOCK -> EXCLUSIVE_LOCK | No
** RESERVED_LOCK -> EXCLUSIVE_LOCK | Yes
**
-** If the busy-handler callback returns non-zero, the lock is
+** If the busy-handler callback returns non-zero, the lock is
** retried. If it returns zero, then the SQLITE_BUSY error is
** returned to the caller of the pager API function.
*/
Pager *pPager, /* Pager object */
int (*xBusyHandler)(void *), /* Pointer to busy-handler function */
void *pBusyHandlerArg /* Argument to pass to xBusyHandler */
-){
+){
pPager->xBusyHandler = xBusyHandler;
pPager->pBusyHandlerArg = pBusyHandlerArg;
}
#endif
/*
-** Change the page size used by the Pager object. The new page size
+** Change the page size used by the Pager object. The new page size
** is passed in *pPageSize.
**
** If the pager is in the error state when this function is called, it
-** is a no-op. The value returned is the error state error code (i.e.
+** is a no-op. The value returned is the error state error code (i.e.
** one of SQLITE_IOERR, SQLITE_CORRUPT or SQLITE_FULL).
**
** Otherwise, if all of the following are true:
**
-** * the new page size (value of *pPageSize) is valid (a power
+** * the new page size (value of *pPageSize) is valid (a power
** of two between 512 and SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, inclusive), and
**
** * there are no outstanding page references, and
**
** then the pager object page size is set to *pPageSize.
**
-** If the page size is changed, then this function uses sqlite3PagerMalloc()
-** to obtain a new Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. If this allocation attempt
-** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and the page size remains unchanged.
+** If the page size is changed, then this function uses sqlite3PagerMalloc()
+** to obtain a new Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. If this allocation attempt
+** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and the page size remains unchanged.
** In all other cases, SQLITE_OK is returned.
**
** If the page size is not changed, either because one of the enumerated
** conditions above is not true, the pager was in error state when this
-** function was called, or because the memory allocation attempt failed,
+** function was called, or because the memory allocation attempt failed,
** then *pPageSize is set to the old, retained page size before returning.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u16 *pPageSize, int nReserve){
u16 pageSize = *pPageSize;
assert( pageSize==0 || (pageSize>=512 && pageSize<=SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE) );
if( (pPager->memDb==0 || pPager->dbSize==0)
- && sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0
- && pageSize && pageSize!=pPager->pageSize
+ && sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0
+ && pageSize && pageSize!=pPager->pageSize
){
char *pNew = (char *)sqlite3PageMalloc(pageSize);
if( !pNew ){
}
/*
-** Attempt to set the maximum database page count if mxPage is positive.
+** Attempt to set the maximum database page count if mxPage is positive.
** Make no changes if mxPage is zero or negative. And never reduce the
** maximum page count below the current size of the database.
**
/*
** Read the first N bytes from the beginning of the file into memory
-** that pDest points to.
+** that pDest points to.
**
** If the pager was opened on a transient file (zFilename==""), or
** opened on a file less than N bytes in size, the output buffer is
-** zeroed and SQLITE_OK returned. The rationale for this is that this
+** zeroed and SQLITE_OK returned. The rationale for this is that this
** function is used to read database headers, and a new transient or
** zero sized database has a header than consists entirely of zeroes.
**
}
/*
-** Return the total number of pages in the database file associated
+** Return the total number of pages in the database file associated
** with pPager. Normally, this is calculated as (<db file size>/<page-size>).
-** However, if the file is between 1 and <page-size> bytes in size, then
+** However, if the file is between 1 and <page-size> bytes in size, then
** this is considered a 1 page file.
**
** If the pager is in error state when this function is called, then the
}
}
- /* If the current number of pages in the file is greater than the
+ /* If the current number of pages in the file is greater than the
** configured maximum pager number, increase the allowed limit so
** that the file can be read.
*/
** a similar or greater lock is already held, this function is a no-op
** (returning SQLITE_OK immediately).
**
-** Otherwise, attempt to obtain the lock using sqlite3OsLock(). Invoke
-** the busy callback if the lock is currently not available. Repeat
-** until the busy callback returns false or until the attempt to
+** Otherwise, attempt to obtain the lock using sqlite3OsLock(). Invoke
+** the busy callback if the lock is currently not available. Repeat
+** until the busy callback returns false or until the attempt to
** obtain the lock succeeds.
**
** Return SQLITE_OK on success and an error code if we cannot obtain
-** the lock. If the lock is obtained successfully, set the Pager.state
+** the lock. If the lock is obtained successfully, set the Pager.state
** variable to locktype before returning.
*/
static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){
assert( pPager->state>=PAGER_SHARED || pPager->dbSizeValid==0 );
assert( pPager->state>=PAGER_SHARED || pPager->dbModified==0 );
- /* Check that this is either a no-op (because the requested lock is
+ /* Check that this is either a no-op (because the requested lock is
** already held, or one of the transistions that the busy-handler
** may be invoked during, according to the comment above
** sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler().
}
/*
-** Function assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) checks that one of the
+** Function assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) checks that one of the
** following is true for all dirty pages currently in the page-cache:
**
-** a) The page number is less than or equal to the size of the
+** a) The page number is less than or equal to the size of the
** current database image, in pages, OR
**
** b) if the page content were written at this time, it would not
** the database file. If a savepoint transaction were rolled back after
** this happened, the correct behaviour would be to restore the current
** content of the page. However, since this content is not present in either
-** the database file or the portion of the rollback journal and
+** the database file or the portion of the rollback journal and
** sub-journal rolled back the content could not be restored and the
-** database image would become corrupt. It is therefore fortunate that
+** database image would become corrupt. It is therefore fortunate that
** this circumstance cannot arise.
*/
#if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
#endif
/*
-** Truncate the in-memory database file image to nPage pages. This
-** function does not actually modify the database file on disk. It
-** just sets the internal state of the pager object so that the
+** Truncate the in-memory database file image to nPage pages. This
+** function does not actually modify the database file on disk. It
+** just sets the internal state of the pager object so that the
** truncation will be done when the current transaction is committed.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerTruncateImage(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){
** result in a coredump.
**
** This function always succeeds. If a transaction is active an attempt
-** is made to roll it back. If an error occurs during the rollback
+** is made to roll it back. If an error occurs during the rollback
** a hot journal may be left in the filesystem but no error is returned
** to the caller.
*/
if( MEMDB ){
pager_unlock(pPager);
}else{
- /* Set Pager.journalHdr to -1 for the benefit of the pager_playback()
+ /* Set Pager.journalHdr to -1 for the benefit of the pager_playback()
** call which may be made from within pagerUnlockAndRollback(). If it
** is not -1, then the unsynced portion of an open journal file may
** be played back into the database. If a power failure occurs while
** been written following it. If the pager is operating in full-sync
** mode, then the journal file is synced before this field is updated.
**
-** * If the device does not support the SEQUENTIAL property, then
+** * If the device does not support the SEQUENTIAL property, then
** journal file is synced.
**
** Or, in pseudo-code:
** if( NOT SAFE_APPEND ){
** if( <full-sync mode> ) xSync(<journal file>);
** <update nRec field>
-** }
+** }
** if( NOT SEQUENTIAL ) xSync(<journal file>);
** }
**
** The Pager.needSync flag is never be set for temporary files, or any
** file operating in no-sync mode (Pager.noSync set to non-zero).
**
-** If successful, this routine clears the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag of every
+** If successful, this routine clears the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag of every
** page currently held in memory before returning SQLITE_OK. If an IO
** error is encountered, then the IO error code is returned to the caller.
*/
** mode, then the journal file may at this point actually be larger
** than Pager.journalOff bytes. If the next thing in the journal
** file happens to be a journal-header (written as part of the
- ** previous connections transaction), and a crash or power-failure
- ** occurs after nRec is updated but before this connection writes
- ** anything else to the journal file (or commits/rolls back its
- ** transaction), then SQLite may become confused when doing the
+ ** previous connections transaction), and a crash or power-failure
+ ** occurs after nRec is updated but before this connection writes
+ ** anything else to the journal file (or commits/rolls back its
+ ** transaction), then SQLite may become confused when doing the
** hot-journal rollback following recovery. It may roll back all
** of this connections data, then proceed to rolling back the old,
** out-of-date data that follows it. Database corruption.
** byte to the start of it to prevent it from being recognized.
**
** Variable iNextHdrOffset is set to the offset at which this
- ** problematic header will occur, if it exists. aMagic is used
+ ** problematic header will occur, if it exists. aMagic is used
** as a temporary buffer to inspect the first couple of bytes of
** the potential journal header.
*/
** it as a candidate for rollback.
**
** This is not required if the persistent media supports the
- ** SAFE_APPEND property. Because in this case it is not possible
+ ** SAFE_APPEND property. Because in this case it is not possible
** for garbage data to be appended to the file, the nRec field
** is populated with 0xFFFFFFFF when the journal header is written
** and never needs to be updated.
if( 0==(iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL) ){
PAGERTRACE(("SYNC journal of %d\n", PAGERID(pPager)));
IOTRACE(("JSYNC %p\n", pPager))
- rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, pPager->sync_flags|
+ rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, pPager->sync_flags|
(pPager->sync_flags==SQLITE_SYNC_FULL?SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY:0)
);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
}
}
- /* The journal file was just successfully synced. Set Pager.needSync
+ /* The journal file was just successfully synced. Set Pager.needSync
** to zero and clear the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag on all pagess.
*/
pPager->needSync = 0;
** is called. Before writing anything to the database file, this lock
** is upgraded to an EXCLUSIVE lock. If the lock cannot be obtained,
** SQLITE_BUSY is returned and no data is written to the database file.
-**
+**
** If the pager is a temp-file pager and the actual file-system file
-** is not yet open, it is created and opened before any data is
+** is not yet open, it is created and opened before any data is
** written out.
**
** Once the lock has been upgraded and, if necessary, the file opened,
** in Pager.dbFileVers[] is updated to match the new value stored in
** the database file.
**
-** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error
+** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error
** occurs, an IO error code is returned. Or, if the EXCLUSIVE lock cannot
** be obtained, SQLITE_BUSY is returned.
*/
*/
if( pgno<=pPager->dbSize && 0==(pList->flags&PGHDR_DONT_WRITE) ){
i64 offset = (pgno-1)*(i64)pPager->pageSize; /* Offset to write */
- char *pData; /* Data to write */
+ char *pData; /* Data to write */
/* Encode the database */
CODEC2(pPager, pList->pData, pgno, 6, return SQLITE_NOMEM, pData);
rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->fd, pData, pPager->pageSize, offset);
/* If page 1 was just written, update Pager.dbFileVers to match
- ** the value now stored in the database file. If writing this
- ** page caused the database file to grow, update dbFileSize.
+ ** the value now stored in the database file. If writing this
+ ** page caused the database file to grow, update dbFileSize.
*/
if( pgno==1 ){
memcpy(&pPager->dbFileVers, &pData[24], sizeof(pPager->dbFileVers));
}
/*
-** Append a record of the current state of page pPg to the sub-journal.
-** It is the callers responsibility to use subjRequiresPage() to check
+** Append a record of the current state of page pPg to the sub-journal.
+** It is the callers responsibility to use subjRequiresPage() to check
** that it is really required before calling this function.
**
** If successful, set the bit corresponding to pPg->pgno in the bitvecs
** for all open savepoints before returning.
**
** This function returns SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, an IO
-** error code if the attempt to write to the sub-journal fails, or
+** error code if the attempt to write to the sub-journal fails, or
** SQLITE_NOMEM if a malloc fails while setting a bit in a savepoint
** bitvec.
*/
CODEC2(pPager, pData, pPg->pgno, 7, return SQLITE_NOMEM, pData2);
PAGERTRACE(("STMT-JOURNAL %d page %d\n", PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno));
-
+
assert( pageInJournal(pPg) || pPg->pgno>pPager->dbOrigSize );
rc = write32bits(pPager->sjfd, offset, pPg->pgno);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
** This function is called by the pcache layer when it has reached some
** soft memory limit. The first argument is a pointer to a Pager object
** (cast as a void*). The pager is always 'purgeable' (not an in-memory
-** database). The second argument is a reference to a page that is
+** database). The second argument is a reference to a page that is
** currently dirty but has no outstanding references. The page
-** is always associated with the Pager object passed as the first
+** is always associated with the Pager object passed as the first
** argument.
**
** The job of this function is to make pPg clean by writing its contents
** out to the database file, if possible. This may involve syncing the
-** journal file.
+** journal file.
**
** If successful, sqlite3PcacheMakeClean() is called on the page and
** SQLITE_OK returned. If an IO error occurs while trying to make the
/* Sync the journal file if required. */
if( pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC ){
rc = syncJournal(pPager);
- if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pPager->fullSync &&
+ if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pPager->fullSync &&
!(pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY) &&
!(sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND)
){
** was when the transaction started, not as it was when "SAVEPOINT sp"
** was executed.
**
- ** The solution is to write the current data for page X into the
+ ** The solution is to write the current data for page X into the
** sub-journal file now (if it is not already there), so that it will
- ** be restored to its current value when the "ROLLBACK TO sp" is
+ ** be restored to its current value when the "ROLLBACK TO sp" is
** executed.
*/
if( NEVER(
** The zFilename argument is the path to the database file to open.
** If zFilename is NULL then a randomly-named temporary file is created
** and used as the file to be cached. Temporary files are be deleted
-** automatically when they are closed. If zFilename is ":memory:" then
-** all information is held in cache. It is never written to disk.
+** automatically when they are closed. If zFilename is ":memory:" then
+** all information is held in cache. It is never written to disk.
** This can be used to implement an in-memory database.
**
** The nExtra parameter specifies the number of bytes of space allocated
** of the PAGER_OMIT_JOURNAL and PAGER_NO_READLOCK flags.
**
** The vfsFlags parameter is a bitmask to pass to the flags parameter
-** of the xOpen() method of the supplied VFS when opening files.
+** of the xOpen() method of the supplied VFS when opening files.
**
-** If the pager object is allocated and the specified file opened
+** If the pager object is allocated and the specified file opened
** successfully, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppPager set to point to
** the new pager object. If an error occurs, *ppPager is set to NULL
** and error code returned. This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM
-** (sqlite3Malloc() is used to allocate memory), SQLITE_CANTOPEN or
+** (sqlite3Malloc() is used to allocate memory), SQLITE_CANTOPEN or
** various SQLITE_IO_XXX errors.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen(
/* Figure out how much space is required for each journal file-handle
** (there are two of them, the main journal and the sub-journal). This
- ** is the maximum space required for an in-memory journal file handle
+ ** is the maximum space required for an in-memory journal file handle
** and a regular journal file-handle. Note that a "regular journal-handle"
** may be a wrapper capable of caching the first portion of the journal
- ** file in memory to implement the atomic-write optimization (see
+ ** file in memory to implement the atomic-write optimization (see
** source file journal.c).
*/
if( sqlite3JournalSize(pVfs)>sqlite3MemJournalSize() ){
}
/* Allocate memory for the Pager structure, PCache object, the
- ** three file descriptors, the database file name and the journal
+ ** three file descriptors, the database file name and the journal
** file name. The layout in memory is as follows:
**
** Pager object (sizeof(Pager) bytes)
ROUND8(sizeof(*pPager)) + /* Pager structure */
ROUND8(pcacheSize) + /* PCache object */
ROUND8(pVfs->szOsFile) + /* The main db file */
- journalFileSize * 2 + /* The two journal files */
+ journalFileSize * 2 + /* The two journal files */
nPathname + 1 + /* zFilename */
nPathname + 8 + 1 /* zJournal */
);
** This branch is also run for an in-memory database. An in-memory
** database is the same as a temp-file that is never written out to
** disk and uses an in-memory rollback journal.
- */
+ */
tempFile = 1;
pPager->state = PAGER_EXCLUSIVE;
readOnly = (vfsFlags&SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY);
}
- /* The following call to PagerSetPagesize() serves to set the value of
+ /* The following call to PagerSetPagesize() serves to set the value of
** Pager.pageSize and to allocate the Pager.pTmpSpace buffer.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK );
}
- /* If an error occurred in either of the blocks above, free the
+ /* If an error occurred in either of the blocks above, free the
** Pager structure and close the file.
*/
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
assert( pPager->state == (tempFile ? PAGER_EXCLUSIVE : PAGER_UNLOCK) );
/* pPager->errMask = 0; */
pPager->tempFile = (u8)tempFile;
- assert( tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL
+ assert( tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL
|| tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE );
assert( PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE==1 );
- pPager->exclusiveMode = (u8)tempFile;
+ pPager->exclusiveMode = (u8)tempFile;
pPager->changeCountDone = pPager->tempFile;
pPager->memDb = (u8)memDb;
pPager->readOnly = (u8)readOnly;
/*
** This function is called after transitioning from PAGER_UNLOCK to
** PAGER_SHARED state. It tests if there is a hot journal present in
-** the file-system for the given pager. A hot journal is one that
+** the file-system for the given pager. A hot journal is one that
** needs to be played back. According to this function, a hot-journal
** file exists if the following criteria are met:
**
** at the end of the file. If there is, and that master journal file
** does not exist, then the journal file is not really hot. In this
** case this routine will return a false-positive. The pager_playback()
-** routine will discover that the journal file is not really hot and
-** will not roll it back.
+** routine will discover that the journal file is not really hot and
+** will not roll it back.
**
-** If a hot-journal file is found to exist, *pExists is set to 1 and
+** If a hot-journal file is found to exist, *pExists is set to 1 and
** SQLITE_OK returned. If no hot-journal file is present, *pExists is
** set to 0 and SQLITE_OK returned. If an IO error occurs while trying
** to determine whether or not a hot-journal file exists, the IO error
int locked; /* True if some process holds a RESERVED lock */
/* Race condition here: Another process might have been holding the
- ** the RESERVED lock and have a journal open at the sqlite3OsAccess()
+ ** the RESERVED lock and have a journal open at the sqlite3OsAccess()
** call above, but then delete the journal and drop the lock before
** we get to the following sqlite3OsCheckReservedLock() call. If that
** is the case, this routine might think there is a hot journal when
int nPage;
/* Check the size of the database file. If it consists of 0 pages,
- ** then delete the journal file. See the header comment above for
+ ** then delete the journal file. See the header comment above for
** the reasoning here. Delete the obsolete journal file under
** a RESERVED lock to avoid race conditions and to avoid violating
** [H33020].
/* The journal file exists and no other connection has a reserved
** or greater lock on the database file. Now check that there is
** at least one non-zero bytes at the start of the journal file.
- ** If there is, then we consider this journal to be hot. If not,
+ ** If there is, then we consider this journal to be hot. If not,
** it can be ignored.
*/
int f = SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY|SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL;
}
/*
-** Read the content for page pPg out of the database file and into
+** Read the content for page pPg out of the database file and into
** pPg->pData. A shared lock or greater must be held on the database
** file before this function is called.
**
** on the database file), then an attempt is made to obtain a
** SHARED lock on the database file. Immediately after obtaining
** the SHARED lock, the file-system is checked for a hot-journal,
-** which is played back if present. Following any hot-journal
+** which is played back if present. Following any hot-journal
** rollback, the contents of the cache are validated by checking
** the 'change-counter' field of the database file header and
** discarded if they are found to be invalid.
** important that a RESERVED lock is not obtained on the way to the
** EXCLUSIVE lock. If it were, another process might open the
** database file, detect the RESERVED lock, and conclude that the
- ** database is safe to read while this process is still rolling the
+ ** database is safe to read while this process is still rolling the
** hot-journal back.
- **
+ **
** Because the intermediate RESERVED lock is not requested, any
- ** other process attempting to access the database file will get to
- ** this point in the code and fail to obtain its own EXCLUSIVE lock
+ ** other process attempting to access the database file will get to
+ ** this point in the code and fail to obtain its own EXCLUSIVE lock
** on the database file.
*/
if( pPager->state<EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ){
}
pPager->state = PAGER_EXCLUSIVE;
}
-
- /* Open the journal for read/write access. This is because in
+
+ /* Open the journal for read/write access. This is because in
** exclusive-access mode the file descriptor will be kept open and
** possibly used for a transaction later on. On some systems, the
** OsTruncate() call used in exclusive-access mode also requires
sqlite3OsClose(pPager->jfd);
}
}else{
- /* If the journal does not exist, it usually means that some
- ** other connection managed to get in and roll it back before
- ** this connection obtained the exclusive lock above. Or, it
+ /* If the journal does not exist, it usually means that some
+ ** other connection managed to get in and roll it back before
+ ** this connection obtained the exclusive lock above. Or, it
** may mean that the pager was in the error-state when this
** function was called and the journal file does not exist. */
rc = pager_end_transaction(pPager, 0);
pPager->journalOff = 0;
pPager->setMaster = 0;
pPager->journalHdr = 0;
-
+
/* Playback and delete the journal. Drop the database write
** lock and reacquire the read lock. Purge the cache before
** playing back the hot-journal so that we don't end up with
** a 32-bit counter that is incremented with each change. The
** other bytes change randomly with each file change when
** a codec is in use.
- **
- ** There is a vanishingly small chance that a change will not be
+ **
+ ** There is a vanishingly small chance that a change will not be
** detected. The chance of an undetected change is so small that
** it can be neglected.
*/
** Except, in locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE when there is nothing to in
** the rollback journal, the unlock is not performed and there is
** nothing to rollback, so this routine is a no-op.
-*/
+*/
static void pagerUnlockIfUnused(Pager *pPager){
if( (sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0)
- && (!pPager->exclusiveMode || pPager->journalOff>0)
+ && (!pPager->exclusiveMode || pPager->journalOff>0)
){
pagerUnlockAndRollback(pPager);
}
/*
** Acquire a reference to page number pgno in pager pPager (a page
-** reference has type DbPage*). If the requested reference is
+** reference has type DbPage*). If the requested reference is
** successfully obtained, it is copied to *ppPage and SQLITE_OK returned.
**
-** If the requested page is already in the cache, it is returned.
+** If the requested page is already in the cache, it is returned.
** Otherwise, a new page object is allocated and populated with data
** read from the database file. In some cases, the pcache module may
** choose not to allocate a new page object and may reuse an existing
** object with no outstanding references.
**
-** The extra data appended to a page is always initialized to zeros the
-** first time a page is loaded into memory. If the page requested is
+** The extra data appended to a page is always initialized to zeros the
+** first time a page is loaded into memory. If the page requested is
** already in the cache when this function is called, then the extra
** data is left as it was when the page object was last used.
**
-** If the database image is smaller than the requested page or if a
-** non-zero value is passed as the noContent parameter and the
-** requested page is not already stored in the cache, then no
-** actual disk read occurs. In this case the memory image of the
-** page is initialized to all zeros.
+** If the database image is smaller than the requested page or if a
+** non-zero value is passed as the noContent parameter and the
+** requested page is not already stored in the cache, then no
+** actual disk read occurs. In this case the memory image of the
+** page is initialized to all zeros.
**
** If noContent is true, it means that we do not care about the contents
** of the page. This occurs in two seperate scenarios:
return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}
- /* If the pager is in the error state, return an error immediately.
+ /* If the pager is in the error state, return an error immediately.
** Otherwise, request the page from the PCache layer. */
if( pPager->errCode!=SQLITE_OK && pPager->errCode!=SQLITE_FULL ){
rc = pPager->errCode;
return SQLITE_OK;
}else{
- /* The pager cache has created a new page. Its content needs to
+ /* The pager cache has created a new page. Its content needs to
** be initialized. */
int nMax;
}
if( noContent ){
/* Failure to set the bits in the InJournal bit-vectors is benign.
- ** It merely means that we might do some extra work to journal a
- ** page that does not need to be journaled. Nevertheless, be sure
- ** to test the case where a malloc error occurs while trying to set
+ ** It merely means that we might do some extra work to journal a
+ ** page that does not need to be journaled. Nevertheless, be sure
+ ** to test the case where a malloc error occurs while trying to set
** a bit in a bit vector.
*/
sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
/*
** Acquire a page if it is already in the in-memory cache. Do
** not read the page from disk. Return a pointer to the page,
-** or 0 if the page is not in cache. Also, return 0 if the
+** or 0 if the page is not in cache. Also, return 0 if the
** pager is in PAGER_UNLOCK state when this function is called,
** or if the pager is in an error state other than SQLITE_FULL.
**
** See also sqlite3PagerGet(). The difference between this routine
** and sqlite3PagerGet() is that _get() will go to the disk and read
** in the page if the page is not already in cache. This routine
-** returns NULL if the page is not in cache or if a disk I/O error
+** returns NULL if the page is not in cache or if a disk I/O error
** has ever happened.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE DbPage *sqlite3PagerLookup(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
** sub-journal file is open too. If the main journal is not open,
** this function is a no-op.
**
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if everything goes according to plan.
-** An SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned if a call to
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if everything goes according to plan.
+** An SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned if a call to
** sqlite3OsOpen() fails.
*/
static int openSubJournal(Pager *pPager){
/*
** This function is called at the start of every write transaction.
-** There must already be a RESERVED or EXCLUSIVE lock on the database
+** There must already be a RESERVED or EXCLUSIVE lock on the database
** file when this routine is called.
**
** Open the journal file for pager pPager and write a journal header
** to the start of it. If there are active savepoints, open the sub-journal
-** as well. This function is only used when the journal file is being
-** opened to write a rollback log for a transaction. It is not used
+** as well. This function is only used when the journal file is being
+** opened to write a rollback log for a transaction. It is not used
** when opening a hot journal file to roll it back.
**
** If the journal file is already open (as it may be in exclusive mode),
** then this function just writes a journal header to the start of the
-** already open file.
+** already open file.
**
** Whether or not the journal file is opened by this function, the
** Pager.pInJournal bitvec structure is allocated.
**
-** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful. Otherwise, return
-** SQLITE_NOMEM if the attempt to allocate Pager.pInJournal fails, or
+** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful. Otherwise, return
+** SQLITE_NOMEM if the attempt to allocate Pager.pInJournal fails, or
** an IO error code if opening or writing the journal file fails.
*/
static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
assert( pPager->useJournal );
assert( pPager->journalMode!=PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF );
assert( pPager->pInJournal==0 );
-
+
/* If already in the error state, this function is a no-op. But on
** the other hand, this routine is never called if we are already in
** an error state. */
}else{
const int flags = /* VFS flags to open journal file */
SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE|SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE|
- (pPager->tempFile ?
+ (pPager->tempFile ?
(SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE|SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL):
(SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL)
);
}
- /* Write the first journal header to the journal file and open
+ /* Write the first journal header to the journal file and open
** the sub-journal if necessary.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
}
/*
-** Begin a write-transaction on the specified pager object. If a
+** Begin a write-transaction on the specified pager object. If a
** write-transaction has already been opened, this function is a no-op.
**
** If the exFlag argument is false, then acquire at least a RESERVED
** lock on the database file. If exFlag is true, then acquire at least
-** an EXCLUSIVE lock. If such a lock is already held, no locking
+** an EXCLUSIVE lock. If such a lock is already held, no locking
** functions need be called.
**
-** If this is not a temporary or in-memory file and, the journal file is
-** opened if it has not been already. For a temporary file, the opening
-** of the journal file is deferred until there is an actual need to
+** If this is not a temporary or in-memory file and, the journal file is
+** opened if it has not been already. For a temporary file, the opening
+** of the journal file is deferred until there is an actual need to
** write to the journal. TODO: Why handle temporary files differently?
**
** If the journal file is opened (or if it is already open), then a
** has no effect if the sub-journal is already opened (as it may be when
** running in exclusive mode) or if the transaction does not require a
** sub-journal. If the subjInMemory argument is zero, then any required
-** sub-journal is implemented in-memory if pPager is an in-memory database,
+** sub-journal is implemented in-memory if pPager is an in-memory database,
** or using a temporary file otherwise.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerBegin(Pager *pPager, int exFlag, int subjInMemory){
}else if( isOpen(pPager->jfd) && pPager->journalOff==0 ){
/* This happens when the pager was in exclusive-access mode the last
** time a (read or write) transaction was successfully concluded
- ** by this connection. Instead of deleting the journal file it was
+ ** by this connection. Instead of deleting the journal file it was
** kept open and either was truncated to 0 bytes or its header was
** overwritten with zeros.
*/
}
/*
-** Mark a single data page as writeable. The page is written into the
+** Mark a single data page as writeable. The page is written into the
** main journal or sub-journal as required. If the page is written into
-** one of the journals, the corresponding bit is set in the
+** one of the journals, the corresponding bit is set in the
** Pager.pInJournal bitvec and the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint bitvecs
** of any open savepoints as appropriate.
*/
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
}
pPager->dbModified = 1;
-
+
/* The transaction journal now exists and we have a RESERVED or an
** EXCLUSIVE lock on the main database file. Write the current page to
** the transaction journal if it is not there already.
rc = write32bits(pPager->jfd, pPager->journalOff, cksum);
pPager->journalOff += 4;
}
- IOTRACE(("JOUT %p %d %lld %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno,
+ IOTRACE(("JOUT %p %d %lld %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno,
pPager->journalOff, pPager->pageSize));
PAGER_INCR(sqlite3_pager_writej_count);
PAGERTRACE(("JOURNAL %d page %d needSync=%d hash(%08x)\n",
- PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno,
+ PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno,
((pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0), pager_pagehash(pPg)));
/* Even if an IO or diskfull error occurred while journalling the
pPager->needSync = 1;
}
- /* An error has occurred writing to the journal file. The
+ /* An error has occurred writing to the journal file. The
** transaction will be rolled back by the layer above.
*/
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
((pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0)));
}
}
-
+
/* If the statement journal is open and the page is not in it,
** then write the current page to the statement journal. Note that
** the statement journal format differs from the standard journal format
}
/*
-** Mark a data page as writeable. This routine must be called before
-** making changes to a page. The caller must check the return value
-** of this function and be careful not to change any page data unless
+** Mark a data page as writeable. This routine must be called before
+** making changes to a page. The caller must check the return value
+** of this function and be careful not to change any page data unless
** this routine returns SQLITE_OK.
**
** The difference between this function and pager_write() is that this
}
}
- /* If the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag is set for any of the nPage pages
+ /* If the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag is set for any of the nPage pages
** starting at pg1, then it needs to be set for all of them. Because
** writing to any of these nPage pages may damage the others, the
** journal file must contain sync()ed copies of all of them
** on the given page is unused. The pager marks the page as clean so
** that it does not get written to disk.
**
-** Tests show that this optimization can quadruple the speed of large
+** Tests show that this optimization can quadruple the speed of large
** DELETE operations.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){
}
/*
-** This routine is called to increment the value of the database file
-** change-counter, stored as a 4-byte big-endian integer starting at
+** This routine is called to increment the value of the database file
+** change-counter, stored as a 4-byte big-endian integer starting at
** byte offset 24 of the pager file.
**
-** If the isDirectMode flag is zero, then this is done by calling
+** If the isDirectMode flag is zero, then this is done by calling
** sqlite3PagerWrite() on page 1, then modifying the contents of the
** page data. In this case the file will be updated when the current
** transaction is committed.
** The isDirectMode flag may only be non-zero if the library was compiled
** with the SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE macro defined. In this case,
** if isDirect is non-zero, then the database file is updated directly
-** by writing an updated version of page 1 using a call to the
+** by writing an updated version of page 1 using a call to the
** sqlite3OsWrite() function.
*/
static int pager_incr_changecounter(Pager *pPager, int isDirectMode){
assert( pPgHdr==0 || rc==SQLITE_OK );
/* If page one was fetched successfully, and this function is not
- ** operating in direct-mode, make page 1 writable. When not in
+ ** operating in direct-mode, make page 1 writable. When not in
** direct mode, page 1 is always held in cache and hence the PagerGet()
** above is always successful - hence the ALWAYS on rc==SQLITE_OK.
*/
**
** * The database file change-counter is updated,
** * the journal is synced (unless the atomic-write optimization is used),
-** * all dirty pages are written to the database file,
+** * all dirty pages are written to the database file,
** * the database file is truncated (if required), and
-** * the database file synced.
+** * the database file synced.
**
-** The only thing that remains to commit the transaction is to finalize
-** (delete, truncate or zero the first part of) the journal file (or
+** The only thing that remains to commit the transaction is to finalize
+** (delete, truncate or zero the first part of) the journal file (or
** delete the master journal file if specified).
**
** Note that if zMaster==NULL, this does not overwrite a previous value
** coding errors by repeating the prior error. */
if( NEVER(pPager->errCode) ) return pPager->errCode;
- PAGERTRACE(("DATABASE SYNC: File=%s zMaster=%s nSize=%d\n",
+ PAGERTRACE(("DATABASE SYNC: File=%s zMaster=%s nSize=%d\n",
pPager->zFilename, zMaster, pPager->dbSize));
if( MEMDB && pPager->dbModified ){
/* The following block updates the change-counter. Exactly how it
** does this depends on whether or not the atomic-update optimization
- ** was enabled at compile time, and if this transaction meets the
- ** runtime criteria to use the operation:
+ ** was enabled at compile time, and if this transaction meets the
+ ** runtime criteria to use the operation:
**
** * The file-system supports the atomic-write property for
- ** blocks of size page-size, and
+ ** blocks of size page-size, and
** * This commit is not part of a multi-file transaction, and
** * Exactly one page has been modified and store in the journal file.
**
** is not applicable to this transaction, call sqlite3JournalCreate()
** to make sure the journal file has actually been created, then call
** pager_incr_changecounter() to update the change-counter in indirect
- ** mode.
+ ** mode.
**
** Otherwise, if the optimization is both enabled and applicable,
** then call pager_incr_changecounter() to update the change-counter
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE
PgHdr *pPg;
assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF );
- if( !zMaster && isOpen(pPager->jfd)
- && pPager->journalOff==jrnlBufferSize(pPager)
+ if( !zMaster && isOpen(pPager->jfd)
+ && pPager->journalOff==jrnlBufferSize(pPager)
&& pPager->dbSize>=pPager->dbFileSize
&& (0==(pPg = sqlite3PcacheDirtyList(pPager->pPCache)) || 0==pPg->pDirty)
){
- /* Update the db file change counter via the direct-write method. The
- ** following call will modify the in-memory representation of page 1
- ** to include the updated change counter and then write page 1
- ** directly to the database file. Because of the atomic-write
+ /* Update the db file change counter via the direct-write method. The
+ ** following call will modify the in-memory representation of page 1
+ ** to include the updated change counter and then write page 1
+ ** directly to the database file. Because of the atomic-write
** property of the host file-system, this is safe.
*/
rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 1);
** being discarded by the truncation must be written to the journal
** file. This can only happen in auto-vacuum mode.
**
- ** Before reading the pages with page numbers larger than the
+ ** Before reading the pages with page numbers larger than the
** current value of Pager.dbSize, set dbSize back to the value
** that it took at the start of the transaction. Otherwise, the
- ** calls to sqlite3PagerGet() return zeroed pages instead of
+ ** calls to sqlite3PagerGet() return zeroed pages instead of
** reading data from the database file.
**
** When journal_mode==OFF the dbOrigSize is always zero, so this
** block never runs if journal_mode=OFF.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
- if( pPager->dbSize<pPager->dbOrigSize
+ if( pPager->dbSize<pPager->dbOrigSize
&& ALWAYS(pPager->journalMode!=PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF)
){
Pgno i; /* Iterator variable */
const Pgno iSkip = PAGER_MJ_PGNO(pPager); /* Pending lock page */
- const Pgno dbSize = pPager->dbSize; /* Database image size */
+ const Pgno dbSize = pPager->dbSize; /* Database image size */
pPager->dbSize = pPager->dbOrigSize;
for( i=dbSize+1; i<=pPager->dbOrigSize; i++ ){
if( !sqlite3BitvecTest(pPager->pInJournal, i) && i!=iSkip ){
sqlite3PagerUnref(pPage);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
}
- }
+ }
pPager->dbSize = dbSize;
}
#endif
- /* Write the master journal name into the journal file. If a master
- ** journal file name has already been written to the journal file,
+ /* Write the master journal name into the journal file. If a master
+ ** journal file name has already been written to the journal file,
** or if zMaster is NULL (no master journal), then this call is a no-op.
*/
rc = writeMasterJournal(pPager, zMaster);
/*
** When this function is called, the database file has been completely
** updated to reflect the changes made by the current transaction and
-** synced to disk. The journal file still exists in the file-system
+** synced to disk. The journal file still exists in the file-system
** though, and if a failure occurs at this point it will eventually
** be used as a hot-journal and the current transaction rolled back.
**
-** This function finalizes the journal file, either by deleting,
-** truncating or partially zeroing it, so that it cannot be used
+** This function finalizes the journal file, either by deleting,
+** truncating or partially zeroing it, so that it cannot be used
** for hot-journal rollback. Once this is done the transaction is
** irrevocably committed.
**
** this transaction, the pager is running in exclusive-mode and is
** using persistent journals, then this function is a no-op.
**
- ** The start of the journal file currently contains a single journal
+ ** The start of the journal file currently contains a single journal
** header with the nRec field set to 0. If such a journal is used as
** a hot-journal during hot-journal rollback, 0 changes will be made
- ** to the database file. So there is no need to zero the journal
+ ** to the database file. So there is no need to zero the journal
** header. Since the pager is in exclusive mode, there is no need
** to drop any locks either.
*/
- if( pPager->dbModified==0 && pPager->exclusiveMode
+ if( pPager->dbModified==0 && pPager->exclusiveMode
&& pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
){
assert( pPager->journalOff==JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) );
**
** This function performs two tasks:
**
-** 1) It rolls back the journal file, restoring all database file and
+** 1) It rolls back the journal file, restoring all database file and
** in-memory cache pages to the state they were in when the transaction
** was opened, and
** 2) It finalizes the journal file, so that it is not used for hot
** then only (2) is performed. In this case there is no journal file
** to roll back.
**
-** * If in an error state other than SQLITE_FULL, then task (1) is
+** * If in an error state other than SQLITE_FULL, then task (1) is
** performed. If successful, task (2). Regardless of the outcome
** of either, the error state error code is returned to the caller
** (i.e. either SQLITE_IOERR or SQLITE_CORRUPT).
**
** * If the pager is in PAGER_RESERVED state, then attempt (1). Whether
** or not (1) is succussful, also attempt (2). If successful, return
-** SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, enter the error state and return the first
-** error code encountered.
+** SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, enter the error state and return the first
+** error code encountered.
**
-** In this case there is no chance that the database was written to.
-** So is safe to finalize the journal file even if the playback
+** In this case there is no chance that the database was written to.
+** So is safe to finalize the journal file even if the playback
** (operation 1) failed. However the pager must enter the error state
** as the contents of the in-memory cache are now suspect.
**
** * Finally, if in PAGER_EXCLUSIVE state, then attempt (1). Only
** attempt (2) if (1) is successful. Return SQLITE_OK if successful,
-** otherwise enter the error state and return the error code from the
+** otherwise enter the error state and return the error code from the
** failing operation.
**
** In this case the database file may have been written to. So if the
}
/* If an error occurs during a ROLLBACK, we can no longer trust the pager
- ** cache. So call pager_error() on the way out to make any error
+ ** cache. So call pager_error() on the way out to make any error
** persistent.
*/
rc = pager_error(pPager, rc);
** to make up the difference. If the number of savepoints is already
** equal to nSavepoint, then this function is a no-op.
**
-** If a memory allocation fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. If an error
+** If a memory allocation fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. If an error
** occurs while opening the sub-journal file, then an IO error code is
** returned. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
*/
int ii; /* Iterator variable */
PagerSavepoint *aNew; /* New Pager.aSavepoint array */
- /* Either there is no active journal or the sub-journal is open or
+ /* Either there is no active journal or the sub-journal is open or
** the journal is always stored in memory */
assert( pPager->nSavepoint==0 || isOpen(pPager->sjfd) ||
pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY );
/* Grow the Pager.aSavepoint array using realloc(). Return SQLITE_NOMEM
- ** if the allocation fails. Otherwise, zero the new portion in case a
+ ** if the allocation fails. Otherwise, zero the new portion in case a
** malloc failure occurs while populating it in the for(...) loop below.
*/
aNew = (PagerSavepoint *)sqlite3Realloc(
/*
** This function is called to rollback or release (commit) a savepoint.
-** The savepoint to release or rollback need not be the most recently
+** The savepoint to release or rollback need not be the most recently
** created savepoint.
**
** Parameter op is always either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE.
** index iSavepoint. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then rollback all changes
** that have occurred since the specified savepoint was created.
**
-** The savepoint to rollback or release is identified by parameter
+** The savepoint to rollback or release is identified by parameter
** iSavepoint. A value of 0 means to operate on the outermost savepoint
** (the first created). A value of (Pager.nSavepoint-1) means operate
** on the most recently created savepoint. If iSavepoint is greater than
** (Pager.nSavepoint-1), then this function is a no-op.
**
** If a negative value is passed to this function, then the current
-** transaction is rolled back. This is different to calling
+** transaction is rolled back. This is different to calling
** sqlite3PagerRollback() because this function does not terminate
-** the transaction or unlock the database, it just restores the
-** contents of the database to its original state.
+** the transaction or unlock the database, it just restores the
+** contents of the database to its original state.
**
-** In any case, all savepoints with an index greater than iSavepoint
+** In any case, all savepoints with an index greater than iSavepoint
** are destroyed. If this is a release operation (op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE),
** then savepoint iSavepoint is also destroyed.
**
** This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM if a memory allocation fails,
-** or an IO error code if an IO error occurs while rolling back a
+** or an IO error code if an IO error occurs while rolling back a
** savepoint. If no errors occur, SQLITE_OK is returned.
-*/
+*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
int nNew; /* Number of remaining savepoints after this op. */
/* Figure out how many savepoints will still be active after this
- ** operation. Store this value in nNew. Then free resources associated
+ ** operation. Store this value in nNew. Then free resources associated
** with any savepoints that are destroyed by this operation.
*/
nNew = iSavepoint + (( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ) ? 0 : 1);
}
pPager->nSavepoint = nNew;
- /* If this is a release of the outermost savepoint, truncate
+ /* If this is a release of the outermost savepoint, truncate
** the sub-journal to zero bytes in size. */
if( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
if( nNew==0 && isOpen(pPager->sjfd) ){
rc = pagerPlaybackSavepoint(pPager, pSavepoint);
assert(rc!=SQLITE_DONE);
}
-
+
}
return rc;
}
** transaction is active).
**
** If the fourth argument, isCommit, is non-zero, then this page is being
-** moved as part of a database reorganization just before the transaction
-** is being committed. In this case, it is guaranteed that the database page
+** moved as part of a database reorganization just before the transaction
+** is being committed. In this case, it is guaranteed that the database page
** pPg refers to will not be written to again within this transaction.
**
** This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM or an IO error code if an error
}
/* If the page being moved is dirty and has not been saved by the latest
- ** savepoint, then save the current contents of the page into the
+ ** savepoint, then save the current contents of the page into the
** sub-journal now. This is required to handle the following scenario:
**
** BEGIN;
return rc;
}
- PAGERTRACE(("MOVE %d page %d (needSync=%d) moves to %d\n",
+ PAGERTRACE(("MOVE %d page %d (needSync=%d) moves to %d\n",
PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno, (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0, pgno));
IOTRACE(("MOVE %p %d %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno, pgno))
** be written to, store pPg->pgno in local variable needSyncPgno.
**
** If the isCommit flag is set, there is no need to remember that
- ** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pPg->pgno
+ ** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pPg->pgno
** can be written to. The caller has already promised not to write to it.
*/
if( (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC) && !isCommit ){
}
/* If the cache contains a page with page-number pgno, remove it
- ** from its hash chain. Also, if the PgHdr.needSync was set for
- ** page pgno before the 'move' operation, it needs to be retained
+ ** from its hash chain. Also, if the PgHdr.needSync was set for
+ ** page pgno before the 'move' operation, it needs to be retained
** for the page moved there.
*/
pPg->flags &= ~PGHDR_NEED_SYNC;
pPager->dbModified = 1;
if( needSyncPgno ){
- /* If needSyncPgno is non-zero, then the journal file needs to be
+ /* If needSyncPgno is non-zero, then the journal file needs to be
** sync()ed before any data is written to database file page needSyncPgno.
- ** Currently, no such page exists in the page-cache and the
+ ** Currently, no such page exists in the page-cache and the
** "is journaled" bitvec flag has been set. This needs to be remedied by
- ** loading the page into the pager-cache and setting the PgHdr.needSync
+ ** loading the page into the pager-cache and setting the PgHdr.needSync
** flag.
**
** If the attempt to load the page into the page-cache fails, (due
}
/*
-** Return a pointer to the Pager.nExtra bytes of "extra" space
+** Return a pointer to the Pager.nExtra bytes of "extra" space
** allocated along with the specified page.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *pPg){
/*
** Get/set the locking-mode for this pager. Parameter eMode must be one
-** of PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY, PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL or
+** of PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY, PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL or
** PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE. If the parameter is not _QUERY, then
** the locking-mode is set to the value specified.
**
|| eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
|| eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE
|| eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
- || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
|| eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY );
assert( PAGER_JOURNALMODE_QUERY<0 );
if( eMode>=0
- && (!MEMDB || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
+ && (!MEMDB || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
|| eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF)
&& !pPager->dbModified
&& (!isOpen(pPager->jfd) || 0==pPager->journalOff)
** on Ptr(N) and its subpages have values greater than Key(N-1). And
** so forth.
**
-** Finding a particular key requires reading O(log(M)) pages from the
+** Finding a particular key requires reading O(log(M)) pages from the
** disk where M is the number of entries in the tree.
**
-** In this implementation, a single file can hold one or more separate
+** In this implementation, a single file can hold one or more separate
** BTrees. Each BTree is identified by the index of its root page. The
** key and data for any entry are combined to form the "payload". A
** fixed amount of payload can be carried directly on the database
** page. If the payload is larger than the preset amount then surplus
** bytes are stored on overflow pages. The payload for an entry
-** and the preceding pointer are combined to form a "Cell". Each
+** and the preceding pointer are combined to form a "Cell". Each
** page has a small header which contains the Ptr(N) pointer and other
** information such as the size of key and data.
**
**
** OFFSET SIZE DESCRIPTION
** 0 16 Header string: "SQLite format 3\000"
-** 16 2 Page size in bytes.
+** 16 2 Page size in bytes.
** 18 1 File format write version
** 19 1 File format read version
** 20 1 Bytes of unused space at the end of each page
** contiguous or in order, but cell pointers are contiguous and in order.
**
** Cell content makes use of variable length integers. A variable
-** length integer is 1 to 9 bytes where the lower 7 bits of each
+** length integer is 1 to 9 bytes where the lower 7 bits of each
** byte are used. The integer consists of all bytes that have bit 8 set and
** the first byte with bit 8 clear. The most significant byte of the integer
** appears first. A variable-length integer may not be more than 9 bytes long.
** -DSQLITE_FILE_HEADER="..." on the compiler command-line. The
** header must be exactly 16 bytes including the zero-terminator so
** the string itself should be 15 characters long. If you change
-** the header, then your custom library will not be able to read
+** the header, then your custom library will not be able to read
** databases generated by the standard tools and the standard tools
** will not be able to read databases created by your custom library.
*/
/*
** A linked list of the following structures is stored at BtShared.pLock.
-** Locks are added (or upgraded from READ_LOCK to WRITE_LOCK) when a cursor
+** Locks are added (or upgraded from READ_LOCK to WRITE_LOCK) when a cursor
** is opened on the table with root page BtShared.iTable. Locks are removed
** from this list when a transaction is committed or rolled back, or when
** a btree handle is closed.
** see the internals of this structure and only deals with pointers to
** this structure.
**
-** For some database files, the same underlying database cache might be
+** For some database files, the same underlying database cache might be
** shared between multiple connections. In that case, each connection
** has it own instance of this object. But each instance of this object
** points to the same BtShared object. The database cache and the
** the BtShared object.
**
** All fields in this structure are accessed under sqlite3.mutex.
-** The pBt pointer itself may not be changed while there exists cursors
+** The pBt pointer itself may not be changed while there exists cursors
** in the referenced BtShared that point back to this Btree since those
** cursors have to do go through this Btree to find their BtShared and
** they often do so without holding sqlite3.mutex.
/*
** An instance of this object represents a single database file.
-**
+**
** A single database file can be in use as the same time by two
** or more database connections. When two or more connections are
** sharing the same database file, each connection has it own
** particular database connection identified BtCursor.pBtree.db.
**
** Fields in this structure are accessed under the BtShared.mutex
-** found at self->pBt->mutex.
+** found at self->pBt->mutex.
*/
struct BtCursor {
Btree *pBtree; /* The Btree to which this cursor belongs */
** Cursor points to a valid entry. getPayload() etc. may be called.
**
** CURSOR_INVALID:
-** Cursor does not point to a valid entry. This can happen (for example)
+** Cursor does not point to a valid entry. This can happen (for example)
** because the table is empty or because BtreeCursorFirst() has not been
** called.
**
** CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK:
-** The table that this cursor was opened on still exists, but has been
+** The table that this cursor was opened on still exists, but has been
** modified since the cursor was last used. The cursor position is saved
-** in variables BtCursor.pKey and BtCursor.nKey. When a cursor is in
+** in variables BtCursor.pKey and BtCursor.nKey. When a cursor is in
** this state, restoreCursorPosition() can be called to attempt to
** seek the cursor to the saved position.
**
#define CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK 2
#define CURSOR_FAULT 3
-/*
+/*
** The database page the PENDING_BYTE occupies. This page is never used.
*/
# define PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) PAGER_MJ_PGNO(pBt)
/*
-** These macros define the location of the pointer-map entry for a
+** These macros define the location of the pointer-map entry for a
** database page. The first argument to each is the number of usable
** bytes on each page of the database (often 1024). The second is the
** page number to look up in the pointer map.
** PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE: The database page is a root-page. The page-number is not
** used in this case.
**
-** PTRMAP_FREEPAGE: The database page is an unused (free) page. The page-number
+** PTRMAP_FREEPAGE: The database page is an unused (free) page. The page-number
** is not used in this case.
**
-** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: The database page is the first page in a list of
+** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: The database page is the first page in a list of
** overflow pages. The page number identifies the page that
** contains the cell with a pointer to this overflow page.
**
*/
#define btreeIntegrity(p) \
assert( p->pBt->inTransaction!=TRANS_NONE || p->pBt->nTransaction==0 ); \
- assert( p->pBt->inTransaction>=p->inTrans );
+ assert( p->pBt->inTransaction>=p->inTrans );
/*
** The ISAUTOVACUUM macro is used within balance_nonroot() to determine
** if the database supports auto-vacuum or not. Because it is used
-** within an expression that is an argument to another macro
+** within an expression that is an argument to another macro
** (sqliteMallocRaw), it is not possible to use conditional compilation.
** So, this macro is defined instead.
*/
#endif /* NDEBUG */
/*
-** Add a new Btree pointer to a BtreeMutexArray.
+** Add a new Btree pointer to a BtreeMutexArray.
** if the pointer can possibly be shared with
** another database connection.
**
/*
** A list of BtShared objects that are eligible for participation
** in shared cache. This variable has file scope during normal builds,
-** but the test harness needs to access it so we make it global for
+** but the test harness needs to access it so we make it global for
** test builds.
**
** Access to this variable is protected by SQLITE_MUTEX_STATIC_MASTER.
** manipulate entries in the BtShared.pLock linked list used to store
** shared-cache table level locks. If the library is compiled with the
** shared-cache feature disabled, then there is only ever one user
- ** of each BtShared structure and so this locking is not necessary.
+ ** of each BtShared structure and so this locking is not necessary.
** So define the lock related functions as no-ops.
*/
#define querySharedCacheTableLock(a,b,c) SQLITE_OK
/*
**** This function is only used as part of an assert() statement. ***
**
-** Check to see if pBtree holds the required locks to read or write to the
+** Check to see if pBtree holds the required locks to read or write to the
** table with root page iRoot. Return 1 if it does and 0 if not.
**
-** For example, when writing to a table with root-page iRoot via
+** For example, when writing to a table with root-page iRoot via
** Btree connection pBtree:
**
** assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(pBtree, iRoot, 0, WRITE_LOCK) );
**
-** When writing to an index that resides in a sharable database, the
+** When writing to an index that resides in a sharable database, the
** caller should have first obtained a lock specifying the root page of
** the corresponding table. This makes things a bit more complicated,
** as this module treats each table as a separate structure. To determine
BtLock *pLock;
/* If this database is not shareable, or if the client is reading
- ** and has the read-uncommitted flag set, then no lock is required.
+ ** and has the read-uncommitted flag set, then no lock is required.
** Return true immediately.
*/
if( (pBtree->sharable==0)
iTab = iRoot;
}
- /* Search for the required lock. Either a write-lock on root-page iTab, a
+ /* Search for the required lock. Either a write-lock on root-page iTab, a
** write-lock on the schema table, or (if the client is reading) a
** read-lock on iTab will suffice. Return 1 if any of these are found. */
for(pLock=pBtree->pBt->pLock; pLock; pLock=pLock->pNext){
- if( pLock->pBtree==pBtree
+ if( pLock->pBtree==pBtree
&& (pLock->iTable==iTab || (pLock->eLock==WRITE_LOCK && pLock->iTable==1))
- && pLock->eLock>=eLockType
+ && pLock->eLock>=eLockType
){
return 1;
}
static int hasReadConflicts(Btree *pBtree, Pgno iRoot){
BtCursor *p;
for(p=pBtree->pBt->pCursor; p; p=p->pNext){
- if( p->pgnoRoot==iRoot
+ if( p->pgnoRoot==iRoot
&& p->pBtree!=pBtree
&& 0==(p->pBtree->db->flags & SQLITE_ReadUncommitted)
){
#endif /* #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG */
/*
-** Query to see if Btree handle p may obtain a lock of type eLock
+** Query to see if Btree handle p may obtain a lock of type eLock
** (READ_LOCK or WRITE_LOCK) on the table with root-page iTab. Return
** SQLITE_OK if the lock may be obtained (by calling
** setSharedCacheTableLock()), or SQLITE_LOCKED if not.
assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || eLock==WRITE_LOCK );
assert( p->db!=0 );
assert( !(p->db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommitted)||eLock==WRITE_LOCK||iTab==1 );
-
+
/* If requesting a write-lock, then the Btree must have an open write
- ** transaction on this file. And, obviously, for this to be so there
+ ** transaction on this file. And, obviously, for this to be so there
** must be an open write transaction on the file itself.
*/
assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || (p==pBt->pWriter && p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE) );
assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE );
-
+
/* This routine is a no-op if the shared-cache is not enabled */
if( !p->sharable ){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
for(pIter=pBt->pLock; pIter; pIter=pIter->pNext){
- /* The condition (pIter->eLock!=eLock) in the following if(...)
+ /* The condition (pIter->eLock!=eLock) in the following if(...)
** statement is a simplification of:
**
** (eLock==WRITE_LOCK || pIter->eLock==WRITE_LOCK)
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE
/*
** Add a lock on the table with root-page iTable to the shared-btree used
-** by Btree handle p. Parameter eLock must be either READ_LOCK or
+** by Btree handle p. Parameter eLock must be either READ_LOCK or
** WRITE_LOCK.
**
** This function assumes the following:
** with the requested lock (i.e. querySharedCacheTableLock() has
** already been called and returned SQLITE_OK).
**
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if the lock is added successfully. SQLITE_NOMEM
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if the lock is added successfully. SQLITE_NOMEM
** is returned if a malloc attempt fails.
*/
static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){
/* A connection with the read-uncommitted flag set will never try to
** obtain a read-lock using this function. The only read-lock obtained
- ** by a connection in read-uncommitted mode is on the sqlite_master
+ ** by a connection in read-uncommitted mode is on the sqlite_master
** table, and that lock is obtained in BtreeBeginTrans(). */
assert( 0==(p->db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommitted) || eLock==WRITE_LOCK );
- /* This function should only be called on a sharable b-tree after it
+ /* This function should only be called on a sharable b-tree after it
** has been determined that no other b-tree holds a conflicting lock. */
assert( p->sharable );
assert( SQLITE_OK==querySharedCacheTableLock(p, iTable, eLock) );
** Release all the table locks (locks obtained via calls to
** the setSharedCacheTableLock() procedure) held by Btree object p.
**
-** This function assumes that Btree p has an open read or write
+** This function assumes that Btree p has an open read or write
** transaction. If it does not, then the BtShared.isPending variable
** may be incorrectly cleared.
*/
pBt->isExclusive = 0;
pBt->isPending = 0;
}else if( pBt->nTransaction==2 ){
- /* This function is called when Btree p is concluding its
+ /* This function is called when Btree p is concluding its
** transaction. If there currently exists a writer, and p is not
** that writer, then the number of locks held by connections other
** than the writer must be about to drop to zero. In this case
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB */
/*
-** Set bit pgno of the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. This is called
-** when a page that previously contained data becomes a free-list leaf
+** Set bit pgno of the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. This is called
+** when a page that previously contained data becomes a free-list leaf
** page.
**
** The BtShared.pHasContent bitvec exists to work around an obscure
** may be lost. In the event of a rollback, it may not be possible
** to restore the database to its original configuration.
**
-** The solution is the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. Whenever a page is
+** The solution is the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. Whenever a page is
** moved to become a free-list leaf page, the corresponding bit is
** set in the bitvec. Whenever a leaf page is extracted from the free-list,
** optimization 2 above is omitted if the corresponding bit is already
}
/*
-** Save the current cursor position in the variables BtCursor.nKey
+** Save the current cursor position in the variables BtCursor.nKey
** and BtCursor.pKey. The cursor's state is set to CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK.
**
** The caller must ensure that the cursor is valid (has eState==CURSOR_VALID)
-** prior to calling this routine.
+** prior to calling this routine.
*/
static int saveCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){
int rc;
/* If this is an intKey table, then the above call to BtreeKeySize()
** stores the integer key in pCur->nKey. In this case this value is
** all that is required. Otherwise, if pCur is not open on an intKey
- ** table, then malloc space for and store the pCur->nKey bytes of key
+ ** table, then malloc space for and store the pCur->nKey bytes of key
** data.
*/
if( 0==pCur->apPage[0]->intKey ){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) );
assert( pExcept==0 || pExcept->pBt==pBt );
for(p=pBt->pCursor; p; p=p->pNext){
- if( p!=pExcept && (0==iRoot || p->pgnoRoot==iRoot) &&
+ if( p!=pExcept && (0==iRoot || p->pgnoRoot==iRoot) &&
p->eState==CURSOR_VALID ){
int rc = saveCursorPosition(p);
if( SQLITE_OK!=rc ){
/*
** Restore the cursor to the position it was in (or as close to as possible)
-** when saveCursorPosition() was called. Note that this call deletes the
+** when saveCursorPosition() was called. Note that this call deletes the
** saved position info stored by saveCursorPosition(), so there can be
-** at most one effective restoreCursorPosition() call after each
+** at most one effective restoreCursorPosition() call after each
** saveCursorPosition().
*/
static int btreeRestoreCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) );
nPagesPerMapPage = (pBt->usableSize/5)+1;
iPtrMap = (pgno-2)/nPagesPerMapPage;
- ret = (iPtrMap*nPagesPerMapPage) + 2;
+ ret = (iPtrMap*nPagesPerMapPage) + 2;
if( ret==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) ){
ret++;
}
/*
** Parse a cell content block and fill in the CellInfo structure. There
-** are two versions of this function. btreeParseCell() takes a
-** cell index as the second argument and btreeParseCellPtr()
+** are two versions of this function. btreeParseCell() takes a
+** cell index as the second argument and btreeParseCellPtr()
** takes a pointer to the body of the cell as its second argument.
**
** Within this file, the parseCell() macro can be called instead of
nSize = 0;
}
- /* pIter now points at the 64-bit integer key value, a variable length
+ /* pIter now points at the 64-bit integer key value, a variable length
** integer. The following block moves pIter to point at the first byte
** past the end of the key value. */
pEnd = &pIter[9];
testcase( pc==iCellLast );
#if !defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_OVERSIZE_CELL_CHECK)
/* These conditions have already been verified in btreeInitPage()
- ** if SQLITE_ENABLE_OVERSIZE_CELL_CHECK is defined
+ ** if SQLITE_ENABLE_OVERSIZE_CELL_CHECK is defined
*/
if( pc<iCellFirst || pc>iCellLast ){
return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
int gap; /* First byte of gap between cell pointers and cell content */
int rc; /* Integer return code */
int usableSize; /* Usable size of the page */
-
+
assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pPage->pDbPage) );
assert( pPage->pBt );
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pPage->pBt->mutex) );
if( rc ) return rc;
top = get2byte(&data[hdr+5]);
}else if( gap+2<=top ){
- /* Search the freelist looking for a free slot big enough to satisfy
- ** the request. The allocation is made from the first free slot in
+ /* Search the freelist looking for a free slot big enough to satisfy
+ ** the request. The allocation is made from the first free slot in
** the list that is large enough to accomadate it.
*/
int pc, addr;
** Initialize the auxiliary information for a disk block.
**
** Return SQLITE_OK on success. If we see that the page does
-** not contain a well-formed database page, then return
+** not contain a well-formed database page, then return
** SQLITE_CORRUPT. Note that a return of SQLITE_OK does not
** guarantee that the page is well-formed. It only shows that
** we failed to detect any corruption.
testcase( pPage->nCell==MX_CELL(pBt) );
/* A malformed database page might cause us to read past the end
- ** of page when parsing a cell.
+ ** of page when parsing a cell.
**
** The following block of code checks early to see if a cell extends
- ** past the end of a page boundary and causes SQLITE_CORRUPT to be
+ ** past the end of a page boundary and causes SQLITE_CORRUPT to be
** returned if it does.
*/
iCellFirst = cellOffset + 2*pPage->nCell;
}
}
if( !pPage->leaf ) iCellLast++;
- }
+ }
#endif
/* Compute the total free space on the page */
u16 next, size;
if( pc<iCellFirst || pc>iCellLast ){
/* Start of free block is off the page */
- return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
+ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}
next = get2byte(&data[pc]);
size = get2byte(&data[pc+2]);
if( (next>0 && next<=pc+size+3) || pc+size>usableSize ){
/* Free blocks must be in ascending order. And the last byte of
** the free-block must lie on the database page. */
- return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
+ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}
nFree = nFree + size;
pc = next;
** area, according to the page header, lies within the page.
*/
if( nFree>usableSize ){
- return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
+ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}
pPage->nFree = (u16)(nFree - iCellFirst);
pPage->isInit = 1;
pPage->pBt = pBt;
pPage->pgno = pgno;
pPage->hdrOffset = pPage->pgno==1 ? 100 : 0;
- return pPage;
+ return pPage;
}
/*
/*
** Get a page from the pager and initialize it. This routine is just a
-** convenience wrapper around separate calls to btreeGetPage() and
+** convenience wrapper around separate calls to btreeGetPage() and
** btreeInitPage().
**
** If an error occurs, then the value *ppPage is set to is undefined. It
/*
** Open a database file.
-**
+**
** zFilename is the name of the database file. If zFilename is NULL
** a new database with a random name is created. This randomly named
** database file will be deleted when sqlite3BtreeClose() is called.
u8 nReserve; /* Byte of unused space on each page */
unsigned char zDbHeader[100]; /* Database header content */
- /* Set the variable isMemdb to true for an in-memory database, or
+ /* Set the variable isMemdb to true for an in-memory database, or
** false for a file-based database. This symbol is only required if
- ** either of the shared-data or autovacuum features are compiled
+ ** either of the shared-data or autovacuum features are compiled
** into the library.
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM)
assert( sizeof(u32)==4 );
assert( sizeof(u16)==2 );
assert( sizeof(Pgno)==4 );
-
+
pBt = sqlite3MallocZero( sizeof(*pBt) );
if( pBt==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
pBt->db = db;
sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler(pBt->pPager, btreeInvokeBusyHandler, pBt);
p->pBt = pBt;
-
+
pBt->pCursor = 0;
pBt->pPage1 = 0;
pBt->readOnly = sqlite3PagerIsreadonly(pBt->pPager);
if( rc ) goto btree_open_out;
pBt->usableSize = pBt->pageSize - nReserve;
assert( (pBt->pageSize & 7)==0 ); /* 8-byte alignment of pageSize */
-
+
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_DISKIO)
/* Add the new BtShared object to the linked list sharable BtShareds.
*/
}
/*
-** Make sure pBt->pTmpSpace points to an allocation of
+** Make sure pBt->pTmpSpace points to an allocation of
** MX_CELL_SIZE(pBt) bytes.
*/
static void allocateTempSpace(BtShared *pBt){
sqlite3BtreeLeave(p);
/* If there are still other outstanding references to the shared-btree
- ** structure, return now. The remainder of this procedure cleans
+ ** structure, return now. The remainder of this procedure cleans
** up the shared-btree.
*/
assert( p->wantToLock==0 && p->locked==0 );
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSyncDisabled(Btree *p){
BtShared *pBt = p->pBt;
int rc;
- assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(p->db->mutex) );
+ assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(p->db->mutex) );
sqlite3BtreeEnter(p);
assert( pBt && pBt->pPager );
rc = sqlite3PagerNosync(pBt->pPager);
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VACUUM)
/*
** Change the default pages size and the number of reserved bytes per page.
-** Or, if the page size has already been fixed, return SQLITE_READONLY
+** Or, if the page size has already been fixed, return SQLITE_READONLY
** without changing anything.
**
** The page size must be a power of 2 between 512 and 65536. If the page
sqlite3BtreeEnter(p);
if( newFlag>=0 ){
p->pBt->secureDelete = (newFlag!=0) ? 1 : 0;
- }
+ }
b = p->pBt->secureDelete;
sqlite3BtreeLeave(p);
return b;
/*
** Change the 'auto-vacuum' property of the database. If the 'autoVacuum'
** parameter is non-zero, then auto-vacuum mode is enabled. If zero, it
-** is disabled. The default value for the auto-vacuum property is
+** is disabled. The default value for the auto-vacuum property is
** determined by the SQLITE_DEFAULT_AUTOVACUUM macro.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(Btree *p, int autoVacuum){
}
/*
-** Return the value of the 'auto-vacuum' property. If auto-vacuum is
+** Return the value of the 'auto-vacuum' property. If auto-vacuum is
** enabled 1 is returned. Otherwise 0.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeGetAutoVacuum(Btree *p){
** SQLITE_OK is returned on success. If the file is not a
** well-formed database file, then SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned.
** SQLITE_BUSY is returned if the database is locked. SQLITE_NOMEM
-** is returned if we run out of memory.
+** is returned if we run out of memory.
*/
static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
int rc;
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
/* Do some checking to help insure the file we opened really is
- ** a valid database file.
+ ** a valid database file.
*/
rc = sqlite3PagerPagecount(pBt->pPager, &nPage);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
/*
** If there are no outstanding cursors and we are not in the middle
** of a transaction but there is a read lock on the database, then
-** this routine unrefs the first page of the database file which
+** this routine unrefs the first page of the database file which
** has the effect of releasing the read lock.
**
** If there is a transaction in progress, this routine is a no-op.
** upgraded to exclusive by calling this routine a second time - the
** exclusivity flag only works for a new transaction.
**
-** A write-transaction must be started before attempting any
-** changes to the database. None of the following routines
+** A write-transaction must be started before attempting any
+** changes to the database. None of the following routines
** will work unless a transaction is started first:
**
** sqlite3BtreeCreateTable()
** If an initial attempt to acquire the lock fails because of lock contention
** and the database was previously unlocked, then invoke the busy handler
** if there is one. But if there was previously a read-lock, do not
-** invoke the busy handler - just return SQLITE_BUSY. SQLITE_BUSY is
+** invoke the busy handler - just return SQLITE_BUSY. SQLITE_BUSY is
** returned when there is already a read-lock in order to avoid a deadlock.
**
** Suppose there are two processes A and B. A has a read lock and B has
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE
- /* If another database handle has already opened a write transaction
+ /* If another database handle has already opened a write transaction
** on this shared-btree structure and a second write transaction is
** requested, return SQLITE_LOCKED.
*/
}
#endif
- /* Any read-only or read-write transaction implies a read-lock on
- ** page 1. So if some other shared-cache client already has a write-lock
+ /* Any read-only or read-write transaction implies a read-lock on
+ ** page 1. So if some other shared-cache client already has a write-lock
** on page 1, the transaction cannot be opened. */
rc = querySharedCacheTableLock(p, MASTER_ROOT, READ_LOCK);
if( SQLITE_OK!=rc ) goto trans_begun;
/* Call lockBtree() until either pBt->pPage1 is populated or
** lockBtree() returns something other than SQLITE_OK. lockBtree()
** may return SQLITE_OK but leave pBt->pPage1 set to 0 if after
- ** reading page 1 it discovers that the page-size of the database
+ ** reading page 1 it discovers that the page-size of the database
** file is not pBt->pageSize. In this case lockBtree() will update
** pBt->pageSize to the page-size of the file on disk.
*/
}
}
}
-
+
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
unlockBtreeIfUnused(pBt);
}
** that it points to iTo. Parameter eType describes the type of pointer to
** be modified, as follows:
**
-** PTRMAP_BTREE: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at a child
+** PTRMAP_BTREE: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at a child
** page of pPage.
**
** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at an overflow
}
}
}
-
+
if( i==nCell ){
- if( eType!=PTRMAP_BTREE ||
+ if( eType!=PTRMAP_BTREE ||
get4byte(&pPage->aData[pPage->hdrOffset+8])!=iFrom ){
return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}
/*
-** Move the open database page pDbPage to location iFreePage in the
+** Move the open database page pDbPage to location iFreePage in the
** database. The pDbPage reference remains valid.
**
** The isCommit flag indicates that there is no need to remember that
-** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pDbPage->pgno
+** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pDbPage->pgno
** can be written to. The caller has already promised not to write to that
** page.
*/
Pager *pPager = pBt->pPager;
int rc;
- assert( eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2 || eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 ||
+ assert( eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2 || eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 ||
eType==PTRMAP_BTREE || eType==PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE );
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) );
assert( pDbPage->pBt==pBt );
/* Move page iDbPage from its current location to page number iFreePage */
- TRACE(("AUTOVACUUM: Moving %d to free page %d (ptr page %d type %d)\n",
+ TRACE(("AUTOVACUUM: Moving %d to free page %d (ptr page %d type %d)\n",
iDbPage, iFreePage, iPtrPage, eType));
rc = sqlite3PagerMovepage(pPager, pDbPage->pDbPage, iFreePage, isCommit);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
** return SQLITE_OK. If there is no work to do (and therefore no
** point in calling this function again), return SQLITE_DONE.
**
-** More specificly, this function attempts to re-organize the
+** More specificly, this function attempts to re-organize the
** database so that the last page of the file currently in use
** is no longer in use.
**
** If the nFin parameter is non-zero, this function assumes
** that the caller will keep calling incrVacuumStep() until
** it returns SQLITE_DONE or an error, and that nFin is the
-** number of pages the database file will contain after this
+** number of pages the database file will contain after this
** process is complete. If nFin is zero, it is assumed that
** incrVacuumStep() will be called a finite amount of times
** which may or may not empty the freelist. A full autovacuum
if( nFin==0 ){
/* Remove the page from the files free-list. This is not required
** if nFin is non-zero. In that case, the free-list will be
- ** truncated to zero after this function returns, so it doesn't
+ ** truncated to zero after this function returns, so it doesn't
** matter if it still contains some garbage entries.
*/
Pgno iFreePg;
releasePage(pFreePg);
}while( nFin!=0 && iFreePg>nFin );
assert( iFreePg<iLastPg );
-
+
rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pLastPg->pDbPage);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = relocatePage(pBt, pLastPg, eType, iPtrPage, iFreePg, nFin!=0);
**
** If the incremental vacuum is finished after this function has run,
** SQLITE_DONE is returned. If it is not finished, but no error occurred,
-** SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise an SQLite error code.
+** SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise an SQLite error code.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeIncrVacuum(Btree *p){
int rc;
** is commited for an auto-vacuum database.
**
** If SQLITE_OK is returned, then *pnTrunc is set to the number of pages
-** the database file should be truncated to during the commit process.
+** the database file should be truncated to during the commit process.
** i.e. the database has been reorganized so that only the first *pnTrunc
** pages are in use.
*/
**
** Otherwise, sync the database file for the btree pBt. zMaster points to
** the name of a master journal file that should be written into the
-** individual journal file, or is NULL, indicating no master journal file
+** individual journal file, or is NULL, indicating no master journal file
** (single database transaction).
**
** When this is called, the master journal should already have been
downgradeAllSharedCacheTableLocks(p);
p->inTrans = TRANS_READ;
}else{
- /* If the handle had any kind of transaction open, decrement the
- ** transaction count of the shared btree. If the transaction count
+ /* If the handle had any kind of transaction open, decrement the
+ ** transaction count of the shared btree. If the transaction count
** reaches 0, set the shared state to TRANS_NONE. The unlockBtreeIfUnused()
** call below will unlock the pager. */
if( p->inTrans!=TRANS_NONE ){
}
}
- /* Set the current transaction state to TRANS_NONE and unlock the
+ /* Set the current transaction state to TRANS_NONE and unlock the
** pager if this call closed the only read or write transaction. */
p->inTrans = TRANS_NONE;
unlockBtreeIfUnused(pBt);
sqlite3BtreeEnter(p);
btreeIntegrity(p);
- /* If the handle has a write-transaction open, commit the shared-btrees
+ /* If the handle has a write-transaction open, commit the shared-btrees
** transaction and set the shared state to TRANS_READ.
*/
if( p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE ){
BtCursor *pCur;
int r = 0;
for(pCur=pBt->pCursor; pCur; pCur=pCur->pNext){
- if( pCur->wrFlag && pCur->eState!=CURSOR_FAULT ) r++;
+ if( pCur->wrFlag && pCur->eState!=CURSOR_FAULT ) r++;
}
return r;
}
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
/* This is a horrible situation. An IO or malloc() error occurred whilst
** trying to save cursor positions. If this is an automatic rollback (as
- ** the result of a constraint, malloc() failure or IO error) then
+ ** the result of a constraint, malloc() failure or IO error) then
** the cache may be internally inconsistent (not contain valid trees) so
- ** we cannot simply return the error to the caller. Instead, abort
+ ** we cannot simply return the error to the caller. Instead, abort
** all queries that may be using any of the cursors that failed to save.
*/
sqlite3BtreeTripAllCursors(p, rc);
/*
** Start a statement subtransaction. The subtransaction can can be rolled
-** back independently of the main transaction. You must start a transaction
-** before starting a subtransaction. The subtransaction is ended automatically
+** back independently of the main transaction. You must start a transaction
+** before starting a subtransaction. The subtransaction is ended automatically
** if the main transaction commits or rolls back.
**
** Statement subtransactions are used around individual SQL statements
/*
** The second argument to this function, op, is always SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK
** or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. This function either releases or rolls back the
-** savepoint identified by parameter iSavepoint, depending on the value
+** savepoint identified by parameter iSavepoint, depending on the value
** of op.
**
** Normally, iSavepoint is greater than or equal to zero. However, if op is
-** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then iSavepoint may also be -1. In this case the
+** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then iSavepoint may also be -1. In this case the
** contents of the entire transaction are rolled back. This is different
** from a normal transaction rollback, as no locks are released and the
** transaction remains open.
assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(p) );
assert( wrFlag==0 || wrFlag==1 );
- /* The following assert statements verify that if this is a sharable
- ** b-tree database, the connection is holding the required table locks,
- ** and that no other connection has any open cursor that conflicts with
+ /* The following assert statements verify that if this is a sharable
+ ** b-tree database, the connection is holding the required table locks,
+ ** and that no other connection has any open cursor that conflicts with
** this lock. */
assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(p, iTable, pKeyInfo!=0, wrFlag+1) );
assert( wrFlag==0 || !hasReadConflicts(p, iTable) );
/*
** Set *pSize to the size of the buffer needed to hold the value of
** the key for the current entry. If the cursor is not pointing
-** to a valid entry, *pSize is set to 0.
+** to a valid entry, *pSize is set to 0.
**
** For a table with the INTKEY flag set, this routine returns the key
** itself, not the number of bytes in the key.
**
** The caller must position the cursor prior to invoking this routine.
-**
-** This routine cannot fail. It always returns SQLITE_OK.
+**
+** This routine cannot fail. It always returns SQLITE_OK.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeKeySize(BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pSize){
assert( cursorHoldsMutex(pCur) );
/*
** Given the page number of an overflow page in the database (parameter
-** ovfl), this function finds the page number of the next page in the
+** ovfl), this function finds the page number of the next page in the
** linked list of overflow pages. If possible, it uses the auto-vacuum
-** pointer-map data instead of reading the content of page ovfl to do so.
+** pointer-map data instead of reading the content of page ovfl to do so.
**
** If an error occurs an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise:
**
-** The page number of the next overflow page in the linked list is
-** written to *pPgnoNext. If page ovfl is the last page in its linked
-** list, *pPgnoNext is set to zero.
+** The page number of the next overflow page in the linked list is
+** written to *pPgnoNext. If page ovfl is the last page in its linked
+** list, *pPgnoNext is set to zero.
**
** If ppPage is not NULL, and a reference to the MemPage object corresponding
** to page number pOvfl was obtained, then *ppPage is set to point to that
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
/* Try to find the next page in the overflow list using the
- ** autovacuum pointer-map pages. Guess that the next page in
- ** the overflow list is page number (ovfl+1). If that guess turns
- ** out to be wrong, fall back to loading the data of page
+ ** autovacuum pointer-map pages. Guess that the next page in
+ ** the overflow list is page number (ovfl+1). If that guess turns
+ ** out to be wrong, fall back to loading the data of page
** number ovfl to determine the next page number.
*/
if( pBt->autoVacuum ){
**
** If the BtCursor.isIncrblobHandle flag is set, and the current
** cursor entry uses one or more overflow pages, this function
-** allocates space for and lazily popluates the overflow page-list
+** allocates space for and lazily popluates the overflow page-list
** cache array (BtCursor.aOverflow). Subsequent calls use this
** cache to make seeking to the supplied offset more efficient.
**
BtCursor *pCur, /* Cursor pointing to entry to read from */
u32 offset, /* Begin reading this far into payload */
u32 amt, /* Read this many bytes */
- unsigned char *pBuf, /* Write the bytes into this buffer */
+ unsigned char *pBuf, /* Write the bytes into this buffer */
int eOp /* zero to read. non-zero to write. */
){
unsigned char *aPayload;
aPayload = pCur->info.pCell + pCur->info.nHeader;
nKey = (pPage->intKey ? 0 : (int)pCur->info.nKey);
- if( NEVER(offset+amt > nKey+pCur->info.nData)
+ if( NEVER(offset+amt > nKey+pCur->info.nData)
|| &aPayload[pCur->info.nLocal] > &pPage->aData[pBt->usableSize]
){
/* Trying to read or write past the end of the data is an error */
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB
if( pCur->aOverflow && pCur->aOverflow[iIdx+1] ){
nextPage = pCur->aOverflow[iIdx+1];
- } else
+ } else
#endif
rc = getOverflowPage(pBt, nextPage, 0, &nextPage);
offset -= ovflSize;
}
/*
-** Return a pointer to payload information from the entry that the
+** Return a pointer to payload information from the entry that the
** pCur cursor is pointing to. The pointer is to the beginning of
** the key if skipKey==0 and it points to the beginning of data if
** skipKey==1. The number of bytes of available key/data is written
#ifndef NDEBUG
/*
-** Page pParent is an internal (non-leaf) tree page. This function
+** Page pParent is an internal (non-leaf) tree page. This function
** asserts that page number iChild is the left-child if the iIdx'th
** cell in page pParent. Or, if iIdx is equal to the total number of
** cells in pParent, that page number iChild is the right-child of
}
}
#else
-# define assertParentIndex(x,y,z)
+# define assertParentIndex(x,y,z)
#endif
/*
assert( pCur->iPage>0 );
assert( pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage] );
assertParentIndex(
- pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1],
- pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1],
+ pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1],
+ pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1],
pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage]->pgno
);
releasePage(pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage]);
**
** If the table has a virtual root page, then the cursor is moved to point
** to the virtual root page instead of the actual root page. A table has a
-** virtual root page when the actual root page contains no cells and a
+** virtual root page when the actual root page contains no cells and a
** single child page. This can only happen with the table rooted at page 1.
**
-** If the b-tree structure is empty, the cursor state is set to
+** If the b-tree structure is empty, the cursor state is set to
** CURSOR_INVALID. Otherwise, the cursor is set to point to the first
** cell located on the root (or virtual root) page and the cursor state
** is set to CURSOR_VALID.
**
** If this function returns successfully, it may be assumed that the
-** page-header flags indicate that the [virtual] root-page is the expected
+** page-header flags indicate that the [virtual] root-page is the expected
** kind of b-tree page (i.e. if when opening the cursor the caller did not
** specify a KeyInfo structure the flags byte is set to 0x05 or 0x0D,
-** indicating a table b-tree, or if the caller did specify a KeyInfo
+** indicating a table b-tree, or if the caller did specify a KeyInfo
** structure the flags byte is set to 0x02 or 0x0A, indicating an index
** b-tree).
*/
/* Assert that the root page is of the correct type. This must be the
** case as the call to this function that loaded the root-page (either
- ** this call or a previous invocation) would have detected corruption
- ** if the assumption were not true, and it is not possible for the flags
+ ** this call or a previous invocation) would have detected corruption
+ ** if the assumption were not true, and it is not possible for the flags
** byte to have been modified while this cursor is holding a reference
** to the page. */
pRoot = pCur->apPage[0];
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
int rc;
-
+
assert( cursorHoldsMutex(pCur) );
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCur->pBtree->db->mutex) );
/* If the cursor already points to the last entry, this is a no-op. */
if( CURSOR_VALID==pCur->eState && pCur->atLast ){
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
- /* This block serves to assert() that the cursor really does point
+ /* This block serves to assert() that the cursor really does point
** to the last entry in the b-tree. */
int ii;
for(ii=0; ii<pCur->iPage; ii++){
return rc;
}
-/* Move the cursor so that it points to an entry near the key
+/* Move the cursor so that it points to an entry near the key
** specified by pIdxKey or intKey. Return a success code.
**
-** For INTKEY tables, the intKey parameter is used. pIdxKey
+** For INTKEY tables, the intKey parameter is used. pIdxKey
** must be NULL. For index tables, pIdxKey is used and intKey
** is ignored.
**
** before or after the key.
**
** An integer is written into *pRes which is the result of
-** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is
+** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is
** pointing. The meaning of the integer written into
** *pRes is as follows:
**
/* If the cursor is already positioned at the point we are trying
** to move to, then just return without doing any work */
- if( pCur->eState==CURSOR_VALID && pCur->validNKey
- && pCur->apPage[0]->intKey
+ if( pCur->eState==CURSOR_VALID && pCur->validNKey
+ && pCur->apPage[0]->intKey
){
if( pCur->info.nKey==intKey ){
*pRes = 0;
/* The maximum supported page-size is 32768 bytes. This means that
** the maximum number of record bytes stored on an index B-Tree
** page is at most 8198 bytes, which may be stored as a 2-byte
- ** varint. This information is used to attempt to avoid parsing
- ** the entire cell by checking for the cases where the record is
- ** stored entirely within the b-tree page by inspecting the first
+ ** varint. This information is used to attempt to avoid parsing
+ ** the entire cell by checking for the cases where the record is
+ ** stored entirely within the b-tree page by inspecting the first
** 2 bytes of the cell.
*/
int nCell = pCell[0];
** single byte varint and the record fits entirely on the main
** b-tree page. */
c = sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[1], pIdxKey);
- }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80)
+ }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80)
&& (nCell = ((nCell&0x7f)<<7) + pCell[1])<=pPage->maxLocal
){
- /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record
+ /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record
** fits entirely on the main b-tree page. */
c = sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[2], pIdxKey);
}else{
** an error. *ppPage and *pPgno are undefined in the event of an error.
** Do not invoke sqlite3PagerUnref() on *ppPage if an error is returned.
**
-** If the "nearby" parameter is not 0, then a (feeble) effort is made to
+** If the "nearby" parameter is not 0, then a (feeble) effort is made to
** locate a page close to the page number "nearby". This can be used in an
** attempt to keep related pages close to each other in the database file,
** which in turn can make database access faster.
**
-** If the "exact" parameter is not 0, and the page-number nearby exists
+** If the "exact" parameter is not 0, and the page-number nearby exists
** anywhere on the free-list, then it is guarenteed to be returned. This
** is only used by auto-vacuum databases when allocating a new table.
*/
static int allocateBtreePage(
- BtShared *pBt,
- MemPage **ppPage,
- Pgno *pPgno,
+ BtShared *pBt,
+ MemPage **ppPage,
+ Pgno *pPgno,
Pgno nearby,
u8 exact
){
/* There are pages on the freelist. Reuse one of those pages. */
Pgno iTrunk;
u8 searchList = 0; /* If the free-list must be searched for 'nearby' */
-
+
/* If the 'exact' parameter was true and a query of the pointer-map
** shows that the page 'nearby' is somewhere on the free-list, then
** the entire-list will be searched for that page.
k = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[4]);
if( k==0 && !searchList ){
- /* The trunk has no leaves and the list is not being searched.
- ** So extract the trunk page itself and use it as the newly
+ /* The trunk has no leaves and the list is not being searched.
+ ** So extract the trunk page itself and use it as the newly
** allocated page */
assert( pPrevTrunk==0 );
rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pTrunk->pDbPage);
memcpy(&pPrevTrunk->aData[0], &pTrunk->aData[0], 4);
}
}else{
- /* The trunk page is required by the caller but it contains
+ /* The trunk page is required by the caller but it contains
** pointers to free-list leaves. The first leaf becomes a trunk
** page in this case.
*/
MemPage *pNewTrunk;
Pgno iNewTrunk = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[8]);
- if( iNewTrunk>mxPage ){
+ if( iNewTrunk>mxPage ){
rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
goto end_allocate_page;
}
}
/*
-** This function is used to add page iPage to the database file free-list.
+** This function is used to add page iPage to the database file free-list.
** It is assumed that the page is not already a part of the free-list.
**
** The value passed as the second argument to this function is optional.
-** If the caller happens to have a pointer to the MemPage object
-** corresponding to page iPage handy, it may pass it as the second value.
+** If the caller happens to have a pointer to the MemPage object
+** corresponding to page iPage handy, it may pass it as the second value.
** Otherwise, it may pass NULL.
**
** If a pointer to a MemPage object is passed as the second argument,
*/
static int freePage2(BtShared *pBt, MemPage *pMemPage, Pgno iPage){
MemPage *pTrunk = 0; /* Free-list trunk page */
- Pgno iTrunk = 0; /* Page number of free-list trunk page */
+ Pgno iTrunk = 0; /* Page number of free-list trunk page */
MemPage *pPage1 = pBt->pPage1; /* Local reference to page 1 */
MemPage *pPage; /* Page being freed. May be NULL. */
int rc; /* Return Code */
/* If control flows to this point, then it was not possible to add the
** the page being freed as a leaf page of the first trunk in the free-list.
- ** Possibly because the free-list is empty, or possibly because the
+ ** Possibly because the free-list is empty, or possibly because the
** first trunk in the free-list is full. Either way, the page being freed
** will become the new first trunk page in the free-list.
*/
Pgno iNext = 0;
MemPage *pOvfl = 0;
if( ovflPgno<2 || ovflPgno>pagerPagecount(pBt) ){
- /* 0 is not a legal page number and page 1 cannot be an
- ** overflow page. Therefore if ovflPgno<2 or past the end of the
+ /* 0 is not a legal page number and page 1 cannot be an
+ ** overflow page. Therefore if ovflPgno<2 or past the end of the
** file the database must be corrupt. */
return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}
if( ( pOvfl || ((pOvfl = btreePageLookup(pBt, ovflPgno))!=0) )
&& sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pOvfl->pDbPage)!=1
){
- /* There is no reason any cursor should have an outstanding reference
+ /* There is no reason any cursor should have an outstanding reference
** to an overflow page belonging to a cell that is being deleted/updated.
- ** So if there exists more than one reference to this page, then it
- ** must not really be an overflow page and the database must be corrupt.
- ** It is helpful to detect this before calling freePage2(), as
+ ** So if there exists more than one reference to this page, then it
+ ** must not really be an overflow page and the database must be corrupt.
+ ** It is helpful to detect this before calling freePage2(), as
** freePage2() may zero the page contents if secure-delete mode is
** enabled. If this 'overflow' page happens to be a page that the
** caller is iterating through or using in some other way, this
assert( info.nHeader==nHeader );
assert( info.nKey==nKey );
assert( info.nData==(u32)(nData+nZero) );
-
+
/* Fill in the payload */
nPayload = nData + nZero;
if( pPage->intKey ){
pSrc = pData;
nSrc = nData;
nData = 0;
- }else{
+ }else{
if( NEVER(nKey>0x7fffffff || pKey==0) ){
return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}
if( pBt->autoVacuum ){
do{
pgnoOvfl++;
- } while(
- PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, pgnoOvfl) || pgnoOvfl==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt)
+ } while(
+ PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, pgnoOvfl) || pgnoOvfl==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt)
);
}
#endif
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
/* If the database supports auto-vacuum, and the second or subsequent
** overflow page is being allocated, add an entry to the pointer-map
- ** for that page now.
+ ** for that page now.
**
- ** If this is the first overflow page, then write a partial entry
+ ** If this is the first overflow page, then write a partial entry
** to the pointer-map. If we write nothing to this pointer-map slot,
** then the optimistic overflow chain processing in clearCell()
** may misinterpret the uninitialised values and delete the
** will not fit, then make a copy of the cell content into pTemp if
** pTemp is not null. Regardless of pTemp, allocate a new entry
** in pPage->aOvfl[] and make it point to the cell content (either
-** in pTemp or the original pCell) and also record its index.
-** Allocating a new entry in pPage->aCell[] implies that
+** in pTemp or the original pCell) and also record its index.
+** Allocating a new entry in pPage->aCell[] implies that
** pPage->nOverflow is incremented.
**
** If nSkip is non-zero, then do not copy the first nSkip bytes of the
** cell. The caller will overwrite them after this function returns. If
-** nSkip is non-zero, then pCell may not point to an invalid memory location
+** nSkip is non-zero, then pCell may not point to an invalid memory location
** (but pCell+nSkip is always valid).
*/
static void insertCell(
if( pPage->nCell<=0 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
- /* Allocate a new page. This page will become the right-sibling of
+ /* Allocate a new page. This page will become the right-sibling of
** pPage. Make the parent page writable, so that the new divider cell
** may be inserted. If both these operations are successful, proceed.
*/
assemblePage(pNew, 1, &pCell, &szCell);
/* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer map
- ** with entries for the new page, and any pointer from the
+ ** with entries for the new page, and any pointer from the
** cell on the page to an overflow page. If either of these
** operations fails, the return code is set, but the contents
** of the parent page are still manipulated by thh code below.
ptrmapPutOvflPtr(pNew, pCell, &rc);
}
}
-
+
/* Create a divider cell to insert into pParent. The divider cell
** consists of a 4-byte page number (the page number of pPage) and
** a variable length key value (which must be the same value as the
** largest key on pPage).
**
- ** To find the largest key value on pPage, first find the right-most
- ** cell on pPage. The first two fields of this cell are the
+ ** To find the largest key value on pPage, first find the right-most
+ ** cell on pPage. The first two fields of this cell are the
** record-length (a variable length integer at most 32-bits in size)
** and the key value (a variable length integer, may have any value).
** The first of the while(...) loops below skips over the record-length
/* Set the right-child pointer of pParent to point to the new page. */
put4byte(&pParent->aData[pParent->hdrOffset+8], pgnoNew);
-
+
/* Release the reference to the new page. */
releasePage(pNew);
}
#if 0
/*
** This function does not contribute anything to the operation of SQLite.
-** it is sometimes activated temporarily while debugging code responsible
+** it is sometimes activated temporarily while debugging code responsible
** for setting pointer-map entries.
*/
static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){
for(j=0; j<pPage->nCell; j++){
CellInfo info;
u8 *z;
-
+
z = findCell(pPage, j);
btreeParseCellPtr(pPage, z, &info);
if( info.iOverflow ){
#endif
/*
-** This function is used to copy the contents of the b-tree node stored
+** This function is used to copy the contents of the b-tree node stored
** on page pFrom to page pTo. If page pFrom was not a leaf page, then
** the pointer-map entries for each child page are updated so that the
** parent page stored in the pointer map is page pTo. If pFrom contained
** map entries are also updated so that the parent page is page pTo.
**
** If pFrom is currently carrying any overflow cells (entries in the
-** MemPage.aOvfl[] array), they are not copied to pTo.
+** MemPage.aOvfl[] array), they are not copied to pTo.
**
** Before returning, page pTo is reinitialized using btreeInitPage().
**
-** The performance of this function is not critical. It is only used by
+** The performance of this function is not critical. It is only used by
** the balance_shallower() and balance_deeper() procedures, neither of
** which are called often under normal circumstances.
*/
int const iToHdr = ((pTo->pgno==1) ? 100 : 0);
int rc;
int iData;
-
-
+
+
assert( pFrom->isInit );
assert( pFrom->nFree>=iToHdr );
assert( get2byte(&aFrom[iFromHdr+5])<=pBt->usableSize );
-
+
/* Copy the b-tree node content from page pFrom to page pTo. */
iData = get2byte(&aFrom[iFromHdr+5]);
memcpy(&aTo[iData], &aFrom[iData], pBt->usableSize-iData);
memcpy(&aTo[iToHdr], &aFrom[iFromHdr], pFrom->cellOffset + 2*pFrom->nCell);
-
+
/* Reinitialize page pTo so that the contents of the MemPage structure
** match the new data. The initialization of pTo can actually fail under
- ** fairly obscure circumstances, even though it is a copy of initialized
+ ** fairly obscure circumstances, even though it is a copy of initialized
** page pFrom.
*/
pTo->isInit = 0;
*pRC = rc;
return;
}
-
+
/* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer-map entries
** for any b-tree or overflow pages that pTo now contains the pointers to.
*/
** (hereafter "the page") and up to 2 siblings so that all pages have about the
** same amount of free space. Usually a single sibling on either side of the
** page are used in the balancing, though both siblings might come from one
-** side if the page is the first or last child of its parent. If the page
+** side if the page is the first or last child of its parent. If the page
** has fewer than 2 siblings (something which can only happen if the page
** is a root page or a child of a root page) then all available siblings
** participate in the balancing.
**
-** The number of siblings of the page might be increased or decreased by
-** one or two in an effort to keep pages nearly full but not over full.
+** The number of siblings of the page might be increased or decreased by
+** one or two in an effort to keep pages nearly full but not over full.
**
** Note that when this routine is called, some of the cells on the page
** might not actually be stored in MemPage.aData[]. This can happen
** inserted into or removed from the parent page (pParent). Doing so
** may cause the parent page to become overfull or underfull. If this
** happens, it is the responsibility of the caller to invoke the correct
-** balancing routine to fix this problem (see the balance() routine).
+** balancing routine to fix this problem (see the balance() routine).
**
** If this routine fails for any reason, it might leave the database
** in a corrupted state. So if this routine fails, the database should
** of the page-size, the aOvflSpace[] buffer is guaranteed to be large
** enough for all overflow cells.
**
-** If aOvflSpace is set to a null pointer, this function returns
+** If aOvflSpace is set to a null pointer, this function returns
** SQLITE_NOMEM.
*/
static int balance_nonroot(
#endif
/* At this point pParent may have at most one overflow cell. And if
- ** this overflow cell is present, it must be the cell with
+ ** this overflow cell is present, it must be the cell with
** index iParentIdx. This scenario comes about when this function
** is called (indirectly) from sqlite3BtreeDelete().
*/
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
- /* Find the sibling pages to balance. Also locate the cells in pParent
- ** that divide the siblings. An attempt is made to find NN siblings on
- ** either side of pPage. More siblings are taken from one side, however,
+ /* Find the sibling pages to balance. Also locate the cells in pParent
+ ** that divide the siblings. An attempt is made to find NN siblings on
+ ** either side of pPage. More siblings are taken from one side, however,
** if there are fewer than NN siblings on the other side. If pParent
- ** has NB or fewer children then all children of pParent are taken.
+ ** has NB or fewer children then all children of pParent are taken.
**
** This loop also drops the divider cells from the parent page. This
** way, the remainder of the function does not have to deal with any
nOld = i+1;
}else{
nOld = 3;
- if( iParentIdx==0 ){
+ if( iParentIdx==0 ){
nxDiv = 0;
}else if( iParentIdx==i ){
nxDiv = i-2;
** This is safe because dropping a cell only overwrites the first
** four bytes of it, and this function does not need the first
** four bytes of the divider cell. So the pointer is safe to use
- ** later on.
+ ** later on.
**
** Unless SQLite is compiled in secure-delete mode. In this case,
** the dropCell() routine will overwrite the entire cell with zeroes.
+ nMaxCells*sizeof(u16) /* szCell */
+ pBt->pageSize /* aSpace1 */
+ k*nOld; /* Page copies (apCopy) */
- apCell = sqlite3ScratchMalloc( szScratch );
+ apCell = sqlite3ScratchMalloc( szScratch );
if( apCell==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
goto balance_cleanup;
leafData = apOld[0]->hasData;
for(i=0; i<nOld; i++){
int limit;
-
+
/* Before doing anything else, take a copy of the i'th original sibling
** The rest of this function will use data from the copies rather
** that the original pages since the original pages will be in the
** Figure out the number of pages needed to hold all nCell cells.
** Store this number in "k". Also compute szNew[] which is the total
** size of all cells on the i-th page and cntNew[] which is the index
- ** in apCell[] of the cell that divides page i from page i+1.
+ ** in apCell[] of the cell that divides page i from page i+1.
** cntNew[k] should equal nCell.
**
** Values computed by this block:
** cntNew[i]: Index in apCell[] and szCell[] for the first cell to
** the right of the i-th sibling page.
** usableSpace: Number of bytes of space available on each sibling.
- **
+ **
*/
usableSpace = pBt->usableSize - 12 + leafCorrection;
for(subtotal=k=i=0; i<nCell; i++){
assert( cntNew[0]>0 || (pParent->pgno==1 && pParent->nCell==0) );
TRACE(("BALANCE: old: %d %d %d ",
- apOld[0]->pgno,
+ apOld[0]->pgno,
nOld>=2 ? apOld[1]->pgno : 0,
nOld>=3 ? apOld[2]->pgno : 0
));
if( !pNew->leaf ){
memcpy(&pNew->aData[8], pCell, 4);
}else if( leafData ){
- /* If the tree is a leaf-data tree, and the siblings are leaves,
- ** then there is no divider cell in apCell[]. Instead, the divider
- ** cell consists of the integer key for the right-most cell of
+ /* If the tree is a leaf-data tree, and the siblings are leaves,
+ ** then there is no divider cell in apCell[]. Instead, the divider
+ ** cell consists of the integer key for the right-most cell of
** the sibling-page assembled above only.
*/
CellInfo info;
pCell -= 4;
/* Obscure case for non-leaf-data trees: If the cell at pCell was
** previously stored on a leaf node, and its reported size was 4
- ** bytes, then it may actually be smaller than this
+ ** bytes, then it may actually be smaller than this
** (see btreeParseCellPtr(), 4 bytes is the minimum size of
- ** any cell). But it is important to pass the correct size to
+ ** any cell). But it is important to pass the correct size to
** insertCell(), so reparse the cell now.
**
** Note that this can never happen in an SQLite data file, as all
** b-tree structure by one. This is described as the "balance-shallower"
** sub-algorithm in some documentation.
**
- ** If this is an auto-vacuum database, the call to copyNodeContent()
- ** sets all pointer-map entries corresponding to database image pages
+ ** If this is an auto-vacuum database, the call to copyNodeContent()
+ ** sets all pointer-map entries corresponding to database image pages
** for which the pointer is stored within the content being copied.
**
** The second assert below verifies that the child page is defragmented
** is important if the parent page happens to be page 1 of the database
** image. */
assert( nNew==1 );
- assert( apNew[0]->nFree ==
- (get2byte(&apNew[0]->aData[5])-apNew[0]->cellOffset-apNew[0]->nCell*2)
+ assert( apNew[0]->nFree ==
+ (get2byte(&apNew[0]->aData[5])-apNew[0]->cellOffset-apNew[0]->nCell*2)
);
copyNodeContent(apNew[0], pParent, &rc);
freePage(apNew[0], &rc);
}else if( ISAUTOVACUUM ){
- /* Fix the pointer-map entries for all the cells that were shifted around.
+ /* Fix the pointer-map entries for all the cells that were shifted around.
** There are several different types of pointer-map entries that need to
** be dealt with by this routine. Some of these have been set already, but
** many have not. The following is a summary:
** of those.
**
** 2) The pointer-map entries associated with the first overflow
- ** page in any overflow chains used by new divider cells. These
+ ** page in any overflow chains used by new divider cells. These
** have also already been taken care of by the insertCell() code.
**
** 3) If the sibling pages are not leaves, then the child pages of
nOverflow = pOld->nOverflow;
iOverflow = i + !leafData + pOld->aOvfl[0].idx;
}
- isDivider = !leafData;
+ isDivider = !leafData;
}
assert(nOverflow>0 || iOverflow<i );
#if 0
/* The ptrmapCheckPages() contains assert() statements that verify that
- ** all pointer map pages are set correctly. This is helpful while
+ ** all pointer map pages are set correctly. This is helpful while
** debugging. This is usually disabled because a corrupt database may
** cause an assert() statement to fail. */
ptrmapCheckPages(apNew, nNew);
**
** A new child page is allocated and the contents of the current root
** page, including overflow cells, are copied into the child. The root
-** page is then overwritten to make it an empty page with the right-child
+** page is then overwritten to make it an empty page with the right-child
** pointer pointing to the new page.
**
-** Before returning, all pointer-map entries corresponding to pages
+** Before returning, all pointer-map entries corresponding to pages
** that the new child-page now contains pointers to are updated. The
** entry corresponding to the new right-child pointer of the root
** page is also updated.
**
-** If successful, *ppChild is set to contain a reference to the child
+** If successful, *ppChild is set to contain a reference to the child
** page and SQLITE_OK is returned. In this case the caller is required
** to call releasePage() on *ppChild exactly once. If an error occurs,
** an error code is returned and *ppChild is set to 0.
assert( pRoot->nOverflow>0 );
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) );
- /* Make pRoot, the root page of the b-tree, writable. Allocate a new
+ /* Make pRoot, the root page of the b-tree, writable. Allocate a new
** page that will become the new right-child of pPage. Copy the contents
** of the node stored on pRoot into the new child page.
*/
/*
** The page that pCur currently points to has just been modified in
** some way. This function figures out if this modification means the
-** tree needs to be balanced, and if so calls the appropriate balancing
+** tree needs to be balanced, and if so calls the appropriate balancing
** routine. Balancing routines are:
**
** balance_quick()
** balance_deeper() function to create a new child for the root-page
** and copy the current contents of the root-page to it. The
** next iteration of the do-loop will balance the child page.
- */
+ */
assert( (balance_deeper_called++)==0 );
rc = balance_deeper(pPage, &pCur->apPage[1]);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
/* Call balance_quick() to create a new sibling of pPage on which
** to store the overflow cell. balance_quick() inserts a new cell
** into pParent, which may cause pParent overflow. If this
- ** happens, the next interation of the do-loop will balance pParent
+ ** happens, the next interation of the do-loop will balance pParent
** use either balance_nonroot() or balance_deeper(). Until this
** happens, the overflow cell is stored in the aBalanceQuickSpace[]
- ** buffer.
+ ** buffer.
**
** The purpose of the following assert() is to check that only a
** single call to balance_quick() is made for each call to this
** modifying the contents of pParent, which may cause pParent to
** become overfull or underfull. The next iteration of the do-loop
** will balance the parent page to correct this.
- **
+ **
** If the parent page becomes overfull, the overflow cell or cells
- ** are stored in the pSpace buffer allocated immediately below.
+ ** are stored in the pSpace buffer allocated immediately below.
** A subsequent iteration of the do-loop will deal with this by
** calling balance_nonroot() (balance_deeper() may be called first,
** but it doesn't deal with overflow cells - just moves them to a
- ** different page). Once this subsequent call to balance_nonroot()
+ ** different page). Once this subsequent call to balance_nonroot()
** has completed, it is safe to release the pSpace buffer used by
- ** the previous call, as the overflow cell data will have been
+ ** the previous call, as the overflow cell data will have been
** copied either into the body of a database page or into the new
** pSpace buffer passed to the latter call to balance_nonroot().
*/
u8 *pSpace = sqlite3PageMalloc(pCur->pBt->pageSize);
rc = balance_nonroot(pParent, iIdx, pSpace, iPage==1);
if( pFree ){
- /* If pFree is not NULL, it points to the pSpace buffer used
+ /* If pFree is not NULL, it points to the pSpace buffer used
** by a previous call to balance_nonroot(). Its contents are
- ** now stored either on real database pages or within the
+ ** now stored either on real database pages or within the
** new pSpace buffer, so it may be safely freed here. */
sqlite3PageFree(pFree);
}
** MovetoUnpacked() to seek cursor pCur to (pKey, nKey) has already
** been performed. seekResult is the search result returned (a negative
** number if pCur points at an entry that is smaller than (pKey, nKey), or
-** a positive value if pCur points at an etry that is larger than
-** (pKey, nKey)).
+** a positive value if pCur points at an etry that is larger than
+** (pKey, nKey)).
**
** If the seekResult parameter is non-zero, then the caller guarantees that
** cursor pCur is pointing at the existing copy of a row that is to be
** blob of associated data. */
assert( (pKey==0)==(pCur->pKeyInfo==0) );
- /* If this is an insert into a table b-tree, invalidate any incrblob
+ /* If this is an insert into a table b-tree, invalidate any incrblob
** cursors open on the row being replaced (assuming this is a replace
** operation - if it is not, the following is a no-op). */
if( pCur->pKeyInfo==0 ){
**
** In some cases, the call to btreeMoveto() below is a no-op. For
** example, when inserting data into a table with auto-generated integer
- ** keys, the VDBE layer invokes sqlite3BtreeLast() to figure out the
- ** integer key to use. It then calls this function to actually insert the
+ ** keys, the VDBE layer invokes sqlite3BtreeLast() to figure out the
+ ** integer key to use. It then calls this function to actually insert the
** data into the intkey B-Tree. In this case btreeMoveto() recognizes
** that the cursor is already where it needs to be and returns without
** doing any work. To avoid thwarting these optimizations, it is important
insertCell(pPage, idx, newCell, szNew, 0, 0, &rc);
assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || pPage->nCell>0 || pPage->nOverflow>0 );
- /* If no error has occured and pPage has an overflow cell, call balance()
+ /* If no error has occured and pPage has an overflow cell, call balance()
** to redistribute the cells within the tree. Since balance() may move
** the cursor, zero the BtCursor.info.nSize and BtCursor.validNKey
** variables.
rc = balance(pCur);
/* Must make sure nOverflow is reset to zero even if the balance()
- ** fails. Internal data structure corruption will result otherwise.
+ ** fails. Internal data structure corruption will result otherwise.
** Also, set the cursor state to invalid. This stops saveCursorPosition()
** from trying to save the current position of the cursor. */
pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage]->nOverflow = 0;
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur){
Btree *p = pCur->pBtree;
- BtShared *pBt = p->pBt;
+ BtShared *pBt = p->pBt;
int rc; /* Return code */
MemPage *pPage; /* Page to delete cell from */
unsigned char *pCell; /* Pointer to cell to delete */
int iCellIdx; /* Index of cell to delete */
- int iCellDepth; /* Depth of node containing pCell */
+ int iCellDepth; /* Depth of node containing pCell */
assert( cursorHoldsMutex(pCur) );
assert( pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE );
assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(p, pCur->pgnoRoot, pCur->pKeyInfo!=0, 2) );
assert( !hasReadConflicts(p, pCur->pgnoRoot) );
- if( NEVER(pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage]>=pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage]->nCell)
+ if( NEVER(pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage]>=pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage]->nCell)
|| NEVER(pCur->eState!=CURSOR_VALID)
){
return SQLITE_ERROR; /* Something has gone awry. */
}
/* Save the positions of any other cursors open on this table before
- ** making any modifications. Make the page containing the entry to be
- ** deleted writable. Then free any overflow pages associated with the
- ** entry and finally remove the cell itself from within the page.
+ ** making any modifications. Make the page containing the entry to be
+ ** deleted writable. Then free any overflow pages associated with the
+ ** entry and finally remove the cell itself from within the page.
*/
rc = saveAllCursors(pBt, pCur->pgnoRoot, pCur);
if( rc ) return rc;
** on the leaf node first. If the balance proceeds far enough up the
** tree that we can be sure that any problem in the internal node has
** been corrected, so be it. Otherwise, after balancing the leaf node,
- ** walk the cursor up the tree to the internal node and balance it as
+ ** walk the cursor up the tree to the internal node and balance it as
** well. */
rc = balance(pCur);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pCur->iPage>iCellDepth ){
}
}else{
pRoot = pPageMove;
- }
+ }
/* Update the pointer-map and meta-data with the new root-page number. */
ptrmapPut(pBt, pgnoRoot, PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE, 0, &rc);
** cursors on the table.
**
** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled and the page at iTable is not the last
-** root page in the database file, then the last root page
+** root page in the database file, then the last root page
** in the database file is moved into the slot formerly occupied by
** iTable and that last slot formerly occupied by the last root page
** is added to the freelist instead of iTable. In this say, all
** root pages are kept at the beginning of the database file, which
-** is necessary for AUTOVACUUM to work right. *piMoved is set to the
+** is necessary for AUTOVACUUM to work right. *piMoved is set to the
** page number that used to be the last root page in the file before
** the move. If no page gets moved, *piMoved is set to 0.
** The last root page is recorded in meta[3] and the value of
/* It is illegal to drop a table if any cursors are open on the
** database. This is because in auto-vacuum mode the backend may
** need to move another root-page to fill a gap left by the deleted
- ** root page. If an open cursor was using this page a problem would
+ ** root page. If an open cursor was using this page a problem would
** occur.
**
** This error is caught long before control reaches this point.
if( iTable==maxRootPgno ){
/* If the table being dropped is the table with the largest root-page
- ** number in the database, put the root page on the free list.
+ ** number in the database, put the root page on the free list.
*/
freePage(pPage, &rc);
releasePage(pPage);
}
}else{
/* The table being dropped does not have the largest root-page
- ** number in the database. So move the page that does into the
+ ** number in the database. So move the page that does into the
** gap left by the deleted root-page.
*/
MemPage *pMove;
}else{
/* If sqlite3BtreeDropTable was called on page 1.
** This really never should happen except in a corrupt
- ** database.
+ ** database.
*/
zeroPage(pPage, PTF_INTKEY|PTF_LEAF );
releasePage(pPage);
}
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDropTable(Btree *p, int iTable, int *piMoved){
int rc;
** is the number of free pages currently in the database. Meta[1]
** through meta[15] are available for use by higher layers. Meta[0]
** is read-only, the others are read/write.
-**
+**
** The schema layer numbers meta values differently. At the schema
** layer (and the SetCookie and ReadCookie opcodes) the number of
** free pages is not visible. So Cookie[0] is the same as Meta[1].
** The first argument, pCur, is a cursor opened on some b-tree. Count the
** number of entries in the b-tree and write the result to *pnEntry.
**
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if the operation is successfully executed.
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if the operation is successfully executed.
** Otherwise, if an error is encountered (i.e. an IO error or database
** corruption) an SQLite error code is returned.
*/
rc = moveToRoot(pCur);
/* Unless an error occurs, the following loop runs one iteration for each
- ** page in the B-Tree structure (not including overflow pages).
+ ** page in the B-Tree structure (not including overflow pages).
*/
while( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
int iIdx; /* Index of child node in parent */
MemPage *pPage; /* Current page of the b-tree */
- /* If this is a leaf page or the tree is not an int-key tree, then
+ /* If this is a leaf page or the tree is not an int-key tree, then
** this page contains countable entries. Increment the entry counter
** accordingly.
*/
nEntry += pPage->nCell;
}
- /* pPage is a leaf node. This loop navigates the cursor so that it
+ /* pPage is a leaf node. This loop navigates the cursor so that it
** points to the first interior cell that it points to the parent of
** the next page in the tree that has not yet been visited. The
** pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage] value is set to the index of the parent cell
pPage = pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage];
}
- /* Descend to the child node of the cell that the cursor currently
+ /* Descend to the child node of the cell that the cursor currently
** points at. This is the right-child if (iIdx==pPage->nCell).
*/
iIdx = pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage];
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
/*
-** Check that the entry in the pointer-map for page iChild maps to
+** Check that the entry in the pointer-map for page iChild maps to
** page iParent, pointer type ptrType. If not, append an error message
** to pCheck.
*/
}
if( ePtrmapType!=eType || iPtrmapParent!=iParent ){
- checkAppendMsg(pCheck, zContext,
- "Bad ptr map entry key=%d expected=(%d,%d) got=(%d,%d)",
+ checkAppendMsg(pCheck, zContext,
+ "Bad ptr map entry key=%d expected=(%d,%d) got=(%d,%d)",
iChild, eType, iParent, ePtrmapType, iPtrmapParent);
}
}
** Do various sanity checks on a single page of a tree. Return
** the tree depth. Root pages return 0. Parents of root pages
** return 1, and so forth.
-**
+**
** These checks are done:
**
** 1. Make sure that cells and freeblocks do not overlap
IntegrityCk *pCheck, /* Context for the sanity check */
int iPage, /* Page number of the page to check */
char *zParentContext, /* Parent context */
- i64 *pnParentMinKey,
+ i64 *pnParentMinKey,
i64 *pnParentMaxKey
){
MemPage *pPage;
pPage->isInit = 0;
if( (rc = btreeInitPage(pPage))!=0 ){
assert( rc==SQLITE_CORRUPT ); /* The only possible error from InitPage */
- checkAppendMsg(pCheck, zContext,
+ checkAppendMsg(pCheck, zContext,
"btreeInitPage() returns error code %d", rc);
releasePage(pPage);
return 0;
else if( i==0 ) nMinKey = nMaxKey = info.nKey;
else{
if( info.nKey <= nMaxKey ){
- checkAppendMsg(pCheck, zContext,
+ checkAppendMsg(pCheck, zContext,
"Rowid %lld out of order (previous was %lld)", info.nKey, nMaxKey);
}
nMaxKey = info.nKey;
}
assert( sz==info.nPayload );
- if( (sz>info.nLocal)
+ if( (sz>info.nLocal)
&& (&pCell[info.iOverflow]<=&pPage->aData[pBt->usableSize])
){
int nPage = (sz - info.nLocal + usableSize - 5)/(usableSize - 4);
if( !pPage->leaf ){
pgno = get4byte(&pPage->aData[pPage->hdrOffset+8]);
- sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zContext), zContext,
+ sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zContext), zContext,
"On page %d at right child: ", iPage);
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
if( pBt->autoVacuum ){
#endif
checkTreePage(pCheck, pgno, zContext, NULL, !pPage->nCell ? NULL : &nMaxKey);
}
-
+
/* For intKey leaf pages, check that the min/max keys are in order
** with any left/parent/right pages.
*/
/* if we are the left most child page */
if( !pnParentMaxKey ){
if( nMaxKey > *pnParentMinKey ){
- checkAppendMsg(pCheck, zContext,
+ checkAppendMsg(pCheck, zContext,
"Rowid %lld out of order (max larger than parent min of %lld)",
nMaxKey, *pnParentMinKey);
}
}else{
if( nMinKey <= *pnParentMinKey ){
- checkAppendMsg(pCheck, zContext,
+ checkAppendMsg(pCheck, zContext,
"Rowid %lld out of order (min less than parent min of %lld)",
nMinKey, *pnParentMinKey);
}
if( nMaxKey > *pnParentMaxKey ){
- checkAppendMsg(pCheck, zContext,
+ checkAppendMsg(pCheck, zContext,
"Rowid %lld out of order (max larger than parent max of %lld)",
nMaxKey, *pnParentMaxKey);
}
/* else if we're a right child page */
} else if( pnParentMaxKey ){
if( nMinKey <= *pnParentMaxKey ){
- checkAppendMsg(pCheck, zContext,
+ checkAppendMsg(pCheck, zContext,
"Rowid %lld out of order (min less than parent max of %lld)",
nMinKey, *pnParentMaxKey);
}
size = cellSizePtr(pPage, &data[pc]);
}
if( (pc+size-1)>=usableSize ){
- checkAppendMsg(pCheck, 0,
+ checkAppendMsg(pCheck, 0,
"Corruption detected in cell %d on page %d",i,iPage);
}else{
for(j=pc+size-1; j>=pc; j--) hit[j]++;
}
}
if( cnt!=data[hdr+7] ){
- checkAppendMsg(pCheck, 0,
+ checkAppendMsg(pCheck, 0,
"Fragmentation of %d bytes reported as %d on page %d",
cnt, data[hdr+7], iPage);
}
/* If the database supports auto-vacuum, make sure no tables contain
** references to pointer-map pages.
*/
- if( sCheck.anRef[i]==0 &&
+ if( sCheck.anRef[i]==0 &&
(PTRMAP_PAGENO(pBt, i)!=i || !pBt->autoVacuum) ){
checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, 0, "Page %d is never used", i);
}
- if( sCheck.anRef[i]!=0 &&
+ if( sCheck.anRef[i]!=0 &&
(PTRMAP_PAGENO(pBt, i)==i && pBt->autoVacuum) ){
checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, 0, "Pointer map page %d is referenced", i);
}
** of the integrity check.
*/
if( NEVER(nRef != sqlite3PagerRefcount(pBt->pPager)) ){
- checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, 0,
+ checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, 0,
"Outstanding page count goes from %d to %d during this analysis",
nRef, sqlite3PagerRefcount(pBt->pPager)
);
/*
** This function returns a pointer to a blob of memory associated with
** a single shared-btree. The memory is used by client code for its own
-** purposes (for example, to store a high-level schema associated with
+** purposes (for example, to store a high-level schema associated with
** the shared-btree). The btree layer manages reference counting issues.
**
** The first time this is called on a shared-btree, nBytes bytes of memory
-** are allocated, zeroed, and returned to the caller. For each subsequent
+** are allocated, zeroed, and returned to the caller. For each subsequent
** call the nBytes parameter is ignored and a pointer to the same blob
-** of memory returned.
+** of memory returned.
**
** If the nBytes parameter is 0 and the blob of memory has not yet been
** allocated, a null pointer is returned. If the blob has already been
** allocated, it is returned as normal.
**
-** Just before the shared-btree is closed, the function passed as the
-** xFree argument when the memory allocation was made is invoked on the
+** Just before the shared-btree is closed, the function passed as the
+** xFree argument when the memory allocation was made is invoked on the
** blob of allocated memory. This function should not call sqlite3_free()
** on the memory, the btree layer does that.
*/
}
/*
-** Return SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE if another user of the same shared
-** btree as the argument handle holds an exclusive lock on the
+** Return SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE if another user of the same shared
+** btree as the argument handle holds an exclusive lock on the
** sqlite_master table. Otherwise SQLITE_OK.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSchemaLocked(Btree *p){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB
/*
-** Argument pCsr must be a cursor opened for writing on an
-** INTKEY table currently pointing at a valid table entry.
+** Argument pCsr must be a cursor opened for writing on an
+** INTKEY table currently pointing at a valid table entry.
** This function modifies the data stored as part of that entry.
**
-** Only the data content may only be modified, it is not possible to
+** Only the data content may only be modified, it is not possible to
** change the length of the data stored. If this function is called with
** parameters that attempt to write past the end of the existing data,
** no modifications are made and SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned.
return SQLITE_ABORT;
}
- /* Check some assumptions:
+ /* Check some assumptions:
** (a) the cursor is open for writing,
** (b) there is a read/write transaction open,
** (c) the connection holds a write-lock on the table (if required),
return accessPayload(pCsr, offset, amt, (unsigned char *)z, 1);
}
-/*
-** Set a flag on this cursor to cache the locations of pages from the
+/*
+** Set a flag on this cursor to cache the locations of pages from the
** overflow list for the current row. This is used by cursors opened
** for incremental blob IO only.
**
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
-** This file contains the implementation of the sqlite3_backup_XXX()
+** This file contains the implementation of the sqlite3_backup_XXX()
** API functions and the related features.
*/
** Once it has been created using backup_init(), a single sqlite3_backup
** structure may be accessed via two groups of thread-safe entry points:
**
-** * Via the sqlite3_backup_XXX() API function backup_step() and
+** * Via the sqlite3_backup_XXX() API function backup_step() and
** backup_finish(). Both these functions obtain the source database
-** handle mutex and the mutex associated with the source BtShared
+** handle mutex and the mutex associated with the source BtShared
** structure, in that order.
**
** * Via the BackupUpdate() and BackupRestart() functions, which are
** invoked by the pager layer to report various state changes in
** the page cache associated with the source database. The mutex
-** associated with the source database BtShared structure will always
+** associated with the source database BtShared structure will always
** be held when either of these functions are invoked.
**
** The other sqlite3_backup_XXX() API functions, backup_remaining() and
** in connection handle pDb. If such a database cannot be found, return
** a NULL pointer and write an error message to pErrorDb.
**
-** If the "temp" database is requested, it may need to be opened by this
-** function. If an error occurs while doing so, return 0 and write an
+** If the "temp" database is requested, it may need to be opened by this
+** function. If an error occurs while doing so, return 0 and write an
** error message to pErrorDb.
*/
static Btree *findBtree(sqlite3 *pErrorDb, sqlite3 *pDb, const char *zDb){
}
/*
-** Argument rc is an SQLite error code. Return true if this error is
+** Argument rc is an SQLite error code. Return true if this error is
** considered fatal if encountered during a backup operation. All errors
** are considered fatal except for SQLITE_BUSY and SQLITE_LOCKED.
*/
}
/*
-** Parameter zSrcData points to a buffer containing the data for
-** page iSrcPg from the source database. Copy this data into the
+** Parameter zSrcData points to a buffer containing the data for
+** page iSrcPg from the source database. Copy this data into the
** destination database.
*/
static int backupOnePage(sqlite3_backup *p, Pgno iSrcPg, const u8 *zSrcData){
assert( zSrcData );
/* Catch the case where the destination is an in-memory database and the
- ** page sizes of the source and destination differ.
+ ** page sizes of the source and destination differ.
*/
if( nSrcPgsz!=nDestPgsz && sqlite3PagerIsMemdb(sqlite3BtreePager(p->pDest)) ){
rc = SQLITE_READONLY;
}
- /* This loop runs once for each destination page spanned by the source
+ /* This loop runs once for each destination page spanned by the source
** page. For each iteration, variable iOff is set to the byte offset
** of the destination page.
*/
** Then clear the Btree layer MemPage.isInit flag. Both this module
** and the pager code use this trick (clearing the first byte
** of the page 'extra' space to invalidate the Btree layers
- ** cached parse of the page). MemPage.isInit is marked
+ ** cached parse of the page). MemPage.isInit is marked
** "MUST BE FIRST" for this purpose.
*/
memcpy(zOut, zIn, nCopy);
** exactly iSize bytes. If pFile is not larger than iSize bytes, then
** this function is a no-op.
**
-** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, or an SQLite error
+** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, or an SQLite error
** code if an error occurs.
*/
static int backupTruncateFile(sqlite3_file *pFile, i64 iSize){
/* Lock the destination database, if it is not locked already. */
if( SQLITE_OK==rc && p->bDestLocked==0
- && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(p->pDest, 2))
+ && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(p->pDest, 2))
){
p->bDestLocked = 1;
sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(p->pDest, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION, &p->iDestSchema);
rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(p->pSrc, 0);
bCloseTrans = 1;
}
-
+
/* Now that there is a read-lock on the source database, query the
** source pager for the number of pages in the database.
*/
attachBackupObject(p);
}
}
-
+
/* Update the schema version field in the destination database. This
** is to make sure that the schema-version really does change in
** the case where the source and destination databases have the
** same schema version.
*/
- if( rc==SQLITE_DONE
+ if( rc==SQLITE_DONE
&& (rc = sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta(p->pDest,1,p->iDestSchema+1))==SQLITE_OK
){
const int nSrcPagesize = sqlite3BtreeGetPageSize(p->pSrc);
const int nDestPagesize = sqlite3BtreeGetPageSize(p->pDest);
int nDestTruncate;
-
+
if( p->pDestDb ){
sqlite3ResetInternalSchema(p->pDestDb, 0);
}
/* Set nDestTruncate to the final number of pages in the destination
** database. The complication here is that the destination page
- ** size may be different to the source page size.
+ ** size may be different to the source page size.
**
- ** If the source page size is smaller than the destination page size,
+ ** If the source page size is smaller than the destination page size,
** round up. In this case the call to sqlite3OsTruncate() below will
** fix the size of the file. However it is important to call
- ** sqlite3PagerTruncateImage() here so that any pages in the
+ ** sqlite3PagerTruncateImage() here so that any pages in the
** destination file that lie beyond the nDestTruncate page mark are
** journalled by PagerCommitPhaseOne() before they are destroyed
** by the file truncation.
**
** * The destination may need to be truncated, and
**
- ** * Data stored on the pages immediately following the
+ ** * Data stored on the pages immediately following the
** pending-byte page in the source database may need to be
** copied into the destination database.
*/
i64 iOff;
i64 iEnd = MIN(PENDING_BYTE + nDestPagesize, iSize);
for(
- iOff=PENDING_BYTE+nSrcPagesize;
- rc==SQLITE_OK && iOff<iEnd;
+ iOff=PENDING_BYTE+nSrcPagesize;
+ rc==SQLITE_OK && iOff<iEnd;
iOff+=nSrcPagesize
){
PgHdr *pSrcPg = 0;
}else{
rc = sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(pDestPager, 0, 0);
}
-
+
/* Finish committing the transaction to the destination database. */
if( SQLITE_OK==rc
&& SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(p->pDest))
rc = SQLITE_DONE;
}
}
-
+
/* If bCloseTrans is true, then this function opened a read transaction
** on the source database. Close the read transaction here. There is
** no need to check the return values of the btree methods here, as
TESTONLY( rc2 |= ) sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(p->pSrc);
assert( rc2==SQLITE_OK );
}
-
+
p->rc = rc;
}
if( p->pDestDb ){
}
/*
-** Return the total number of pages in the source database as of the most
+** Return the total number of pages in the source database as of the most
** recent call to sqlite3_backup_step().
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p){
/*
** This function is called after the contents of page iPage of the
-** source database have been modified. If page iPage has already been
+** source database have been modified. If page iPage has already been
** copied into the destination database, then the data written to the
** destination is now invalidated. The destination copy of iPage needs
** to be updated with the new data before the backup operation is
** Restart the backup process. This is called when the pager layer
** detects that the database has been modified by an external database
** connection. In this case there is no way of knowing which of the
-** pages that have been copied into the destination database are still
+** pages that have been copied into the destination database are still
** valid and which are not, so the entire process needs to be restarted.
**
** It is assumed that the mutex associated with the BtShared object
** Copy the complete content of pBtFrom into pBtTo. A transaction
** must be active for both files.
**
-** The size of file pTo may be reduced by this operation. If anything
-** goes wrong, the transaction on pTo is rolled back. If successful, the
+** The size of file pTo may be reduced by this operation. If anything
+** goes wrong, the transaction on pTo is rolled back. If successful, the
** transaction is committed before returning.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCopyFile(Btree *pTo, Btree *pFrom){
/* 0x7FFFFFFF is the hard limit for the number of pages in a database
** file. By passing this as the number of pages to copy to
- ** sqlite3_backup_step(), we can guarantee that the copy finishes
+ ** sqlite3_backup_step(), we can guarantee that the copy finishes
** within a single call (unless an error occurs). The assert() statement
- ** checks this assumption - (p->rc) should be set to either SQLITE_DONE
+ ** checks this assumption - (p->rc) should be set to either SQLITE_DONE
** or an error code.
*/
sqlite3_backup_step(&b, 0x7FFFFFFF);
}
/*
-** Make sure pMem->z points to a writable allocation of at least
+** Make sure pMem->z points to a writable allocation of at least
** n bytes.
**
** If the memory cell currently contains string or blob data
-** and the third argument passed to this function is true, the
+** and the third argument passed to this function is true, the
** current content of the cell is preserved. Otherwise, it may
-** be discarded.
+** be discarded.
**
** This function sets the MEM_Dyn flag and clears any xDel callback.
-** It also clears MEM_Ephem and MEM_Static. If the preserve flag is
+** It also clears MEM_Ephem and MEM_Static. If the preserve flag is
** not set, Mem.n is zeroed.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMemGrow(Mem *pMem, int n, int preserve){
assert( 1 >=
((pMem->zMalloc && pMem->zMalloc==pMem->z) ? 1 : 0) +
- (((pMem->flags&MEM_Dyn)&&pMem->xDel) ? 1 : 0) +
- ((pMem->flags&MEM_Ephem) ? 1 : 0) +
+ (((pMem->flags&MEM_Dyn)&&pMem->xDel) ? 1 : 0) +
+ ((pMem->flags&MEM_Ephem) ? 1 : 0) +
((pMem->flags&MEM_Static) ? 1 : 0)
);
assert( (pMem->flags&MEM_RowSet)==0 );
/* For a Real or Integer, use sqlite3_mprintf() to produce the UTF-8
** string representation of the value. Then, if the required encoding
** is UTF-16le or UTF-16be do a translation.
- **
+ **
** FIX ME: It would be better if sqlite3_snprintf() could do UTF-16.
*/
if( fg & MEM_Int ){
pMem->flags = MEM_Null;
}else{
assert( pMem->zMalloc );
- pMem->u.pRowSet = sqlite3RowSetInit(db, pMem->zMalloc,
+ pMem->u.pRowSet = sqlite3RowSetInit(db, pMem->zMalloc,
sqlite3DbMallocSize(db, pMem->zMalloc));
assert( pMem->u.pRowSet!=0 );
pMem->flags = MEM_RowSet;
}
return n>p->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH];
}
- return 0;
+ return 0;
}
/*
** Change the value of a Mem to be a string or a BLOB.
**
** The memory management strategy depends on the value of the xDel
-** parameter. If the value passed is SQLITE_TRANSIENT, then the
-** string is copied into a (possibly existing) buffer managed by the
+** parameter. If the value passed is SQLITE_TRANSIENT, then the
+** string is copied into a (possibly existing) buffer managed by the
** Mem structure. Otherwise, any existing buffer is freed and the
** pointer copied.
**
f2 = pMem2->flags;
combined_flags = f1|f2;
assert( (combined_flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 );
-
+
/* If one value is NULL, it is less than the other. If both values
** are NULL, return 0.
*/
}
assert( pMem1->enc==pMem2->enc );
- assert( pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 ||
+ assert( pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 ||
pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE || pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF16BE );
/* The collation sequence must be defined at this point, even if
/* If a NULL pointer was passed as the collate function, fall through
** to the blob case and use memcmp(). */
}
-
+
/* Both values must be blobs. Compare using memcmp(). */
rc = memcmp(pMem1->z, pMem2->z, (pMem1->n>pMem2->n)?pMem2->n:pMem1->n);
if( rc==0 ){
assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCur) );
- /* Note: the calls to BtreeKeyFetch() and DataFetch() below assert()
+ /* Note: the calls to BtreeKeyFetch() and DataFetch() below assert()
** that both the BtShared and database handle mutexes are held. */
assert( (pMem->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 );
if( key ){
#endif
/*
-** Resize the Vdbe.aOp array so that it is at least one op larger than
+** Resize the Vdbe.aOp array so that it is at least one op larger than
** it was.
**
** If an out-of-memory error occurs while resizing the array, return
-** SQLITE_NOMEM. In this case Vdbe.aOp and Vdbe.nOpAlloc remain
-** unchanged (this is so that any opcodes already allocated can be
+** SQLITE_NOMEM. In this case Vdbe.aOp and Vdbe.nOpAlloc remain
+** unchanged (this is so that any opcodes already allocated can be
** correctly deallocated along with the rest of the Vdbe).
*/
static int growOpArray(Vdbe *p){
/*
** The following type and function are used to iterate through all opcodes
-** in a Vdbe main program and each of the sub-programs (triggers) it may
+** in a Vdbe main program and each of the sub-programs (triggers) it may
** invoke directly or indirectly. It should be used as follows:
**
** Op *pOp;
** VdbeOpIter sIter;
**
** memset(&sIter, 0, sizeof(sIter));
-** sIter.v = v; // v is of type Vdbe*
+** sIter.v = v; // v is of type Vdbe*
** while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter)) ){
** // Do something with pOp
** }
** sqlite3DbFree(v->db, sIter.apSub);
-**
+**
*/
typedef struct VdbeOpIter VdbeOpIter;
struct VdbeOpIter {
p->iSub++;
p->iAddr = 0;
}
-
+
if( pRet->p4type==P4_SUBPROGRAM ){
int nByte = (p->nSub+1)*sizeof(SubProgram*);
int j;
while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter))!=0 ){
int opcode = pOp->opcode;
- if( opcode==OP_Destroy || opcode==OP_VUpdate || opcode==OP_VRename
+ if( opcode==OP_Destroy || opcode==OP_VUpdate || opcode==OP_VRename
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY
- || (opcode==OP_FkCounter && pOp->p1==0 && pOp->p2==1)
+ || (opcode==OP_FkCounter && pOp->p1==0 && pOp->p2==1)
#endif
- || ((opcode==OP_Halt || opcode==OP_HaltIfNull)
+ || ((opcode==OP_Halt || opcode==OP_HaltIfNull)
&& (pOp->p1==SQLITE_CONSTRAINT && pOp->p2==OE_Abort))
){
hasAbort = 1;
**
** This routine is called once after all opcodes have been inserted.
**
-** Variable *pMaxFuncArgs is set to the maximum value of any P2 argument
-** to an OP_Function, OP_AggStep or OP_VFilter opcode. This is used by
+** Variable *pMaxFuncArgs is set to the maximum value of any P2 argument
+** to an OP_Function, OP_AggStep or OP_VFilter opcode. This is used by
** sqlite3VdbeMakeReady() to size the Vdbe.apArg[] array.
**
** The Op.opflags field is set on all opcodes.
/*
** This function returns a pointer to the array of opcodes associated with
** the Vdbe passed as the first argument. It is the callers responsibility
-** to arrange for the returned array to be eventually freed using the
+** to arrange for the returned array to be eventually freed using the
** vdbeFreeOpArray() function.
**
** Before returning, *pnOp is set to the number of entries in the returned
-** array. Also, *pnMaxArg is set to the larger of its current value and
-** the number of entries in the Vdbe.apArg[] array required to execute the
+** array. Also, *pnMaxArg is set to the larger of its current value and
+** the number of entries in the Vdbe.apArg[] array required to execute the
** returned program.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE VdbeOp *sqlite3VdbeTakeOpArray(Vdbe *p, int *pnOp, int *pnMaxArg){
/*
** Free the space allocated for aOp and any p4 values allocated for the
-** opcodes contained within. If aOp is not NULL it is assumed to contain
-** nOp entries.
+** opcodes contained within. If aOp is not NULL it is assumed to contain
+** nOp entries.
*/
static void vdbeFreeOpArray(sqlite3 *db, Op *aOp, int nOp){
if( aOp ){
freeP4(db, pOp->p4type, pOp->p4.p);
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
sqlite3DbFree(db, pOp->zComment);
-#endif
+#endif
}
}
sqlite3DbFree(db, aOp);
** A copy is made of the KeyInfo structure into memory obtained from
** sqlite3_malloc, to be freed when the Vdbe is finalized.
** n==P4_KEYINFO_HANDOFF indicates that zP4 points to a KeyInfo structure
-** stored in memory that the caller has obtained from sqlite3_malloc. The
+** stored in memory that the caller has obtained from sqlite3_malloc. The
** caller should not free the allocation, it will be freed when the Vdbe is
** finalized.
-**
+**
** Other values of n (P4_STATIC, P4_COLLSEQ etc.) indicate that zP4 points
** to a string or structure that is guaranteed to exist for the lifetime of
** the Vdbe. In these cases we can just copy the pointer.
static const char *zFormat1 = "%4d %-13s %4d %4d %4d %-4s %.2X %s\n";
if( pOut==0 ) pOut = stdout;
zP4 = displayP4(pOp, zPtr, sizeof(zPtr));
- fprintf(pOut, zFormat1, pc,
+ fprintf(pOut, zFormat1, pc,
sqlite3OpcodeName(pOp->opcode), pOp->p1, pOp->p2, pOp->p3, zP4, pOp->p5,
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
pOp->zComment ? pOp->zComment : ""
assert( (&p[1])==pEnd || p[0].db==p[1].db );
/* This block is really an inlined version of sqlite3VdbeMemRelease()
- ** that takes advantage of the fact that the memory cell value is
+ ** that takes advantage of the fact that the memory cell value is
** being set to NULL after releasing any dynamic resources.
**
- ** The justification for duplicating code is that according to
- ** callgrind, this causes a certain test case to hit the CPU 4.7
- ** percent less (x86 linux, gcc version 4.1.2, -O6) than if
+ ** The justification for duplicating code is that according to
+ ** callgrind, this causes a certain test case to hit the CPU 4.7
+ ** percent less (x86 linux, gcc version 4.1.2, -O6) than if
** sqlite3MemRelease() were called from here. With -O2, this jumps
- ** to 6.6 percent. The test case is inserting 1000 rows into a table
- ** with no indexes using a single prepared INSERT statement, bind()
+ ** to 6.6 percent. The test case is inserting 1000 rows into a table
+ ** with no indexes using a single prepared INSERT statement, bind()
** and reset(). Inserts are grouped into a transaction.
*/
if( p->flags&(MEM_Agg|MEM_Dyn|MEM_Frame|MEM_RowSet) ){
pMem->type = SQLITE_INTEGER;
pMem->u.i = i; /* Program counter */
pMem++;
-
+
pMem->flags = MEM_Static|MEM_Str|MEM_Term;
pMem->z = (char*)sqlite3OpcodeName(pOp->opcode); /* Opcode */
assert( pMem->z!=0 );
pMem->type = SQLITE_TEXT;
pMem->enc = SQLITE_UTF8;
pMem++;
-
+
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
if( pOp->zComment ){
pMem->flags = MEM_Str|MEM_Term;
** Prepare a virtual machine for execution. This involves things such
** as allocating stack space and initializing the program counter.
** After the VDBE has be prepped, it can be executed by one or more
-** calls to sqlite3VdbeExec().
+** calls to sqlite3VdbeExec().
**
** This is the only way to move a VDBE from VDBE_MAGIC_INIT to
** VDBE_MAGIC_RUN.
** This function may be called more than once on a single virtual machine.
** The first call is made while compiling the SQL statement. Subsequent
** calls are made as part of the process of resetting a statement to be
-** re-executed (from a call to sqlite3_reset()). The nVar, nMem, nCursor
+** re-executed (from a call to sqlite3_reset()). The nVar, nMem, nCursor
** and isExplain parameters are only passed correct values the first time
** the function is called. On subsequent calls, from sqlite3_reset(), nVar
** is passed -1 and nMem, nCursor and isExplain are all passed zero.
/* For each cursor required, also allocate a memory cell. Memory
** cells (nMem+1-nCursor)..nMem, inclusive, will never be used by
** the vdbe program. Instead they are used to allocate space for
- ** VdbeCursor/BtCursor structures. The blob of memory associated with
+ ** VdbeCursor/BtCursor structures. The blob of memory associated with
** cursor 0 is stored in memory cell nMem. Memory cell (nMem-1)
** stores the blob of memory associated with cursor 1, etc.
**
*/
nMem += nCursor;
- /* Allocate space for memory registers, SQL variables, VDBE cursors and
+ /* Allocate space for memory registers, SQL variables, VDBE cursors and
** an array to marshal SQL function arguments in. This is only done the
** first time this function is called for a given VDBE, not when it is
** being called from sqlite3_reset() to reset the virtual machine.
assert( EIGHT_BYTE_ALIGNMENT(zCsr) );
/* Memory for registers, parameters, cursor, etc, is allocated in two
- ** passes. On the first pass, we try to reuse unused space at the
+ ** passes. On the first pass, we try to reuse unused space at the
** end of the opcode array. If we are unable to satisfy all memory
** requirements by reusing the opcode array tail, then the second
- ** pass will fill in the rest using a fresh allocation.
+ ** pass will fill in the rest using a fresh allocation.
**
** This two-pass approach that reuses as much memory as possible from
** the leftover space at the end of the opcode array can significantly
}
/*
-** Close a VDBE cursor and release all the resources that cursor
+** Close a VDBE cursor and release all the resources that cursor
** happens to hold.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(Vdbe *p, VdbeCursor *pCx){
/*
** Close all cursors.
**
-** Also release any dynamic memory held by the VM in the Vdbe.aMem memory
+** Also release any dynamic memory held by the VM in the Vdbe.aMem memory
** cell array. This is necessary as the memory cell array may contain
** pointers to VdbeFrame objects, which may in turn contain pointers to
** open cursors.
sqlite3 *db = p->db;
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
- /* Execute assert() statements to ensure that the Vdbe.apCsr[] and
+ /* Execute assert() statements to ensure that the Vdbe.apCsr[] and
** Vdbe.aMem[] arrays have already been cleaned up. */
int i;
for(i=0; i<p->nCursor; i++) assert( p->apCsr==0 || p->apCsr[i]==0 );
int needXcommit = 0;
#ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
- /* With this option, sqlite3VtabSync() is defined to be simply
- ** SQLITE_OK so p is not used.
+ /* With this option, sqlite3VtabSync() is defined to be simply
+ ** SQLITE_OK so p is not used.
*/
UNUSED_PARAMETER(p);
#endif
/* Before doing anything else, call the xSync() callback for any
** virtual module tables written in this transaction. This has to
- ** be done before determining whether a master journal file is
+ ** be done before determining whether a master journal file is
** required, as an xSync() callback may add an attached database
** to the transaction.
*/
}
/* This loop determines (a) if the commit hook should be invoked and
- ** (b) how many database files have open write transactions, not
- ** including the temp database. (b) is important because if more than
+ ** (b) how many database files have open write transactions, not
+ ** including the temp database. (b) is important because if more than
** one database file has an open write transaction, a master journal
** file is required for an atomic commit.
- */
- for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){
+ */
+ for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){
Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(pBt) ){
needXcommit = 1;
** master-journal.
**
** If the return value of sqlite3BtreeGetFilename() is a zero length
- ** string, it means the main database is :memory: or a temp file. In
- ** that case we do not support atomic multi-file commits, so use the
+ ** string, it means the main database is :memory: or a temp file. In
+ ** that case we do not support atomic multi-file commits, so use the
** simple case then too.
*/
if( 0==sqlite3Strlen30(sqlite3BtreeGetFilename(db->aDb[0].pBt))
}
}
- /* Do the commit only if all databases successfully complete phase 1.
+ /* Do the commit only if all databases successfully complete phase 1.
** If one of the BtreeCommitPhaseOne() calls fails, this indicates an
** IO error while deleting or truncating a journal file. It is unlikely,
** but could happen. In this case abandon processing and return the error.
}while( rc==SQLITE_OK && res );
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
/* Open the master journal. */
- rc = sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(pVfs, zMaster, &pMaster,
+ rc = sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(pVfs, zMaster, &pMaster,
SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE|SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE|
SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE|SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL, 0
);
sqlite3DbFree(db, zMaster);
return rc;
}
-
+
/* Write the name of each database file in the transaction into the new
** master journal file. If an error occurs at this point close
** and delete the master journal file. All the individual journal files
/* Sync the master journal file. If the IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL device
** flag is set this is not required.
*/
- if( needSync
+ if( needSync
&& 0==(sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pMaster)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL)
&& SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsSync(pMaster, SQLITE_SYNC_NORMAL))
){
** in case the master journal file name was written into the journal
** file before the failure occurred.
*/
- for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){
+ for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<db->nDb; i++){
Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( pBt ){
rc = sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseOne(pBt, zMaster);
*/
disable_simulated_io_errors();
sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
- for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){
+ for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){
Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( pBt ){
sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(pBt);
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** This routine checks that the sqlite3.activeVdbeCnt count variable
** matches the number of vdbe's in the list sqlite3.pVdbe that are
** currently active. An assertion fails if the two counts do not match.
#endif
/*
-** For every Btree that in database connection db which
+** For every Btree that in database connection db which
** has been modified, "trip" or invalidate each cursor in
** that Btree might have been modified so that the cursor
** can never be used again. This happens when a rollback
** If the Vdbe passed as the first argument opened a statement-transaction,
** close it now. Argument eOp must be either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or
** SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then the statement
-** transaction is rolled back. If eOp is SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the
+** transaction is rolled back. If eOp is SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the
** statement transaction is commtted.
**
-** If an IO error occurs, an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned.
+** If an IO error occurs, an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned.
** Otherwise SQLITE_OK.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){
sqlite3 *const db = p->db;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
- /* If p->iStatement is greater than zero, then this Vdbe opened a
+ /* If p->iStatement is greater than zero, then this Vdbe opened a
** statement transaction that should be closed here. The only exception
** is that an IO error may have occured, causing an emergency rollback.
** In this case (db->nStatement==0), and there is nothing to do.
assert( db->nStatement>0 );
assert( p->iStatement==(db->nStatement+db->nSavepoint) );
- for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){
+ for(i=0; i<db->nDb; i++){
int rc2 = SQLITE_OK;
Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( pBt ){
db->nStatement--;
p->iStatement = 0;
- /* If the statement transaction is being rolled back, also restore the
- ** database handles deferred constraint counter to the value it had when
+ /* If the statement transaction is being rolled back, also restore the
+ ** database handles deferred constraint counter to the value it had when
** the statement transaction was opened. */
if( eOp==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){
db->nDeferredCons = p->nStmtDefCons;
**
** If SQLite is not threadsafe but does support shared-cache mode, then
** sqlite3BtreeEnterAll() is invoked to set the BtShared.db variables
-** of all of BtShared structures accessible via the database handle
+** of all of BtShared structures accessible via the database handle
** associated with the VM. Of course only a subset of these structures
** will be accessed by the VM, and we could use Vdbe.btreeMask to figure
** that subset out, but there is no advantage to doing so.
#endif
/*
-** This function is called when a transaction opened by the database
-** handle associated with the VM passed as an argument is about to be
+** This function is called when a transaction opened by the database
+** handle associated with the VM passed as an argument is about to be
** committed. If there are outstanding deferred foreign key constraint
** violations, return SQLITE_ERROR. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
**
-** If there are outstanding FK violations and this function returns
+** If there are outstanding FK violations and this function returns
** SQLITE_ERROR, set the result of the VM to SQLITE_CONSTRAINT and write
** an error message to it. Then return SQLITE_ERROR.
*/
/* This function contains the logic that determines if a statement or
** transaction will be committed or rolled back as a result of the
- ** execution of this virtual machine.
+ ** execution of this virtual machine.
**
** If any of the following errors occur:
**
if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 0);
}
-
- /* If the auto-commit flag is set and this is the only active writer
- ** VM, then we do either a commit or rollback of the current transaction.
+
+ /* If the auto-commit flag is set and this is the only active writer
+ ** VM, then we do either a commit or rollback of the current transaction.
**
- ** Note: This block also runs if one of the special errors handled
- ** above has occurred.
+ ** Note: This block also runs if one of the special errors handled
+ ** above has occurred.
*/
- if( !sqlite3VtabInSync(db)
- && db->autoCommit
- && db->writeVdbeCnt==(p->readOnly==0)
+ if( !sqlite3VtabInSync(db)
+ && db->autoCommit
+ && db->writeVdbeCnt==(p->readOnly==0)
){
if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->errorAction==OE_Fail && !isSpecialError) ){
if( sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1) ){
sqlite3BtreeMutexArrayLeave(&p->aMutex);
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
- /* The auto-commit flag is true, the vdbe program was successful
+ /* The auto-commit flag is true, the vdbe program was successful
** or hit an 'OR FAIL' constraint and there are no deferred foreign
- ** key constraints to hold up the transaction. This means a commit
+ ** key constraints to hold up the transaction. This means a commit
** is required. */
rc = vdbeCommit(db, p);
if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){
db->autoCommit = 1;
}
}
-
+
/* If eStatementOp is non-zero, then a statement transaction needs to
** be committed or rolled back. Call sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement() to
** do so. If this operation returns an error, and the current statement
**
** Note that sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement() can only fail if eStatementOp
** is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK. But if p->rc==SQLITE_OK then eStatementOp
- ** must be SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. Hence the NEVER(p->rc==SQLITE_OK) in
+ ** must be SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. Hence the NEVER(p->rc==SQLITE_OK) in
** the following code.
*/
if( eStatementOp ){
p->zErrMsg = 0;
}
}
-
+
/* If this was an INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE and no statement transaction
- ** has been rolled back, update the database connection change-counter.
+ ** has been rolled back, update the database connection change-counter.
*/
if( p->changeCntOn ){
if( eStatementOp!=SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){
}
p->nChange = 0;
}
-
+
/* Rollback or commit any schema changes that occurred. */
if( p->rc!=SQLITE_OK && db->flags&SQLITE_InternChanges ){
sqlite3ResetInternalSchema(db, 0);
}
/* If the auto-commit flag is set to true, then any locks that were held
- ** by connection db have now been released. Call sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked()
+ ** by connection db have now been released. Call sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked()
** to invoke any required unlock-notify callbacks.
*/
if( db->autoCommit ){
p->magic = VDBE_MAGIC_INIT;
return p->rc & db->errMask;
}
-
+
/*
** Clean up and delete a VDBE after execution. Return an integer which is
** the result code. Write any error message text into *pzErrMsg.
}
/*
-** If we are on an architecture with mixed-endian floating
-** points (ex: ARM7) then swap the lower 4 bytes with the
+** If we are on an architecture with mixed-endian floating
+** points (ex: ARM7) then swap the lower 4 bytes with the
** upper 4 bytes. Return the result.
**
** For most architectures, this is a no-op.
** (2007-08-30) Frank van Vugt has studied this problem closely
** and has send his findings to the SQLite developers. Frank
** writes that some Linux kernels offer floating point hardware
-** emulation that uses only 32-bit mantissas instead of a full
+** emulation that uses only 32-bit mantissas instead of a full
** 48-bits as required by the IEEE standard. (This is the
** CONFIG_FPE_FASTFPE option.) On such systems, floating point
** byte swapping becomes very complicated. To avoid problems,
#endif
/*
-** Write the serialized data blob for the value stored in pMem into
+** Write the serialized data blob for the value stored in pMem into
** buf. It is assumed that the caller has allocated sufficient space.
** Return the number of bytes written.
**
** Return the number of bytes actually written into buf[]. The number
** of bytes in the zero-filled tail is included in the return value only
** if those bytes were zeroed in buf[].
-*/
+*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialPut(u8 *buf, int nBuf, Mem *pMem, int file_format){
u32 serial_type = sqlite3VdbeSerialType(pMem, file_format);
u32 len;
/*
** Deserialize the data blob pointed to by buf as serial type serial_type
** and store the result in pMem. Return the number of bytes read.
-*/
+*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(
const unsigned char *buf, /* Buffer to deserialize from */
u32 serial_type, /* Serial type to deserialize */
**
** The returned structure should be closed by a call to
** sqlite3VdbeDeleteUnpackedRecord().
-*/
+*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE UnpackedRecord *sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack(
KeyInfo *pKeyInfo, /* Information about the record format */
int nKey, /* Size of the binary record */
u32 szHdr;
Mem *pMem;
int nOff; /* Increase pSpace by this much to 8-byte align it */
-
+
/*
** We want to shift the pointer pSpace up such that it is 8-byte aligned.
- ** Thus, we need to calculate a value, nOff, between 0 and 7, to shift
+ ** Thus, we need to calculate a value, nOff, between 0 and 7, to shift
** it by. If pSpace is already 8-byte aligned, nOff should be zero.
*/
nOff = (8 - (SQLITE_PTR_TO_INT(pSpace) & 7)) & 7;
/*
** This function compares the two table rows or index records
** specified by {nKey1, pKey1} and pPKey2. It returns a negative, zero
-** or positive integer if key1 is less than, equal to or
+** or positive integer if key1 is less than, equal to or
** greater than key2. The {nKey1, pKey1} key must be a blob
** created by th OP_MakeRecord opcode of the VDBE. The pPKey2
** key must be a parsed key such as obtained from
** sqlite3VdbeParseRecord.
**
** Key1 and Key2 do not have to contain the same number of fields.
-** The key with fewer fields is usually compares less than the
+** The key with fewer fields is usually compares less than the
** longer key. However if the UNPACKED_INCRKEY flags in pPKey2 is set
** and the common prefixes are equal, then key1 is less than key2.
** Or if the UNPACKED_MATCH_PREFIX flag is set and the prefixes are
/* Compilers may complain that mem1.u.i is potentially uninitialized.
** We could initialize it, as shown here, to silence those complaints.
- ** But in fact, mem1.u.i will never actually be used initialized, and doing
+ ** But in fact, mem1.u.i will never actually be used initialized, and doing
** the unnecessary initialization has a measurable negative performance
** impact, since this routine is a very high runner. And so, we choose
** to ignore the compiler warnings and leave this variable uninitialized.
*/
/* mem1.u.i = 0; // not needed, here to silence compiler warning */
-
+
idx1 = getVarint32(aKey1, szHdr1);
d1 = szHdr1;
if( pPKey2->flags & UNPACKED_IGNORE_ROWID ){
if( pKeyInfo->aSortOrder && i<nField && pKeyInfo->aSortOrder[i] ){
rc = -rc;
}
-
+
/* If the PREFIX_SEARCH flag is set and all fields except the final
- ** rowid field were equal, then clear the PREFIX_SEARCH flag and set
+ ** rowid field were equal, then clear the PREFIX_SEARCH flag and set
** pPKey2->rowid to the value of the rowid field in (pKey1, nKey1).
** This is used by the OP_IsUnique opcode.
*/
pPKey2->flags &= ~UNPACKED_PREFIX_SEARCH;
pPKey2->rowid = mem1.u.i;
}
-
+
return rc;
}
i++;
** all the fields up to that point were equal. If the UNPACKED_INCRKEY
** flag is set, then break the tie by treating key2 as larger.
** If the UPACKED_PREFIX_MATCH flag is set, then keys with common prefixes
- ** are considered to be equal. Otherwise, the longer key is the
+ ** are considered to be equal. Otherwise, the longer key is the
** larger. As it happens, the pPKey2 will always be the longer
** if there is a difference.
*/
}
return rc;
}
-
+
/*
** pCur points at an index entry created using the OP_MakeRecord opcode.
/* Get the size of the index entry. Only indices entries of less
** than 2GiB are support - anything large must be database corruption.
** Any corruption is detected in sqlite3BtreeParseCellPtr(), though, so
- ** this code can safely assume that nCellKey is 32-bits
+ ** this code can safely assume that nCellKey is 32-bits
*/
assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCur) );
rc = sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pCur, &nCellKey);
**
** pUnpacked is either created without a rowid or is truncated so that it
** omits the rowid at the end. The rowid at the end of the index entry
-** is ignored as well. Hence, this routine only compares the prefixes
+** is ignored as well. Hence, this routine only compares the prefixes
** of the keys prior to the final rowid, not the entire key.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare(
/*
** This routine sets the value to be returned by subsequent calls to
-** sqlite3_changes() on the database handle 'db'.
+** sqlite3_changes() on the database handle 'db'.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(sqlite3 *db, int nChange){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
/*
** Return a pointer to an sqlite3_value structure containing the value bound
-** parameter iVar of VM v. Except, if the value is an SQL NULL, return
+** parameter iVar of VM v. Except, if the value is an SQL NULL, return
** 0 instead. Unless it is NULL, apply affinity aff (one of the SQLITE_AFF_*
** constants) to the value before returning it.
**
}
}
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_blob(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const void *z,
- int n,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const void *z,
+ int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
assert( n>=0 );
sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(&pCtx->s);
}
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const char *z,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const char *z,
int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text16(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const void *z,
- int n,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const void *z,
+ int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->s.db->mutex) );
setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE, xDel);
}
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text16be(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const void *z,
- int n,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const void *z,
+ int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->s.db->mutex) );
setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, SQLITE_UTF16BE, xDel);
}
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text16le(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const void *z,
- int n,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const void *z,
+ int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->s.db->mutex) );
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_error_code(sqlite3_context *pCtx, int errCode){
pCtx->isError = errCode;
if( pCtx->s.flags & MEM_Null ){
- sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(&pCtx->s, sqlite3ErrStr(errCode), -1,
+ sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(&pCtx->s, sqlite3ErrStr(errCode), -1,
SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC);
}
}
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_error_toobig(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->s.db->mutex) );
pCtx->isError = SQLITE_TOOBIG;
- sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(&pCtx->s, "string or blob too big", -1,
+ sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(&pCtx->s, "string or blob too big", -1,
SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC);
}
** statement is completely executed or an error occurs.
**
** This routine implements the bulk of the logic behind the sqlite_step()
-** API. The only thing omitted is the automatic recompile if a
+** API. The only thing omitted is the automatic recompile if a
** schema change has occurred. That detail is handled by the
** outer sqlite3_step() wrapper procedure.
*/
assert(p);
if( p->magic!=VDBE_MAGIC_RUN ){
- sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
+ sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
"attempt to step a halted statement: [%s]", p->zSql);
return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
}
p->rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
end_of_step:
- /* At this point local variable rc holds the value that should be
- ** returned if this statement was compiled using the legacy
+ /* At this point local variable rc holds the value that should be
+ ** returned if this statement was compiled using the legacy
** sqlite3_prepare() interface. According to the docs, this can only
- ** be one of the values in the first assert() below. Variable p->rc
- ** contains the value that would be returned if sqlite3_finalize()
+ ** be one of the values in the first assert() below. Variable p->rc
+ ** contains the value that would be returned if sqlite3_finalize()
** were called on statement p.
*/
- assert( rc==SQLITE_ROW || rc==SQLITE_DONE || rc==SQLITE_ERROR
+ assert( rc==SQLITE_ROW || rc==SQLITE_DONE || rc==SQLITE_ERROR
|| rc==SQLITE_BUSY || rc==SQLITE_MISUSE
);
assert( p->rc!=SQLITE_ROW && p->rc!=SQLITE_DONE );
/* If this statement was prepared using sqlite3_prepare_v2(), and an
** error has occured, then return the error code in p->rc to the
** caller. Set the error code in the database handle to the same value.
- */
+ */
rc = db->errCode = p->rc;
}
return (rc&db->errMask);
v->expired = 0;
}
if( rc2!=SQLITE_OK && ALWAYS(v->isPrepareV2) && ALWAYS(db->pErr) ){
- /* This case occurs after failing to recompile an sql statement.
- ** The error message from the SQL compiler has already been loaded
- ** into the database handle. This block copies the error message
+ /* This case occurs after failing to recompile an sql statement.
+ ** The error message from the SQL compiler has already been loaded
+ ** into the database handle. This block copies the error message
** from the database handle into the statement and sets the statement
- ** program counter to 0 to ensure that when the statement is
+ ** program counter to 0 to ensure that when the statement is
** finalized or reset the parser error message is available via
** sqlite3_errmsg() and sqlite3_errcode().
*/
- const char *zErr = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(db->pErr);
+ const char *zErr = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(db->pErr);
sqlite3DbFree(db, v->zErrMsg);
if( !db->mallocFailed ){
v->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, zErr);
** deleted by calling the delete function specified when it was set.
*/
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_set_auxdata(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- int iArg,
- void *pAux,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ int iArg,
+ void *pAux,
void (*xDelete)(void*)
){
struct AuxData *pAuxData;
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED
/*
-** Return the number of times the Step function of a aggregate has been
+** Return the number of times the Step function of a aggregate has been
** called.
**
** This function is deprecated. Do not use it for new code. It is
** this assert() from failing, when building with SQLITE_DEBUG defined
** using gcc, force nullMem to be 8-byte aligned using the magical
** __attribute__((aligned(8))) macro. */
- static const Mem nullMem
+ static const Mem nullMem
#if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) && defined(__GNUC__)
- __attribute__((aligned(8)))
+ __attribute__((aligned(8)))
#endif
= {{0}, (double)0, 0, "", 0, MEM_Null, SQLITE_NULL, 0, 0, 0 };
}
/*
-** This function is called after invoking an sqlite3_value_XXX function on a
+** This function is called after invoking an sqlite3_value_XXX function on a
** column value (i.e. a value returned by evaluating an SQL expression in the
-** select list of a SELECT statement) that may cause a malloc() failure. If
+** select list of a SELECT statement) that may cause a malloc() failure. If
** malloc() has failed, the threads mallocFailed flag is cleared and the result
** code of statement pStmt set to SQLITE_NOMEM.
**
const void *val;
val = sqlite3_value_blob( columnMem(pStmt,i) );
/* Even though there is no encoding conversion, value_blob() might
- ** need to call malloc() to expand the result of a zeroblob()
- ** expression.
+ ** need to call malloc() to expand the result of a zeroblob()
+ ** expression.
*/
columnMallocFailure(pStmt);
return val;
Vdbe *p = (Vdbe *)pStmt;
int n;
sqlite3 *db = p->db;
-
+
assert( db!=0 );
n = sqlite3_column_count(pStmt);
if( N<n && N>=0 ){
/******************************* sqlite3_bind_ ***************************
-**
+**
** Routines used to attach values to wildcards in a compiled SQL statement.
*/
/*
-** Unbind the value bound to variable i in virtual machine p. This is the
+** Unbind the value bound to variable i in virtual machine p. This is the
** the same as binding a NULL value to the column. If the "i" parameter is
** out of range, then SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Othewise SQLITE_OK.
**
if( p->magic!=VDBE_MAGIC_RUN || p->pc>=0 ){
sqlite3Error(p->db, SQLITE_MISUSE, 0);
sqlite3_mutex_leave(p->db->mutex);
- sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
+ sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
"bind on a busy prepared statement: [%s]", p->zSql);
return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
}
pVar->flags = MEM_Null;
sqlite3Error(p->db, SQLITE_OK, 0);
- /* If the bit corresponding to this variable in Vdbe.expmask is set, then
+ /* If the bit corresponding to this variable in Vdbe.expmask is set, then
** binding a new value to this variable invalidates the current query plan.
*/
if( p->isPrepareV2 &&
** Bind a blob value to an SQL statement variable.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_blob(
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
- int i,
- const void *zData,
- int nData,
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+ int i,
+ const void *zData,
+ int nData,
void (*xDel)(void*)
){
return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, 0);
}
return rc;
}
-SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text(
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
- int i,
- const char *zData,
- int nData,
+SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text(
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+ int i,
+ const char *zData,
+ int nData,
void (*xDel)(void*)
){
return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, SQLITE_UTF8);
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text16(
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
- int i,
- const void *zData,
- int nData,
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+ int i,
+ const void *zData,
+ int nData,
void (*xDel)(void*)
){
return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE);
/*
** Return the number of wildcards that can be potentially bound to.
-** This routine is added to support DBD::SQLite.
+** This routine is added to support DBD::SQLite.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_parameter_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){
Vdbe *p = (Vdbe*)pStmt;
if( p==0 ){
return 0;
}
- createVarMap(p);
+ createVarMap(p);
if( zName ){
for(i=0; i<p->nVar; i++){
const char *z = p->azVar[i];
char zBase[100]; /* Initial working space */
db = p->db;
- sqlite3StrAccumInit(&out, zBase, sizeof(zBase),
+ sqlite3StrAccumInit(&out, zBase, sizeof(zBase),
db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH]);
out.db = db;
while( zRawSql[0] ){
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
-** The code in this file implements execution method of the
+** The code in this file implements execution method of the
** Virtual Database Engine (VDBE). A separate file ("vdbeaux.c")
** handles housekeeping details such as creating and deleting
** VDBE instances. This file is solely interested in executing
** to a VDBE.
**
** The SQL parser generates a program which is then executed by
-** the VDBE to do the work of the SQL statement. VDBE programs are
+** the VDBE to do the work of the SQL statement. VDBE programs are
** similar in form to assembly language. The program consists of
-** a linear sequence of operations. Each operation has an opcode
-** and 5 operands. Operands P1, P2, and P3 are integers. Operand P4
+** a linear sequence of operations. Each operation has an opcode
+** and 5 operands. Operands P1, P2, and P3 are integers. Operand P4
** is a null-terminated string. Operand P5 is an unsigned character.
** Few opcodes use all 5 operands.
**
** either an integer, a null-terminated string, a floating point
** number, or the SQL "NULL" value. An implicit conversion from one
** type to the other occurs as necessary.
-**
+**
** Most of the code in this file is taken up by the sqlite3VdbeExec()
** function which does the work of interpreting a VDBE program.
** But other routines are also provided to help in building up
/*
** Argument pMem points at a register that will be passed to a
** user-defined function or returned to the user as the result of a query.
-** This routine sets the pMem->type variable used by the sqlite3_value_*()
+** This routine sets the pMem->type variable used by the sqlite3_value_*()
** routines.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMemStoreType(Mem *pMem){
int isBtreeCursor /* True for B-Tree. False for pseudo-table or vtab */
){
/* Find the memory cell that will be used to store the blob of memory
- ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a
+ ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a
** vdbe memory cell to manage the memory allocation required for a
** VdbeCursor structure for the following reasons:
**
int nByte;
VdbeCursor *pCx = 0;
- nByte =
- ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) +
- (isBtreeCursor?sqlite3BtreeCursorSize():0) +
+ nByte =
+ ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) +
+ (isBtreeCursor?sqlite3BtreeCursorSize():0) +
2*nField*sizeof(u32);
assert( iCur<p->nCursor );
** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER:
** SQLITE_AFF_REAL:
** SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC:
-** Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a
+** Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a
** floating-point representation if an integer representation
** is not possible. Note that the integer representation is
** always preferred, even if the affinity is REAL, because
}
/*
-** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*,
+** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*,
** not the internal Mem* type.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ValueApplyAffinity(
- sqlite3_value *pVal,
- u8 affinity,
+ sqlite3_value *pVal,
+ u8 affinity,
u8 enc
){
applyAffinity((Mem *)pVal, affinity, enc);
#ifdef VDBE_PROFILE
-/*
-** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing
+/*
+** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing
** high-performance timing routines.
*/
/************** Include hwtime.h in the middle of vdbe.c *********************/
__asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val));
return val;
}
-
+
#elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__))
__inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){
/*
** This function is only called from within an assert() expression. It
** checks that the sqlite3.nTransaction variable is correctly set to
-** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the
+** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the
** linked list starting at sqlite3.pSavepoint.
-**
+**
** Usage:
**
** assert( checkSavepointCount(db) );
#endif
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
- if( p->pc==0
+ if( p->pc==0
&& ((p->db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeListing) || fileExists(db, "vdbe_explain"))
){
int i;
sqlite3EndBenignMalloc();
}
#endif
-
+
/* Check to see if we need to simulate an interrupt. This only happens
** if we have a special test build.
assert( pOp->p3<=p->nMem );
}
#endif
-
+
switch( pOp->opcode ){
/*****************************************************************************
/* Opcode: Goto * P2 * * *
**
** An unconditional jump to address P2.
-** The next instruction executed will be
+** The next instruction executed will be
** the one at index P2 from the beginning of
** the program.
*/
** whether or not to rollback the current transaction. Do not rollback
** if P2==OE_Fail. Do the rollback if P2==OE_Rollback. If P2==OE_Abort,
** then back out all changes that have occurred during this execution of the
-** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction.
+** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction.
**
** If P4 is not null then it is an error message string.
**
sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange);
pc = sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(pFrame);
if( pOp->p2==OE_Ignore ){
- /* Instruction pc is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program
+ /* Instruction pc is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program
** currently being halted. If the p2 instruction of this OP_Halt
** instruction is set to OE_Ignore, then the sub-program is throwing
** an IGNORE exception. In this case jump to the address specified
/* Opcode: String8 * P2 * P4 *
**
-** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed
+** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed
** into an OP_String before it is executed for the first time.
*/
case OP_String8: { /* same as TK_STRING, out2-prerelease */
}
/* Fall through to the next case, OP_String */
}
-
+
/* Opcode: String P1 P2 * P4 *
**
** The string value P4 of length P1 (bytes) is stored in register P2.
/* Opcode: Divide P1 P2 P3 * *
**
** Divide the value in register P1 by the value in register P2
-** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in
-** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is
+** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in
+** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is
** NULL, the result is NULL.
*/
/* Opcode: Remainder P1 P2 P3 * *
**
** Compute the remainder after integer division of the value in
-** register P1 by the value in register P2 and store the result in P3.
+** register P1 by the value in register P2 and store the result in P3.
** If the value in register P2 is zero the result is NULL.
** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
*/
** successors. The result of the function is stored in register P3.
** Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs.
**
-** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
+** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first
** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine
** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the
}
/* Opcode: AddImm P1 P2 * * *
-**
+**
** Add the constant P2 to the value in register P1.
** The result is always an integer.
**
}
/* Opcode: MustBeInt P1 P2 * * *
-**
+**
** Force the value in register P1 to be an integer. If the value
** in P1 is not an integer and cannot be converted into an integer
** without data loss, then jump immediately to P2, or if P2==0
** Force the value in register P1 to be numeric (either an
** integer or a floating-point number.)
** If the value is text or blob, try to convert it to an using the
-** equivalent of atoi() or atof() and store 0 if no such conversion
+** equivalent of atoi() or atof() and store 0 if no such conversion
** is possible.
**
** A NULL value is not changed by this routine. It remains NULL.
/* Opcode: Lt P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
**
** Compare the values in register P1 and P3. If reg(P3)<reg(P1) then
-** jump to address P2.
+** jump to address P2.
**
** If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit of P5 is set and either reg(P1) or
-** reg(P3) is NULL then take the jump. If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL
+** reg(P3) is NULL then take the jump. If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL
** bit is clear then fall thru if either operand is NULL.
**
** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character -
-** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
+** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the
** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric
** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored
** back into the input registers P1 and P3. So this opcode can cause
** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3.
**
-** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
+** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is
** used to determine the results of the comparison. If both values
** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in
/* Opcode: Not P1 P2 * * *
**
** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value. Store the
-** boolean complement in register P2. If the value in register P1 is
+** boolean complement in register P2. If the value in register P1 is
** NULL, then a NULL is stored in P2.
*/
case OP_Not: { /* same as TK_NOT, in1, out2 */
/* Opcode: NotNull P1 P2 * * *
**
-** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL.
+** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL.
*/
case OP_NotNull: { /* same as TK_NOTNULL, jump, in1 */
pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
** Interpret the data that cursor P1 points to as a structure built using
** the MakeRecord instruction. (See the MakeRecord opcode for additional
** information about the format of the data.) Extract the P2-th column
-** from this record. If there are less that (P2+1)
+** from this record. If there are less that (P2+1)
** values in the record, extract a NULL.
**
** The value extracted is stored in register P3.
/* Opcode: Count P1 P2 * * *
**
-** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index
+** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index
** opened by cursor P1 in register P2
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_BTREECOUNT
/* Opcode: SetCookie P1 P2 P3 * *
**
** Write the content of register P3 (interpreted as an integer)
-** into cookie number P2 of database P1. P2==1 is the schema version.
-** P2==2 is the database format. P2==3 is the recommended pager cache
-** size, and so forth. P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the
+** into cookie number P2 of database P1. P2==1 is the schema version.
+** P2==2 is the database format. P2==3 is the recommended pager cache
+** size, and so forth. P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the
** database file used to store temporary tables.
**
** A transaction must be started before executing this opcode.
/* Opcode: VerifyCookie P1 P2 *
**
** Check the value of global database parameter number 0 (the
-** schema version) and make sure it is equal to P2.
+** schema version) and make sure it is equal to P2.
** P1 is the database number which is 0 for the main database file
** and 1 for the file holding temporary tables and some higher number
** for auxiliary databases.
/* Opcode: OpenRead P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
**
** Open a read-only cursor for the database table whose root page is
-** P2 in a database file. The database file is determined by P3.
-** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for
+** P2 in a database file. The database file is determined by P3.
+** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for
** temporary tables, and P3>1 means used the corresponding attached
** database. Give the new cursor an identifier of P1. The P1
** values need not be contiguous but all P1 values should be small integers.
** SQLITE_BUSY error code.
**
** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to
-** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
-** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating
-** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
+** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
+** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating
+** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
** value, it is set to the number of columns in the table.
**
** See also OpenWrite.
** root page.
**
** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to
-** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
-** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating
-** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
+** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
+** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating
+** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
** value, it is set to the number of columns in the table, or to the
** largest index of any column of the table that is actually used.
**
/* Opcode: OpenEphemeral P1 P2 * P4 *
**
** Open a new cursor P1 to a transient table.
-** The cursor is always opened read/write even if
+** The cursor is always opened read/write even if
** the main database is read-only. The transient or virtual
** table is deleted automatically when the cursor is closed.
**
**
** Open a new cursor that points to a fake table that contains a single
** row of data. The content of that one row in the content of memory
-** register P2. In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the
+** register P2. In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the
** MEM_Blob content contained in register P2.
**
** A pseudo-table created by this opcode is used to hold a single
/* Opcode: SeekGe P1 P2 P3 P4 *
**
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
-** use the value in register P3 as the key. If cursor P1 refers
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
-** that are used as an unpacked index key.
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as the key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
**
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that
-** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that
+** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
** greater than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
**
** See also: Found, NotFound, Distinct, SeekLt, SeekGt, SeekLe
*/
/* Opcode: SeekGt P1 P2 P3 P4 *
**
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
-** that are used as an unpacked index key.
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
**
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that
-** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that
+** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than
** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
**
** See also: Found, NotFound, Distinct, SeekLt, SeekGe, SeekLe
*/
-/* Opcode: SeekLt P1 P2 P3 P4 *
+/* Opcode: SeekLt P1 P2 P3 P4 *
**
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
-** that are used as an unpacked index key.
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
**
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
-** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
+** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than
** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
**
** See also: Found, NotFound, Distinct, SeekGt, SeekGe, SeekLe
*/
/* Opcode: SeekLe P1 P2 P3 P4 *
**
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
-** that are used as an unpacked index key.
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
**
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
-** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
+** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
** less than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
**
** See also: Found, NotFound, Distinct, SeekGt, SeekGe, SeekLt
}
break;
}
-
+
/* Opcode: Found P1 P2 P3 P4 *
**
** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If
** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked
** record.
-**
+**
** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4
-** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2. If P1
+** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2. If P1
** does contain an entry whose prefix matches the P3/P4 record then control
** falls through to the next instruction and P1 is left pointing at the
** matching entry.
** the list field being the integer ROWID of the entry that the index
** entry refers to.
**
-** The P3 register contains an integer record number. Call this record
+** The P3 register contains an integer record number. Call this record
** number R. Register P4 is the first in a set of N contiguous registers
** that make up an unpacked index key that can be used with cursor P1.
** The value of N can be inferred from the cursor. N includes the rowid
/* Opcode: NotExists P1 P2 P3 * *
**
-** Use the content of register P3 as a integer key. If a record
-** with that key does not exist in table of P1, then jump to P2.
-** If the record does exist, then fall thru. The cursor is left
+** Use the content of register P3 as a integer key. If a record
+** with that key does not exist in table of P1, then jump to P2.
+** If the record does exist, then fall thru. The cursor is left
** pointing to the record if it exists.
**
** The difference between this operation and NotFound is that this
** Find the next available sequence number for cursor P1.
** Write the sequence number into register P2.
** The sequence number on the cursor is incremented after this
-** instruction.
+** instruction.
*/
case OP_Sequence: { /* out2-prerelease */
assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
** table that cursor P1 points to. The new record number is written
** written to register P2.
**
-** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds
+** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds
** the largest previously generated record number. No new record numbers are
-** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum,
+** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum,
** a SQLITE_FULL error is generated. The P3 register is updated with the '
** generated record number. This P3 mechanism is used to help implement the
** AUTOINCREMENT feature.
** the update hook.
**
** Parameter P4 may point to a string containing the table-name, or
-** may be NULL. If it is not NULL, then the update-hook
+** may be NULL. If it is not NULL, then the update-hook
** (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked following a successful insert.
**
** (WARNING/TODO: If P1 is a pseudo-cursor and P2 is dynamically
** This works exactly like OP_Insert except that the key is the
** integer value P3, not the value of the integer stored in register P3.
*/
-case OP_Insert:
+case OP_Insert:
case OP_InsertInt: {
#if 0 /* local variables moved into u.bf */
Mem *pData; /* MEM cell holding data for the record to be inserted */
/* Opcode: RowData P1 P2 * * *
**
** Write into register P2 the complete row data for cursor P1.
-** There is no interpretation of the data.
-** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as
+** There is no interpretation of the data.
+** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as
** it is found in the database file.
**
** If the P1 cursor must be pointing to a valid row (not a NULL row)
/* Opcode: RowKey P1 P2 * * *
**
** Write into register P2 the complete row key for cursor P1.
-** There is no interpretation of the data.
-** The key is copied onto the P3 register exactly as
+** There is no interpretation of the data.
+** The key is copied onto the P3 register exactly as
** it is found in the database file.
**
** If the P1 cursor must be pointing to a valid row (not a NULL row)
/* Opcode: Last P1 P2 * * *
**
-** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1
+** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1
** will refer to the last entry in the database table or index.
** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2.
** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through
}
/* Opcode: Rewind P1 P2 * * *
**
-** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1
+** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1
** will refer to the first entry in the database table or index.
** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2.
** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through
/* Opcode: IdxDelete P1 P2 P3 * *
**
** The content of P3 registers starting at register P2 form
-** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the
+** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the
** index opened by cursor P1.
*/
case OP_IdxDelete: {
/* Opcode: IdxGE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
**
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
-** key that omits the ROWID. Compare this key value against the index
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
+** key that omits the ROWID. Compare this key value against the index
** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the ROWID on the P1 index.
**
** If the P1 index entry is greater than or equal to the key value
** then jump to P2. Otherwise fall through to the next instruction.
**
-** If P5 is non-zero then the key value is increased by an epsilon
+** If P5 is non-zero then the key value is increased by an epsilon
** prior to the comparison. This make the opcode work like IdxGT except
** that if the key from register P3 is a prefix of the key in the cursor,
** the result is false whereas it would be true with IdxGT.
*/
/* Opcode: IdxLT P1 P2 P3 * P5
**
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
-** key that omits the ROWID. Compare this key value against the index
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
+** key that omits the ROWID. Compare this key value against the index
** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the ROWID on the P1 index.
**
** If the P1 index entry is less than the key value then jump to P2.
** Otherwise fall through to the next instruction.
**
-** If P5 is non-zero then the key value is increased by an epsilon prior
+** If P5 is non-zero then the key value is increased by an epsilon prior
** to the comparison. This makes the opcode work like IdxLE.
*/
case OP_IdxLT: /* jump */
** might be moved into the newly deleted root page in order to keep all
** root pages contiguous at the beginning of the database. The former
** value of the root page that moved - its value before the move occurred -
-** is stored in register P2. If no page
-** movement was required (because the table being dropped was already
+** is stored in register P2. If no page
+** movement was required (because the table being dropped was already
** the last one in the database) then a zero is stored in register P2.
** If AUTOVACUUM is disabled then a zero is stored in register P2.
**
** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE.
**
** If the P3 value is non-zero, then the table referred to must be an
-** intkey table (an SQL table, not an index). In this case the row change
-** count is incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared.
+** intkey table (an SQL table, not an index). In this case the row change
+** count is incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared.
** If P3 is greater than zero, then the value stored in register P3 is
** also incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared.
**
case OP_LoadAnalysis: {
assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb );
rc = sqlite3AnalysisLoad(db, pOp->p1);
- break;
+ break;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) */
**
** The register P3 contains the maximum number of allowed errors.
** At most reg(P3) errors will be reported.
-** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are
+** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are
** seen. Reg(P1) is updated with the number of errors remaining.
**
** The root page numbers of all tables in the database are integer
/* Opcode: Program P1 P2 P3 P4 *
**
-** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM).
+** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM).
**
-** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory
-** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2
-** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE
-** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address
-** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the
+** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory
+** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2
+** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE
+** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address
+** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the
** memory required by the sub-vdbe at runtime.
**
** P4 is a pointer to the VM containing the trigger program.
/* Opcode: Param P1 P2 * * *
**
-** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the
-** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory
-** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames
-** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.*
+** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the
+** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory
+** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames
+** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.*
** and old.* values.
**
** The address of the cell in the parent frame is determined by adding
/* Opcode: FkCounter P1 P2 * * *
**
** Increment a "constraint counter" by P2 (P2 may be negative or positive).
-** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented
-** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the
+** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented
+** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the
** statement counter is incremented (immediate foreign key constraints).
*/
case OP_FkCounter: {
/* Opcode: FkIfZero P1 P2 * * *
**
** This opcode tests if a foreign key constraint-counter is currently zero.
-** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next
+** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next
** instruction.
**
** If P1 is non-zero, then the jump is taken if the database constraint-counter
**
** P1 is a register in the root frame of this VM (the root frame is
** different from the current frame if this instruction is being executed
-** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of
+** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of
** its current value and the value in register P2.
**
** This instruction throws an error if the memory cell is not initially
/* Opcode: IfNeg P1 P2 * * *
**
-** If the value of register P1 is less than zero, jump to P2.
+** If the value of register P1 is less than zero, jump to P2.
**
** It is illegal to use this instruction on a register that does
** not contain an integer. An assertion fault will result if you try.
/* Opcode: IfZero P1 P2 P3 * *
**
** The register P1 must contain an integer. Add literal P3 to the
-** value in register P1. If the result is exactly 0, jump to P2.
+** value in register P1. If the result is exactly 0, jump to P2.
**
** It is illegal to use this instruction on a register that does
** not contain an integer. An assertion fault will result if you try.
/* Opcode: Expire P1 * * * *
**
** Cause precompiled statements to become expired. An expired statement
-** fails with an error code of SQLITE_SCHEMA if it is ever executed
+** fails with an error code of SQLITE_SCHEMA if it is ever executed
** (via sqlite3_step()).
-**
+**
** If P1 is 0, then all SQL statements become expired. If P1 is non-zero,
-** then only the currently executing statement is affected.
+** then only the currently executing statement is affected.
*/
case OP_Expire: {
if( !pOp->p1 ){
/* Opcode: TableLock P1 P2 P3 P4 *
**
** Obtain a lock on a particular table. This instruction is only used when
-** the shared-cache feature is enabled.
+** the shared-cache feature is enabled.
**
** P1 is the index of the database in sqlite3.aDb[] of the database
** on which the lock is acquired. A readlock is obtained if P3==0 or
case OP_TableLock: {
u8 isWriteLock = (u8)pOp->p3;
if( isWriteLock || 0==(db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommitted) ){
- int p1 = pOp->p1;
+ int p1 = pOp->p1;
assert( p1>=0 && p1<db->nDb );
assert( (p->btreeMask & (1<<p1))!=0 );
assert( isWriteLock==0 || isWriteLock==1 );
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
/* Opcode: VBegin * * * P4 *
**
-** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the
+** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the
** xBegin method for that table.
**
** Also, whether or not P4 is set, check that this is not being called from
/* Opcode: VColumn P1 P2 P3 * *
**
** Store the value of the P2-th column of
-** the row of the virtual-table that the
+** the row of the virtual-table that the
** P1 cursor is pointing to into register P3.
*/
case OP_VColumn: {
**
** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure.
** This opcode invokes the corresponding xUpdate method. P2 values
-** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate
-** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the
+** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate
+** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the
** p2th element of the argv array passed to xUpdate.
**
** The xUpdate method will do a DELETE or an INSERT or both.
** The argv[0] element (which corresponds to memory cell P3)
-** is the rowid of a row to delete. If argv[0] is NULL then no
-** deletion occurs. The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new
-** row. This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new
-** rowid for itself. The subsequent elements in the array are
+** is the rowid of a row to delete. If argv[0] is NULL then no
+** deletion occurs. The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new
+** row. This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new
+** rowid for itself. The subsequent elements in the array are
** the values of columns in the new row.
**
** If P2==1 then no insert is performed. argv[0] is the rowid of
** a row to delete.
**
** P1 is a boolean flag. If it is set to true and the xUpdate call
-** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid()
+** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid()
** is set to the value of the rowid for the row just inserted.
*/
case OP_VUpdate: {
assert( rc );
p->rc = rc;
testcase( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xLog!=0 );
- sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s",
+ sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s",
pc, p->zSql, p->zErrMsg);
sqlite3VdbeHalt(p);
if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ) db->mallocFailed = 1;
int nAttempt = 0;
int iCol; /* Index of zColumn in row-record */
- /* This VDBE program seeks a btree cursor to the identified
+ /* This VDBE program seeks a btree cursor to the identified
** db/table/row entry. The reason for using a vdbe program instead
** of writing code to use the b-tree layer directly is that the
** vdbe program will take advantage of the various transaction,
**
** After seeking the cursor, the vdbe executes an OP_ResultRow.
** Code external to the Vdbe then "borrows" the b-tree cursor and
- ** uses it to implement the blob_read(), blob_write() and
+ ** uses it to implement the blob_read(), blob_write() and
** blob_bytes() functions.
**
** The sqlite3_blob_close() function finalizes the vdbe program,
- ** which closes the b-tree cursor and (possibly) commits the
+ ** which closes the b-tree cursor and (possibly) commits the
** transaction.
*/
static const VdbeOpList openBlob[] = {
}
/* If the value is being opened for writing, check that the
- ** column is not indexed, and that it is not part of a foreign key.
+ ** column is not indexed, and that it is not part of a foreign key.
** It is against the rules to open a column to which either of these
** descriptions applies for writing. */
if( flags ){
if( db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){
/* Check that the column is not part of an FK child key definition. It
** is not necessary to check if it is part of a parent key, as parent
- ** key columns must be indexed. The check below will pick up this
+ ** key columns must be indexed. The check below will pick up this
** case. */
FKey *pFKey;
for(pFKey=pTab->pFKey; pFKey; pFKey=pFKey->pNextFrom){
sqlite3VdbeChangeP2(v, 1, pTab->pSchema->schema_cookie);
/* Make sure a mutex is held on the table to be accessed */
- sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree(v, iDb);
+ sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree(v, iDb);
/* Configure the OP_TableLock instruction */
sqlite3VdbeChangeP1(v, 2, iDb);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP3(v, 2, flags);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, 2, pTab->zName, P4_TRANSIENT);
- /* Remove either the OP_OpenWrite or OpenRead. Set the P2
+ /* Remove either the OP_OpenWrite or OpenRead. Set the P2
** parameter of the other to pTab->tnum. */
sqlite3VdbeChangeToNoop(v, 4 - flags, 1);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP2(v, 3 + flags, pTab->tnum);
** think that the table has one more column than it really
** does. An OP_Column to retrieve this imaginary column will
** always return an SQL NULL. This is useful because it means
- ** we can invoke OP_Column to fill in the vdbe cursors type
+ ** we can invoke OP_Column to fill in the vdbe cursors type
** and offset cache without causing any IO.
*/
sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, 3+flags, SQLITE_INT_TO_PTR(pTab->nCol+1),P4_INT32);
sqlite3VdbeMakeReady(v, 1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0);
}
}
-
+
sqlite3BtreeLeaveAll(db);
if( db->mallocFailed ){
goto blob_open_out;
** Perform a read or write operation on a blob
*/
static int blobReadWrite(
- sqlite3_blob *pBlob,
- void *z,
- int n,
- int iOffset,
+ sqlite3_blob *pBlob,
+ void *z,
+ int n,
+ int iOffset,
int (*xCall)(BtCursor*, u32, u32, void*)
){
int rc;
** be used to service read() and write() requests. The actual file
** on disk is not created or populated until either:
**
-** 1) The in-memory representation grows too large for the allocated
+** 1) The in-memory representation grows too large for the allocated
** buffer, or
** 2) The sqlite3JournalCreate() function is called.
*/
typedef struct JournalFile JournalFile;
/*
-** If it does not already exists, create and populate the on-disk file
+** If it does not already exists, create and populate the on-disk file
** for JournalFile p.
*/
static int createFile(JournalFile *p){
0 /* xDeviceCharacteristics */
};
-/*
+/*
** Open a journal file.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3JournalOpen(
return createFile((JournalFile *)p);
}
-/*
+/*
** Return the number of bytes required to store a JournalFile that uses vfs
** pVfs to create the underlying on-disk files.
*/
if( p->readpoint.iOffset!=iOfst || iOfst==0 ){
sqlite3_int64 iOff = 0;
- for(pChunk=p->pFirst;
+ for(pChunk=p->pFirst;
ALWAYS(pChunk) && (iOff+JOURNAL_CHUNKSIZE)<=iOfst;
pChunk=pChunk->pNext
){
0 /* xDeviceCharacteristics */
};
-/*
+/*
** Open a journal file.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemJournalOpen(sqlite3_file *pJfd){
}
/*
-** Return true if the file-handle passed as an argument is
-** an in-memory journal
+** Return true if the file-handle passed as an argument is
+** an in-memory journal
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsMemJournal(sqlite3_file *pJfd){
return pJfd->pMethods==&MemJournalMethods;
}
-/*
+/*
** Return the number of bytes required to store a MemJournal that uses vfs
** pVfs to create the underlying on-disk files.
*/
** Walk the parse trees associated with all subqueries in the
** FROM clause of SELECT statement p. Do not invoke the select
** callback on p, but do invoke it on each FROM clause subquery
-** and on any subqueries further down in the tree. Return
+** and on any subqueries further down in the tree. Return
** WRC_Abort or WRC_Continue;
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalkSelectFrom(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
}
}
return WRC_Continue;
-}
+}
/*
** Call sqlite3WalkExpr() for every expression in Select statement p.
**
** The reason for suppressing the TK_AS term when the expression is a simple
** column reference is so that the column reference will be recognized as
-** usable by indices within the WHERE clause processing logic.
+** usable by indices within the WHERE clause processing logic.
**
** Hack: The TK_AS operator is inhibited if zType[0]=='G'. This means
** that in a GROUP BY clause, the expression is evaluated twice. Hence:
pDup->flags |= EP_ExpCollate;
}
- /* Before calling sqlite3ExprDelete(), set the EP_Static flag. This
+ /* Before calling sqlite3ExprDelete(), set the EP_Static flag. This
** prevents ExprDelete() from deleting the Expr structure itself,
** allowing it to be repopulated by the memcpy() on the following line.
*/
/*
** Given the name of a column of the form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z, look up
-** that name in the set of source tables in pSrcList and make the pExpr
+** that name in the set of source tables in pSrcList and make the pExpr
** expression node refer back to that source column. The following changes
** are made to pExpr:
**
Table *pTab;
int iDb;
Column *pCol;
-
+
pTab = pItem->pTab;
assert( pTab!=0 && pTab->zName!=0 );
iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema);
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
- /* If we have not already resolved the name, then maybe
+ /* If we have not already resolved the name, then maybe
** it is a new.* or old.* trigger argument reference
*/
if( zDb==0 && zTab!=0 && cnt==0 && pParse->pTriggerTab!=0 ){
pTab = pParse->pTriggerTab;
}
- if( pTab ){
+ if( pTab ){
int iCol;
pSchema = pTab->pSchema;
cntTab++;
assert( zTab==0 && zDb==0 );
goto lookupname_end;
}
- }
+ }
}
/* Advance to the next name context. The loop will exit when either
SrcList *pSrcList = pNC->pSrcList;
struct SrcList_item *pItem;
assert( pSrcList && pSrcList->nSrc==1 );
- pItem = pSrcList->a;
+ pItem = pSrcList->a;
pExpr->op = TK_COLUMN;
pExpr->pTab = pItem->pTab;
pExpr->iTable = pItem->iCursor;
case TK_ID: {
return lookupName(pParse, 0, 0, pExpr->u.zToken, pNC, pExpr);
}
-
+
/* A table name and column name: ID.ID
** Or a database, table and column: ID.ID.ID
*/
sqlite3WalkExprList(pWalker, pList);
if( is_agg ) pNC->allowAgg = 1;
/* FIX ME: Compute pExpr->affinity based on the expected return
- ** type of the function
+ ** type of the function
*/
return WRC_Prune;
}
int i, /* The index (1-based) of the term out of range */
int mx /* Largest permissible value of i */
){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"%r %s BY term out of range - should be "
"between 1 and %d", i, zType, mx);
}
ExprList *pGroupBy; /* The GROUP BY clause */
Select *pLeftmost; /* Left-most of SELECT of a compound */
sqlite3 *db; /* Database connection */
-
+
assert( p!=0 );
if( p->selFlags & SF_Resolved ){
sqlite3ResolveExprNames(&sNC, p->pOffset) ){
return WRC_Abort;
}
-
+
/* Set up the local name-context to pass to sqlite3ResolveExprNames() to
** resolve the result-set expression list.
*/
sNC.allowAgg = 1;
sNC.pSrcList = p->pSrc;
sNC.pNext = pOuterNC;
-
+
/* Resolve names in the result set. */
pEList = p->pEList;
assert( pEList!=0 );
return WRC_Abort;
}
}
-
+
/* Recursively resolve names in all subqueries
*/
for(i=0; i<p->pSrc->nSrc; i++){
if( pParse->nErr || db->mallocFailed ) return WRC_Abort;
}
}
-
- /* If there are no aggregate functions in the result-set, and no GROUP BY
+
+ /* If there are no aggregate functions in the result-set, and no GROUP BY
** expression, do not allow aggregates in any of the other expressions.
*/
assert( (p->selFlags & SF_Aggregate)==0 );
}else{
sNC.allowAgg = 0;
}
-
+
/* If a HAVING clause is present, then there must be a GROUP BY clause.
*/
if( p->pHaving && !pGroupBy ){
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a GROUP BY clause is required before HAVING");
return WRC_Abort;
}
-
+
/* Add the expression list to the name-context before parsing the
** other expressions in the SELECT statement. This is so that
** expressions in the WHERE clause (etc.) can refer to expressions by
}
/* The ORDER BY and GROUP BY clauses may not refer to terms in
- ** outer queries
+ ** outer queries
*/
sNC.pNext = 0;
sNC.allowAgg = 1;
if( db->mallocFailed ){
return WRC_Abort;
}
-
- /* Resolve the GROUP BY clause. At the same time, make sure
+
+ /* Resolve the GROUP BY clause. At the same time, make sure
** the GROUP BY clause does not contain aggregate functions.
*/
if( pGroupBy ){
struct ExprList_item *pItem;
-
+
if( resolveOrderGroupBy(&sNC, p, pGroupBy, "GROUP") || db->mallocFailed ){
return WRC_Abort;
}
** checking on function usage and set a flag if any aggregate functions
** are seen.
**
-** To resolve table columns references we look for nodes (or subtrees) of the
+** To resolve table columns references we look for nodes (or subtrees) of the
** form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z where
**
** X: The name of a database. Ex: "main" or "temp" or
**
** SELECT a+b AS x, c+d AS y FROM t1 ORDER BY a+b;
**
-** Function calls are checked to make sure that the function is
+** Function calls are checked to make sure that the function is
** defined and that the correct number of arguments are specified.
** If the function is an aggregate function, then the pNC->hasAgg is
** set and the opcode is changed from TK_FUNCTION to TK_AGG_FUNCTION.
** An error message is left in pParse if anything is amiss. The number
** if errors is returned.
*/
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ResolveExprNames(
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ResolveExprNames(
NameContext *pNC, /* Namespace to resolve expressions in. */
Expr *pExpr /* The expression to be analyzed. */
){
** Return the 'affinity' of the expression pExpr if any.
**
** If pExpr is a column, a reference to a column via an 'AS' alias,
-** or a sub-select with a column as the return value, then the
+** or a sub-select with a column as the return value, then the
** affinity of that column is returned. Otherwise, 0x00 is returned,
** indicating no affinity for the expression.
**
return sqlite3AffinityType(pExpr->u.zToken);
}
#endif
- if( (op==TK_AGG_COLUMN || op==TK_COLUMN || op==TK_REGISTER)
+ if( (op==TK_AGG_COLUMN || op==TK_COLUMN || op==TK_REGISTER)
&& pExpr->pTab!=0
){
/* op==TK_REGISTER && pExpr->pTab!=0 happens when pExpr was originally
}
p = p->pLeft;
}
- if( sqlite3CheckCollSeq(pParse, pColl) ){
+ if( sqlite3CheckCollSeq(pParse, pColl) ){
pColl = 0;
}
return pColl;
** it is not considered.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE CollSeq *sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(
- Parse *pParse,
- Expr *pLeft,
+ Parse *pParse,
+ Expr *pLeft,
Expr *pRight
){
CollSeq *pColl;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
int mxHeight = pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_EXPR_DEPTH];
if( nHeight>mxHeight ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"Expression tree is too large (maximum depth %d)", mxHeight
);
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}
/*
-** Set the Expr.nHeight variable in the structure passed as an
-** argument. An expression with no children, Expr.pList or
+** Set the Expr.nHeight variable in the structure passed as an
+** argument. An expression with no children, Expr.pList or
** Expr.pSelect member has a height of 1. Any other expression
-** has a height equal to the maximum height of any other
+** has a height equal to the maximum height of any other
** referenced Expr plus one.
*/
static void exprSetHeight(Expr *p){
pNew->u.zToken = (char*)&pNew[1];
memcpy(pNew->u.zToken, pToken->z, pToken->n);
pNew->u.zToken[pToken->n] = 0;
- if( dequote && nExtra>=3
+ if( dequote && nExtra>=3
&& ((c = pToken->z[0])=='\'' || c=='"' || c=='[' || c=='`') ){
sqlite3Dequote(pNew->u.zToken);
if( c=='"' ) pNew->flags |= EP_DblQuoted;
}
#if SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH>0
pNew->nHeight = 1;
-#endif
+#endif
}
return pNew;
}
/*
** Assign a variable number to an expression that encodes a wildcard
-** in the original SQL statement.
+** in the original SQL statement.
**
** Wildcards consisting of a single "?" are assigned the next sequential
** variable number.
pParse->apVarExpr[pParse->nVarExpr++] = pExpr;
}
}
- }
+ }
if( !pParse->nErr && pParse->nVar>db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_VARIABLE_NUMBER] ){
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "too many SQL variables");
}
}
/*
-** Return the number of bytes allocated for the expression structure
+** Return the number of bytes allocated for the expression structure
** passed as the first argument. This is always one of EXPR_FULLSIZE,
** EXPR_REDUCEDSIZE or EXPR_TOKENONLYSIZE.
*/
** to store a copy of an expression or expression tree. They differ in
** how much of the tree is measured.
**
-** dupedExprStructSize() Size of only the Expr structure
+** dupedExprStructSize() Size of only the Expr structure
** dupedExprNodeSize() Size of Expr + space for token
** dupedExprSize() Expr + token + subtree components
**
***************************************************************************
**
-** The dupedExprStructSize() function returns two values OR-ed together:
-** (1) the space required for a copy of the Expr structure only and
+** The dupedExprStructSize() function returns two values OR-ed together:
+** (1) the space required for a copy of the Expr structure only and
** (2) the EP_xxx flags that indicate what the structure size should be.
** The return values is always one of:
**
nSize = EXPR_FULLSIZE;
}else{
assert( !ExprHasAnyProperty(p, EP_TokenOnly|EP_Reduced) );
- assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_FromJoin) );
+ assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_FromJoin) );
assert( (p->flags2 & EP2_MallocedToken)==0 );
assert( (p->flags2 & EP2_Irreducible)==0 );
if( p->pLeft || p->pRight || p->pColl || p->x.pList ){
}
/*
-** This function returns the space in bytes required to store the copy
+** This function returns the space in bytes required to store the copy
** of the Expr structure and a copy of the Expr.u.zToken string (if that
** string is defined.)
*/
}
/*
-** Return the number of bytes required to create a duplicate of the
+** Return the number of bytes required to create a duplicate of the
** expression passed as the first argument. The second argument is a
** mask containing EXPRDUP_XXX flags.
**
** The value returned includes space to create a copy of the Expr struct
** itself and the buffer referred to by Expr.u.zToken, if any.
**
-** If the EXPRDUP_REDUCE flag is set, then the return value includes
-** space to duplicate all Expr nodes in the tree formed by Expr.pLeft
-** and Expr.pRight variables (but not for any structures pointed to or
+** If the EXPRDUP_REDUCE flag is set, then the return value includes
+** space to duplicate all Expr nodes in the tree formed by Expr.pLeft
+** and Expr.pRight variables (but not for any structures pointed to or
** descended from the Expr.x.pList or Expr.x.pSelect variables).
*/
static int dupedExprSize(Expr *p, int flags){
}
/*
-** This function is similar to sqlite3ExprDup(), except that if pzBuffer
-** is not NULL then *pzBuffer is assumed to point to a buffer large enough
+** This function is similar to sqlite3ExprDup(), except that if pzBuffer
+** is not NULL then *pzBuffer is assumed to point to a buffer large enough
** to store the copy of expression p, the copies of p->u.zToken
** (if applicable), and the copies of the p->pLeft and p->pRight expressions,
** if any. Before returning, *pzBuffer is set to the first byte passed the
** without effecting the originals.
**
** The expression list, ID, and source lists return by sqlite3ExprListDup(),
-** sqlite3IdListDup(), and sqlite3SrcListDup() can not be further expanded
+** sqlite3IdListDup(), and sqlite3SrcListDup() can not be further expanded
** by subsequent calls to sqlite*ListAppend() routines.
**
** Any tables that the SrcList might point to are not duplicated.
if( pItem==0 ){
sqlite3DbFree(db, pNew);
return 0;
- }
+ }
pOldItem = p->a;
for(i=0; i<p->nExpr; i++, pItem++, pOldItem++){
Expr *pOldExpr = pOldItem->pExpr;
/*
** If cursors, triggers, views and subqueries are all omitted from
-** the build, then none of the following routines, except for
+** the build, then none of the following routines, except for
** sqlite3SelectDup(), can be called. sqlite3SelectDup() is sometimes
** called with a NULL argument.
*/
}
return pList;
-no_mem:
+no_mem:
/* Avoid leaking memory if malloc has failed. */
sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pExpr);
sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pList);
** Return FALSE if there is no chance that the expression can be NULL.
**
** If the expression might be NULL or if the expression is too complex
-** to tell return TRUE.
+** to tell return TRUE.
**
** This routine is used as an optimization, to skip OP_IsNull opcodes
** when we know that a value cannot be NULL. Hence, a false positive
/*
** Generate an OP_IsNull instruction that tests register iReg and jumps
-** to location iDest if the value in iReg is NULL. The value in iReg
+** to location iDest if the value in iReg is NULL. The value in iReg
** was computed by pExpr. If we can look at pExpr at compile-time and
** determine that it can never generate a NULL, then the OP_IsNull operation
** can be omitted.
** either to test for membership of the (...) set or to iterate through
** its members, skipping duplicates.
**
-** The index of the cursor opened on the b-tree (database table, database index
+** The index of the cursor opened on the b-tree (database table, database index
** or ephermal table) is stored in pX->iTable before this function returns.
** The returned value of this function indicates the b-tree type, as follows:
**
** to be unique - either because it is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY or it
** has a UNIQUE constraint or UNIQUE index.
**
-** If the prNotFound parameter is not 0, then the b-tree will be used
-** for fast set membership tests. In this case an epheremal table must
-** be used unless <column> is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY or an index can
+** If the prNotFound parameter is not 0, then the b-tree will be used
+** for fast set membership tests. In this case an epheremal table must
+** be used unless <column> is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY or an index can
** be found with <column> as its left-most column.
**
** When the b-tree is being used for membership tests, the calling function
-** needs to know whether or not the structure contains an SQL NULL
+** needs to know whether or not the structure contains an SQL NULL
** value in order to correctly evaluate expressions like "X IN (Y, Z)".
** If there is any chance that the (...) might contain a NULL value at
** runtime, then a register is allocated and the register number written
assert( pX->op==TK_IN );
/* Check to see if an existing table or index can be used to
- ** satisfy the query. This is preferable to generating a new
+ ** satisfy the query. This is preferable to generating a new
** ephemeral table.
*/
p = (ExprHasProperty(pX, EP_xIsSelect) ? pX->x.pSelect : 0);
Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse); /* Virtual machine being coded */
Table *pTab = p->pSrc->a[0].pTab; /* Table <table>. */
int iDb; /* Database idx for pTab */
-
+
/* Code an OP_VerifyCookie and OP_TableLock for <table>. */
iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema);
sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(pParse, iDb);
** to this collation sequence. */
CollSeq *pReq = sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(pParse, pX->pLeft, pExpr);
- /* Check that the affinity that will be used to perform the
+ /* Check that the affinity that will be used to perform the
** comparison is the same as the affinity of the column. If
** it is not, it is not possible to use any index.
*/
int iMem = ++pParse->nMem;
int iAddr;
char *pKey;
-
+
pKey = (char *)sqlite3IndexKeyinfo(pParse, pIdx);
iAddr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_If, iMem);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, 1, iMem);
-
+
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenRead, iTab, pIdx->tnum, iDb,
pKey,P4_KEYINFO_HANDOFF);
VdbeComment((v, "%s", pIdx->zName));
affinity = sqlite3ExprAffinity(pLeft);
/* Whether this is an 'x IN(SELECT...)' or an 'x IN(<exprlist>)'
- ** expression it is handled the same way. An ephemeral table is
+ ** expression it is handled the same way. An ephemeral table is
** filled with single-field index keys representing the results
** from the SELECT or the <exprlist>.
**
return 0;
}
pEList = pExpr->x.pSelect->pEList;
- if( ALWAYS(pEList!=0 && pEList->nExpr>0) ){
+ if( ALWAYS(pEList!=0 && pEList->nExpr>0) ){
keyInfo.aColl[0] = sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(pParse, pExpr->pLeft,
pEList->a[0].pExpr);
}
** if the LHS is NULL or if the LHS is not contained within the RHS and the
** RHS contains one or more NULL values.
**
-** This routine generates code will jump to destIfFalse if the LHS is not
+** This routine generates code will jump to destIfFalse if the LHS is not
** contained within the RHS. If due to NULLs we cannot determine if the LHS
** is contained in the RHS then jump to destIfNull. If the LHS is contained
** within the RHS then fall through.
*/
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_Affinity, r1, 1, 0, &affinity, 1);
- /* If the set membership test fails, then the result of the
+ /* If the set membership test fails, then the result of the
** "x IN (...)" expression must be either 0 or NULL. If the set
- ** contains no NULL values, then the result is 0. If the set
+ ** contains no NULL values, then the result is 0. If the set
** contains one or more NULL values, then the result of the
** expression is also NULL.
*/
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_If, rRhsHasNull, destIfNull);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, destIfFalse);
- /* The OP_Found at the top of this branch jumps here when true,
+ /* The OP_Found at the top of this branch jumps here when true,
** causing the overall IN expression evaluation to fall through.
*/
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, j1);
** Generate an instruction that will put the floating point
** value described by z[0..n-1] into register iMem.
**
-** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated. But the
+** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated. But the
** z[n] character is guaranteed to be something that does not look
** like the continuation of the number.
*/
** Generate an instruction that will put the integer describe by
** text z[0..n-1] into register iMem.
**
-** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated. But the
+** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated. But the
** z[n] character is guaranteed to be something that does not look
** like the continuation of the number.
*/
sqlite3ExprCachePinRegister(pParse, p->iReg);
return p->iReg;
}
- }
+ }
assert( v!=0 );
if( iColumn<0 ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Rowid, iTable, iReg);
** same order that it is executed.
**
** Aliases are numbered starting with 1. So iAlias is in the range
-** of 1 to pParse->nAlias inclusive.
+** of 1 to pParse->nAlias inclusive.
**
** pParse->aAlias[iAlias-1] records the register number where the value
** of the iAlias-th alias is stored. If zero, that means that the
case TK_BITOR:
case TK_SLASH:
case TK_LSHIFT:
- case TK_RSHIFT:
+ case TK_RSHIFT:
case TK_CONCAT: {
assert( TK_AND==OP_And );
assert( TK_OR==OP_Or );
** see if it is a column in a virtual table. This is done because
** the left operand of infix functions (the operand we want to
** control overloading) ends up as the second argument to the
- ** function. The expression "A glob B" is equivalent to
+ ** function. The expression "A glob B" is equivalent to
** "glob(B,A). We want to use the A in "A glob B" to test
** for function overloading. But we use the B term in "glob(B,A)".
*/
}
}
if( pDef->flags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL ){
- if( !pColl ) pColl = db->pDfltColl;
+ if( !pColl ) pColl = db->pDfltColl;
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CollSeq, 0, 0, 0, (char *)pColl, P4_COLLSEQ);
}
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_Function, constMask, r1, target,
**
** The expression is implemented using an OP_Param opcode. The p1
** parameter is set to 0 for an old.rowid reference, or to (i+1)
- ** to reference another column of the old.* pseudo-table, where
+ ** to reference another column of the old.* pseudo-table, where
** i is the index of the column. For a new.rowid reference, p1 is
** set to (n+1), where n is the number of columns in each pseudo-table.
** For a reference to any other column in the new.* pseudo-table, p1
**
** p1==0 -> old.rowid p1==3 -> new.rowid
** p1==1 -> old.a p1==4 -> new.a
- ** p1==2 -> old.b p1==5 -> new.b
+ ** p1==2 -> old.b p1==5 -> new.b
*/
Table *pTab = pExpr->pTab;
int p1 = pExpr->iTable * (pTab->nCol+1) + 1 + pExpr->iColumn;
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT
/* If the column has REAL affinity, it may currently be stored as an
** integer. Use OP_RealAffinity to make sure it is really real. */
- if( pExpr->iColumn>=0
+ if( pExpr->iColumn>=0
&& pTab->aCol[pExpr->iColumn].affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL
){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_RealAffinity, target);
}else{
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, target);
}
- assert( db->mallocFailed || pParse->nErr>0
+ assert( db->mallocFailed || pParse->nErr>0
|| pParse->iCacheLevel==iCacheLevel );
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, endLabel);
break;
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
case TK_RAISE: {
- assert( pExpr->affinity==OE_Rollback
+ assert( pExpr->affinity==OE_Rollback
|| pExpr->affinity==OE_Abort
|| pExpr->affinity==OE_Fail
|| pExpr->affinity==OE_Ignore
** and modify the expression so that the next time it is evaluated,
** the result is a copy of the cache register.
**
-** This routine is used for expressions that are used multiple
+** This routine is used for expressions that are used multiple
** times. They are evaluated once and the results of the expression
** are reused.
*/
** no way for a TK_REGISTER to exist here. But it seems prudent to
** keep the ALWAYS() in case the conditions above change with future
** modifications or enhancements. */
- if( ALWAYS(pExpr->op!=TK_REGISTER) ){
+ if( ALWAYS(pExpr->op!=TK_REGISTER) ){
int iMem;
iMem = ++pParse->nMem;
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Copy, inReg, iMem);
**
** * Any expression that evaluates to two or more opcodes.
**
-** * Any OP_Integer, OP_Real, OP_String, OP_Blob, OP_Null,
-** or OP_Variable that does not need to be placed in a
+** * Any OP_Integer, OP_Real, OP_String, OP_Blob, OP_Null,
+** or OP_Variable that does not need to be placed in a
** specific register.
**
** There is no point in factoring out single-instruction constant
-** expressions that need to be placed in a particular register.
+** expressions that need to be placed in a particular register.
** We could factor them out, but then we would end up adding an
** OP_SCopy instruction to move the value into the correct register
** later. We might as well just use the original instruction and
case TK_CONST_FUNC: {
/* The arguments to a function have a fixed destination.
** Mark them this way to avoid generated unneeded OP_SCopy
- ** instructions.
+ ** instructions.
*/
ExprList *pList = pExpr->x.pList;
assert( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_xIsSelect) );
**
** x BETWEEN y AND z
**
-** The above is equivalent to
+** The above is equivalent to
**
** x>=y AND x<=z
**
}
}
sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree1);
- sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree2);
+ sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree2);
}
/*
&i
);
return i;
-}
+}
/*
** Add a new element to the pAggInfo->aFunc[] array. Return the index of
static int addAggInfoFunc(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){
int i;
pInfo->aFunc = sqlite3ArrayAllocate(
- db,
+ db,
pInfo->aFunc,
sizeof(pInfo->aFunc[0]),
3,
&i
);
return i;
-}
+}
/*
** This is the xExprCallback for a tree walker. It is used to
assert( !ExprHasAnyProperty(pExpr, EP_TokenOnly|EP_Reduced) );
if( pExpr->iTable==pItem->iCursor ){
/* If we reach this point, it means that pExpr refers to a table
- ** that is in the FROM clause of the aggregate query.
+ ** that is in the FROM clause of the aggregate query.
**
** Make an entry for the column in pAggInfo->aCol[] if there
** is not an entry there already.
}
}
if( (k>=pAggInfo->nColumn)
- && (k = addAggInfoColumn(pParse->db, pAggInfo))>=0
+ && (k = addAggInfoColumn(pParse->db, pAggInfo))>=0
){
pCol = &pAggInfo->aCol[k];
pCol->pTab = pExpr->pTab;
/* The pNC->nDepth==0 test causes aggregate functions in subqueries
** to be ignored */
if( pNC->nDepth==0 ){
- /* Check to see if pExpr is a duplicate of another aggregate
+ /* Check to see if pExpr is a duplicate of another aggregate
** function that is already in the pAggInfo structure
*/
struct AggInfo_func *pItem = pAggInfo->aFunc;
/*
-** This function is used by SQL generated to implement the
+** This function is used by SQL generated to implement the
** ALTER TABLE command. The first argument is the text of a CREATE TABLE or
-** CREATE INDEX command. The second is a table name. The table name in
+** CREATE INDEX command. The second is a table name. The table name in
** the CREATE TABLE or CREATE INDEX statement is replaced with the third
** argument and the result returned. Examples:
**
UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed);
- /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TABLE
+ /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TABLE
** statement is that the table name is the first non-space token that
** is immediately followed by a TK_LP or TK_USING token.
*/
assert( len>0 );
} while( token!=TK_LP && token!=TK_USING );
- zRet = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%.*s\"%w\"%s", ((u8*)tname.z) - zSql, zSql,
+ zRet = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%.*s\"%w\"%s", ((u8*)tname.z) - zSql, zSql,
zTableName, tname.z+tname.n);
sqlite3_result_text(context, zRet, -1, SQLITE_DYNAMIC);
}
/*
** This C function implements an SQL user function that is used by SQL code
** generated by the ALTER TABLE ... RENAME command to modify the definition
-** of any foreign key constraints that use the table being renamed as the
+** of any foreign key constraints that use the table being renamed as the
** parent table. It is passed three arguments:
**
** 1) The complete text of the CREATE TABLE statement being modified,
if( zParent==0 ) break;
sqlite3Dequote(zParent);
if( 0==sqlite3StrICmp((const char *)zOld, zParent) ){
- char *zOut = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%.*s\"%w\"",
+ char *zOut = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%.*s\"%w\"",
(zOutput?zOutput:""), z-zInput, zInput, (const char *)zNew
);
sqlite3DbFree(db, zOutput);
}
}
- zResult = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%s", (zOutput?zOutput:""), zInput),
+ zResult = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%s", (zOutput?zOutput:""), zInput),
sqlite3_result_text(context, zResult, -1, SQLITE_DYNAMIC);
sqlite3DbFree(db, zOutput);
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
/* This function is used by SQL generated to implement the
-** ALTER TABLE command. The first argument is the text of a CREATE TRIGGER
-** statement. The second is a table name. The table name in the CREATE
-** TRIGGER statement is replaced with the third argument and the result
+** ALTER TABLE command. The first argument is the text of a CREATE TRIGGER
+** statement. The second is a table name. The table name in the CREATE
+** TRIGGER statement is replaced with the third argument and the result
** returned. This is analagous to renameTableFunc() above, except for CREATE
** TRIGGER, not CREATE INDEX and CREATE TABLE.
*/
UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed);
- /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TRIGGER
+ /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TRIGGER
** statement is that the table name is the first token that is immediatedly
** preceded by either TK_ON or TK_DOT and immediatedly followed by one
** of TK_WHEN, TK_BEGIN or TK_FOR.
assert( len>0 );
/* Variable 'dist' stores the number of tokens read since the most
- ** recent TK_DOT or TK_ON. This means that when a WHEN, FOR or BEGIN
+ ** recent TK_DOT or TK_ON. This means that when a WHEN, FOR or BEGIN
** token is read and 'dist' equals 2, the condition stated above
** to be met.
**
** Note that ON cannot be a database, table or column name, so
- ** there is no need to worry about syntax like
+ ** there is no need to worry about syntax like
** "CREATE TRIGGER ... ON ON.ON BEGIN ..." etc.
*/
dist++;
/* Variable tname now contains the token that is the old table-name
** in the CREATE TRIGGER statement.
*/
- zRet = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%.*s\"%w\"%s", ((u8*)tname.z) - zSql, zSql,
+ zRet = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%.*s\"%w\"%s", ((u8*)tname.z) - zSql, zSql,
zTableName, tname.z+tname.n);
sqlite3_result_text(context, zRet, -1, SQLITE_DYNAMIC);
}
**
** name=<constant1> OR name=<constant2> OR ...
**
-** If argument zWhere is NULL, then a pointer string containing the text
+** If argument zWhere is NULL, then a pointer string containing the text
** "name=<constant>" is returned, where <constant> is the quoted version
** of the string passed as argument zConstant. The returned buffer is
** allocated using sqlite3DbMalloc(). It is the responsibility of the
** caller to ensure that it is eventually freed.
**
-** If argument zWhere is not NULL, then the string returned is
+** If argument zWhere is not NULL, then the string returned is
** "<where> OR name=<constant>", where <where> is the contents of zWhere.
** In this case zWhere is passed to sqlite3DbFree() before returning.
-**
+**
*/
static char *whereOrName(sqlite3 *db, char *zWhere, char *zConstant){
char *zNew;
/*
** Generate the text of a WHERE expression which can be used to select all
** temporary triggers on table pTab from the sqlite_temp_master table. If
-** table pTab has no temporary triggers, or is itself stored in the
+** table pTab has no temporary triggers, or is itself stored in the
** temporary database, NULL is returned.
*/
static char *whereTempTriggers(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
char *zWhere = 0;
const Schema *pTempSchema = pParse->db->aDb[1].pSchema; /* Temp db schema */
- /* If the table is not located in the temp-db (in which case NULL is
+ /* If the table is not located in the temp-db (in which case NULL is
** returned, loop through the tables list of triggers. For each trigger
- ** that is not part of the temp-db schema, add a clause to the WHERE
+ ** that is not part of the temp-db schema, add a clause to the WHERE
** expression being built up in zWhere.
*/
if( pTab->pSchema!=pTempSchema ){
** pTab from the database, including triggers and temporary triggers.
** Argument zName is the name of the table in the database schema at
** the time the generated code is executed. This can be different from
-** pTab->zName if this function is being called to code part of an
+** pTab->zName if this function is being called to code part of an
** "ALTER TABLE RENAME TO" statement.
*/
static void reloadTableSchema(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, const char *zName){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_ParseSchema, iDb, 0, 0, zWhere, P4_DYNAMIC);
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
- /* Now, if the table is not stored in the temp database, reload any temp
- ** triggers. Don't use IN(...) in case SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY is defined.
+ /* Now, if the table is not stored in the temp database, reload any temp
+ ** triggers. Don't use IN(...) in case SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY is defined.
*/
if( (zWhere=whereTempTriggers(pParse, pTab))!=0 ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_ParseSchema, 1, 0, 0, zWhere, P4_DYNAMIC);
}
/*
-** Generate code to implement the "ALTER TABLE xxx RENAME TO yyy"
-** command.
+** Generate code to implement the "ALTER TABLE xxx RENAME TO yyy"
+** command.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
Parse *pParse, /* Parser context. */
int iDb; /* Database that contains the table */
char *zDb; /* Name of database iDb */
Table *pTab; /* Table being renamed */
- char *zName = 0; /* NULL-terminated version of pName */
+ char *zName = 0; /* NULL-terminated version of pName */
sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Database connection */
int nTabName; /* Number of UTF-8 characters in zTabName */
const char *zTabName; /* Original name of the table */
char *zWhere = 0; /* Where clause to locate temp triggers */
#endif
VTable *pVTab = 0; /* Non-zero if this is a v-tab with an xRename() */
-
+
if( NEVER(db->mallocFailed) ) goto exit_rename_table;
assert( pSrc->nSrc==1 );
assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsAllMutexes(pParse->db) );
** in database iDb. If so, this is an error.
*/
if( sqlite3FindTable(db, zName, zDb) || sqlite3FindIndex(db, zName, zDb) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"there is already another table or index with this name: %s", zName);
goto exit_rename_table;
}
/* Make sure it is not a system table being altered, or a reserved name
** that the table is being renamed to.
*/
- if( sqlite3Strlen30(pTab->zName)>6
+ if( sqlite3Strlen30(pTab->zName)>6
&& 0==sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)
){
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "table %s may not be altered", pTab->zName);
}
#endif
- /* Begin a transaction and code the VerifyCookie for database iDb.
+ /* Begin a transaction and code the VerifyCookie for database iDb.
** Then modify the schema cookie (since the ALTER TABLE modifies the
** schema). Open a statement transaction if the table is a virtual
** table.
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER)
if( db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){
- /* If foreign-key support is enabled, rewrite the CREATE TABLE
+ /* If foreign-key support is enabled, rewrite the CREATE TABLE
** statements corresponding to all child tables of foreign key constraints
** for which the renamed table is the parent table. */
if( (zWhere=whereForeignKeys(pParse, pTab))!=0 ){
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE \"%w\".%s SET "
"sql = sqlite_rename_parent(sql, %Q, %Q) "
"WHERE %s;", zDb, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb), zTabName, zName, zWhere);
"'sqlite_autoindex_' || %Q || substr(name,%d+18) "
"ELSE name END "
"WHERE tbl_name=%Q AND "
- "(type='table' OR type='index' OR type='trigger');",
- zDb, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb), zName, zName, zName,
+ "(type='table' OR type='index' OR type='trigger');",
+ zDb, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb), zName, zName, zName,
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
zName,
#endif
);
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT
- /* If the sqlite_sequence table exists in this database, then update
+ /* If the sqlite_sequence table exists in this database, then update
** it with the new table name.
*/
if( sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_sequence", zDb) ){
** the temp database.
*/
if( (zWhere=whereTempTriggers(pParse, pTab))!=0 ){
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE sqlite_temp_master SET "
"sql = sqlite_rename_trigger(sql, %Q), "
"tbl_name = %Q "
}
#endif
- /* If the default value for the new column was specified with a
+ /* If the default value for the new column was specified with a
** literal NULL, then set pDflt to 0. This simplifies checking
** for an SQL NULL default below.
*/
return;
}
if( (db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys) && pNew->pFKey && pDflt ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"Cannot add a REFERENCES column with non-NULL default value");
return;
}
if( pCol->notNull && !pDflt ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"Cannot add a NOT NULL column with default value NULL");
return;
}
while( zEnd>zCol && (*zEnd==';' || sqlite3Isspace(*zEnd)) ){
*zEnd-- = '\0';
}
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE \"%w\".%s SET "
"sql = substr(sql,1,%d) || ', ' || %Q || substr(sql,%d) "
- "WHERE type = 'table' AND name = %Q",
+ "WHERE type = 'table' AND name = %Q",
zDb, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb), pNew->addColOffset, zCol, pNew->addColOffset+1,
zTab
);
/*
** This function is called by the parser after the table-name in
-** an "ALTER TABLE <table-name> ADD" statement is parsed. Argument
+** an "ALTER TABLE <table-name> ADD" statement is parsed. Argument
** pSrc is the full-name of the table being altered.
**
** This routine makes a (partial) copy of the Table structure
** for the table being altered and sets Parse.pNewTable to point
** to it. Routines called by the parser as the column definition
-** is parsed (i.e. sqlite3AddColumn()) add the new Column data to
-** the copy. The copy of the Table structure is deleted by tokenize.c
+** is parsed (i.e. sqlite3AddColumn()) add the new Column data to
+** the copy. The copy of the Table structure is deleted by tokenize.c
** after parsing is finished.
**
** Routine sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn() will be called to complete
**
** If the sqlite_stat1 tables does not previously exist, it is created.
** Similarly, if the sqlite_stat2 table does not exist and the library
-** is compiled with SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT2 defined, it is created.
+** is compiled with SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT2 defined, it is created.
**
** Argument zWhere may be a pointer to a buffer containing a table name,
** or it may be a NULL pointer. If it is not NULL, then all entries in
const char *zTab = aTable[i].zName;
Table *pStat;
if( (pStat = sqlite3FindTable(db, zTab, pDb->zName))==0 ){
- /* The sqlite_stat[12] table does not exist. Create it. Note that a
- ** side-effect of the CREATE TABLE statement is to leave the rootpage
- ** of the new table in register pParse->regRoot. This is important
+ /* The sqlite_stat[12] table does not exist. Create it. Note that a
+ ** side-effect of the CREATE TABLE statement is to leave the rootpage
+ ** of the new table in register pParse->regRoot. This is important
** because the OpenWrite opcode below will be needing it. */
sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"CREATE TABLE %Q.%s(%s)", pDb->zName, zTab, aTable[i].zCols
aRoot[i] = pParse->regRoot;
aCreateTbl[i] = 1;
}else{
- /* The table already exists. If zWhere is not NULL, delete all entries
+ /* The table already exists. If zWhere is not NULL, delete all entries
** associated with the table zWhere. If zWhere is NULL, delete the
** entire contents of the table. */
aRoot[i] = pStat->tnum;
/* The block of memory cells initialized here is used as follows.
**
- ** iMem:
+ ** iMem:
** The total number of rows in the table.
**
- ** iMem+1 .. iMem+nCol:
- ** Number of distinct entries in index considering the
- ** left-most N columns only, where N is between 1 and nCol,
+ ** iMem+1 .. iMem+nCol:
+ ** Number of distinct entries in index considering the
+ ** left-most N columns only, where N is between 1 and nCol,
** inclusive.
**
- ** iMem+nCol+1 .. Mem+2*nCol:
+ ** iMem+nCol+1 .. Mem+2*nCol:
** Previous value of indexed columns, from left to right.
**
- ** Cells iMem through iMem+nCol are initialized to 0. The others are
+ ** Cells iMem through iMem+nCol are initialized to 0. The others are
** initialized to contain an SQL NULL.
*/
for(i=0; i<=nCol; i++){
** value that should be stored in the sqlite_stat2 table. If so,
** store it. */
int ne = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Ne, regRecno, 0, regSamplerecno);
- assert( regTabname+1==regIdxname
+ assert( regTabname+1==regIdxname
&& regTabname+2==regSampleno
&& regTabname+3==regCol
);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
}
if( db->mallocFailed ){
- /* If a malloc failure has occurred, then the result of the expression
- ** passed as the second argument to the call to sqlite3VdbeJumpHere()
+ /* If a malloc failure has occurred, then the result of the expression
+ ** passed as the second argument to the call to sqlite3VdbeJumpHere()
** below may be negative. Which causes an assert() to fail (or an
** out-of-bounds write if SQLITE_DEBUG is not defined). */
return;
**
** I = (K+D-1)/D
**
- ** If K==0 then no entry is made into the sqlite_stat1 table.
+ ** If K==0 then no entry is made into the sqlite_stat1 table.
** If K>0 then it is always the case the D>0 so division by zero
** is never possible.
*/
analyzeTable(pParse, pTab);
}
}
- }
+ }
}
}
/*
** This callback is invoked once for each index when reading the
-** sqlite_stat1 table.
+** sqlite_stat1 table.
**
** argv[0] = name of the index
** argv[1] = results of analysis - on integer for each column
** Index.aSample[] arrays.
**
** If the sqlite_stat1 table is not present in the database, SQLITE_ERROR
-** is returned. In this case, even if SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT2 was defined
-** during compilation and the sqlite_stat2 table is present, no data is
+** is returned. In this case, even if SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT2 was defined
+** during compilation and the sqlite_stat2 table is present, no data is
** read from it.
**
-** If SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT2 was defined during compilation and the
+** If SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT2 was defined during compilation and the
** sqlite_stat2 table is not present in the database, SQLITE_ERROR is
** returned. However, in this case, data is read from the sqlite_stat1
** table (if it is present) before returning.
}
/* Load new statistics out of the sqlite_stat1 table */
- zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
+ zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
"SELECT idx, stat FROM %Q.sqlite_stat1", sInfo.zDatabase);
if( zSql==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0;
- zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
+ zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
"SELECT idx,sampleno,sample FROM %Q.sqlite_stat2", sInfo.zDatabase);
if( !zSql ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
** * Specified database name already being used.
*/
if( db->nDb>=db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_ATTACHED]+2 ){
- zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "too many attached databases - max %d",
+ zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "too many attached databases - max %d",
db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_ATTACHED]
);
goto attach_error;
if( !aNew->pSchema ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
}else if( aNew->pSchema->file_format && aNew->pSchema->enc!=ENC(db) ){
- zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
+ zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
"attached databases must use the same text encoding as main database");
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}
zErrDyn = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "Invalid key value");
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
break;
-
+
case SQLITE_TEXT:
case SQLITE_BLOB:
nKey = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[2]);
#endif
/* If the file was opened successfully, read the schema for the new database.
- ** If this fails, or if opening the file failed, then close the file and
+ ** If this fails, or if opening the file failed, then close the file and
** remove the entry from the db->aDb[] array. i.e. put everything back the way
** we found it.
*/
}
goto attach_error;
}
-
+
return;
attach_error:
memset(&sName, 0, sizeof(NameContext));
sName.pParse = pParse;
- if(
+ if(
SQLITE_OK!=(rc = resolveAttachExpr(&sName, pFilename)) ||
SQLITE_OK!=(rc = resolveAttachExpr(&sName, pDbname)) ||
SQLITE_OK!=(rc = resolveAttachExpr(&sName, pKey))
*/
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Expire, (type==SQLITE_ATTACH));
}
-
+
attach_end:
sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pFilename);
sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pDbname);
/*
** The pExpr should be a TK_COLUMN expression. The table referred to
-** is in pTabList or else it is the NEW or OLD table of a trigger.
+** is in pTabList or else it is the NEW or OLD table of a trigger.
** Check to see if it is OK to read this particular column.
**
-** If the auth function returns SQLITE_IGNORE, change the TK_COLUMN
+** If the auth function returns SQLITE_IGNORE, change the TK_COLUMN
** instruction into a TK_NULL. If the auth function returns SQLITE_DENY,
** then generate an error.
*/
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AuthContextPush(
Parse *pParse,
- AuthContext *pContext,
+ AuthContext *pContext,
const char *zContext
){
assert( pParse );
};
/*
-** Record the fact that we want to lock a table at run-time.
+** Record the fact that we want to lock a table at run-time.
**
** The table to be locked has root page iTab and is found in database iDb.
** A read or a write lock can be taken depending on isWritelock.
*/
static void codeTableLocks(Parse *pParse){
int i;
- Vdbe *pVdbe;
+ Vdbe *pVdbe;
pVdbe = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
assert( pVdbe!=0 ); /* sqlite3GetVdbe cannot fail: VDBE already allocated */
** vdbe program
*/
v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
- assert( !pParse->isMultiWrite
+ assert( !pParse->isMultiWrite
|| sqlite3VdbeAssertMayAbort(v, pParse->mayAbort));
if( v ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Halt);
}
#endif
- /* Once all the cookies have been verified and transactions opened,
- ** obtain the required table-locks. This is a no-op unless the
+ /* Once all the cookies have been verified and transactions opened,
+ ** obtain the required table-locks. This is a no-op unless the
** shared-cache feature is enabled.
*/
codeTableLocks(pParse);
}
/*
-** Locate the in-memory structure that describes
+** Locate the in-memory structure that describes
** a particular index given the name of that index
** and the name of the database that contains the index.
** Return NULL if not found.
**
** This routine just deletes the data structure. It does not unlink
** the table data structure from the hash table. But it does destroy
-** memory structures of the indices and foreign keys associated with
+** memory structures of the indices and foreign keys associated with
** the table.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteTable(Table *pTable){
Db *pDb;
int n = sqlite3Strlen30(zName);
for(i=(db->nDb-1), pDb=&db->aDb[i]; i>=0; i--, pDb--){
- if( (!OMIT_TEMPDB || i!=1 ) && n==sqlite3Strlen30(pDb->zName) &&
+ if( (!OMIT_TEMPDB || i!=1 ) && n==sqlite3Strlen30(pDb->zName) &&
0==sqlite3StrICmp(pDb->zName, zName) ){
break;
}
/*
** The token *pName contains the name of a database (either "main" or
** "temp" or the name of an attached db). This routine returns the
-** index of the named database in db->aDb[], or -1 if the named db
+** index of the named database in db->aDb[], or -1 if the named db
** does not exist.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindDb(sqlite3 *db, Token *pName){
** pName1 and pName2. If the table name was fully qualified, for example:
**
** CREATE TABLE xxx.yyy (...);
-**
+**
** Then pName1 is set to "xxx" and pName2 "yyy". On the other hand if
** the table name is not fully qualified, i.e.:
**
** is reserved for internal use.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CheckObjectName(Parse *pParse, const char *zName){
- if( !pParse->db->init.busy && pParse->nested==0
+ if( !pParse->db->init.busy && pParse->nested==0
&& (pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_WriteSchema)==0
&& 0==sqlite3StrNICmp(zName, "sqlite_", 7) ){
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "object name reserved for internal use: %s", zName);
** pName1 and pName2. If the table name was fully qualified, for example:
**
** CREATE TABLE xxx.yyy (...);
- **
+ **
** Then pName1 is set to "xxx" and pName2 "yyy". On the other hand if
** the table name is not fully qualified, i.e.:
**
** the SQLITE_MASTER table. Note in particular that we must go ahead
** and allocate the record number for the table entry now. Before any
** PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE keywords are parsed. Those keywords will cause
- ** indices to be created and the table record must come before the
+ ** indices to be created and the table record must come before the
** indices. Hence, the record number for the table must be allocated
** now.
*/
}
#endif
- /* If the file format and encoding in the database have not been set,
+ /* If the file format and encoding in the database have not been set,
** set them now.
*/
reg1 = pParse->regRowid = ++pParse->nMem;
pCol = &p->aCol[p->nCol];
memset(pCol, 0, sizeof(p->aCol[0]));
pCol->zName = z;
-
+
/* If there is no type specified, columns have the default affinity
** 'NONE'. If there is a type specified, then sqlite3AddColumnType() will
** be called next to set pCol->affinity correctly.
** Scan the column type name zType (length nType) and return the
** associated affinity type.
**
-** This routine does a case-independent search of zType for the
+** This routine does a case-independent search of zType for the
** substrings in the following table. If one of the substrings is
** found, the corresponding affinity is returned. If zType contains
-** more than one of the substrings, entries toward the top of
-** the table take priority. For example, if zType is 'BLOBINT',
+** more than one of the substrings, entries toward the top of
+** the table take priority. For example, if zType is 'BLOBINT',
** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER is returned.
**
** Substring | Affinity
h = (h<<8) + sqlite3UpperToLower[(*zIn)&0xff];
zIn++;
if( h==(('c'<<24)+('h'<<16)+('a'<<8)+'r') ){ /* CHAR */
- aff = SQLITE_AFF_TEXT;
+ aff = SQLITE_AFF_TEXT;
}else if( h==(('c'<<24)+('l'<<16)+('o'<<8)+'b') ){ /* CLOB */
aff = SQLITE_AFF_TEXT;
}else if( h==(('t'<<24)+('e'<<16)+('x'<<8)+'t') ){ /* TEXT */
** in the sequence. Use this information to construct a string
** that contains the typename of the column and store that string
** in zType.
-*/
+*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddColumnType(Parse *pParse, Token *pType){
Table *p;
Column *pCol;
}
/*
-** Designate the PRIMARY KEY for the table. pList is a list of names
+** Designate the PRIMARY KEY for the table. pList is a list of names
** of columns that form the primary key. If pList is NULL, then the
** most recently added column of the table is the primary key.
**
int iCol = -1, i;
if( pTab==0 || IN_DECLARE_VTAB ) goto primary_key_exit;
if( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasPrimaryKey ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"table \"%s\" has more than one primary key", pTab->zName);
goto primary_key_exit;
}
if( sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, zColl) ){
Index *pIdx;
p->aCol[i].zColl = zColl;
-
+
/* If the column is declared as "<name> PRIMARY KEY COLLATE <type>",
** then an index may have been created on this column before the
** collation type was added. Correct this if it is the case.
}
/*
-** The first parameter is a pointer to an output buffer. The second
+** The first parameter is a pointer to an output buffer. The second
** parameter is a pointer to an integer that contains the offset at
** which to write into the output buffer. This function copies the
** nul-terminated string pointed to by the third parameter, zSignedIdent,
** to the specified offset in the buffer and updates *pIdx to refer
** to the first byte after the last byte written before returning.
-**
+**
** If the string zSignedIdent consists entirely of alpha-numeric
** characters, does not begin with a digit and is not an SQL keyword,
** then it is copied to the output buffer exactly as it is. Otherwise,
n += identLength(pCol->zName) + 5;
}
n += identLength(p->zName);
- if( n<50 ){
+ if( n<50 ){
zSep = "";
zSep2 = ",";
zEnd = ")";
testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC );
testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER );
testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL );
-
+
zType = azType[pCol->affinity - SQLITE_AFF_TEXT];
len = sqlite3Strlen30(zType);
- assert( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NONE
+ assert( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NONE
|| pCol->affinity==sqlite3AffinityType(zType) );
memcpy(&zStmt[k], zType, len);
k += len;
** the sqlite_master table. We do not want to create it again.
**
** If the pSelect argument is not NULL, it means that this routine
-** was called to create a table generated from a
+** was called to create a table generated from a
** "CREATE TABLE ... AS SELECT ..." statement. The column names of
** the new table will match the result set of the SELECT.
*/
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Close, 0);
- /*
+ /*
** Initialize zType for the new view or table.
*/
if( p->pSelect==0 ){
zStmt = createTableStmt(db, p);
}else{
n = (int)(pEnd->z - pParse->sNameToken.z) + 1;
- zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
+ zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
"CREATE %s %.*s", zType2, n, pParse->sNameToken.z
);
}
- /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
+ /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
** SQLITE_MASTER table. We just need to update that slot with all
** the information we've collected.
*/
** Actually, the error above is now caught prior to reaching this point.
** But the following test is still important as it does come up
** in the following:
- **
+ **
** CREATE TABLE main.ex1(a);
** CREATE TEMP VIEW ex1 AS SELECT a FROM ex1;
** SELECT * FROM temp.ex1;
nErr++;
}
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW */
- return nErr;
+ return nErr;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE) */
** on tables and/or indices that are the process of being deleted.
** If you are unlucky, one of those deleted indices or tables might
** have the same rootpage number as the real table or index that is
-** being moved. So we cannot stop searching after the first match
+** being moved. So we cannot stop searching after the first match
** because the first match might be for one of the deleted indices
** or tables and not the table/index that is actually being moved.
** We must continue looping until all tables and indices with
** Also write code to modify the sqlite_master table and internal schema
** if a root-page of another table is moved by the btree-layer whilst
** erasing iTable (this can happen with an auto-vacuum database).
-*/
+*/
static void destroyRootPage(Parse *pParse, int iTable, int iDb){
Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
** is in register NNN. See grammar rules associated with the TK_REGISTER
** token for additional information.
*/
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE %Q.%s SET rootpage=%d WHERE #%d AND rootpage=#%d",
pParse->db->aDb[iDb].zName, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb), iTable, r1, r1);
#endif
#else
/* If the database may be auto-vacuum capable (if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
** is not defined), then it is important to call OP_Destroy on the
- ** table and index root-pages in order, starting with the numerically
+ ** table and index root-pages in order, starting with the numerically
** largest root-page number. This guarantees that none of the root-pages
** to be destroyed is relocated by an earlier OP_Destroy. i.e. if the
** following were coded:
** OP_Destroy 5 0
**
** and root page 5 happened to be the largest root-page number in the
- ** database, then root page 5 would be moved to page 4 by the
+ ** database, then root page 5 would be moved to page 4 by the
** "OP_Destroy 4 0" opcode. The subsequent "OP_Destroy 5 0" would hit
** a free-list page.
*/
assert( pParse->nErr==0 );
assert( pName->nSrc==1 );
if( noErr ) db->suppressErr++;
- pTab = sqlite3LocateTable(pParse, isView,
+ pTab = sqlite3LocateTable(pParse, isView,
pName->a[0].zName, pName->a[0].zDatabase);
if( noErr ) db->suppressErr--;
*/
pTrigger = sqlite3TriggerList(pParse, pTab);
while( pTrigger ){
- assert( pTrigger->pSchema==pTab->pSchema ||
+ assert( pTrigger->pSchema==pTab->pSchema ||
pTrigger->pSchema==db->aDb[1].pSchema );
sqlite3DropTriggerPtr(pParse, pTrigger);
pTrigger = pTrigger->pNext;
** created in the temp database that refers to a table in another
** database.
*/
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"DELETE FROM %Q.%s WHERE tbl_name=%Q and type!='trigger'",
pDb->zName, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb), pTab->zName);
}
}
if( j>=p->nCol ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
- "unknown column \"%s\" in foreign key definition",
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ "unknown column \"%s\" in foreign key definition",
pFromCol->a[i].zName);
goto fk_end;
}
pFKey->aAction[0] = (u8)(flags & 0xff); /* ON DELETE action */
pFKey->aAction[1] = (u8)((flags >> 8 ) & 0xff); /* ON UPDATE action */
- pNextTo = (FKey *)sqlite3HashInsert(&p->pSchema->fkeyHash,
+ pNextTo = (FKey *)sqlite3HashInsert(&p->pSchema->fkeyHash,
pFKey->zTo, sqlite3Strlen30(pFKey->zTo), (void *)pFKey
);
if( pNextTo==pFKey ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Clear, tnum, iDb);
}
pKey = sqlite3IndexKeyinfo(pParse, pIndex);
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenWrite, iIdx, tnum, iDb,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenWrite, iIdx, tnum, iDb,
(char *)pKey, P4_KEYINFO_HANDOFF);
if( memRootPage>=0 ){
sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, 1);
/* The registers accessed by the OP_IsUnique opcode were allocated
** using sqlite3GetTempRange() inside of the sqlite3GenerateIndexKey()
** call above. Just before that function was freed they were released
- ** (made available to the compiler for reuse) using
+ ** (made available to the compiler for reuse) using
** sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(). So in some ways having the OP_IsUnique
** opcode use the values stored within seems dangerous. However, since
** we can be sure that no other temp registers have been allocated
}
/*
-** Create a new index for an SQL table. pName1.pName2 is the name of the index
-** and pTblList is the name of the table that is to be indexed. Both will
+** Create a new index for an SQL table. pName1.pName2 is the name of the index
+** and pTblList is the name of the table that is to be indexed. Both will
** be NULL for a primary key or an index that is created to satisfy a
** UNIQUE constraint. If pTable and pIndex are NULL, use pParse->pNewTable
** as the table to be indexed. pParse->pNewTable is a table that is
**
** pList is a list of columns to be indexed. pList will be NULL if this
** is a primary key or unique-constraint on the most recent column added
-** to the table currently under construction.
+** to the table currently under construction.
**
** If the index is created successfully, return a pointer to the new Index
** structure. This is used by sqlite3AddPrimaryKey() to mark the index
*/
if( pTblName!=0 ){
- /* Use the two-part index name to determine the database
+ /* Use the two-part index name to determine the database
** to search for the table. 'Fix' the table name to this db
** before looking up the table.
*/
** sqlite3FixSrcList can never fail. */
assert(0);
}
- pTab = sqlite3LocateTable(pParse, 0, pTblName->a[0].zName,
+ pTab = sqlite3LocateTable(pParse, 0, pTblName->a[0].zName,
pTblName->a[0].zDatabase);
if( !pTab || db->mallocFailed ) goto exit_create_index;
assert( db->aDb[iDb].pSchema==pTab->pSchema );
assert( pTab!=0 );
assert( pParse->nErr==0 );
- if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0
+ if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0
&& memcmp(&pTab->zName[7],"altertab_",9)!=0 ){
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "table %s may not be indexed", pTab->zName);
goto exit_create_index;
/*
** Find the name of the index. Make sure there is not already another
- ** index or table with the same name.
+ ** index or table with the same name.
**
** Exception: If we are reading the names of permanent indices from the
** sqlite_master table (because some other process changed the schema) and
}
}
- /*
- ** Allocate the index structure.
+ /*
+ ** Allocate the index structure.
*/
nName = sqlite3Strlen30(zName);
nCol = pList->nExpr;
- pIndex = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db,
+ pIndex = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db,
sizeof(Index) + /* Index structure */
sizeof(int)*nCol + /* Index.aiColumn */
sizeof(int)*(nCol+1) + /* Index.aiRowEst */
** TODO: Add a test to make sure that the same column is not named
** more than once within the same index. Only the first instance of
** the column will ever be used by the optimizer. Note that using the
- ** same column more than once cannot be an error because that would
+ ** same column more than once cannot be an error because that would
** break backwards compatibility - it needs to be a warning.
*/
for(i=0, pListItem=pList->a; i<pList->nExpr; i++, pListItem++){
if( pIdx->onError!=pIndex->onError ){
/* This constraint creates the same index as a previous
** constraint specified somewhere in the CREATE TABLE statement.
- ** However the ON CONFLICT clauses are different. If both this
+ ** However the ON CONFLICT clauses are different. If both this
** constraint and the previous equivalent constraint have explicit
** ON CONFLICT clauses this is an error. Otherwise, use the
** explicitly specified behaviour for the index.
*/
if( !(pIdx->onError==OE_Default || pIndex->onError==OE_Default) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"conflicting ON CONFLICT clauses specified", 0);
}
if( pIdx->onError==OE_Default ){
}
/* Link the new Index structure to its table and to the other
- ** in-memory database structures.
+ ** in-memory database structures.
*/
if( db->init.busy ){
Index *p;
- p = sqlite3HashInsert(&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash,
+ p = sqlite3HashInsert(&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash,
pIndex->zName, sqlite3Strlen30(pIndex->zName),
pIndex);
if( p ){
** involves writing the index into the master table and filling in the
** index with the current table contents.
**
- ** The db->init.busy is 0 when the user first enters a CREATE INDEX
- ** command. db->init.busy is 1 when a database is opened and
+ ** The db->init.busy is 0 when the user first enters a CREATE INDEX
+ ** command. db->init.busy is 1 when a database is opened and
** CREATE INDEX statements are read out of the master table. In
** the latter case the index already exists on disk, which is why
** we don't want to recreate it.
/* Add an entry in sqlite_master for this index
*/
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"INSERT INTO %Q.%s VALUES('index',%Q,%Q,#%d,%Q);",
db->aDb[iDb].zName, SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb),
pIndex->zName,
** sure all indices labeled OE_Replace come after all those labeled
** OE_Ignore. This is necessary for the correct constraint check
** processing (in sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks()) as part of
- ** UPDATE and INSERT statements.
+ ** UPDATE and INSERT statements.
*/
if( db->init.busy || pTblName==0 ){
if( onError!=OE_Replace || pTab->pIndex==0
** database name prefix. Like this: "database.table". The pDatabase
** points to the table name and the pTable points to the database name.
** The SrcList.a[].zName field is filled with the table name which might
-** come from pTable (if pDatabase is NULL) or from pDatabase.
+** come from pTable (if pDatabase is NULL) or from pDatabase.
** SrcList.a[].zDatabase is filled with the database name from pTable,
** or with NULL if no database is specified.
**
struct SrcList_item *pItem;
sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
if( !p && (pOn || pUsing) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a JOIN clause is required before %s",
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a JOIN clause is required before %s",
(pOn ? "ON" : "USING")
);
goto append_from_error;
}
/*
-** Add an INDEXED BY or NOT INDEXED clause to the most recently added
+** Add an INDEXED BY or NOT INDEXED clause to the most recently added
** element of the source-list passed as the second argument.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p, Token *pIndexedBy){
struct SrcList_item *pItem = &p->a[p->nSrc-1];
assert( pItem->notIndexed==0 && pItem->zIndex==0 );
if( pIndexedBy->n==1 && !pIndexedBy->z ){
- /* A "NOT INDEXED" clause was supplied. See parse.y
+ /* A "NOT INDEXED" clause was supplied. See parse.y
** construct "indexed_opt" for details. */
pItem->notIndexed = 1;
}else{
/*
** This function is called by the parser when it parses a command to create,
-** release or rollback an SQL savepoint.
+** release or rollback an SQL savepoint.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Savepoint(Parse *pParse, int op, Token *pName){
char *zName = sqlite3NameFromToken(pParse->db, pName);
if( db->aDb[1].pBt==0 && !pParse->explain ){
int rc;
Btree *pBt;
- static const int flags =
+ static const int flags =
SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE |
SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE |
SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
pToplevel->isMultiWrite = 1;
}
-/*
+/*
** The code generator calls this routine if is discovers that it is
-** possible to abort a statement prior to completion. In order to
+** possible to abort a statement prior to completion. In order to
** perform this abort without corrupting the database, we need to make
** sure that the statement is protected by a statement transaction.
**
** such that the abort must occur after the multiwrite. This makes
** some statements involving the REPLACE conflict resolution algorithm
** go a little faster. But taking advantage of this time dependency
-** makes it more difficult to prove that the code is correct (in
+** makes it more difficult to prove that the code is correct (in
** particular, it prevents us from writing an effective
** implementation of sqlite3AssertMayAbort()) and so we have chosen
** to take the safe route and skip the optimization.
** with OP_OpenRead or OP_OpenWrite to access database index pIdx.
**
** If successful, a pointer to the new structure is returned. In this case
-** the caller is responsible for calling sqlite3DbFree(db, ) on the returned
-** pointer. If an error occurs (out of memory or missing collation
+** the caller is responsible for calling sqlite3DbFree(db, ) on the returned
+** pointer. If an error occurs (out of memory or missing collation
** sequence), NULL is returned and the state of pParse updated to reflect
** the error.
*/
/************** End of build.c ***********************************************/
/************** Begin file callback.c ****************************************/
/*
-** 2005 May 23
+** 2005 May 23
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
** This function is responsible for invoking the collation factory callback
** or substituting a collation sequence of a different encoding when the
** requested collation sequence is not available in the desired encoding.
-**
-** If it is not NULL, then pColl must point to the database native encoding
+**
+** If it is not NULL, then pColl must point to the database native encoding
** collation sequence with name zName, length nName.
**
** The return value is either the collation sequence to be used in database
** that have not been defined by sqlite3_create_collation() etc.
**
** If required, this routine calls the 'collation needed' callback to
-** request a definition of the collating sequence. If this doesn't work,
+** request a definition of the collating sequence. If this doesn't work,
** an equivalent collating sequence that uses a text encoding different
** from the main database is substituted, if one is available.
*/
pColl[0].zName[nName] = 0;
pDel = sqlite3HashInsert(&db->aCollSeq, pColl[0].zName, nName, pColl);
- /* If a malloc() failure occurred in sqlite3HashInsert(), it will
+ /* If a malloc() failure occurred in sqlite3HashInsert(), it will
** return the pColl pointer to be deleted (because it wasn't added
** to the hash table).
*/
*/
static int matchQuality(FuncDef *p, int nArg, u8 enc){
int match = 0;
- if( p->nArg==-1 || p->nArg==nArg
+ if( p->nArg==-1 || p->nArg==nArg
|| (nArg==-1 && (p->xFunc!=0 || p->xStep!=0))
){
match = 1;
pHash->a[h] = pDef;
}
}
-
-
+
+
/*
** Locate a user function given a name, a number of arguments and a flag
** have fields overwritten with new information appropriate for the
** new function. But the FuncDefs for built-in functions are read-only.
** So we must not search for built-ins when creating a new function.
- */
+ */
if( !createFlag && !pBest ){
FuncDefHash *pHash = &GLOBAL(FuncDefHash, sqlite3GlobalFunctions);
p = functionSearch(pHash, h, zName, nName);
** exact match for the name, number of arguments and encoding, then add a
** new entry to the hash table and return it.
*/
- if( createFlag && (bestScore<6 || pBest->nArg!=nArg) &&
+ if( createFlag && (bestScore<6 || pBest->nArg!=nArg) &&
(pBest = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, sizeof(*pBest)+nName+1))!=0 ){
pBest->zName = (char *)&pBest[1];
pBest->nArg = (u16)nArg;
/*
** Free all resources held by the schema structure. The void* argument points
-** at a Schema struct. This function does not call sqlite3DbFree(db, ) on the
+** at a Schema struct. This function does not call sqlite3DbFree(db, ) on the
** pointer itself, it just cleans up subsiduary resources (i.e. the contents
** of the schema hash tables).
**
** 1) It is a virtual table and no implementation of the xUpdate method
** has been provided, or
** 2) It is a system table (i.e. sqlite_master), this call is not
- ** part of a nested parse and writable_schema pragma has not
+ ** part of a nested parse and writable_schema pragma has not
** been specified.
**
** In either case leave an error message in pParse and return non-zero.
*/
- if( ( IsVirtual(pTab)
+ if( ( IsVirtual(pTab)
&& sqlite3GetVTable(pParse->db, pTab)->pMod->pModule->xUpdate==0 )
|| ( (pTab->tabFlags & TF_Readonly)!=0
&& (pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_WriteSchema)==0
pDup = sqlite3SelectDup(db, pView->pSelect, 0);
if( pWhere ){
SrcList *pFrom;
-
+
pWhere = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pWhere, 0);
pFrom = sqlite3SrcListAppend(db, 0, 0, 0);
if( pFrom ){
return pWhere;
}
- /* Generate a select expression tree to enforce the limit/offset
+ /* Generate a select expression tree to enforce the limit/offset
** term for the DELETE or UPDATE statement. For example:
** DELETE FROM table_a WHERE col1=1 ORDER BY col2 LIMIT 1 OFFSET 1
** becomes:
- ** DELETE FROM table_a WHERE rowid IN (
+ ** DELETE FROM table_a WHERE rowid IN (
** SELECT rowid FROM table_a WHERE col1=1 ORDER BY col2 LIMIT 1 OFFSET 1
** );
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRUNCATE_OPTIMIZATION
/* Special case: A DELETE without a WHERE clause deletes everything.
** It is easier just to erase the whole table. Prior to version 3.6.5,
- ** this optimization caused the row change count (the value returned by
+ ** this optimization caused the row change count (the value returned by
** API function sqlite3_count_changes) to be set incorrectly. */
- if( rcauth==SQLITE_OK && pWhere==0 && !pTrigger && !IsVirtual(pTab)
+ if( rcauth==SQLITE_OK && pWhere==0 && !pTrigger && !IsVirtual(pTab)
&& 0==sqlite3FkRequired(pParse, pTab, 0, 0)
){
assert( !isView );
** because deleting an item can change the scan order. */
end = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
- /* Unless this is a view, open cursors for the table we are
+ /* Unless this is a view, open cursors for the table we are
** deleting from and all its indices. If this is a view, then the
- ** only effect this statement has is to fire the INSTEAD OF
+ ** only effect this statement has is to fire the INSTEAD OF
** triggers. */
if( !isView ){
sqlite3OpenTableAndIndices(pParse, pTab, iCur, OP_OpenWrite);
sqlite3AutoincrementEnd(pParse);
}
- /* Return the number of rows that were deleted. If this routine is
+ /* Return the number of rows that were deleted. If this routine is
** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not
** invoke the callback function.
*/
** 3. The record number of the row to be deleted must be stored in
** memory cell iRowid.
**
-** This routine generates code to remove both the table record and all
+** This routine generates code to remove both the table record and all
** index entries that point to that record.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
/* Vdbe is guaranteed to have been allocated by this stage. */
assert( v );
- /* Seek cursor iCur to the row to delete. If this row no longer exists
+ /* Seek cursor iCur to the row to delete. If this row no longer exists
** (this can happen if a trigger program has already deleted it), do
** not attempt to delete it or fire any DELETE triggers. */
iLabel = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_NotExists, iCur, iLabel, iRowid);
-
+
/* If there are any triggers to fire, allocate a range of registers to
** use for the old.* references in the triggers. */
if( sqlite3FkRequired(pParse, pTab, 0, 0) || pTrigger ){
iOld = pParse->nMem+1;
pParse->nMem += (1 + pTab->nCol);
- /* Populate the OLD.* pseudo-table register array. These values will be
+ /* Populate the OLD.* pseudo-table register array. These values will be
** used by any BEFORE and AFTER triggers that exist. */
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Copy, iRowid, iOld);
for(iCol=0; iCol<pTab->nCol; iCol++){
}
/* Invoke BEFORE DELETE trigger programs. */
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
TK_DELETE, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, iOld, onconf, iLabel
);
/* Seek the cursor to the row to be deleted again. It may be that
** the BEFORE triggers coded above have already removed the row
- ** being deleted. Do not attempt to delete the row a second time, and
+ ** being deleted. Do not attempt to delete the row a second time, and
** do not fire AFTER triggers. */
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_NotExists, iCur, iLabel, iRowid);
/* Do FK processing. This call checks that any FK constraints that
- ** refer to this table (i.e. constraints attached to other tables)
+ ** refer to this table (i.e. constraints attached to other tables)
** are not violated by deleting this row. */
sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, iOld, 0);
}
/* Delete the index and table entries. Skip this step if pTab is really
** a view (in which case the only effect of the DELETE statement is to
- ** fire the INSTEAD OF triggers). */
+ ** fire the INSTEAD OF triggers). */
if( pTab->pSelect==0 ){
sqlite3GenerateRowIndexDelete(pParse, pTab, iCur, 0);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Delete, iCur, (count?OPFLAG_NCHANGE:0));
/* Do any ON CASCADE, SET NULL or SET DEFAULT operations required to
** handle rows (possibly in other tables) that refer via a foreign key
- ** to the row just deleted. */
+ ** to the row just deleted. */
sqlite3FkActions(pParse, pTab, 0, iOld);
/* Invoke AFTER DELETE trigger programs. */
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
TK_DELETE, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, iOld, onconf, iLabel
);
/* Jump here if the row had already been deleted before any BEFORE
- ** trigger programs were invoked. Or if a trigger program throws a
+ ** trigger programs were invoked. Or if a trigger program throws a
** RAISE(IGNORE) exception. */
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, iLabel);
}
**
*************************************************************************
** This file contains the C functions that implement various SQL
-** functions of SQLite.
+** functions of SQLite.
**
** There is only one exported symbol in this file - the function
** sqliteRegisterBuildinFunctions() found at the bottom of the file.
** Implementation of the abs() function.
**
** IMP: R-23979-26855 The abs(X) function returns the absolute value of
-** the numeric argument X.
+** the numeric argument X.
*/
static void absFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
assert( argc==1 );
return;
}
iVal = -iVal;
- }
+ }
sqlite3_result_int64(context, iVal);
break;
}
/* Because sqlite3_value_double() returns 0.0 if the argument is not
** something that can be converted into a number, we have:
** IMP: R-57326-31541 Abs(X) return 0.0 if X is a string or blob that
- ** cannot be converted to a numeric value.
+ ** cannot be converted to a numeric value.
*/
double rVal = sqlite3_value_double(argv[0]);
if( rVal<0 ) rVal = -rVal;
** comment.
*/
/*
-** Implementation of the IFNULL(), NVL(), and COALESCE() functions.
+** Implementation of the IFNULL(), NVL(), and COALESCE() functions.
** All three do the same thing. They return the first non-NULL
** argument.
*/
#define ifnullFunc versionFunc /* Substitute function - never called */
/*
-** Implementation of random(). Return a random integer.
+** Implementation of random(). Return a random integer.
*/
static void randomFunc(
sqlite3_context *context,
UNUSED_PARAMETER2(NotUsed, NotUsed2);
sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(r), &r);
if( r<0 ){
- /* We need to prevent a random number of 0x8000000000000000
+ /* We need to prevent a random number of 0x8000000000000000
** (or -9223372036854775808) since when you do abs() of that
** number of you get the same value back again. To do this
** in a way that is testable, mask the sign bit off of negative
- ** values, resulting in a positive value. Then take the
+ ** values, resulting in a positive value. Then take the
** 2s complement of that positive value. The end result can
** therefore be no less than -9223372036854775807.
*/
** value is the same as the sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() API function.
*/
static void last_insert_rowid(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- int NotUsed,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ int NotUsed,
sqlite3_value **NotUsed2
){
sqlite3 *db = sqlite3_context_db_handle(context);
u8 matchOne = pInfo->matchOne;
u8 matchAll = pInfo->matchAll;
u8 matchSet = pInfo->matchSet;
- u8 noCase = pInfo->noCase;
+ u8 noCase = pInfo->noCase;
int prevEscape = 0; /* True if the previous character was 'escape' */
while( (c = sqlite3Utf8Read(zPattern,&zPattern))!=0 ){
** the GLOB operator.
*/
static void likeFunc(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- int argc,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ int argc,
sqlite3_value **argv
){
const unsigned char *zA, *zB;
const unsigned char *zEsc = sqlite3_value_text(argv[2]);
if( zEsc==0 ) return;
if( sqlite3Utf8CharLen((char*)zEsc, -1)!=1 ){
- sqlite3_result_error(context,
+ sqlite3_result_error(context,
"ESCAPE expression must be a single character", -1);
return;
}
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
sqlite3_like_count++;
#endif
-
+
sqlite3_result_int(context, patternCompare(zB, zA, pInfo, escape));
}
}
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS */
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite_compileoption_get() function.
-** The result is a string that identifies the compiler options
+** Implementation of the sqlite_compileoption_get() function.
+** The result is a string that identifies the compiler options
** used to build SQLite.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS
** digits. */
static const char hexdigits[] = {
'0', '1', '2', '3', '4', '5', '6', '7',
- '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F'
+ '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F'
};
/*
char const *zBlob = sqlite3_value_blob(argv[0]);
int nBlob = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[0]);
assert( zBlob==sqlite3_value_blob(argv[0]) ); /* No encoding change */
- zText = (char *)contextMalloc(context, (2*(i64)nBlob)+4);
+ zText = (char *)contextMalloc(context, (2*(i64)nBlob)+4);
if( zText ){
int i;
for(i=0; i<nBlob; i++){
if( zOut==0 ){
return;
}
- loopLimit = nStr - nPattern;
+ loopLimit = nStr - nPattern;
for(i=j=0; i<=loopLimit; i++){
if( zStr[i]!=zPattern[0] || memcmp(&zStr[i], zPattern, nPattern) ){
zOut[j++] = zStr[i];
** Compute the soundex encoding of a word.
**
** IMP: R-59782-00072 The soundex(X) function returns a string that is the
-** soundex encoding of the string X.
+** soundex encoding of the string X.
*/
static void soundexFunc(
sqlite3_context *context,
typedef struct SumCtx SumCtx;
struct SumCtx {
double rSum; /* Floating point sum */
- i64 iSum; /* Integer sum */
+ i64 iSum; /* Integer sum */
i64 cnt; /* Number of elements summed */
u8 overflow; /* True if integer overflow seen */
u8 approx; /* True if non-integer value was input to the sum */
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED
/* The sqlite3_aggregate_count() function is deprecated. But just to make
- ** sure it still operates correctly, verify that its count agrees with our
+ ** sure it still operates correctly, verify that its count agrees with our
** internal count when using count(*) and when the total count can be
** expressed as a 32-bit integer. */
assert( argc==1 || p==0 || p->n>0x7fffffff
|| p->n==sqlite3_aggregate_count(context) );
#endif
-}
+}
static void countFinalize(sqlite3_context *context){
CountCtx *p;
p = sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, 0);
** Routines to implement min() and max() aggregate functions.
*/
static void minmaxStep(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- int NotUsed,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ int NotUsed,
sqlite3_value **argv
){
Mem *pArg = (Mem *)argv[0];
sqlite3_result_error_toobig(context);
}else if( pAccum->mallocFailed ){
sqlite3_result_error_nomem(context);
- }else{
- sqlite3_result_text(context, sqlite3StrAccumFinish(pAccum), -1,
+ }else{
+ sqlite3_result_text(context, sqlite3StrAccumFinish(pAccum), -1,
sqlite3_free);
}
}
}
sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "like", 2, SQLITE_ANY, pInfo, likeFunc, 0, 0);
sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "like", 3, SQLITE_ANY, pInfo, likeFunc, 0, 0);
- sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "glob", 2, SQLITE_ANY,
+ sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "glob", 2, SQLITE_ANY,
(struct compareInfo*)&globInfo, likeFunc, 0,0);
setLikeOptFlag(db, "glob", SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE | SQLITE_FUNC_CASE);
- setLikeOptFlag(db, "like",
+ setLikeOptFlag(db, "like",
caseSensitive ? (SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE | SQLITE_FUNC_CASE) : SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE);
}
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsLikeFunction(sqlite3 *db, Expr *pExpr, int *pIsNocase, char *aWc){
FuncDef *pDef;
- if( pExpr->op!=TK_FUNCTION
- || !pExpr->x.pList
+ if( pExpr->op!=TK_FUNCTION
+ || !pExpr->x.pList
|| pExpr->x.pList->nExpr!=2
){
return 0;
}
assert( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_xIsSelect) );
- pDef = sqlite3FindFunction(db, pExpr->u.zToken,
+ pDef = sqlite3FindFunction(db, pExpr->u.zToken,
sqlite3Strlen30(pExpr->u.zToken),
2, SQLITE_UTF8, 0);
if( NEVER(pDef==0) || (pDef->flags & SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE)==0 ){
AGGREGATE(count, 1, 0, 0, countStep, countFinalize ),
AGGREGATE(group_concat, 1, 0, 0, groupConcatStep, groupConcatFinalize),
AGGREGATE(group_concat, 2, 0, 0, groupConcatStep, groupConcatFinalize),
-
+
LIKEFUNC(glob, 2, &globInfo, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE),
#ifdef SQLITE_CASE_SENSITIVE_LIKE
LIKEFUNC(like, 2, &likeInfoAlt, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE),
**
** Foreign keys in SQLite come in two flavours: deferred and immediate.
** If an immediate foreign key constraint is violated, SQLITE_CONSTRAINT
-** is returned and the current statement transaction rolled back. If a
-** deferred foreign key constraint is violated, no action is taken
-** immediately. However if the application attempts to commit the
+** is returned and the current statement transaction rolled back. If a
+** deferred foreign key constraint is violated, no action is taken
+** immediately. However if the application attempts to commit the
** transaction before fixing the constraint violation, the attempt fails.
**
** Deferred constraints are implemented using a simple counter associated
-** with the database handle. The counter is set to zero each time a
-** database transaction is opened. Each time a statement is executed
+** with the database handle. The counter is set to zero each time a
+** database transaction is opened. Each time a statement is executed
** that causes a foreign key violation, the counter is incremented. Each
** time a statement is executed that removes an existing violation from
** the database, the counter is decremented. When the transaction is
** committed, the commit fails if the current value of the counter is
** greater than zero. This scheme has two big drawbacks:
**
-** * When a commit fails due to a deferred foreign key constraint,
+** * When a commit fails due to a deferred foreign key constraint,
** there is no way to tell which foreign constraint is not satisfied,
** or which row it is not satisfied for.
**
-** * If the database contains foreign key violations when the
+** * If the database contains foreign key violations when the
** transaction is opened, this may cause the mechanism to malfunction.
**
** Despite these problems, this approach is adopted as it seems simpler
** the parent table for a match. If none is found increment the
** constraint counter.
**
-** I.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table,
+** I.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table,
** search the child table for rows that correspond to the new
** row in the parent table. Decrement the counter for each row
** found (as the constraint is now satisfied).
**
** DELETE operations:
**
-** D.1) For each FK for which the table is the child table,
-** search the parent table for a row that corresponds to the
-** deleted row in the child table. If such a row is not found,
+** D.1) For each FK for which the table is the child table,
+** search the parent table for a row that corresponds to the
+** deleted row in the child table. If such a row is not found,
** decrement the counter.
**
-** D.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table, search
-** the child table for rows that correspond to the deleted row
+** D.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table, search
+** the child table for rows that correspond to the deleted row
** in the parent table. For each found increment the counter.
**
** UPDATE operations:
**
** An UPDATE command requires that all 4 steps above are taken, but only
-** for FK constraints for which the affected columns are actually
+** for FK constraints for which the affected columns are actually
** modified (values must be compared at runtime).
**
** Note that I.1 and D.1 are very similar operations, as are I.2 and D.2.
** For the purposes of immediate FK constraints, the OR REPLACE conflict
** resolution is considered to delete rows before the new row is inserted.
** If a delete caused by OR REPLACE violates an FK constraint, an exception
-** is thrown, even if the FK constraint would be satisfied after the new
+** is thrown, even if the FK constraint would be satisfied after the new
** row is inserted.
**
-** Immediate constraints are usually handled similarly. The only difference
+** Immediate constraints are usually handled similarly. The only difference
** is that the counter used is stored as part of each individual statement
** object (struct Vdbe). If, after the statement has run, its immediate
** constraint counter is greater than zero, it returns SQLITE_CONSTRAINT
** INSERT violates a foreign key constraint. This is necessary as such
** an INSERT does not open a statement transaction.
**
-** TODO: How should dropping a table be handled? How should renaming a
+** TODO: How should dropping a table be handled? How should renaming a
** table be handled?
**
**
** for those two operations needs to know whether or not the operation
** requires any FK processing and, if so, which columns of the original
** row are required by the FK processing VDBE code (i.e. if FKs were
-** implemented using triggers, which of the old.* columns would be
+** implemented using triggers, which of the old.* columns would be
** accessed). No information is required by the code-generator before
** coding an INSERT operation. The functions used by the UPDATE/DELETE
** generation code to query for this information are:
/*
** A foreign key constraint requires that the key columns in the parent
** table are collectively subject to a UNIQUE or PRIMARY KEY constraint.
-** Given that pParent is the parent table for foreign key constraint pFKey,
-** search the schema a unique index on the parent key columns.
+** Given that pParent is the parent table for foreign key constraint pFKey,
+** search the schema a unique index on the parent key columns.
+**
+** If successful, zero is returned. If the parent key is an INTEGER PRIMARY
+** KEY column, then output variable *ppIdx is set to NULL. Otherwise, *ppIdx
+** is set to point to the unique index.
**
-** If successful, zero is returned. If the parent key is an INTEGER PRIMARY
-** KEY column, then output variable *ppIdx is set to NULL. Otherwise, *ppIdx
-** is set to point to the unique index.
-**
** If the parent key consists of a single column (the foreign key constraint
** is not a composite foreign key), output variable *paiCol is set to NULL.
** Otherwise, it is set to point to an allocated array of size N, where
** PRIMARY KEY, or
**
** 4) No parent key columns were provided explicitly as part of the
-** foreign key definition, and the PRIMARY KEY of the parent table
-** consists of a a different number of columns to the child key in
+** foreign key definition, and the PRIMARY KEY of the parent table
+** consists of a a different number of columns to the child key in
** the child table.
**
** then non-zero is returned, and a "foreign key mismatch" error loaded
assert( !paiCol || *paiCol==0 );
assert( pParse );
- /* If this is a non-composite (single column) foreign key, check if it
- ** maps to the INTEGER PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. If so, leave *ppIdx
- ** and *paiCol set to zero and return early.
+ /* If this is a non-composite (single column) foreign key, check if it
+ ** maps to the INTEGER PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. If so, leave *ppIdx
+ ** and *paiCol set to zero and return early.
**
** Otherwise, for a composite foreign key (more than one column), allocate
** space for the aiCol array (returned via output parameter *paiCol).
if( nCol==1 ){
/* The FK maps to the IPK if any of the following are true:
**
- ** 1) There is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and the FK is implicitly
+ ** 1) There is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and the FK is implicitly
** mapped to the primary key of table pParent, or
** 2) The FK is explicitly mapped to a column declared as INTEGER
** PRIMARY KEY.
}
for(pIdx=pParent->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext){
- if( pIdx->nColumn==nCol && pIdx->onError!=OE_None ){
+ if( pIdx->nColumn==nCol && pIdx->onError!=OE_None ){
/* pIdx is a UNIQUE index (or a PRIMARY KEY) and has the right number
** of columns. If each indexed column corresponds to a foreign key
** column of pFKey, then this index is a winner. */
if( zKey==0 ){
- /* If zKey is NULL, then this foreign key is implicitly mapped to
- ** the PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. The PRIMARY KEY index may be
+ /* If zKey is NULL, then this foreign key is implicitly mapped to
+ ** the PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. The PRIMARY KEY index may be
** identified by the test (Index.autoIndex==2). */
if( pIdx->autoIndex==2 ){
if( aiCol ){
}
/*
-** This function is called when a row is inserted into or deleted from the
-** child table of foreign key constraint pFKey. If an SQL UPDATE is executed
+** This function is called when a row is inserted into or deleted from the
+** child table of foreign key constraint pFKey. If an SQL UPDATE is executed
** on the child table of pFKey, this function is invoked twice for each row
** affected - once to "delete" the old row, and then again to "insert" the
** new row.
**
** Each time it is called, this function generates VDBE code to locate the
-** row in the parent table that corresponds to the row being inserted into
-** or deleted from the child table. If the parent row can be found, no
+** row in the parent table that corresponds to the row being inserted into
+** or deleted from the child table. If the parent row can be found, no
** special action is taken. Otherwise, if the parent row can *not* be
** found in the parent table:
**
**
** DELETE deferred Decrement the "deferred constraint counter".
**
-** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file
+** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file
** (fkey.c) as "I.1" and "D.1".
*/
static void fkLookupParent(
** outstanding constraints to resolve. If there are not, there is no need
** to check if deleting this row resolves any outstanding violations.
**
- ** Check if any of the key columns in the child table row are NULL. If
- ** any are, then the constraint is considered satisfied. No need to
+ ** Check if any of the key columns in the child table row are NULL. If
+ ** any are, then the constraint is considered satisfied. No need to
** search for a matching row in the parent table. */
if( nIncr<0 ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_FkIfZero, pFKey->isDeferred, iOk);
** column of the parent table (table pTab). */
int iMustBeInt; /* Address of MustBeInt instruction */
int regTemp = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
-
- /* Invoke MustBeInt to coerce the child key value to an integer (i.e.
+
+ /* Invoke MustBeInt to coerce the child key value to an integer (i.e.
** apply the affinity of the parent key). If this fails, then there
** is no matching parent key. Before using MustBeInt, make a copy of
** the value. Otherwise, the value inserted into the child key column
** will have INTEGER affinity applied to it, which may not be correct. */
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, aiCol[0]+1+regData, regTemp);
iMustBeInt = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_MustBeInt, regTemp, 0);
-
+
/* If the parent table is the same as the child table, and we are about
** to increment the constraint-counter (i.e. this is an INSERT operation),
** then check if the row being inserted matches itself. If so, do not
if( pTab==pFKey->pFrom && nIncr==1 ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Eq, regData, iOk, regTemp);
}
-
+
sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, iCur, iDb, pTab, OP_OpenRead);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_NotExists, iCur, 0, regTemp);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, iOk);
int regTemp = sqlite3GetTempRange(pParse, nCol);
int regRec = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
KeyInfo *pKey = sqlite3IndexKeyinfo(pParse, pIdx);
-
+
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_OpenRead, iCur, pIdx->tnum, iDb);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1, (char*)pKey, P4_KEYINFO_HANDOFF);
for(i=0; i<nCol; i++){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, aiCol[i]+1+regData, regTemp+i);
}
-
+
/* If the parent table is the same as the child table, and we are about
** to increment the constraint-counter (i.e. this is an INSERT operation),
** then check if the row being inserted matches itself. If so, do not
}
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, iOk);
}
-
+
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_MakeRecord, regTemp, nCol, regRec);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1, sqlite3IndexAffinityStr(v, pIdx), 0);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iCur, iOk, regRec, 0);
-
+
sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regRec);
sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regTemp, nCol);
}
/*
** This function is called to generate code executed when a row is deleted
-** from the parent table of foreign key constraint pFKey and, if pFKey is
+** from the parent table of foreign key constraint pFKey and, if pFKey is
** deferred, when a row is inserted into the same table. When generating
** code for an SQL UPDATE operation, this function may be called twice -
** once to "delete" the old row and once to "insert" the new row.
**
** INSERT deferred Decrement the "deferred constraint counter".
**
-** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file
+** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file
** (fkey.c) as "I.2" and "D.2".
*/
static void fkScanChildren(
Expr *pLeft; /* Value from parent table row */
Expr *pRight; /* Column ref to child table */
Expr *pEq; /* Expression (pLeft = pRight) */
- int iCol; /* Index of column in child table */
+ int iCol; /* Index of column in child table */
const char *zCol; /* Name of column in child table */
pLeft = sqlite3Expr(db, TK_REGISTER, 0);
/* If the child table is the same as the parent table, and this scan
** is taking place as part of a DELETE operation (operation D.2), omit the
- ** row being deleted from the scan by adding ($rowid != rowid) to the WHERE
+ ** row being deleted from the scan by adding ($rowid != rowid) to the WHERE
** clause, where $rowid is the rowid of the row being deleted. */
if( pTab==pFKey->pFrom && nIncr>0 ){
Expr *pEq; /* Expression (pLeft = pRight) */
}
/*
-** The second argument is a Trigger structure allocated by the
+** The second argument is a Trigger structure allocated by the
** fkActionTrigger() routine. This function deletes the Trigger structure
** and all of its sub-components.
**
**
** (a) The table is the parent table of a FK constraint, or
** (b) The table is the child table of a deferred FK constraint and it is
-** determined at runtime that there are outstanding deferred FK
+** determined at runtime that there are outstanding deferred FK
** constraint violations in the database,
**
** then the equivalent of "DELETE FROM <tbl>" is executed before dropping
assert( v ); /* VDBE has already been allocated */
if( sqlite3FkReferences(pTab)==0 ){
/* Search for a deferred foreign key constraint for which this table
- ** is the child table. If one cannot be found, return without
+ ** is the child table. If one cannot be found, return without
** generating any VDBE code. If one can be found, then jump over
** the entire DELETE if there are no outstanding deferred constraints
** when this statement is run. */
sqlite3DeleteFrom(pParse, sqlite3SrcListDup(db, pName, 0), 0);
pParse->disableTriggers = 0;
- /* If the DELETE has generated immediate foreign key constraint
+ /* If the DELETE has generated immediate foreign key constraint
** violations, halt the VDBE and return an error at this point, before
** any modifications to the schema are made. This is because statement
** transactions are not able to rollback schema changes. */
/*
** This function is called when inserting, deleting or updating a row of
-** table pTab to generate VDBE code to perform foreign key constraint
+** table pTab to generate VDBE code to perform foreign key constraint
** processing for the operation.
**
** For a DELETE operation, parameter regOld is passed the index of the
** For an UPDATE operation, this function is called twice. Once before
** the original record is deleted from the table using the calling convention
** described for DELETE. Then again after the original record is deleted
-** but before the new record is inserted using the INSERT convention.
+** but before the new record is inserted using the INSERT convention.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
Parse *pParse, /* Parse context */
- Table *pTab, /* Row is being deleted from this table */
+ Table *pTab, /* Row is being deleted from this table */
int regOld, /* Previous row data is stored here */
int regNew /* New row data is stored here */
){
int i;
int isIgnore = 0;
- /* Find the parent table of this foreign key. Also find a unique index
- ** on the parent key columns in the parent table. If either of these
- ** schema items cannot be located, set an error in pParse and return
+ /* Find the parent table of this foreign key. Also find a unique index
+ ** on the parent key columns in the parent table. If either of these
+ ** schema items cannot be located, set an error in pParse and return
** early. */
if( pParse->disableTriggers ){
pTo = sqlite3FindTable(db, pFKey->zTo, zDb);
aiCol[i] = -1;
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION
- /* Request permission to read the parent key columns. If the
+ /* Request permission to read the parent key columns. If the
** authorization callback returns SQLITE_IGNORE, behave as if any
** values read from the parent table are NULL. */
if( db->xAuth ){
#endif
}
- /* Take a shared-cache advisory read-lock on the parent table. Allocate
- ** a cursor to use to search the unique index on the parent key columns
+ /* Take a shared-cache advisory read-lock on the parent table. Allocate
+ ** a cursor to use to search the unique index on the parent key columns
** in the parent table. */
sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTo->tnum, 0, pTo->zName);
pParse->nTab++;
if( regOld!=0 ){
/* A row is being removed from the child table. Search for the parent.
- ** If the parent does not exist, removing the child row resolves an
+ ** If the parent does not exist, removing the child row resolves an
** outstanding foreign key constraint violation. */
fkLookupParent(pParse, iDb, pTo, pIdx, pFKey, aiCol, regOld, -1,isIgnore);
}
if( regNew!=0 ){
/* A row is being added to the child table. If a parent row cannot
- ** be found, adding the child row has violated the FK constraint. */
+ ** be found, adding the child row has violated the FK constraint. */
fkLookupParent(pParse, iDb, pTo, pIdx, pFKey, aiCol, regNew, +1,isIgnore);
}
}
assert( aiCol || pFKey->nCol==1 );
- /* Create a SrcList structure containing a single table (the table
+ /* Create a SrcList structure containing a single table (the table
** the foreign key that refers to this table is attached to). This
** is required for the sqlite3WhereXXX() interface. */
pSrc = sqlite3SrcListAppend(db, 0, 0, 0);
pItem->zName = pFKey->pFrom->zName;
pItem->pTab->nRef++;
pItem->iCursor = pParse->nTab++;
-
+
if( regNew!=0 ){
fkScanChildren(pParse, pSrc, pTab, pIdx, pFKey, aiCol, regNew, -1);
}
if( regOld!=0 ){
/* If there is a RESTRICT action configured for the current operation
- ** on the parent table of this FK, then throw an exception
+ ** on the parent table of this FK, then throw an exception
** immediately if the FK constraint is violated, even if this is a
** deferred trigger. That's what RESTRICT means. To defer checking
** the constraint, the FK should specify NO ACTION (represented
#define COLUMN_MASK(x) (((x)>31) ? 0xffffffff : ((u32)1<<(x)))
/*
-** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a
+** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a
** row contained in table pTab.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3FkOldmask(
}
/*
-** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a
+** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a
** row contained in table pTab. If the operation is a DELETE, then
** parameter aChange is passed a NULL value. For an UPDATE, aChange points
** to an array of size N, where N is the number of columns in table pTab.
-** If the i'th column is not modified by the UPDATE, then the corresponding
+** If the i'th column is not modified by the UPDATE, then the corresponding
** entry in the aChange[] array is set to -1. If the column is modified,
** the value is 0 or greater. Parameter chngRowid is set to true if the
** UPDATE statement modifies the rowid fields of the table.
**
** If any foreign key processing will be required, this function returns
-** true. If there is no foreign key related processing, this function
+** true. If there is no foreign key related processing, this function
** returns false.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired(
){
if( pParse->db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){
if( !aChange ){
- /* A DELETE operation. Foreign key processing is required if the
- ** table in question is either the child or parent table for any
+ /* A DELETE operation. Foreign key processing is required if the
+ ** table in question is either the child or parent table for any
** foreign key constraint. */
return (sqlite3FkReferences(pTab) || pTab->pFKey);
}else{
}
/*
-** This function is called when an UPDATE or DELETE operation is being
+** This function is called when an UPDATE or DELETE operation is being
** compiled on table pTab, which is the parent table of foreign-key pFKey.
** If the current operation is an UPDATE, then the pChanges parameter is
** passed a pointer to the list of columns being modified. If it is a
** returned (these actions require no special handling by the triggers
** sub-system, code for them is created by fkScanChildren()).
**
-** For example, if pFKey is the foreign key and pTab is table "p" in
+** For example, if pFKey is the foreign key and pTab is table "p" in
** the following schema:
**
** CREATE TABLE p(pk PRIMARY KEY);
** END;
**
** The returned pointer is cached as part of the foreign key object. It
-** is eventually freed along with the rest of the foreign key object by
+** is eventually freed along with the rest of the foreign key object by
** sqlite3FkDelete().
*/
static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
** that the affinity and collation sequence associated with the
** parent table are used for the comparison. */
pEq = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_EQ,
- sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
+ sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tOld),
sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tToCol)
, 0),
*/
if( pChanges ){
pEq = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_IS,
- sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
+ sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tOld),
sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tToCol),
0),
- sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
+ sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tNew),
sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tToCol),
0),
0);
pWhen = sqlite3ExprAnd(db, pWhen, pEq);
}
-
+
if( action!=OE_Restrict && (action!=OE_Cascade || pChanges) ){
Expr *pNew;
if( action==OE_Cascade ){
- pNew = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
+ pNew = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tNew),
sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_ID, 0, 0, &tToCol)
, 0);
if( action==OE_Restrict ){
Token tFrom;
- Expr *pRaise;
+ Expr *pRaise;
tFrom.z = zFrom;
tFrom.n = nFrom;
if( pRaise ){
pRaise->affinity = OE_Abort;
}
- pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse,
+ pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse,
sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0, pRaise),
sqlite3SrcListAppend(db, 0, &tFrom, 0),
pWhere,
enableLookaside = db->lookaside.bEnabled;
db->lookaside.bEnabled = 0;
- pTrigger = (Trigger *)sqlite3DbMallocZero(db,
+ pTrigger = (Trigger *)sqlite3DbMallocZero(db,
sizeof(Trigger) + /* struct Trigger */
sizeof(TriggerStep) + /* Single step in trigger program */
nFrom + 1 /* Space for pStep->target.z */
pStep->target.z = (char *)&pStep[1];
pStep->target.n = nFrom;
memcpy((char *)pStep->target.z, zFrom, nFrom);
-
+
pStep->pWhere = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pWhere, EXPRDUP_REDUCE);
pStep->pExprList = sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pList, EXPRDUP_REDUCE);
pStep->pSelect = sqlite3SelectDup(db, pSelect, EXPRDUP_REDUCE);
switch( action ){
case OE_Restrict:
- pStep->op = TK_SELECT;
+ pStep->op = TK_SELECT;
break;
- case OE_Cascade:
- if( !pChanges ){
- pStep->op = TK_DELETE;
- break;
+ case OE_Cascade:
+ if( !pChanges ){
+ pStep->op = TK_DELETE;
+ break;
}
default:
pStep->op = TK_UPDATE;
ExprList *pChanges, /* Change-list for UPDATE, NULL for DELETE */
int regOld /* Address of array containing old row */
){
- /* If foreign-key support is enabled, iterate through all FKs that
- ** refer to table pTab. If there is an action associated with the FK
- ** for this operation (either update or delete), invoke the associated
+ /* If foreign-key support is enabled, iterate through all FKs that
+ ** refer to table pTab. If there is an action associated with the FK
+ ** for this operation (either update or delete), invoke the associated
** trigger sub-program. */
if( pParse->db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){
FKey *pFKey; /* Iterator variable */
/*
** Return a pointer to the column affinity string associated with index
-** pIdx. A column affinity string has one character for each column in
+** pIdx. A column affinity string has one character for each column in
** the table, according to the affinity of the column:
**
** Character Column affinity
pIdx->zColAff[n++] = SQLITE_AFF_NONE;
pIdx->zColAff[n] = 0;
}
-
+
return pIdx->zColAff;
}
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3TableAffinityStr(Vdbe *v, Table *pTab){
/* The first time a column affinity string for a particular table
- ** is required, it is allocated and populated here. It is then
+ ** is required, it is allocated and populated here. It is then
** stored as a member of the Table structure for subsequent use.
**
** The column affinity string will eventually be deleted by
/*
** Return non-zero if the table pTab in database iDb or any of its indices
** have been opened at any point in the VDBE program beginning at location
-** iStartAddr throught the end of the program. This is used to see if
-** a statement of the form "INSERT INTO <iDb, pTab> SELECT ..." can
-** run without using temporary table for the results of the SELECT.
+** iStartAddr throught the end of the program. This is used to see if
+** a statement of the form "INSERT INTO <iDb, pTab> SELECT ..." can
+** run without using temporary table for the results of the SELECT.
*/
static int readsTable(Parse *p, int iStartAddr, int iDb, Table *pTab){
Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(p);
/*
** This routine generates code that will initialize all of the
-** register used by the autoincrement tracker.
+** register used by the autoincrement tracker.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AutoincrementBegin(Parse *pParse){
AutoincInfo *p; /* Information about an AUTOINCREMENT */
assert( (pTrigger && tmask) || (pTrigger==0 && tmask==0) );
/* If pTab is really a view, make sure it has been initialized.
- ** ViewGetColumnNames() is a no-op if pTab is not a view (or virtual
+ ** ViewGetColumnNames() is a no-op if pTab is not a view (or virtual
** module table).
*/
if( sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames(pParse, pTab) ){
}
/* Ensure that:
- * (a) the table is not read-only,
+ * (a) the table is not read-only,
* (b) that if it is a view then ON INSERT triggers exist
*/
if( sqlite3IsReadOnly(pParse, pTab, tmask) ){
** the destination table (template 3).
**
** A temp table must be used if the table being updated is also one
- ** of the tables being read by the SELECT statement. Also use a
+ ** of the tables being read by the SELECT statement. Also use a
** temp table in the case of row triggers.
*/
if( pTrigger || readsTable(pParse, addrSelect, iDb, pTab) ){
}
}
if( pColumn==0 && nColumn && nColumn!=(pTab->nCol-nHidden) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"table %S has %d columns but %d values were supplied",
pTabList, 0, pTab->nCol-nHidden, nColumn);
goto insert_cleanup;
}
/* If the INSERT statement included an IDLIST term, then make sure
- ** all elements of the IDLIST really are columns of the table and
+ ** all elements of the IDLIST really are columns of the table and
** remember the column indices.
**
** If the table has an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and that column
if( pColumn==0 && nColumn>0 ){
keyColumn = pTab->iPKey;
}
-
+
/* Initialize the count of rows to be inserted
*/
if( db->flags & SQLITE_CountRows ){
if( pColumn && j>=pColumn->nId ){
sqlite3ExprCode(pParse, pTab->aCol[i].pDflt, regCols+i+1);
}else if( useTempTable ){
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, regCols+i+1);
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, regCols+i+1);
}else{
assert( pSelect==0 ); /* Otherwise useTempTable is true */
sqlite3ExprCodeAndCache(pParse, pList->a[j].pExpr, regCols+i+1);
}
/* Fire BEFORE or INSTEAD OF triggers */
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE,
pTab, regCols-pTab->nCol-1, onError, endOfLoop);
sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regCols, pTab->nCol+1);
/* Push the record number for the new entry onto the stack. The
** record number is a randomly generate integer created by NewRowid
** except when the table has an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column, in which
- ** case the record number is the same as that column.
+ ** case the record number is the same as that column.
*/
if( !isView ){
if( IsVirtual(pTab) ){
if( j<0 || nColumn==0 || (pColumn && j>=pColumn->nId) ){
sqlite3ExprCode(pParse, pTab->aCol[i].pDflt, iRegStore);
}else if( useTempTable ){
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, iRegStore);
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, iRegStore);
}else if( pSelect ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, regFromSelect+j, iRegStore);
}else{
if( pTrigger ){
/* Code AFTER triggers */
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER,
pTab, regData-2-pTab->nCol, onError, endOfLoop);
}
}
/*
- ** Return the number of rows inserted. If this routine is
+ ** Return the number of rows inserted. If this routine is
** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not
** invoke the callback function.
*/
** If isUpdate is true and rowidChng is non-zero, then rowidChng contains
** the address of a register containing the rowid before the update takes
** place. isUpdate is true for UPDATEs and false for INSERTs. If isUpdate
-** is false, indicating an INSERT statement, then a non-zero rowidChng
+** is false, indicating an INSERT statement, then a non-zero rowidChng
** indicates that the rowid was explicitly specified as part of the
** INSERT statement. If rowidChng is false, it means that the rowid is
-** computed automatically in an insert or that the rowid value is not
+** computed automatically in an insert or that the rowid value is not
** modified by an update.
**
** The code generated by this routine store new index entries into
}else if( onError==OE_Default ){
onError = OE_Abort;
}
-
+
if( isUpdate ){
j2 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Eq, regRowid, 0, rowidChng);
}
** the triggers and remove both the table and index b-tree entries.
**
** Otherwise, if there are no triggers or the recursive-triggers
- ** flag is not set, but the table has one or more indexes, call
- ** GenerateRowIndexDelete(). This removes the index b-tree entries
- ** only. The table b-tree entry will be replaced by the new entry
- ** when it is inserted.
+ ** flag is not set, but the table has one or more indexes, call
+ ** GenerateRowIndexDelete(). This removes the index b-tree entries
+ ** only. The table b-tree entry will be replaced by the new entry
+ ** when it is inserted.
**
** If either GenerateRowDelete() or GenerateRowIndexDelete() is called,
** also invoke MultiWrite() to indicate that this VDBE may require
/* Find out what action to take in case there is an indexing conflict */
onError = pIdx->onError;
- if( onError==OE_None ){
+ if( onError==OE_None ){
sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regIdx, pIdx->nColumn+1);
continue; /* pIdx is not a UNIQUE index */
}
if( onError==OE_Ignore ) onError = OE_Replace;
else if( onError==OE_Fail ) onError = OE_Abort;
}
-
+
/* Check to see if the new index entry will be unique */
regR = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, regOldRowid, regR);
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, j3);
sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regR);
}
-
+
if( pbMayReplace ){
*pbMayReplace = seenReplace;
}
rc = sqlite3_step(pStmt);
/* Invoke the callback function if required */
- if( xCallback && (SQLITE_ROW==rc ||
+ if( xCallback && (SQLITE_ROW==rc ||
(SQLITE_DONE==rc && !callbackIsInit
&& db->flags&SQLITE_NullCallback)) ){
if( !callbackIsInit ){
** This header file defines the SQLite interface for use by
** shared libraries that want to be imported as extensions into
** an SQLite instance. Shared libraries that intend to be loaded
-** as extensions by SQLite should #include this file instead of
+** as extensions by SQLite should #include this file instead of
** sqlite3.h.
*/
#ifndef _SQLITE3EXT_H_
sqlite3_memory_highwater,
sqlite3_memory_used,
#ifdef SQLITE_MUTEX_OMIT
- 0,
- 0,
+ 0,
+ 0,
0,
0,
0,
**
** Return SQLITE_OK on success and SQLITE_ERROR if something goes wrong.
**
-** If an error occurs and pzErrMsg is not 0, then fill *pzErrMsg with
+** If an error occurs and pzErrMsg is not 0, then fill *pzErrMsg with
** error message text. The calling function should free this memory
** by calling sqlite3DbFree(db, ).
*/
if( pzErrMsg ){
zErrmsg = sqlite3StackAllocZero(db, nMsg);
if( zErrmsg ){
- sqlite3_snprintf(nMsg, zErrmsg,
+ sqlite3_snprintf(nMsg, zErrmsg,
"unable to open shared library [%s]", zFile);
sqlite3OsDlError(pVfs, nMsg-1, zErrmsg);
*pzErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, zErrmsg);
*/
typedef struct sqlite3AutoExtList sqlite3AutoExtList;
static SQLITE_WSD struct sqlite3AutoExtList {
- int nExt; /* Number of entries in aExt[] */
+ int nExt; /* Number of entries in aExt[] */
void (**aExt)(void); /* Pointers to the extension init functions */
} sqlite3Autoext = { 0, 0 };
/*
** Interpret the given string as a safety level. Return 0 for OFF,
-** 1 for ON or NORMAL and 2 for FULL. Return 1 for an empty or
+** 1 for ON or NORMAL and 2 for FULL. Return 1 for an empty or
** unrecognized string argument.
**
** Note that the values returned are one less that the values that
/*
** Interpret the given string as an auto-vacuum mode value.
**
-** The following strings, "none", "full" and "incremental" are
+** The following strings, "none", "full" and "incremental" are
** acceptable, as are their numeric equivalents: 0, 1 and 2 respectively.
*/
static int getAutoVacuum(const char *z){
db->flags &= ~mask;
}
- /* Many of the flag-pragmas modify the code generated by the SQL
+ /* Many of the flag-pragmas modify the code generated by the SQL
** compiler (eg. count_changes). So add an opcode to expire all
** compiled SQL statements after modifying a pragma value.
*/
case OE_SetDflt: zName = "SET DEFAULT"; break;
case OE_Cascade: zName = "CASCADE"; break;
case OE_Restrict: zName = "RESTRICT"; break;
- default: zName = "NO ACTION";
+ default: zName = "NO ACTION";
assert( action==OE_None ); break;
}
return zName;
#endif
/*
-** Process a pragma statement.
+** Process a pragma statement.
**
** Pragmas are of this form:
**
** id and pId2 is any empty string.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
- Parse *pParse,
+ Parse *pParse,
Token *pId1, /* First part of [database.]id field */
Token *pId2, /* Second part of [database.]id field, or NULL */
Token *pValue, /* Token for <value>, or NULL */
if( iDb<0 ) return;
pDb = &db->aDb[iDb];
- /* If the temp database has been explicitly named as part of the
- ** pragma, make sure it is open.
+ /* If the temp database has been explicitly named as part of the
+ ** pragma, make sure it is open.
*/
if( iDb==1 && sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(pParse) ){
return;
if( sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_PRAGMA, zLeft, zRight, zDb) ){
goto pragma_out;
}
-
+
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS
/*
** PRAGMA [database.]default_cache_size
** PRAGMA [database.]max_page_count=N
**
** The first form reports the current setting for the
- ** maximum number of pages in the database file. The
+ ** maximum number of pages in the database file. The
** second form attempts to change this setting. Both
** forms return the current setting.
*/
|| eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY );
sqlite3VdbeSetNumCols(v, 1);
sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, 0, COLNAME_NAME, "journal_mode", SQLITE_STATIC);
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 1, 0,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 1, 0,
azModeName[eMode], P4_STATIC);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, 1, 1);
}else
*/
int rc = sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(pBt, eAuto);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eAuto==1 || eAuto==2) ){
- /* When setting the auto_vacuum mode to either "full" or
+ /* When setting the auto_vacuum mode to either "full" or
** "incremental", write the value of meta[6] in the database
** file. Before writing to meta[6], check that meta[3] indicates
** that this really is an auto-vacuum capable database.
if( !zRight ){
if( sqlite3_temp_directory ){
sqlite3VdbeSetNumCols(v, 1);
- sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, 0, COLNAME_NAME,
+ sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, 0, COLNAME_NAME,
"temp_store_directory", SQLITE_STATIC);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 1, 0, sqlite3_temp_directory, 0);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, 1, 1);
Pager *pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pDb->pBt);
char *proxy_file_path = NULL;
sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager);
- sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_GET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
+ sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_GET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
&proxy_file_path);
-
+
if( proxy_file_path ){
sqlite3VdbeSetNumCols(v, 1);
- sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, 0, COLNAME_NAME,
+ sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, 0, COLNAME_NAME,
"lock_proxy_file", SQLITE_STATIC);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_String8, 0, 1, 0, proxy_file_path, 0);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, 1, 1);
sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager);
int res;
if( zRight[0] ){
- res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
+ res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
zRight);
} else {
- res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
+ res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
NULL);
}
if( res!=SQLITE_OK ){
}
}
}else
-#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */
-
+#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */
+
/*
** PRAGMA [database.]synchronous
** PRAGMA [database.]synchronous=OFF|ON|NORMAL|FULL
returnSingleInt(pParse, "synchronous", pDb->safety_level-1);
}else{
if( !db->autoCommit ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"Safety level may not be changed inside a transaction");
}else{
pDb->safety_level = getSafetyLevel(zRight)+1;
v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
pIdx = pTab->pIndex;
if( pIdx ){
- int i = 0;
+ int i = 0;
sqlite3VdbeSetNumCols(v, 3);
pParse->nMem = 3;
sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, 0, COLNAME_NAME, "seq", SQLITE_STATIC);
v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
pFK = pTab->pFKey;
if( pFK ){
- int i = 0;
+ int i = 0;
sqlite3VdbeSetNumCols(v, 8);
pParse->nMem = 8;
sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, 0, COLNAME_NAME, "id", SQLITE_STATIC);
#endif
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK
- /* Pragma "quick_check" is an experimental reduced version of
+ /* Pragma "quick_check" is an experimental reduced version of
** integrity_check designed to detect most database corruption
** without most of the overhead of a full integrity-check.
*/
if( sqlite3StrICmp(zLeft, "integrity_check")==0
- || sqlite3StrICmp(zLeft, "quick_check")==0
+ || sqlite3StrICmp(zLeft, "quick_check")==0
){
int i, j, addr, mxErr;
sqlite3VdbeChangeP1(v, addr+3, j+2);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP2(v, addr+3, addr+2);
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr+4);
- sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, addr+6,
+ sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, addr+6,
"wrong # of entries in index ", P4_STATIC);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, addr+7, pIdx->zName, P4_STATIC);
}
- }
+ }
}
addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOpList(v, ArraySize(endCode), endCode);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP2(v, addr, -mxErr);
** encoding that will be used for the main database file if a new file
** is created. If an existing main database file is opened, then the
** default text encoding for the existing database is used.
- **
+ **
** In all cases new databases created using the ATTACH command are
** created to use the same default text encoding as the main database. If
** the main database has not been initialized and/or created when ATTACH
** will be overwritten when the schema is next loaded. If it does not
** already exists, it will be created to use the new encoding value.
*/
- if(
- !(DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_SchemaLoaded)) ||
- DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_Empty)
+ if(
+ !(DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_SchemaLoaded)) ||
+ DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_Empty)
){
for(pEnc=&encnames[0]; pEnc->zName; pEnc++){
if( 0==sqlite3StrICmp(zRight, pEnc->zName) ){
** The user-version is not used internally by SQLite. It may be used by
** applications for any purpose.
*/
- if( sqlite3StrICmp(zLeft, "schema_version")==0
- || sqlite3StrICmp(zLeft, "user_version")==0
- || sqlite3StrICmp(zLeft, "freelist_count")==0
+ if( sqlite3StrICmp(zLeft, "schema_version")==0
+ || sqlite3StrICmp(zLeft, "user_version")==0
+ || sqlite3StrICmp(zLeft, "freelist_count")==0
){
int iCookie; /* Cookie index. 1 for schema-cookie, 6 for user-cookie. */
sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree(v, iDb);
pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( pBt==0 || (pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pBt))==0 ){
zState = "closed";
- }else if( sqlite3_file_control(db, i ? db->aDb[i].zName : 0,
+ }else if( sqlite3_file_control(db, i ? db->aDb[i].zName : 0,
SQLITE_FCNTL_LOCKSTATE, &j)==SQLITE_OK ){
zState = azLockName[j];
}
}else
#endif
-
+
{/* Empty ELSE clause */}
/*
sqlite3SetString(pData->pzErrMsg, db,
"malformed database schema (%s)", zObj);
if( zExtra ){
- *pData->pzErrMsg = sqlite3MAppendf(db, *pData->pzErrMsg,
+ *pData->pzErrMsg = sqlite3MAppendf(db, *pData->pzErrMsg,
"%s - %s", *pData->pzErrMsg, zExtra);
}
}
/*
** The master database table has a structure like this
*/
- static const char master_schema[] =
+ static const char master_schema[] =
"CREATE TABLE sqlite_master(\n"
" type text,\n"
" name text,\n"
")"
;
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TEMPDB
- static const char temp_master_schema[] =
+ static const char temp_master_schema[] =
"CREATE TEMP TABLE sqlite_temp_master(\n"
" type text,\n"
" name text,\n"
}
/* If there is not already a read-only (or read-write) transaction opened
- ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it
+ ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it
** will be closed before this function returns. */
sqlite3BtreeEnter(pDb->pBt);
if( !sqlite3BtreeIsInReadTrans(pDb->pBt) ){
assert( db->init.busy );
{
char *zSql;
- zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
+ zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
"SELECT name, rootpage, sql FROM '%q'.%s ORDER BY rowid",
db->aDb[iDb].zName, zMasterName);
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK || (db->flags&SQLITE_RecoveryMode)){
/* Black magic: If the SQLITE_RecoveryMode flag is set, then consider
- ** the schema loaded, even if errors occurred. In this situation the
+ ** the schema loaded, even if errors occurred. In this situation the
** current sqlite3_prepare() operation will fail, but the following one
** will attempt to compile the supplied statement against whatever subset
** of the schema was loaded before the error occurred. The primary
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Init(sqlite3 *db, char **pzErrMsg){
int i, rc;
int commit_internal = !(db->flags&SQLITE_InternChanges);
-
+
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
rc = SQLITE_OK;
db->init.busy = 1;
sqlite3CommitInternalChanges(db);
}
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
/*
if( pBt==0 ) continue;
/* If there is not already a read-only (or read-write) transaction opened
- ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it
+ ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it
** will be closed immediately after reading the meta-value. */
if( !sqlite3BtreeIsInReadTrans(pBt) ){
rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pBt, 0);
openedTransaction = 1;
}
- /* Read the schema cookie from the database. If it does not match the
+ /* Read the schema cookie from the database. If it does not match the
** value stored as part of the in-memory schema representation,
** set Parse.rc to SQLITE_SCHEMA. */
sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(pBt, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION, (u32 *)&cookie);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SchemaToIndex(sqlite3 *db, Schema *pSchema){
int i = -1000000;
- /* If pSchema is NULL, then return -1000000. This happens when code in
+ /* If pSchema is NULL, then return -1000000. This happens when code in
** expr.c is trying to resolve a reference to a transient table (i.e. one
- ** created by a sub-select). In this case the return value of this
+ ** created by a sub-select). In this case the return value of this
** function should never be used.
**
** We return -1000000 instead of the more usual -1 simply because using
- ** -1000000 as the incorrect index into db->aDb[] is much
+ ** -1000000 as the incorrect index into db->aDb[] is much
** more likely to cause a segfault than -1 (of course there are assert()
** statements too, but it never hurts to play the odds).
*/
** This thread is currently holding mutexes on all Btrees (because
** of the sqlite3BtreeEnterAll() in sqlite3LockAndPrepare()) so it
** is not possible for another thread to start a new schema change
- ** while this routine is running. Hence, we do not need to hold
- ** locks on the schema, we just need to make sure nobody else is
+ ** while this routine is running. Hence, we do not need to hold
+ ** locks on the schema, we just need to make sure nobody else is
** holding them.
**
** Note that setting READ_UNCOMMITTED overrides most lock detection,
** Compile the UTF-16 encoded SQL statement zSql into a statement handle.
*/
static int sqlite3Prepare16(
- sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */
+ sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */
const void *zSql, /* UTF-8 encoded SQL statement. */
int nBytes, /* Length of zSql in bytes. */
int saveSqlFlag, /* True to save SQL text into the sqlite3_stmt */
int chars_parsed = sqlite3Utf8CharLen(zSql8, (int)(zTail8-zSql8));
*pzTail = (u8 *)zSql + sqlite3Utf16ByteLen(zSql, chars_parsed);
}
- sqlite3DbFree(db, zSql8);
+ sqlite3DbFree(db, zSql8);
rc = sqlite3ApiExit(db, rc);
sqlite3_mutex_leave(db->mutex);
return rc;
** occurs.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare16(
- sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */
+ sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */
const void *zSql, /* UTF-8 encoded SQL statement. */
int nBytes, /* Length of zSql in bytes. */
sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt, /* OUT: A pointer to the prepared statement */
return rc;
}
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare16_v2(
- sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */
+ sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */
const void *zSql, /* UTF-8 encoded SQL statement. */
int nBytes, /* Length of zSql in bytes. */
sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt, /* OUT: A pointer to the prepared statement */
for(i=0; i<3 && apAll[i]; i++){
p = apAll[i];
for(j=0; j<ArraySize(aKeyword); j++){
- if( p->n==aKeyword[j].nChar
+ if( p->n==aKeyword[j].nChar
&& sqlite3StrNICmp((char*)p->z, &zKeyText[aKeyword[j].i], p->n)==0 ){
jointype |= aKeyword[j].code;
break;
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "unknown or unsupported join type: "
"%T %T%s%T", pA, pB, zSp, pC);
jointype = JT_INNER;
- }else if( (jointype & JT_OUTER)!=0
+ }else if( (jointype & JT_OUTER)!=0
&& (jointype & (JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT))!=JT_LEFT ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"RIGHT and FULL OUTER JOINs are not currently supported");
jointype = JT_INNER;
}
/*
** Search the first N tables in pSrc, from left to right, looking for a
-** table that has a column named zCol.
+** table that has a column named zCol.
**
** When found, set *piTab and *piCol to the table index and column index
** of the matching column and return TRUE.
**
** (tab1.col1 = tab2.col2)
**
-** where tab1 is the iSrc'th table in SrcList pSrc and tab2 is the
+** where tab1 is the iSrc'th table in SrcList pSrc and tab2 is the
** (iSrc+1)'th. Column col1 is column iColLeft of tab1, and col2 is
** column iColRight of tab2.
*/
p->iRightJoinTable = (i16)iTable;
setJoinExpr(p->pLeft, iTable);
p = p->pRight;
- }
+ }
}
/*
}
/* Create extra terms on the WHERE clause for each column named
- ** in the USING clause. Example: If the two tables to be joined are
+ ** in the USING clause. Example: If the two tables to be joined are
** A and B and the USING clause names X, Y, and Z, then add this
** to the WHERE clause: A.X=B.X AND A.Y=B.Y AND A.Z=B.Z
** Report an error if any column mentioned in the USING clause is
pDest->iMem = pParse->nMem+1;
pDest->nMem = nResultCol;
pParse->nMem += nResultCol;
- }else{
+ }else{
assert( pDest->nMem==nResultCol );
}
regResult = pDest->iMem;
#endif
default: {
int i;
- assert( eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
+ assert( eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
testcase( eDest==SRT_Output );
testcase( eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
for(i=0; i<nColumn; i++){
** original CREATE TABLE statement if the expression is a column. The
** declaration type for a ROWID field is INTEGER. Exactly when an expression
** is considered a column can be complex in the presence of subqueries. The
-** result-set expression in all of the following SELECT statements is
+** result-set expression in all of the following SELECT statements is
** considered a column by this function.
**
** SELECT col FROM tbl;
** SELECT (SELECT col FROM tbl;
** SELECT (SELECT col FROM tbl);
** SELECT abc FROM (SELECT col AS abc FROM tbl);
-**
+**
** The declaration type for any expression other than a column is NULL.
*/
static const char *columnType(
- NameContext *pNC,
+ NameContext *pNC,
Expr *pExpr,
const char **pzOriginDb,
const char **pzOriginTab,
if( pTab==0 ){
/* At one time, code such as "SELECT new.x" within a trigger would
** cause this condition to run. Since then, we have restructured how
- ** trigger code is generated and so this condition is no longer
+ ** trigger code is generated and so this condition is no longer
** possible. However, it can still be true for statements like
** the following:
**
** CREATE TABLE t1(col INTEGER);
** SELECT (SELECT t1.col) FROM FROM t1;
**
- ** when columnType() is called on the expression "t1.col" in the
+ ** when columnType() is called on the expression "t1.col" in the
** sub-select. In this case, set the column type to NULL, even
** though it should really be "INTEGER".
**
** This is not a problem, as the column type of "t1.col" is never
- ** used. When columnType() is called on the expression
+ ** used. When columnType() is called on the expression
** "(SELECT t1.col)", the correct type is returned (see the TK_SELECT
** branch below. */
break;
*/
if( iCol>=0 && ALWAYS(iCol<pS->pEList->nExpr) ){
/* If iCol is less than zero, then the expression requests the
- ** rowid of the sub-select or view. This expression is legal (see
+ ** rowid of the sub-select or view. This expression is legal (see
** test case misc2.2.2) - it always evaluates to NULL.
*/
NameContext sNC;
sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc;
sNC.pNext = pNC;
sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse;
- zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOriginDb, &zOriginTab, &zOriginCol);
+ zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOriginDb, &zOriginTab, &zOriginCol);
}
}else if( ALWAYS(pTab->pSchema) ){
/* A real table */
sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc;
sNC.pNext = pNC;
sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse;
- zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOriginDb, &zOriginTab, &zOriginCol);
+ zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOriginDb, &zOriginTab, &zOriginCol);
break;
}
#endif
}
-
+
if( pzOriginDb ){
assert( pzOriginTab && pzOriginCol );
*pzOriginDb = zOriginDb;
const char *zOrigCol = 0;
zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol);
- /* The vdbe must make its own copy of the column-type and other
+ /* The vdbe must make its own copy of the column-type and other
** column specific strings, in case the schema is reset before this
** virtual machine is deleted.
*/
zCol = pTab->aCol[iCol].zName;
}
if( !shortNames && !fullNames ){
- sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, i, COLNAME_NAME,
+ sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, i, COLNAME_NAME,
sqlite3DbStrDup(db, pEList->a[i].zSpan), SQLITE_DYNAMIC);
}else if( fullNames ){
char *zName = 0;
sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, i, COLNAME_NAME, zCol, SQLITE_TRANSIENT);
}
}else{
- sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, i, COLNAME_NAME,
+ sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, i, COLNAME_NAME,
sqlite3DbStrDup(db, pEList->a[i].zSpan), SQLITE_DYNAMIC);
}
}
/*
** Add type and collation information to a column list based on
** a SELECT statement.
-**
+**
** The column list presumably came from selectColumnNamesFromExprList().
** The column list has only names, not types or collations. This
** routine goes through and adds the types and collations.
** Compute the iLimit and iOffset fields of the SELECT based on the
** pLimit and pOffset expressions. pLimit and pOffset hold the expressions
** that appear in the original SQL statement after the LIMIT and OFFSET
-** keywords. Or NULL if those keywords are omitted. iLimit and iOffset
-** are the integer memory register numbers for counters used to compute
-** the limit and offset. If there is no limit and/or offset, then
+** keywords. Or NULL if those keywords are omitted. iLimit and iOffset
+** are the integer memory register numbers for counters used to compute
+** the limit and offset. If there is no limit and/or offset, then
** iLimit and iOffset are negative.
**
** This routine changes the values of iLimit and iOffset only if
int addr1, n;
if( p->iLimit ) return;
- /*
+ /*
** "LIMIT -1" always shows all rows. There is some
** contraversy about what the correct behavior should be.
** The current implementation interprets "LIMIT 0" to mean
**
** "p" points to the right-most of the two queries. the query on the
** left is p->pPrior. The left query could also be a compound query
-** in which case this routine will be called recursively.
+** in which case this routine will be called recursively.
**
** The results of the total query are to be written into a destination
** of type eDest with parameter iParm.
}
}
- /* Compute collating sequences used by
+ /* Compute collating sequences used by
** temporary tables needed to implement the compound select.
** Attach the KeyInfo structure to all temporary tables.
**
addr = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
iContinue = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
- /* Suppress duplicates for UNION, EXCEPT, and INTERSECT
+ /* Suppress duplicates for UNION, EXCEPT, and INTERSECT
*/
if( regPrev ){
int j1, j2;
case SRT_Set: {
int r1;
assert( pIn->nMem==1 );
- p->affinity =
+ p->affinity =
sqlite3CompareAffinity(p->pEList->a[0].pExpr, pDest->affinity);
r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, pIn->iMem, 1, r1, &p->affinity, 1);
** SRT_Output. This routine is never called with any other
** destination other than the ones handled above or SRT_Output.
**
- ** For SRT_Output, results are stored in a sequence of registers.
+ ** For SRT_Output, results are stored in a sequence of registers.
** Then the OP_ResultRow opcode is used to cause sqlite3_step() to
** return the next row of result.
*/
**
** EofB: Called when data is exhausted from selectB.
**
-** The implementation of the latter five subroutines depend on which
+** The implementation of the latter five subroutines depend on which
** <operator> is used:
**
**
/* Patch up the ORDER BY clause
*/
- op = p->op;
+ op = p->op;
pPrior = p->pPrior;
assert( pPrior->pOrderBy==0 );
pOrderBy = p->pOrderBy;
}
}
}
-
+
/* Separate the left and the right query from one another
*/
p->pPrior = 0;
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Yield, regAddrA);
VdbeNoopComment((v, "End coroutine for left SELECT"));
- /* Generate a coroutine to evaluate the SELECT statement on
+ /* Generate a coroutine to evaluate the SELECT statement on
** the right - the "B" select
*/
addrSelectB = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
savedLimit = p->iLimit;
savedOffset = p->iOffset;
p->iLimit = regLimitB;
- p->iOffset = 0;
+ p->iOffset = 0;
sqlite3Select(pParse, p, &destB);
p->iLimit = savedLimit;
p->iOffset = savedOffset;
addrOutA = generateOutputSubroutine(pParse,
p, &destA, pDest, regOutA,
regPrev, pKeyDup, P4_KEYINFO_HANDOFF, labelEnd);
-
+
/* Generate a subroutine that outputs the current row of the B
** select as the next output row of the compound select.
*/
VdbeNoopComment((v, "eof-A subroutine"));
if( op==TK_EXCEPT || op==TK_INTERSECT ){
addrEofA = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Goto, 0, labelEnd);
- }else{
+ }else{
addrEofA = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_If, regEofB, labelEnd);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regOutB, addrOutB);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Yield, regAddrB);
*/
if( op==TK_INTERSECT ){
addrEofB = addrEofA;
- }else{
+ }else{
VdbeNoopComment((v, "eof-B subroutine"));
addrEofB = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_If, regEofA, labelEnd);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regOutA, addrOutA);
/*
** Scan through the expression pExpr. Replace every reference to
** a column in table number iTable with a copy of the iColumn-th
-** entry in pEList. (But leave references to the ROWID column
+** entry in pEList. (But leave references to the ROWID column
** unchanged.)
**
** This routine is part of the flattening procedure. A subquery
** whose result set is defined by pEList appears as entry in the
** FROM clause of a SELECT such that the VDBE cursor assigned to that
-** FORM clause entry is iTable. This routine make the necessary
+** FORM clause entry is iTable. This routine make the necessary
** changes to pExpr so that it refers directly to the source table
** of the subquery rather the result set of the subquery.
*/
** SELECT x+y AS a FROM t1 WHERE z<100 AND a>5
**
** The code generated for this simpification gives the same result
-** but only has to scan the data once. And because indices might
+** but only has to scan the data once. And because indices might
** exist on the table t1, a complete scan of the data might be
** avoided.
**
**
** (16) The outer query is not an aggregate or the subquery does
** not contain ORDER BY. (Ticket #2942) This used to not matter
-** until we introduced the group_concat() function.
+** until we introduced the group_concat() function.
**
-** (17) The sub-query is not a compound select, or it is a UNION ALL
-** compound clause made up entirely of non-aggregate queries, and
+** (17) The sub-query is not a compound select, or it is a UNION ALL
+** compound clause made up entirely of non-aggregate queries, and
** the parent query:
**
** * is not itself part of a compound select,
** LIMIT and OFFSET clauses.
**
** (18) If the sub-query is a compound select, then all terms of the
-** ORDER by clause of the parent must be simple references to
+** ORDER by clause of the parent must be simple references to
** columns of the sub-query.
**
** (19) The subquery does not use LIMIT or the outer query does not
return 0; /* Restriction (15) */
}
if( pSubSrc->nSrc==0 ) return 0; /* Restriction (7) */
- if( ((pSub->selFlags & SF_Distinct)!=0 || pSub->pLimit)
+ if( ((pSub->selFlags & SF_Distinct)!=0 || pSub->pLimit)
&& (pSrc->nSrc>1 || isAgg) ){ /* Restrictions (4)(5)(8)(9) */
- return 0;
+ return 0;
}
if( (p->selFlags & SF_Distinct)!=0 && subqueryIsAgg ){
return 0; /* Restriction (6) */
if( pSub->pLimit && p->pWhere ) return 0; /* Restriction (19) */
/* OBSOLETE COMMENT 1:
- ** Restriction 3: If the subquery is a join, make sure the subquery is
+ ** Restriction 3: If the subquery is a join, make sure the subquery is
** not used as the right operand of an outer join. Examples of why this
** is not allowed:
**
testcase( (pSub1->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))==SF_Distinct );
testcase( (pSub1->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))==SF_Aggregate );
if( (pSub1->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))!=0
- || (pSub1->pPrior && pSub1->op!=TK_ALL)
+ || (pSub1->pPrior && pSub1->op!=TK_ALL)
|| NEVER(pSub1->pSrc==0) || pSub1->pSrc->nSrc!=1
){
return 0;
pParse->zAuthContext = zSavedAuthContext;
/* If the sub-query is a compound SELECT statement, then (by restrictions
- ** 17 and 18 above) it must be a UNION ALL and the parent query must
+ ** 17 and 18 above) it must be a UNION ALL and the parent query must
** be of the form:
**
- ** SELECT <expr-list> FROM (<sub-query>) <where-clause>
+ ** SELECT <expr-list> FROM (<sub-query>) <where-clause>
**
** followed by any ORDER BY, LIMIT and/or OFFSET clauses. This block
- ** creates N-1 copies of the parent query without any ORDER BY, LIMIT or
+ ** creates N-1 copies of the parent query without any ORDER BY, LIMIT or
** OFFSET clauses and joins them to the left-hand-side of the original
** using UNION ALL operators. In this case N is the number of simple
** select statements in the compound sub-query.
if( db->mallocFailed ) return 1;
}
- /* Begin flattening the iFrom-th entry of the FROM clause
+ /* Begin flattening the iFrom-th entry of the FROM clause
** in the outer query.
*/
pSub = pSub1 = pSubitem->pSelect;
memset(&pSubSrc->a[i], 0, sizeof(pSubSrc->a[i]));
}
pSrc->a[iFrom].jointype = jointype;
-
- /* Now begin substituting subquery result set expressions for
+
+ /* Now begin substituting subquery result set expressions for
** references to the iParent in the outer query.
- **
+ **
** Example:
**
** SELECT a+5, b*10 FROM (SELECT x*3 AS a, y+10 AS b FROM t1) WHERE a>b;
pParent->pHaving = pParent->pWhere;
pParent->pWhere = pWhere;
pParent->pHaving = substExpr(db, pParent->pHaving, iParent, pSub->pEList);
- pParent->pHaving = sqlite3ExprAnd(db, pParent->pHaving,
+ pParent->pHaving = sqlite3ExprAnd(db, pParent->pHaving,
sqlite3ExprDup(db, pSub->pHaving, 0));
assert( pParent->pGroupBy==0 );
pParent->pGroupBy = sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pSub->pGroupBy, 0);
pParent->pWhere = substExpr(db, pParent->pWhere, iParent, pSub->pEList);
pParent->pWhere = sqlite3ExprAnd(db, pParent->pWhere, pWhere);
}
-
+
/* The flattened query is distinct if either the inner or the
- ** outer query is distinct.
+ ** outer query is distinct.
*/
pParent->selFlags |= pSub->selFlags & SF_Distinct;
-
+
/*
** SELECT ... FROM (SELECT ... LIMIT a OFFSET b) LIMIT x OFFSET y;
**
/*
** Analyze the SELECT statement passed as an argument to see if it
-** is a min() or max() query. Return WHERE_ORDERBY_MIN or WHERE_ORDERBY_MAX if
+** is a min() or max() query. Return WHERE_ORDERBY_MIN or WHERE_ORDERBY_MAX if
** it is, or 0 otherwise. At present, a query is considered to be
** a min()/max() query if:
**
/*
** The select statement passed as the first argument is an aggregate query.
-** The second argment is the associated aggregate-info object. This
+** The second argment is the associated aggregate-info object. This
** function tests if the SELECT is of the form:
**
** SELECT count(*) FROM <tbl>
assert( !p->pGroupBy );
- if( p->pWhere || p->pEList->nExpr!=1
+ if( p->pWhere || p->pEList->nExpr!=1
|| p->pSrc->nSrc!=1 || p->pSrc->a[0].pSelect
){
return 0;
/*
** If the source-list item passed as an argument was augmented with an
** INDEXED BY clause, then try to locate the specified index. If there
-** was such a clause and the named index cannot be found, return
-** SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error in pParse. Otherwise, populate
+** was such a clause and the named index cannot be found, return
+** SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error in pParse. Otherwise, populate
** pFrom->pIndex and return SQLITE_OK.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, struct SrcList_item *pFrom){
Table *pTab = pFrom->pTab;
char *zIndex = pFrom->zIndex;
Index *pIdx;
- for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex;
- pIdx && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->zName, zIndex);
+ for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex;
+ pIdx && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->zName, zIndex);
pIdx=pIdx->pNext
);
if( !pIdx ){
** (1) Make sure VDBE cursor numbers have been assigned to every
** element of the FROM clause.
**
-** (2) Fill in the pTabList->a[].pTab fields in the SrcList that
+** (2) Fill in the pTabList->a[].pTab fields in the SrcList that
** defines FROM clause. When views appear in the FROM clause,
** fill pTabList->a[].pSelect with a copy of the SELECT statement
** that implements the view. A copy is made of the view's SELECT
}else{
/* An ordinary table or view name in the FROM clause */
assert( pFrom->pTab==0 );
- pFrom->pTab = pTab =
+ pFrom->pTab = pTab =
sqlite3LocateTable(pParse,0,pFrom->zName,pFrom->zDatabase);
if( pTab==0 ) return WRC_Abort;
pTab->nRef++;
if( (pFrom->jointype & JT_NATURAL)!=0
&& tableAndColumnIndex(pTabList, i, zName, 0, 0)
){
- /* In a NATURAL join, omit the join columns from the
+ /* In a NATURAL join, omit the join columns from the
** table to the right of the join */
continue;
}
**
** When this routine is the Walker.xExprCallback then expression trees
** are walked without any actions being taken at each node. Presumably,
-** when this routine is used for Walker.xExprCallback then
-** Walker.xSelectCallback is set to do something useful for every
+** when this routine is used for Walker.xExprCallback then
+** Walker.xSelectCallback is set to do something useful for every
** subquery in the parser tree.
*/
static int exprWalkNoop(Walker *NotUsed, Expr *NotUsed2){
}
/*
-** Generate code for the SELECT statement given in the p argument.
+** Generate code for the SELECT statement given in the p argument.
**
** The results are distributed in various ways depending on the
** contents of the SelectDest structure pointed to by argument pDest
** of the query. This destination implies "LIMIT 1".
**
** SRT_Set The result must be a single column. Store each
-** row of result as the key in table pDest->iParm.
+** row of result as the key in table pDest->iParm.
** Apply the affinity pDest->affinity before storing
** results. Used to implement "IN (SELECT ...)".
**
memset(&sAggInfo, 0, sizeof(sAggInfo));
if( IgnorableOrderby(pDest) ){
- assert(pDest->eDest==SRT_Exists || pDest->eDest==SRT_Union ||
+ assert(pDest->eDest==SRT_Exists || pDest->eDest==SRT_Union ||
pDest->eDest==SRT_Except || pDest->eDest==SRT_Discard);
/* If ORDER BY makes no difference in the output then neither does
** DISTINCT so it can be removed too. */
}
/* If there is an ORDER BY clause, then this sorting
- ** index might end up being unused if the data can be
+ ** index might end up being unused if the data can be
** extracted in pre-sorted order. If that is the case, then the
** OP_OpenEphemeral instruction will be changed to an OP_Noop once
** we figure out that the sorting index is not needed. The addrSortIndex
pWInfo = sqlite3WhereBegin(pParse, pTabList, pWhere, &pOrderBy, 0);
if( pWInfo==0 ) goto select_end;
- /* If sorting index that was created by a prior OP_OpenEphemeral
+ /* If sorting index that was created by a prior OP_OpenEphemeral
** instruction ended up not being needed, then change the OP_OpenEphemeral
** into an OP_Noop.
*/
}
}
-
+
/* Create a label to jump to when we want to abort the query */
addrEnd = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
/* If there is a GROUP BY clause we might need a sorting index to
** implement it. Allocate that sorting index now. If it turns out
** that we do not need it after all, the OpenEphemeral instruction
- ** will be converted into a Noop.
+ ** will be converted into a Noop.
*/
sAggInfo.sortingIdx = pParse->nTab++;
pKeyInfo = keyInfoFromExprList(pParse, pGroupBy);
- addrSortingIdx = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenEphemeral,
- sAggInfo.sortingIdx, sAggInfo.nSortingColumn,
+ addrSortingIdx = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenEphemeral,
+ sAggInfo.sortingIdx, sAggInfo.nSortingColumn,
0, (char*)pKeyInfo, P4_KEYINFO_HANDOFF);
/* Initialize memory locations used by GROUP BY aggregate processing
int r1 = j + regBase;
int r2;
- r2 = sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumn(pParse,
+ r2 = sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumn(pParse,
pCol->pTab, pCol->iColumn, pCol->iTable, r1);
if( r1!=r2 ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, r2, r1);
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrReset);
resetAccumulator(pParse, &sAggInfo);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Return, regReset);
-
+
} /* endif pGroupBy. Begin aggregate queries without GROUP BY: */
else {
ExprList *pDel = 0;
** and pKeyInfo to the KeyInfo structure required to navigate the
** index.
**
- ** In practice the KeyInfo structure will not be used. It is only
+ ** In practice the KeyInfo structure will not be used. It is only
** passed to keep OP_OpenRead happy.
*/
for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext){
** SELECT max(x) FROM ...
**
** If it is, then ask the code in where.c to attempt to sort results
- ** as if there was an "ORDER ON x" or "ORDER ON x DESC" clause.
+ ** as if there was an "ORDER ON x" or "ORDER ON x DESC" clause.
** If where.c is able to produce results sorted in this order, then
- ** add vdbe code to break out of the processing loop after the
- ** first iteration (since the first iteration of the loop is
- ** guaranteed to operate on the row with the minimum or maximum
+ ** add vdbe code to break out of the processing loop after the
+ ** first iteration (since the first iteration of the loop is
+ ** guaranteed to operate on the row with the minimum or maximum
** value of x, the only row required).
**
** A special flag must be passed to sqlite3WhereBegin() to slightly
** for x.
**
** + The optimizer code in where.c (the thing that decides which
- ** index or indices to use) should place a different priority on
+ ** index or indices to use) should place a different priority on
** satisfying the 'ORDER BY' clause than it does in other cases.
** Refer to code and comments in where.c for details.
*/
pMinMax->a[0].pExpr->op = TK_COLUMN;
}
}
-
+
/* This case runs if the aggregate has no GROUP BY clause. The
** processing is much simpler since there is only a single row
** of output.
pOrderBy = 0;
sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pHaving, addrEnd, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
- selectInnerLoop(pParse, p, p->pEList, 0, 0, 0, -1,
+ selectInnerLoop(pParse, p, p->pEList, 0, 0, 0, -1,
pDest, addrEnd, addrEnd);
sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pDel);
}
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrEnd);
-
+
} /* endif aggregate query */
/* If there is an ORDER BY clause, then we need to sort the results
** The following code is used for testing and debugging only. The code
** that follows does not appear in normal builds.
**
-** These routines are used to print out the content of all or part of a
+** These routines are used to print out the content of all or part of a
** parse structures such as Select or Expr. Such printouts are useful
** for helping to understand what is happening inside the code generator
** during the execution of complex SELECT statements.
** at the conclusion of the call.
**
** The result that is written to ***pazResult is held in memory obtained
-** from malloc(). But the caller cannot free this memory directly.
+** from malloc(). But the caller cannot free this memory directly.
** Instead, the entire table should be passed to sqlite3_free_table() when
** the calling procedure is finished using it.
*/
}
/*
-** Given table pTab, return a list of all the triggers attached to
+** Given table pTab, return a list of all the triggers attached to
** the table. The list is connected by Trigger.pNext pointers.
**
** All of the triggers on pTab that are in the same database as pTab
for(p=sqliteHashFirst(&pTmpSchema->trigHash); p; p=sqliteHashNext(p)){
Trigger *pTrig = (Trigger *)sqliteHashData(p);
if( pTrig->pTabSchema==pTab->pSchema
- && 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pTrig->table, pTab->zName)
+ && 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pTrig->table, pTab->zName)
){
pTrig->pNext = (pList ? pList : pTab->pTrigger);
pList = pTrig;
/* Ensure the table name matches database name and that the table exists */
if( db->mallocFailed ) goto trigger_cleanup;
assert( pTableName->nSrc==1 );
- if( sqlite3FixInit(&sFix, pParse, iDb, "trigger", pName) &&
+ if( sqlite3FixInit(&sFix, pParse, iDb, "trigger", pName) &&
sqlite3FixSrcList(&sFix, pTableName) ){
goto trigger_cleanup;
}
** of triggers.
*/
if( pTab->pSelect && tr_tm!=TK_INSTEAD ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot create %s trigger on view: %S",
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot create %s trigger on view: %S",
(tr_tm == TK_BEFORE)?"BEFORE":"AFTER", pTableName, 0);
goto trigger_cleanup;
}
}
nameToken.z = pTrig->zName;
nameToken.n = sqlite3Strlen30(nameToken.z);
- if( sqlite3FixInit(&sFix, pParse, iDb, "trigger", &nameToken)
+ if( sqlite3FixInit(&sFix, pParse, iDb, "trigger", &nameToken)
&& sqlite3FixTriggerStep(&sFix, pTrig->step_list) ){
goto triggerfinish_cleanup;
}
** a trigger step. Return a pointer to a TriggerStep structure.
**
** The parser calls this routine when it finds a SELECT statement in
-** body of a TRIGGER.
+** body of a TRIGGER.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE TriggerStep *sqlite3TriggerSelectStep(sqlite3 *db, Select *pSelect){
TriggerStep *pTriggerStep = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, sizeof(TriggerStep));
return pTriggerStep;
}
-/*
+/*
** Recursively delete a Trigger structure
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteTrigger(sqlite3 *db, Trigger *pTrigger){
}
/*
-** This function is called to drop a trigger from the database schema.
+** This function is called to drop a trigger from the database schema.
**
** This may be called directly from the parser and therefore identifies
** the trigger by name. The sqlite3DropTriggerPtr() routine does the
/*
-** Drop a trigger given a pointer to that trigger.
+** Drop a trigger given a pointer to that trigger.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DropTriggerPtr(Parse *pParse, Trigger *pTrigger){
Table *pTable;
for(e=0; e<pEList->nExpr; e++){
if( sqlite3IdListIndex(pIdList, pEList->a[e].zName)>=0 ) return 1;
}
- return 0;
+ return 0;
}
/*
** Return a list of all triggers on table pTab if there exists at least
-** one trigger that must be fired when an operation of type 'op' is
+** one trigger that must be fired when an operation of type 'op' is
** performed on the table, and, if that operation is an UPDATE, if at
** least one of the columns in pChanges is being modified.
*/
}
/*
-** Generate VDBE code for the statements inside the body of a single
+** Generate VDBE code for the statements inside the body of a single
** trigger.
*/
static int codeTriggerProgram(
Parse *pParse, /* The parser context */
TriggerStep *pStepList, /* List of statements inside the trigger body */
- int orconf /* Conflict algorithm. (OE_Abort, etc) */
+ int orconf /* Conflict algorithm. (OE_Abort, etc) */
){
TriggerStep *pStep;
Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe;
switch( pStep->op ){
case TK_UPDATE: {
- sqlite3Update(pParse,
+ sqlite3Update(pParse,
targetSrcList(pParse, pStep),
- sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pStep->pExprList, 0),
- sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStep->pWhere, 0),
+ sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pStep->pExprList, 0),
+ sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStep->pWhere, 0),
pParse->eOrconf
);
break;
}
case TK_INSERT: {
- sqlite3Insert(pParse,
+ sqlite3Insert(pParse,
targetSrcList(pParse, pStep),
- sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pStep->pExprList, 0),
- sqlite3SelectDup(db, pStep->pSelect, 0),
- sqlite3IdListDup(db, pStep->pIdList),
+ sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pStep->pExprList, 0),
+ sqlite3SelectDup(db, pStep->pSelect, 0),
+ sqlite3IdListDup(db, pStep->pIdList),
pParse->eOrconf
);
break;
}
case TK_DELETE: {
- sqlite3DeleteFrom(pParse,
+ sqlite3DeleteFrom(pParse,
targetSrcList(pParse, pStep),
sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStep->pWhere, 0)
);
sqlite3SelectDelete(db, pSelect);
break;
}
- }
+ }
if( pStep->op!=TK_SELECT ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_ResetCount);
}
}
/*
-** Create and populate a new TriggerPrg object with a sub-program
+** Create and populate a new TriggerPrg object with a sub-program
** implementing trigger pTrigger with ON CONFLICT policy orconf.
*/
static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger(
assert( pTrigger->zName==0 || pTab==tableOfTrigger(pTrigger) );
/* Allocate the TriggerPrg and SubProgram objects. To ensure that they
- ** are freed if an error occurs, link them into the Parse.pTriggerPrg
+ ** are freed if an error occurs, link them into the Parse.pTriggerPrg
** list of the top-level Parse object sooner rather than later. */
pPrg = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, sizeof(TriggerPrg));
if( !pPrg ) return 0;
pPrg->aColmask[0] = 0xffffffff;
pPrg->aColmask[1] = 0xffffffff;
- /* Allocate and populate a new Parse context to use for coding the
+ /* Allocate and populate a new Parse context to use for coding the
** trigger sub-program. */
pSubParse = sqlite3StackAllocZero(db, sizeof(Parse));
if( !pSubParse ) return 0;
v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pSubParse);
if( v ){
- VdbeComment((v, "Start: %s.%s (%s %s%s%s ON %s)",
+ VdbeComment((v, "Start: %s.%s (%s %s%s%s ON %s)",
pTrigger->zName, onErrorText(orconf),
(pTrigger->tr_tm==TRIGGER_BEFORE ? "BEFORE" : "AFTER"),
(pTrigger->op==TK_UPDATE ? "UPDATE" : ""),
pTab->zName
));
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE
- sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1,
+ sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1,
sqlite3MPrintf(db, "-- TRIGGER %s", pTrigger->zName), P4_DYNAMIC
);
#endif
/* If one was specified, code the WHEN clause. If it evaluates to false
- ** (or NULL) the sub-vdbe is immediately halted by jumping to the
+ ** (or NULL) the sub-vdbe is immediately halted by jumping to the
** OP_Halt inserted at the end of the program. */
if( pTrigger->pWhen ){
pWhen = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pTrigger->pWhen, 0);
- if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3ResolveExprNames(&sNC, pWhen)
- && db->mallocFailed==0
+ if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3ResolveExprNames(&sNC, pWhen)
+ && db->mallocFailed==0
){
iEndTrigger = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pSubParse, pWhen, iEndTrigger, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
return pPrg;
}
-
+
/*
** Return a pointer to a TriggerPrg object containing the sub-program for
** trigger pTrigger with default ON CONFLICT algorithm orconf. If no such
** process of being coded). If this is the case, then an entry with
** a matching TriggerPrg.pTrigger field will be present somewhere
** in the Parse.pTriggerPrg list. Search for such an entry. */
- for(pPrg=pRoot->pTriggerPrg;
- pPrg && (pPrg->pTrigger!=pTrigger || pPrg->orconf!=orconf);
+ for(pPrg=pRoot->pTriggerPrg;
+ pPrg && (pPrg->pTrigger!=pTrigger || pPrg->orconf!=orconf);
pPrg=pPrg->pNext
);
}
/*
-** Generate code for the trigger program associated with trigger p on
+** Generate code for the trigger program associated with trigger p on
** table pTab. The reg, orconf and ignoreJump parameters passed to this
** function are the same as those described in the header function for
** sqlite3CodeRowTrigger()
pPrg = getRowTrigger(pParse, p, pTab, orconf);
assert( pPrg || pParse->nErr || pParse->db->mallocFailed );
- /* Code the OP_Program opcode in the parent VDBE. P4 of the OP_Program
+ /* Code the OP_Program opcode in the parent VDBE. P4 of the OP_Program
** is a pointer to the sub-vdbe containing the trigger program. */
if( pPrg ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Program, reg, ignoreJump, ++pParse->nMem);
** If there are no triggers that fire at the specified time for the specified
** operation on pTab, this function is a no-op.
**
-** The reg argument is the address of the first in an array of registers
+** The reg argument is the address of the first in an array of registers
** that contain the values substituted for the new.* and old.* references
** in the trigger program. If N is the number of columns in table pTab
** (a copy of pTab->nCol), then registers are populated as follows:
** reg+N+N+1 NEW.* value of right-most column of pTab
**
** For ON DELETE triggers, the registers containing the NEW.* values will
-** never be accessed by the trigger program, so they are not allocated or
-** populated by the caller (there is no data to populate them with anyway).
+** never be accessed by the trigger program, so they are not allocated or
+** populated by the caller (there is no data to populate them with anyway).
** Similarly, for ON INSERT triggers the values stored in the OLD.* registers
** are never accessed, and so are not allocated by the caller. So, for an
** ON INSERT trigger, the value passed to this function as parameter reg
-** is not a readable register, although registers (reg+N) through
+** is not a readable register, although registers (reg+N) through
** (reg+N+N+1) are.
**
** Parameter orconf is the default conflict resolution algorithm for the
** or else it must be a TEMP trigger. */
assert( p->pSchema!=0 );
assert( p->pTabSchema!=0 );
- assert( p->pSchema==p->pTabSchema
+ assert( p->pSchema==p->pTabSchema
|| p->pSchema==pParse->db->aDb[1].pSchema );
/* Determine whether we should code this trigger */
- if( p->op==op
- && p->tr_tm==tr_tm
+ if( p->op==op
+ && p->tr_tm==tr_tm
&& checkColumnOverlap(p->pColumns, pChanges)
){
sqlite3CodeRowTriggerDirect(pParse, p, pTab, reg, orconf, ignoreJump);
}
/*
-** Triggers may access values stored in the old.* or new.* pseudo-table.
-** This function returns a 32-bit bitmask indicating which columns of the
-** old.* or new.* tables actually are used by triggers. This information
+** Triggers may access values stored in the old.* or new.* pseudo-table.
+** This function returns a 32-bit bitmask indicating which columns of the
+** old.* or new.* tables actually are used by triggers. This information
** may be used by the caller, for example, to avoid having to load the entire
** old.* record into memory when executing an UPDATE or DELETE command.
**
** are more than 32 columns in the table, and at least one of the columns
** with an index greater than 32 may be accessed, 0xffffffff is returned.
**
-** It is not possible to determine if the old.rowid or new.rowid column is
+** It is not possible to determine if the old.rowid or new.rowid column is
** accessed by triggers. The caller must always assume that it is.
**
** Parameter isNew must be either 1 or 0. If it is 0, then the mask returned
/*
** The most recently coded instruction was an OP_Column to retrieve the
-** i-th column of table pTab. This routine sets the P4 parameter of the
+** i-th column of table pTab. This routine sets the P4 parameter of the
** OP_Column to the default value, if any.
**
-** The default value of a column is specified by a DEFAULT clause in the
+** The default value of a column is specified by a DEFAULT clause in the
** column definition. This was either supplied by the user when the table
** was created, or added later to the table definition by an ALTER TABLE
** command. If the latter, then the row-records in the table btree on disk
** If the former, then all row-records are guaranteed to include a value
** for the column and the P4 value is not required.
**
-** Column definitions created by an ALTER TABLE command may only have
+** Column definitions created by an ALTER TABLE command may only have
** literal default values specified: a number, null or a string. (If a more
-** complicated default expression value was provided, it is evaluated
+** complicated default expression value was provided, it is evaluated
** when the ALTER TABLE is executed and one of the literal values written
** into the sqlite_master table.)
**
** sqlite3_value objects.
**
** If parameter iReg is not negative, code an OP_RealAffinity instruction
-** on register iReg. This is used when an equivalent integer value is
-** stored in place of an 8-byte floating point value in order to save
+** on register iReg. This is used when an equivalent integer value is
+** stored in place of an 8-byte floating point value in order to save
** space.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ColumnDefault(Vdbe *v, Table *pTab, int i, int iReg){
Column *pCol = &pTab->aCol[i];
VdbeComment((v, "%s.%s", pTab->zName, pCol->zName));
assert( i<pTab->nCol );
- sqlite3ValueFromExpr(sqlite3VdbeDb(v), pCol->pDflt, enc,
+ sqlite3ValueFromExpr(sqlite3VdbeDb(v), pCol->pDflt, enc,
pCol->affinity, &pValue);
if( pValue ){
sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1, (const char *)pValue, P4_MEM);
}
assert( pTabList->nSrc==1 );
- /* Locate the table which we want to update.
+ /* Locate the table which we want to update.
*/
pTab = sqlite3SrcListLookup(pParse, pTabList);
if( pTab==0 ) goto update_cleanup;
}
if( !isView ){
- /*
+ /*
** Open every index that needs updating. Note that if any
- ** index could potentially invoke a REPLACE conflict resolution
+ ** index could potentially invoke a REPLACE conflict resolution
** action, then we need to open all indices because we might need
** to be deleting some records.
*/
- if( !okOnePass ) sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, iCur, iDb, pTab, OP_OpenWrite);
+ if( !okOnePass ) sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, iCur, iDb, pTab, OP_OpenWrite);
if( onError==OE_Replace ){
openAll = 1;
}else{
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_MustBeInt, regNewRowid);
}
- /* If there are triggers on this table, populate an array of registers
+ /* If there are triggers on this table, populate an array of registers
** with the required old.* column data. */
if( hasFK || pTrigger ){
u32 oldmask = (hasFK ? sqlite3FkOldmask(pParse, pTab) : 0);
- oldmask |= sqlite3TriggerColmask(pParse,
+ oldmask |= sqlite3TriggerColmask(pParse,
pTrigger, pChanges, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE|TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, onError
);
for(i=0; i<pTab->nCol; i++){
** If there are one or more BEFORE triggers, then do not populate the
** registers associated with columns that are (a) not modified by
** this UPDATE statement and (b) not accessed by new.* references. The
- ** values for registers not modified by the UPDATE must be reloaded from
- ** the database after the BEFORE triggers are fired anyway (as the trigger
+ ** values for registers not modified by the UPDATE must be reloaded from
+ ** the database after the BEFORE triggers are fired anyway (as the trigger
** may have modified them). So not loading those that are not going to
** be used eliminates some redundant opcodes.
*/
if( j>=0 ){
sqlite3ExprCode(pParse, pChanges->a[j].pExpr, regNew+i);
}else if( 0==(tmask&TRIGGER_BEFORE) || i>31 || (newmask&(1<<i)) ){
- /* This branch loads the value of a column that will not be changed
+ /* This branch loads the value of a column that will not be changed
** into a register. This is done if there are no BEFORE triggers, or
** if there are one or more BEFORE triggers that use this value via
** a new.* reference in a trigger program.
if( tmask&TRIGGER_BEFORE ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Affinity, regNew, pTab->nCol);
sqlite3TableAffinityStr(v, pTab);
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges,
TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, regOldRowid, onError, addr);
/* The row-trigger may have deleted the row being updated. In this
- ** case, jump to the next row. No updates or AFTER triggers are
+ ** case, jump to the next row. No updates or AFTER triggers are
** required. This behaviour - what happens when the row being updated
** is deleted or renamed by a BEFORE trigger - is left undefined in the
** documentation.
*/
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_NotExists, iCur, addr, regOldRowid);
- /* If it did not delete it, the row-trigger may still have modified
- ** some of the columns of the row being updated. Load the values for
- ** all columns not modified by the update statement into their
+ /* If it did not delete it, the row-trigger may still have modified
+ ** some of the columns of the row being updated. Load the values for
+ ** all columns not modified by the update statement into their
** registers in case this has happened.
*/
for(i=0; i<pTab->nCol; i++){
/* Delete the index entries associated with the current record. */
j1 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_NotExists, iCur, 0, regOldRowid);
sqlite3GenerateRowIndexDelete(pParse, pTab, iCur, aRegIdx);
-
+
/* If changing the record number, delete the old record. */
if( hasFK || chngRowid ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Delete, iCur, 0);
if( hasFK ){
sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, 0, regNewRowid);
}
-
+
/* Insert the new index entries and the new record. */
sqlite3CompleteInsertion(pParse, pTab, iCur, regNewRowid, aRegIdx, 1, 0, 0);
/* Do any ON CASCADE, SET NULL or SET DEFAULT operations required to
** handle rows (possibly in other tables) that refer via a foreign key
- ** to the row just updated. */
+ ** to the row just updated. */
if( hasFK ){
sqlite3FkActions(pParse, pTab, pChanges, regOldRowid);
}
}
- /* Increment the row counter
+ /* Increment the row counter
*/
if( (db->flags & SQLITE_CountRows) && !pParse->pTriggerTab){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, regRowCount, 1);
}
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges,
TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, regOldRowid, onError, addr);
/* Repeat the above with the next record to be updated, until
}
/*
- ** Return the number of rows that were changed. If this routine is
+ ** Return the number of rows that were changed. If this routine is
** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not
** invoke the callback function.
*/
SelectDest dest;
/* Construct the SELECT statement that will find the new values for
- ** all updated rows.
+ ** all updated rows.
*/
pEList = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0, sqlite3Expr(db, TK_ID, "_rowid_"));
if( pRowid ){
pEList = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, pEList, pExpr);
}
pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, pEList, pSrc, pWhere, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0);
-
+
/* Create the ephemeral table into which the update results will
** be stored.
*/
ephemTab = pParse->nTab++;
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, ephemTab, pTab->nCol+1+(pRowid!=0));
- /* fill the ephemeral table
+ /* fill the ephemeral table
*/
sqlite3SelectDestInit(&dest, SRT_Table, ephemTab);
sqlite3Select(pParse, pSelect, &dest);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Close, ephemTab, 0);
/* Cleanup */
- sqlite3SelectDelete(db, pSelect);
+ sqlite3SelectDelete(db, pSelect);
}
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
- /* Save the current value of the database flags so that it can be
+ /* Save the current value of the database flags so that it can be
** restored before returning. Then set the writable-schema flag, and
** disable CHECK and foreign key constraints. */
saved_flags = db->flags;
/*
** Lock the virtual table so that it cannot be disconnected.
** Locks nest. Every lock should have a corresponding unlock.
-** If an unlock is omitted, resources leaks will occur.
+** If an unlock is omitted, resources leaks will occur.
**
** If a disconnect is attempted while a virtual table is locked,
** the disconnect is deferred until all locks have been removed.
/*
** pTab is a pointer to a Table structure representing a virtual-table.
-** Return a pointer to the VTable object used by connection db to access
+** Return a pointer to the VTable object used by connection db to access
** this virtual-table, if one has been created, or NULL otherwise.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE VTable *sqlite3GetVTable(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTab){
/*
** Table p is a virtual table. This function moves all elements in the
** p->pVTable list to the sqlite3.pDisconnect lists of their associated
-** database connections to be disconnected at the next opportunity.
+** database connections to be disconnected at the next opportunity.
** Except, if argument db is not NULL, then the entry associated with
** connection db is left in the p->pVTable list.
*/
VTable *pVTable = p->pVTable;
p->pVTable = 0;
- /* Assert that the mutex (if any) associated with the BtShared database
- ** that contains table p is held by the caller. See header comments
+ /* Assert that the mutex (if any) associated with the BtShared database
+ ** that contains table p is held by the caller. See header comments
** above function sqlite3VtabUnlockList() for an explanation of why
** this makes it safe to access the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of any
** database connection that may have an entry in the p->pVTable list. */
assert( db==0 ||
- sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(db->aDb[sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, p->pSchema)].pBt)
+ sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(db->aDb[sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, p->pSchema)].pBt)
);
while( pVTable ){
** Disconnect all the virtual table objects in the sqlite3.pDisconnect list.
**
** This function may only be called when the mutexes associated with all
-** shared b-tree databases opened using connection db are held by the
+** shared b-tree databases opened using connection db are held by the
** caller. This is done to protect the sqlite3.pDisconnect list. The
** sqlite3.pDisconnect list is accessed only as follows:
**
** or, if the virtual table is stored in a non-sharable database, then
** the database handle mutex is held.
**
-** As a result, a sqlite3.pDisconnect cannot be accessed simultaneously
+** As a result, a sqlite3.pDisconnect cannot be accessed simultaneously
** by multiple threads. It is thread-safe.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabUnlockList(sqlite3 *db){
** record.
**
** Since it is a virtual-table, the Table structure contains a pointer
-** to the head of a linked list of VTable structures. Each VTable
+** to the head of a linked list of VTable structures. Each VTable
** structure is associated with a single sqlite3* user of the schema.
-** The reference count of the VTable structure associated with database
-** connection db is decremented immediately (which may lead to the
+** The reference count of the VTable structure associated with database
+** connection db is decremented immediately (which may lead to the
** structure being xDisconnected and free). Any other VTable structures
-** in the list are moved to the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of the associated
+** in the list are moved to the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of the associated
** database connection.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabClear(Table *p){
** The second call, to obtain permission to create the table, is made now.
*/
if( pTable->azModuleArg ){
- sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_CREATE_VTABLE, pTable->zName,
+ sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_CREATE_VTABLE, pTable->zName,
pTable->azModuleArg[0], pParse->db->aDb[iDb].zName);
}
#endif
addArgumentToVtab(pParse);
pParse->sArg.z = 0;
if( pTab->nModuleArg<1 ) return;
-
+
/* If the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement is being entered for the
** first time (in other words if the virtual table is actually being
** created now instead of just being read out of sqlite_master) then
}
zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE %T", &pParse->sNameToken);
- /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
+ /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
** SQLITE_MASTER table. We just need to update that slot with all
- ** the information we've collected.
+ ** the information we've collected.
**
** The VM register number pParse->regRowid holds the rowid of an
** entry in the sqlite_master table tht was created for this vtab
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Expire, 0, 0);
zWhere = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "name='%q'", pTab->zName);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_ParseSchema, iDb, 1, 0, zWhere, P4_DYNAMIC);
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_VCreate, iDb, 0, 0,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_VCreate, iDb, 0, 0,
pTab->zName, sqlite3Strlen30(pTab->zName) + 1);
}
** to this procedure.
*/
static int vtabCallConstructor(
- sqlite3 *db,
+ sqlite3 *db,
Table *pTab,
Module *pMod,
int (*xConstruct)(sqlite3*,void*,int,const char*const*,sqlite3_vtab**,char**),
}else{
int iCol;
/* If everything went according to plan, link the new VTable structure
- ** into the linked list headed by pTab->pVTable. Then loop through the
+ ** into the linked list headed by pTab->pVTable. Then loop through the
** columns of the table to see if any of them contain the token "hidden".
** If so, set the Column.isHidden flag and remove the token from
** the type string. */
/*
** This function is invoked by the parser to call the xConnect() method
-** of the virtual table pTab. If an error occurs, an error code is returned
+** of the virtual table pTab. If an error occurs, an error code is returned
** and an error left in pParse.
**
** This call is a no-op if table pTab is not a virtual table.
/*
** This function is invoked by the vdbe to call the xCreate method
-** of the virtual table named zTab in database iDb.
+** of the virtual table named zTab in database iDb.
**
** If an error occurs, *pzErr is set to point an an English language
** description of the error and an SQLITE_XXX error code is returned.
zMod = pTab->azModuleArg[0];
pMod = (Module*)sqlite3HashFind(&db->aModule, zMod, sqlite3Strlen30(zMod));
- /* If the module has been registered and includes a Create method,
- ** invoke it now. If the module has not been registered, return an
+ /* If the module has been registered and includes a Create method,
+ ** invoke it now. If the module has not been registered, return an
** error. Otherwise, do nothing.
*/
if( !pMod ){
}else{
pParse->declareVtab = 1;
pParse->db = db;
-
- if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3RunParser(pParse, zCreateTable, &zErr)
+
+ if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3RunParser(pParse, zCreateTable, &zErr)
&& pParse->pNewTable
&& !db->mallocFailed
&& !pParse->pNewTable->pSelect
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}
pParse->declareVtab = 0;
-
+
if( pParse->pVdbe ){
sqlite3VdbeFinalize(pParse->pVdbe);
}
** called is identified by the second argument, "offset", which is
** the offset of the method to call in the sqlite3_module structure.
**
-** The array is cleared after invoking the callbacks.
+** The array is cleared after invoking the callbacks.
*/
static void callFinaliser(sqlite3 *db, int offset){
int i;
** array. Return the error code for the first error that occurs, or
** SQLITE_OK if all xSync operations are successful.
**
-** Set *pzErrmsg to point to a buffer that should be released using
+** Set *pzErrmsg to point to a buffer that should be released using
** sqlite3DbFree() containing an error message, if one is available.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabSync(sqlite3 *db, char **pzErrmsg){
}
/*
-** Invoke the xRollback method of all virtual tables in the
+** Invoke the xRollback method of all virtual tables in the
** sqlite3.aVTrans array. Then clear the array itself.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabRollback(sqlite3 *db){
}
/*
-** Invoke the xCommit method of all virtual tables in the
+** Invoke the xCommit method of all virtual tables in the
** sqlite3.aVTrans array. Then clear the array itself.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabCommit(sqlite3 *db){
/* Special case: If db->aVTrans is NULL and db->nVTrans is greater
** than zero, then this function is being called from within a
- ** virtual module xSync() callback. It is illegal to write to
+ ** virtual module xSync() callback. It is illegal to write to
** virtual module tables in this case, so return SQLITE_LOCKED.
*/
if( sqlite3VtabInSync(db) ){
}
if( !pVTab ){
return SQLITE_OK;
- }
+ }
pModule = pVTab->pVtab->pModule;
if( pModule->xBegin ){
** This routine is used to allow virtual table implementations to
** overload MATCH, LIKE, GLOB, and REGEXP operators.
**
-** Return either the pDef argument (indicating no change) or a
+** Return either the pDef argument (indicating no change) or a
** new FuncDef structure that is marked as ephemeral using the
** SQLITE_FUNC_EPHEM flag.
*/
assert( pVtab->pModule!=0 );
pMod = (sqlite3_module *)pVtab->pModule;
if( pMod->xFindFunction==0 ) return pDef;
-
+
/* Call the xFindFunction method on the virtual table implementation
- ** to see if the implementation wants to overload this function
+ ** to see if the implementation wants to overload this function
*/
zLowerName = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, pDef->zName);
if( zLowerName ){
** clause subexpression is separated from the others by AND operators,
** usually, or sometimes subexpressions separated by OR.
**
-** All WhereTerms are collected into a single WhereClause structure.
+** All WhereTerms are collected into a single WhereClause structure.
** The following identity holds:
**
** WhereTerm.pWC->a[WhereTerm.idx] == WhereTerm
** An instance of the following structure keeps track of a mapping
** between VDBE cursor numbers and bits of the bitmasks in WhereTerm.
**
-** The VDBE cursor numbers are small integers contained in
-** SrcList_item.iCursor and Expr.iTable fields. For any given WHERE
+** The VDBE cursor numbers are small integers contained in
+** SrcList_item.iCursor and Expr.iTable fields. For any given WHERE
** clause, the cursor numbers might not begin with 0 and they might
** contain gaps in the numbering sequence. But we want to make maximum
** use of the bits in our bitmasks. This structure provides a mapping
**
** If a collation sequence is associated with either the left or right
** side of the comparison, it remains associated with the same side after
-** the commutation. So "Y collate NOCASE op X" becomes
+** the commutation. So "Y collate NOCASE op X" becomes
** "X collate NOCASE op Y". This is because any collation sequence on
-** the left hand side of a comparison overrides any collation sequence
+** the left hand side of a comparison overrides any collation sequence
** attached to the right. For the same reason the EP_ExpCollate flag
** is not commuted.
*/
static void exprAnalyze(SrcList*, WhereClause*, int);
/*
-** Call exprAnalyze on all terms in a WHERE clause.
+** Call exprAnalyze on all terms in a WHERE clause.
**
**
*/
** so and false if not.
**
** In order for the operator to be optimizible, the RHS must be a string
-** literal that does not begin with a wildcard.
+** literal that does not begin with a wildcard.
*/
static int isLikeOrGlob(
Parse *pParse, /* Parsing and code generating context */
** function, then no OP_Variable will be added to the program.
** This causes problems for the sqlite3_bind_parameter_name()
** API. To workaround them, add a dummy OP_Variable here.
- */
+ */
int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(pParse, pRight, r1);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP3(v, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)-1, 0);
** WhereTerm.u.pOrInfo->indexable |= the cursor number for table T
**
** A subterm is "indexable" if it is of the form
-** "T.C <op> <expr>" where C is any column of table T and
+** "T.C <op> <expr>" where C is any column of table T and
** <op> is one of "=", "<", "<=", ">", ">=", "IS NULL", or "IN".
** A subterm is also indexable if it is an AND of two or more
-** subsubterms at least one of which is indexable. Indexable AND
+** subsubterms at least one of which is indexable. Indexable AND
** subterms have their eOperator set to WO_AND and they have
** u.pAndInfo set to a dynamically allocated WhereAndTerm object.
**
if( (chngToIN & getMask(pMaskSet, pOrTerm->leftCursor))==0 ){
/* This term must be of the form t1.a==t2.b where t2 is in the
** chngToIN set but t1 is not. This term will be either preceeded
- ** or follwed by an inverted copy (t2.b==t1.a). Skip this term
+ ** or follwed by an inverted copy (t2.b==t1.a). Skip this term
** and use its inversion. */
testcase( pOrTerm->wtFlags & TERM_COPIED );
testcase( pOrTerm->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
}
/* At this point, okToChngToIN is true if original pTerm satisfies
- ** case 1. In that case, construct a new virtual term that is
+ ** case 1. In that case, construct a new virtual term that is
** pTerm converted into an IN operator.
*/
if( okToChngToIN ){
for(i=0; i<2; i++){
Expr *pNewExpr;
int idxNew;
- pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, ops[i],
+ pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, ops[i],
sqlite3ExprDup(db, pExpr->pLeft, 0),
sqlite3ExprDup(db, pList->a[i].pExpr, 0), 0);
idxNew = whereClauseInsert(pWC, pNewExpr, TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_DYNAMIC);
** The last character of the prefix "abc" is incremented to form the
** termination condition "abd".
*/
- if( pWC->op==TK_AND
+ if( pWC->op==TK_AND
&& isLikeOrGlob(pParse, pExpr, &pStr1, &isComplete, &noCase)
){
Expr *pLeft; /* LHS of LIKE/GLOB operator */
if( noCase ){
/* The point is to increment the last character before the first
** wildcard. But if we increment '@', that will push it into the
- ** alphabetic range where case conversions will mess up the
+ ** alphabetic range where case conversions will mess up the
** inequality. To avoid this, make sure to also run the full
** LIKE on all candidate expressions by clearing the isComplete flag
*/
prereqColumn = exprTableUsage(pMaskSet, pLeft);
if( (prereqExpr & prereqColumn)==0 ){
Expr *pNewExpr;
- pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_MATCH,
+ pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_MATCH,
0, sqlite3ExprDup(db, pRight, 0), 0);
idxNew = whereClauseInsert(pWC, pNewExpr, TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_DYNAMIC);
testcase( idxNew==0 );
nTerm = pOrderBy->nExpr;
assert( nTerm>0 );
- /* Argument pIdx must either point to a 'real' named index structure,
+ /* Argument pIdx must either point to a 'real' named index structure,
** or an index structure allocated on the stack by bestBtreeIndex() to
** represent the rowid index that is part of every table. */
assert( pIdx->zName || (pIdx->nColumn==1 && pIdx->aiColumn[0]==-1) );
if( iColumn<0 && !referencesOtherTables(pOrderBy, pMaskSet, j, base) ){
/* If the indexed column is the primary key and everything matches
** so far and none of the ORDER BY terms to the right reference other
- ** tables in the join, then we are assured that the index can be used
+ ** tables in the join, then we are assured that the index can be used
** to sort because the primary key is unique and so none of the other
** columns will make any difference
*/
#define TRACE_IDX_OUTPUTS(A)
#endif
-/*
-** Required because bestIndex() is called by bestOrClauseIndex()
+/*
+** Required because bestIndex() is called by bestOrClauseIndex()
*/
static void bestIndex(
Parse*, WhereClause*, struct SrcList_item*, Bitmask, ExprList*, WhereCost*);
/*
-** This routine attempts to find an scanning strategy that can be used
-** to optimize an 'OR' expression that is part of a WHERE clause.
+** This routine attempts to find an scanning strategy that can be used
+** to optimize an 'OR' expression that is part of a WHERE clause.
**
** The table associated with FROM clause term pSrc may be either a
** regular B-Tree table or a virtual table.
/* Search the WHERE clause terms for a usable WO_OR term. */
for(pTerm=pWC->a; pTerm<pWCEnd; pTerm++){
- if( pTerm->eOperator==WO_OR
+ if( pTerm->eOperator==WO_OR
&& ((pTerm->prereqAll & ~maskSrc) & notReady)==0
- && (pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable & maskSrc)!=0
+ && (pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable & maskSrc)!=0
){
WhereClause * const pOrWC = &pTerm->u.pOrInfo->wc;
WhereTerm * const pOrWCEnd = &pOrWC->a[pOrWC->nTerm];
for(pOrTerm=pOrWC->a; pOrTerm<pOrWCEnd; pOrTerm++){
WhereCost sTermCost;
- WHERETRACE(("... Multi-index OR testing for term %d of %d....\n",
+ WHERETRACE(("... Multi-index OR testing for term %d of %d....\n",
(pOrTerm - pOrWC->a), (pTerm - pWC->a)
));
if( pOrTerm->eOperator==WO_AND ){
if( rTotal>=pCost->rCost ) break;
}
- /* If there is an ORDER BY clause, increase the scan cost to account
+ /* If there is an ORDER BY clause, increase the scan cost to account
** for the cost of the sort. */
if( pOrderBy!=0 ){
rTotal += nRow*estLog(nRow);
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
/*
-** Allocate and populate an sqlite3_index_info structure. It is the
+** Allocate and populate an sqlite3_index_info structure. It is the
** responsibility of the caller to eventually release the structure
** by passing the pointer returned by this function to sqlite3_free().
*/
static sqlite3_index_info *allocateIndexInfo(
- Parse *pParse,
+ Parse *pParse,
WhereClause *pWC,
struct SrcList_item *pSrc,
ExprList *pOrderBy
nTerm++;
}
- /* If the ORDER BY clause contains only columns in the current
+ /* If the ORDER BY clause contains only columns in the current
** virtual table then allocate space for the aOrderBy part of
** the sqlite3_index_info structure.
*/
for(i=0; i<p->nConstraint; i++){
if( !p->aConstraint[i].usable && p->aConstraintUsage[i].argvIndex>0 ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"table %s: xBestIndex returned an invalid plan", pTab->zName);
}
}
** same virtual table. The sqlite3_index_info structure is created
** and initialized on the first invocation and reused on all subsequent
** invocations. The sqlite3_index_info structure is also used when
-** code is generated to access the virtual table. The whereInfoDelete()
+** code is generated to access the virtual table. The whereInfoDelete()
** routine takes care of freeing the sqlite3_index_info structure after
** everybody has finished with it.
*/
int i, j;
int nOrderBy;
- /* Make sure wsFlags is initialized to some sane value. Otherwise, if the
+ /* Make sure wsFlags is initialized to some sane value. Otherwise, if the
** malloc in allocateIndexInfo() fails and this function returns leaving
** wsFlags in an uninitialized state, the caller may behave unpredictably.
*/
/* The module name must be defined. Also, by this point there must
** be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. Otherwise
- ** sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames() would have picked up the error.
+ ** sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames() would have picked up the error.
*/
assert( pTab->azModuleArg && pTab->azModuleArg[0] );
assert( sqlite3GetVTable(pParse->db, pTab) );
- /* Set the aConstraint[].usable fields and initialize all
+ /* Set the aConstraint[].usable fields and initialize all
** output variables to zero.
**
** aConstraint[].usable is true for constraints where the right-hand
**
** column = expr
**
- ** and we are evaluating a join, then the constraint on column is
+ ** and we are evaluating a join, then the constraint on column is
** only valid if all tables referenced in expr occur to the left
** of the table containing column.
**
/* The cost is not allowed to be larger than SQLITE_BIG_DBL (the
** inital value of lowestCost in this loop. If it is, then the
** (cost<lowestCost) test below will never be true.
- **
- ** Use "(double)2" instead of "2.0" in case OMIT_FLOATING_POINT
+ **
+ ** Use "(double)2" instead of "2.0" in case OMIT_FLOATING_POINT
** is defined.
*/
if( (SQLITE_BIG_DBL/((double)2))<pIdxInfo->estimatedCost ){
pIdxInfo->nOrderBy = nOrderBy;
/* Try to find a more efficient access pattern by using multiple indexes
- ** to optimize an OR expression within the WHERE clause.
+ ** to optimize an OR expression within the WHERE clause.
*/
bestOrClauseIndex(pParse, pWC, pSrc, notReady, pOrderBy, pCost);
}
** 1 contains values larger than or equal to the value of the first sample,
** but smaller than the value of the second. And so on.
**
-** If successful, this function determines which of the regions value
+** If successful, this function determines which of the regions value
** pVal lies in, sets *piRegion to the region index (a value between 0
** and SQLITE_INDEX_SAMPLES+1, inclusive) and returns SQLITE_OK.
** Or, if an OOM occurs while converting text values between encodings,
if( aSample[i].eType==SQLITE_NULL ) continue;
if( aSample[i].eType>=SQLITE_TEXT || aSample[i].u.r>r ) break;
}
- }else{
+ }else{
sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
CollSeq *pColl;
const u8 *z;
/*
** If expression pExpr represents a literal value, set *pp to point to
** an sqlite3_value structure containing the same value, with affinity
-** aff applied to it, before returning. It is the responsibility of the
-** caller to eventually release this structure by passing it to
+** aff applied to it, before returning. It is the responsibility of the
+** caller to eventually release this structure by passing it to
** sqlite3ValueFree().
**
** If the current parse is a recompile (sqlite3Reprepare()) and pExpr
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT2
static int valueFromExpr(
- Parse *pParse,
- Expr *pExpr,
- u8 aff,
+ Parse *pParse,
+ Expr *pExpr,
+ u8 aff,
sqlite3_value **pp
){
/* The evalConstExpr() function will have already converted any TK_VARIABLE
** index and in the main table.
**
** If there was an INDEXED BY clause (pSrc->pIndex) attached to the table in
-** the SQL statement, then this function only considers plans using the
+** the SQL statement, then this function only considers plans using the
** named index. If no such plan is found, then the returned cost is
-** SQLITE_BIG_DBL. If a plan is found that uses the named index,
+** SQLITE_BIG_DBL. If a plan is found that uses the named index,
** then the cost is calculated in the usual way.
**
-** If a NOT INDEXED clause (pSrc->notIndexed!=0) was attached to the table
-** in the SELECT statement, then no indexes are considered. However, the
+** If a NOT INDEXED clause (pSrc->notIndexed!=0) was attached to the table
+** in the SELECT statement, then no indexes are considered. However, the
** selected plan may still take advantage of the tables built-in rowid
** index.
*/
** scan being evaluated. They are then used to determine the expected
** cost and number of rows returned.
**
- ** nEq:
+ ** nEq:
** Number of equality terms that can be implemented using the index.
**
- ** nInMul:
- ** The "in-multiplier". This is an estimate of how many seek operations
- ** SQLite must perform on the index in question. For example, if the
+ ** nInMul:
+ ** The "in-multiplier". This is an estimate of how many seek operations
+ ** SQLite must perform on the index in question. For example, if the
** WHERE clause is:
**
** WHERE a IN (1, 2, 3) AND b IN (4, 5, 6)
**
- ** SQLite must perform 9 lookups on an index on (a, b), so nInMul is
- ** set to 9. Given the same schema and either of the following WHERE
+ ** SQLite must perform 9 lookups on an index on (a, b), so nInMul is
+ ** set to 9. Given the same schema and either of the following WHERE
** clauses:
**
** WHERE a = 1
**
** nInMul is set to 1.
**
- ** If there exists a WHERE term of the form "x IN (SELECT ...)", then
- ** the sub-select is assumed to return 25 rows for the purposes of
+ ** If there exists a WHERE term of the form "x IN (SELECT ...)", then
+ ** the sub-select is assumed to return 25 rows for the purposes of
** determining nInMul.
**
- ** bInEst:
- ** Set to true if there was at least one "x IN (SELECT ...)" term used
+ ** bInEst:
+ ** Set to true if there was at least one "x IN (SELECT ...)" term used
** in determining the value of nInMul.
**
** nBound:
** space to 1/3rd its original size. So an x>? constraint reduces
** nBound to 33. Two constraints (x>? AND x<?) reduce nBound to 11.
**
- ** bSort:
- ** Boolean. True if there is an ORDER BY clause that will require an
- ** external sort (i.e. scanning the index being evaluated will not
+ ** bSort:
+ ** Boolean. True if there is an ORDER BY clause that will require an
+ ** external sort (i.e. scanning the index being evaluated will not
** correctly order records).
**
- ** bLookup:
- ** Boolean. True if for each index entry visited a lookup on the
- ** corresponding table b-tree is required. This is always false
- ** for the rowid index. For other indexes, it is true unless all the
- ** columns of the table used by the SELECT statement are present in
+ ** bLookup:
+ ** Boolean. True if for each index entry visited a lookup on the
+ ** corresponding table b-tree is required. This is always false
+ ** for the rowid index. For other indexes, it is true unless all the
+ ** columns of the table used by the SELECT statement are present in
** the index (such an index is sometimes described as a covering index).
- ** For example, given the index on (a, b), the second of the following
+ ** For example, given the index on (a, b), the second of the following
** two queries requires table b-tree lookups, but the first does not.
**
** SELECT a, b FROM tbl WHERE a = 1;
}
/* If currently calculating the cost of using an index (not the IPK
- ** index), determine if all required column data may be obtained without
+ ** index), determine if all required column data may be obtained without
** seeking to entries in the main table (i.e. if the index is a covering
** index for this query). If it is, set the WHERE_IDX_ONLY flag in
** wsFlags. Otherwise, set the bLookup variable to true. */
WHERETRACE((
"tbl=%s idx=%s nEq=%d nInMul=%d nBound=%d bSort=%d bLookup=%d"
" wsFlags=%d (nRow=%.2f cost=%.2f)\n",
- pSrc->pTab->zName, (pIdx ? pIdx->zName : "ipk"),
+ pSrc->pTab->zName, (pIdx ? pIdx->zName : "ipk"),
nEq, nInMul, nBound, bSort, bLookup, wsFlags, nRow, cost
));
assert( pOrderBy || (pCost->plan.wsFlags&WHERE_ORDERBY)==0 );
assert( pCost->plan.u.pIdx==0 || (pCost->plan.wsFlags&WHERE_ROWID_EQ)==0 );
- assert( pSrc->pIndex==0
- || pCost->plan.u.pIdx==0
- || pCost->plan.u.pIdx==pSrc->pIndex
+ assert( pSrc->pIndex==0
+ || pCost->plan.u.pIdx==0
+ || pCost->plan.u.pIdx==pSrc->pIndex
);
- WHERETRACE(("best index is: %s\n",
+ WHERETRACE(("best index is: %s\n",
(pCost->plan.u.pIdx ? pCost->plan.u.pIdx->zName : "ipk")
));
-
+
bestOrClauseIndex(pParse, pWC, pSrc, notReady, pOrderBy, pCost);
pCost->plan.wsFlags |= eqTermMask;
}
/*
** Find the query plan for accessing table pSrc->pTab. Write the
-** best query plan and its cost into the WhereCost object supplied
+** best query plan and its cost into the WhereCost object supplied
** as the last parameter. This function may calculate the cost of
** both real and virtual table scans.
*/
/*
** Code an OP_Affinity opcode to apply the column affinity string zAff
-** to the n registers starting at base.
+** to the n registers starting at base.
**
** As an optimization, SQLITE_AFF_NONE entries (which are no-ops) at the
** beginning and end of zAff are ignored. If all entries in zAff are
/*
** Generate code for a single equality term of the WHERE clause. An equality
-** term can be either X=expr or X IN (...). pTerm is the term to be
+** term can be either X=expr or X IN (...). pTerm is the term to be
** coded.
**
** The current value for the constraint is left in register iReg.
** For example, consider table t1(a,b,c,d,e,f) with index i1(a,b,c).
** Suppose the WHERE clause is this: a==5 AND b IN (1,2,3) AND c>5 AND c<10
** The index has as many as three equality constraints, but in this
-** example, the third "c" value is an inequality. So only two
+** example, the third "c" value is an inequality. So only two
** constraints are coded. This routine will generate code to evaluate
** a==5 and b IN (1,2,3). The current values for a and b will be stored
** in consecutive registers and the index of the first register is returned.
pTabItem = &pWInfo->pTabList->a[pLevel->iFrom];
iCur = pTabItem->iCursor;
bRev = (pLevel->plan.wsFlags & WHERE_REVERSE)!=0;
- omitTable = (pLevel->plan.wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0
+ omitTable = (pLevel->plan.wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0
&& (wctrlFlags & WHERE_FORCE_TABLE)==0;
/* Create labels for the "break" and "continue" instructions
Expr *pX; /* The expression that defines the start bound */
int r1, rTemp; /* Registers for holding the start boundary */
- /* The following constant maps TK_xx codes into corresponding
+ /* The following constant maps TK_xx codes into corresponding
** seek opcodes. It depends on a particular ordering of TK_xx
*/
const u8 aMoveOp[] = {
}else if( pLevel->plan.wsFlags & (WHERE_COLUMN_RANGE|WHERE_COLUMN_EQ) ){
/* Case 3: A scan using an index.
**
- ** The WHERE clause may contain zero or more equality
+ ** The WHERE clause may contain zero or more equality
** terms ("==" or "IN" operators) that refer to the N
** left-most columns of the index. It may also contain
** inequality constraints (>, <, >= or <=) on the indexed
- ** column that immediately follows the N equalities. Only
+ ** column that immediately follows the N equalities. Only
** the right-most column can be an inequality - the rest must
- ** use the "==" and "IN" operators. For example, if the
- ** index is on (x,y,z), then the following clauses are all
+ ** use the "==" and "IN" operators. For example, if the
+ ** index is on (x,y,z), then the following clauses are all
** optimized:
**
** x=5
** This case is also used when there are no WHERE clause
** constraints but an index is selected anyway, in order
** to force the output order to conform to an ORDER BY.
- */
+ */
int aStartOp[] = {
0,
0,
iIdxCur = pLevel->iIdxCur;
k = pIdx->aiColumn[nEq]; /* Column for inequality constraints */
- /* If this loop satisfies a sort order (pOrderBy) request that
- ** was passed to this function to implement a "SELECT min(x) ..."
+ /* If this loop satisfies a sort order (pOrderBy) request that
+ ** was passed to this function to implement a "SELECT min(x) ..."
** query, then the caller will only allow the loop to run for
** a single iteration. This means that the first row returned
** should not have a NULL value stored in 'x'. If column 'x' is
nExtraReg = 1;
}
- /* Find any inequality constraint terms for the start and end
- ** of the range.
+ /* Find any inequality constraint terms for the start and end
+ ** of the range.
*/
if( pLevel->plan.wsFlags & WHERE_TOP_LIMIT ){
pRangeEnd = findTerm(pWC, iCur, k, notReady, (WO_LT|WO_LE), pIdx);
addrNxt = pLevel->addrNxt;
/* If we are doing a reverse order scan on an ascending index, or
- ** a forward order scan on a descending index, interchange the
+ ** a forward order scan on a descending index, interchange the
** start and end terms (pRangeStart and pRangeEnd).
*/
if( bRev==(pIdx->aSortOrder[nEq]==SQLITE_SO_ASC) ){
if( zAff ){
if( sqlite3CompareAffinity(pRight, zAff[nConstraint])==SQLITE_AFF_NONE){
/* Since the comparison is to be performed with no conversions
- ** applied to the operands, set the affinity to apply to pRight to
+ ** applied to the operands, set the affinity to apply to pRight to
** SQLITE_AFF_NONE. */
zAff[nConstraint] = SQLITE_AFF_NONE;
}
if( sqlite3ExprNeedsNoAffinityChange(pRight, zAff[nConstraint]) ){
zAff[nConstraint] = SQLITE_AFF_NONE;
}
- }
+ }
nConstraint++;
}else if( isMinQuery ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, regBase+nEq);
if( zAff ){
if( sqlite3CompareAffinity(pRight, zAff[nConstraint])==SQLITE_AFF_NONE){
/* Since the comparison is to be performed with no conversions
- ** applied to the operands, set the affinity to apply to pRight to
+ ** applied to the operands, set the affinity to apply to pRight to
** SQLITE_AFF_NONE. */
zAff[nConstraint] = SQLITE_AFF_NONE;
}
if( sqlite3ExprNeedsNoAffinityChange(pRight, zAff[nConstraint]) ){
zAff[nConstraint] = SQLITE_AFF_NONE;
}
- }
+ }
codeApplyAffinity(pParse, regBase, nEq+1, zAff);
nConstraint++;
}
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Seek, iCur, iRowidReg); /* Deferred seek */
}
- /* Record the instruction used to terminate the loop. Disable
+ /* Record the instruction used to terminate the loop. Disable
** WHERE clause terms made redundant by the index range scan.
*/
pLevel->op = bRev ? OP_Prev : OP_Next;
int iRetInit; /* Address of regReturn init */
int untestedTerms = 0; /* Some terms not completely tested */
int ii;
-
+
pTerm = pLevel->plan.u.pTerm;
assert( pTerm!=0 );
assert( pTerm->eOperator==WO_OR );
pOrTab = pWInfo->pTabList;
}
- /* Initialize the rowset register to contain NULL. An SQL NULL is
+ /* Initialize the rowset register to contain NULL. An SQL NULL is
** equivalent to an empty rowset.
**
- ** Also initialize regReturn to contain the address of the instruction
+ ** Also initialize regReturn to contain the address of the instruction
** immediately following the OP_Return at the bottom of the loop. This
** is required in a few obscure LEFT JOIN cases where control jumps
- ** over the top of the loop into the body of it. In this case the
- ** correct response for the end-of-loop code (the OP_Return) is to
+ ** over the top of the loop into the body of it. In this case the
+ ** correct response for the end-of-loop code (the OP_Return) is to
** fall through to the next instruction, just as an OP_Next does if
** called on an uninitialized cursor.
*/
if( (wctrlFlags & WHERE_DUPLICATES_OK)==0 ){
int iSet = ((ii==pOrWc->nTerm-1)?-1:ii);
int r;
- r = sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumn(pParse, pTabItem->pTab, -1, iCur,
+ r = sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumn(pParse, pTabItem->pTab, -1, iCur,
regRowid);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_RowSetTest, regRowset,
sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+2, r, iSet);
}
/* For a LEFT OUTER JOIN, generate code that will record the fact that
- ** at least one row of the right table has matched the left table.
+ ** at least one row of the right table has matched the left table.
*/
if( pLevel->iLeftJoin ){
pLevel->addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
sqlite3 *db; /* Database connection */
/* The number of tables in the FROM clause is limited by the number of
- ** bits in a Bitmask
+ ** bits in a Bitmask
*/
if( pTabList->nSrc>BMS ){
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "at most %d tables in a join", BMS);
return 0;
}
- /* This function normally generates a nested loop for all tables in
+ /* This function normally generates a nested loop for all tables in
** pTabList. But if the WHERE_ONETABLE_ONLY flag is set, then we should
** only generate code for the first table in pTabList and assume that
** any cursors associated with subsequent tables are uninitialized.
*/
db = pParse->db;
nByteWInfo = ROUND8(sizeof(WhereInfo)+(nTabList-1)*sizeof(WhereLevel));
- pWInfo = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db,
- nByteWInfo +
+ pWInfo = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db,
+ nByteWInfo +
sizeof(WhereClause) +
sizeof(WhereMaskSet)
);
whereClauseInit(pWC, pParse, pMaskSet);
sqlite3ExprCodeConstants(pParse, pWhere);
whereSplit(pWC, pWhere, TK_AND);
-
+
/* Special case: a WHERE clause that is constant. Evaluate the
** expression and either jump over all of the code or fall thru.
*/
** for all tables to the left of a left join is important. Ticket #3015.
**
** Configure the WhereClause.vmask variable so that bits that correspond
- ** to virtual table cursors are set. This is used to selectively disable
- ** the OR-to-IN transformation in exprAnalyzeOrTerm(). It is not helpful
+ ** to virtual table cursors are set. This is used to selectively disable
+ ** the OR-to-IN transformation in exprAnalyzeOrTerm(). It is not helpful
** with virtual tables.
**
** Note that bitmasks are created for all pTabList->nSrc tables in
/* Loop through the remaining entries in the FROM clause to find the
** next nested loop. The FROM clause entries may be iterated through
- ** either once or twice.
+ ** either once or twice.
**
** The first iteration, which is always performed, searches for the
** FROM clause entry that permits the lowest-cost, "optimal" scan. In
** the next outermost loop was always that with the lowest overall
** cost. However, this meant that SQLite could select the wrong plan
** for scripts such as the following:
- **
- ** CREATE TABLE t1(a, b);
+ **
+ ** CREATE TABLE t1(a, b);
** CREATE TABLE t2(c, d);
** SELECT * FROM t2, t1 WHERE t2.rowid = t1.a;
**
** The best strategy is to iterate through table t1 first. However it
** is not possible to determine this with a simple greedy algorithm.
- ** However, since the cost of a linear scan through table t2 is the same
- ** as the cost of a linear scan through table t1, a simple greedy
+ ** However, since the cost of a linear scan through table t2 is the same
+ ** as the cost of a linear scan through table t1, a simple greedy
** algorithm may choose to use t2 for the outer loop, which is a much
** costlier approach.
*/
int doNotReorder; /* True if this table should not be reordered */
WhereCost sCost; /* Cost information from best[Virtual]Index() */
ExprList *pOrderBy; /* ORDER BY clause for index to optimize */
-
+
doNotReorder = (pTabItem->jointype & (JT_LEFT|JT_CROSS))!=0;
if( j!=iFrom && doNotReorder ) break;
m = getMask(pMaskSet, pTabItem->iCursor);
continue;
}
pOrderBy = ((i==0 && ppOrderBy )?*ppOrderBy:0);
-
+
assert( pTabItem->pTab );
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
if( IsVirtual(pTabItem->pTab) ){
sqlite3_index_info **pp = &pWInfo->a[j].pIdxInfo;
bestVirtualIndex(pParse, pWC, pTabItem, mask, pOrderBy, &sCost, pp);
- }else
+ }else
#endif
{
bestBtreeIndex(pParse, pWC, pTabItem, mask, pOrderBy, &sCost);
assert( isOptimal || (sCost.used¬Ready)==0 );
if( (sCost.used¬Ready)==0
- && (j==iFrom || sCost.rCost<bestPlan.rCost)
+ && (j==iFrom || sCost.rCost<bestPlan.rCost)
){
bestPlan = sCost;
bestJ = j;
Bitmask b = pTabItem->colUsed;
int n = 0;
for(; b; b=b>>1, n++){}
- sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)-1,
+ sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)-1,
SQLITE_INT_TO_PTR(n), P4_INT32);
assert( n<=pTab->nCol );
}
}
/*
-** Generate the end of the WHERE loop. See comments on
+** Generate the end of the WHERE loop. See comments on
** sqlite3WhereBegin() for additional information.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
** as the vdbe level waits until the table is read before actually
** seeking the table cursor to the record corresponding to the current
** position in the index.
- **
+ **
** Calls to the code generator in between sqlite3WhereBegin and
** sqlite3WhereEnd will have created code that references the table
** directly. This loop scans all that code looking for opcodes
pOut->pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, op, pOperand->pExpr, 0, 0);
pOut->zStart = pOperand->zStart;
pOut->zEnd = &pPostOp->z[pPostOp->n];
- }
+ }
/* A routine to convert a binary TK_IS or TK_ISNOT expression into a
** unary TK_ISNULL or TK_NOTNULL expression. */
/* Next is all token values, in a form suitable for use by makeheaders.
** This section will be null unless lemon is run with the -m switch.
*/
-/*
+/*
** These constants (all generated automatically by the parser generator)
** specify the various kinds of tokens (terminals) that the parser
-** understands.
+** understands.
**
** Each symbol here is a terminal symbol in the grammar.
*/
** and nonterminals. "int" is used otherwise.
** YYNOCODE is a number of type YYCODETYPE which corresponds
** to no legal terminal or nonterminal number. This
-** number is used to fill in empty slots of the hash
+** number is used to fill in empty slots of the hash
** table.
** YYFALLBACK If defined, this indicates that one or more tokens
** have fall-back values which should be used if the
** and nonterminal numbers. "unsigned char" is
** used if there are fewer than 250 rules and
** states combined. "int" is used otherwise.
-** sqlite3ParserTOKENTYPE is the data type used for minor tokens given
+** sqlite3ParserTOKENTYPE is the data type used for minor tokens given
** directly to the parser from the tokenizer.
** YYMINORTYPE is the data type used for all minor tokens.
** This is typically a union of many types, one of
/* Next are the tables used to determine what action to take based on the
** current state and lookahead token. These tables are used to implement
** functions that take a state number and lookahead value and return an
-** action integer.
+** action integer.
**
** Suppose the action integer is N. Then the action is determined as
** follows
** If the index value yy_shift_ofst[S]+X is out of range or if the value
** yy_lookahead[yy_shift_ofst[S]+X] is not equal to X or if yy_shift_ofst[S]
** is equal to YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT, it means that the action is not in the table
-** and that yy_default[S] should be used instead.
+** and that yy_default[S] should be used instead.
**
** The formula above is for computing the action when the lookahead is
** a terminal symbol. If the lookahead is a non-terminal (as occurs after
/* The next table maps tokens into fallback tokens. If a construct
** like the following:
-**
+**
** %fallback ID X Y Z.
**
** appears in the grammar, then ID becomes a fallback token for X, Y,
#endif /* NDEBUG */
#ifndef NDEBUG
-/*
+/*
** Turn parser tracing on by giving a stream to which to write the trace
** and a prompt to preface each trace message. Tracing is turned off
-** by making either argument NULL
+** by making either argument NULL
**
** Inputs:
** <ul>
#ifndef NDEBUG
/* For tracing shifts, the names of all terminals and nonterminals
** are required. The following table supplies these names */
-static const char *const yyTokenName[] = {
- "$", "SEMI", "EXPLAIN", "QUERY",
- "PLAN", "BEGIN", "TRANSACTION", "DEFERRED",
- "IMMEDIATE", "EXCLUSIVE", "COMMIT", "END",
- "ROLLBACK", "SAVEPOINT", "RELEASE", "TO",
- "TABLE", "CREATE", "IF", "NOT",
- "EXISTS", "TEMP", "LP", "RP",
- "AS", "COMMA", "ID", "INDEXED",
- "ABORT", "ACTION", "AFTER", "ANALYZE",
- "ASC", "ATTACH", "BEFORE", "BY",
- "CASCADE", "CAST", "COLUMNKW", "CONFLICT",
- "DATABASE", "DESC", "DETACH", "EACH",
- "FAIL", "FOR", "IGNORE", "INITIALLY",
- "INSTEAD", "LIKE_KW", "MATCH", "NO",
- "KEY", "OF", "OFFSET", "PRAGMA",
- "RAISE", "REPLACE", "RESTRICT", "ROW",
- "TRIGGER", "VACUUM", "VIEW", "VIRTUAL",
- "REINDEX", "RENAME", "CTIME_KW", "ANY",
- "OR", "AND", "IS", "BETWEEN",
- "IN", "ISNULL", "NOTNULL", "NE",
- "EQ", "GT", "LE", "LT",
- "GE", "ESCAPE", "BITAND", "BITOR",
- "LSHIFT", "RSHIFT", "PLUS", "MINUS",
- "STAR", "SLASH", "REM", "CONCAT",
- "COLLATE", "BITNOT", "STRING", "JOIN_KW",
- "CONSTRAINT", "DEFAULT", "NULL", "PRIMARY",
- "UNIQUE", "CHECK", "REFERENCES", "AUTOINCR",
- "ON", "INSERT", "DELETE", "UPDATE",
- "SET", "DEFERRABLE", "FOREIGN", "DROP",
- "UNION", "ALL", "EXCEPT", "INTERSECT",
- "SELECT", "DISTINCT", "DOT", "FROM",
- "JOIN", "USING", "ORDER", "GROUP",
- "HAVING", "LIMIT", "WHERE", "INTO",
- "VALUES", "INTEGER", "FLOAT", "BLOB",
- "REGISTER", "VARIABLE", "CASE", "WHEN",
- "THEN", "ELSE", "INDEX", "ALTER",
- "ADD", "error", "input", "cmdlist",
- "ecmd", "explain", "cmdx", "cmd",
+static const char *const yyTokenName[] = {
+ "$", "SEMI", "EXPLAIN", "QUERY",
+ "PLAN", "BEGIN", "TRANSACTION", "DEFERRED",
+ "IMMEDIATE", "EXCLUSIVE", "COMMIT", "END",
+ "ROLLBACK", "SAVEPOINT", "RELEASE", "TO",
+ "TABLE", "CREATE", "IF", "NOT",
+ "EXISTS", "TEMP", "LP", "RP",
+ "AS", "COMMA", "ID", "INDEXED",
+ "ABORT", "ACTION", "AFTER", "ANALYZE",
+ "ASC", "ATTACH", "BEFORE", "BY",
+ "CASCADE", "CAST", "COLUMNKW", "CONFLICT",
+ "DATABASE", "DESC", "DETACH", "EACH",
+ "FAIL", "FOR", "IGNORE", "INITIALLY",
+ "INSTEAD", "LIKE_KW", "MATCH", "NO",
+ "KEY", "OF", "OFFSET", "PRAGMA",
+ "RAISE", "REPLACE", "RESTRICT", "ROW",
+ "TRIGGER", "VACUUM", "VIEW", "VIRTUAL",
+ "REINDEX", "RENAME", "CTIME_KW", "ANY",
+ "OR", "AND", "IS", "BETWEEN",
+ "IN", "ISNULL", "NOTNULL", "NE",
+ "EQ", "GT", "LE", "LT",
+ "GE", "ESCAPE", "BITAND", "BITOR",
+ "LSHIFT", "RSHIFT", "PLUS", "MINUS",
+ "STAR", "SLASH", "REM", "CONCAT",
+ "COLLATE", "BITNOT", "STRING", "JOIN_KW",
+ "CONSTRAINT", "DEFAULT", "NULL", "PRIMARY",
+ "UNIQUE", "CHECK", "REFERENCES", "AUTOINCR",
+ "ON", "INSERT", "DELETE", "UPDATE",
+ "SET", "DEFERRABLE", "FOREIGN", "DROP",
+ "UNION", "ALL", "EXCEPT", "INTERSECT",
+ "SELECT", "DISTINCT", "DOT", "FROM",
+ "JOIN", "USING", "ORDER", "GROUP",
+ "HAVING", "LIMIT", "WHERE", "INTO",
+ "VALUES", "INTEGER", "FLOAT", "BLOB",
+ "REGISTER", "VARIABLE", "CASE", "WHEN",
+ "THEN", "ELSE", "INDEX", "ALTER",
+ "ADD", "error", "input", "cmdlist",
+ "ecmd", "explain", "cmdx", "cmd",
"transtype", "trans_opt", "nm", "savepoint_opt",
- "create_table", "create_table_args", "createkw", "temp",
+ "create_table", "create_table_args", "createkw", "temp",
"ifnotexists", "dbnm", "columnlist", "conslist_opt",
- "select", "column", "columnid", "type",
- "carglist", "id", "ids", "typetoken",
- "typename", "signed", "plus_num", "minus_num",
- "carg", "ccons", "term", "expr",
- "onconf", "sortorder", "autoinc", "idxlist_opt",
- "refargs", "defer_subclause", "refarg", "refact",
- "init_deferred_pred_opt", "conslist", "tcons", "idxlist",
- "defer_subclause_opt", "orconf", "resolvetype", "raisetype",
+ "select", "column", "columnid", "type",
+ "carglist", "id", "ids", "typetoken",
+ "typename", "signed", "plus_num", "minus_num",
+ "carg", "ccons", "term", "expr",
+ "onconf", "sortorder", "autoinc", "idxlist_opt",
+ "refargs", "defer_subclause", "refarg", "refact",
+ "init_deferred_pred_opt", "conslist", "tcons", "idxlist",
+ "defer_subclause_opt", "orconf", "resolvetype", "raisetype",
"ifexists", "fullname", "oneselect", "multiselect_op",
- "distinct", "selcollist", "from", "where_opt",
- "groupby_opt", "having_opt", "orderby_opt", "limit_opt",
- "sclp", "as", "seltablist", "stl_prefix",
- "joinop", "indexed_opt", "on_opt", "using_opt",
- "joinop2", "inscollist", "sortlist", "sortitem",
+ "distinct", "selcollist", "from", "where_opt",
+ "groupby_opt", "having_opt", "orderby_opt", "limit_opt",
+ "sclp", "as", "seltablist", "stl_prefix",
+ "joinop", "indexed_opt", "on_opt", "using_opt",
+ "joinop2", "inscollist", "sortlist", "sortitem",
"nexprlist", "setlist", "insert_cmd", "inscollist_opt",
- "itemlist", "exprlist", "likeop", "escape",
+ "itemlist", "exprlist", "likeop", "escape",
"between_op", "in_op", "case_operand", "case_exprlist",
- "case_else", "uniqueflag", "collate", "nmnum",
+ "case_else", "uniqueflag", "collate", "nmnum",
"plus_opt", "number", "trigger_decl", "trigger_cmd_list",
- "trigger_time", "trigger_event", "foreach_clause", "when_clause",
+ "trigger_time", "trigger_event", "foreach_clause", "when_clause",
"trigger_cmd", "trnm", "tridxby", "database_kw_opt",
- "key_opt", "add_column_fullname", "kwcolumn_opt", "create_vtab",
- "vtabarglist", "vtabarg", "vtabargtoken", "lp",
- "anylist",
+ "key_opt", "add_column_fullname", "kwcolumn_opt", "create_vtab",
+ "vtabarglist", "vtabarg", "vtabargtoken", "lp",
+ "anylist",
};
#endif /* NDEBUG */
}
#endif
-/*
+/*
** This function allocates a new parser.
** The only argument is a pointer to a function which works like
** malloc.
/* Here is inserted the actions which take place when a
** terminal or non-terminal is destroyed. This can happen
** when the symbol is popped from the stack during a
- ** reduce or during error processing or when a parser is
+ ** reduce or during error processing or when a parser is
** being destroyed before it is finished parsing.
**
** Note: during a reduce, the only symbols destroyed are those
return yymajor;
}
-/*
+/*
** Deallocate and destroy a parser. Destructors are all called for
** all stack elements before shutting the parser down.
**
){
int i;
int stateno = pParser->yystack[pParser->yyidx].stateno;
-
+
if( stateno>YY_SHIFT_COUNT
|| (i = yy_shift_ofst[stateno])==YY_SHIFT_USE_DFLT ){
return yy_default[stateno];
#ifdef YYWILDCARD
{
int j = i - iLookAhead + YYWILDCARD;
- if(
+ if(
#if YY_SHIFT_MIN+YYWILDCARD<0
j>=0 &&
#endif
yypParser->yyidxMax = yypParser->yyidx;
}
#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0
+#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0
if( yypParser->yyidx>=YYSTACKDEPTH ){
yyStackOverflow(yypParser, yypMinor);
return;
sqlite3ParserARG_FETCH;
yymsp = &yypParser->yystack[yypParser->yyidx];
#ifndef NDEBUG
- if( yyTraceFILE && yyruleno>=0
+ if( yyTraceFILE && yyruleno>=0
&& yyruleno<(int)(sizeof(yyRuleName)/sizeof(yyRuleName[0])) ){
fprintf(yyTraceFILE, "%sReduce [%s].\n", yyTracePrompt,
yyRuleName[yyruleno]);
** not set the value of its left-hand side nonterminal. Leaving the
** value of the nonterminal uninitialized is utterly harmless as long
** as the value is never used. So really the only thing this code
- ** accomplishes is to quieten purify.
+ ** accomplishes is to quieten purify.
**
** 2007-01-16: The wireshark project (www.wireshark.org) reports that
** without this code, their parser segfaults. I'm not sure what there
case 170: /* cmd ::= UPDATE orconf fullname indexed_opt SET setlist where_opt */
{
sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(pParse, yymsp[-4].minor.yy65, &yymsp[-3].minor.yy0);
- sqlite3ExprListCheckLength(pParse,yymsp[-1].minor.yy14,"set list");
+ sqlite3ExprListCheckLength(pParse,yymsp[-1].minor.yy14,"set list");
sqlite3Update(pParse,yymsp[-4].minor.yy65,yymsp[-1].minor.yy14,yymsp[0].minor.yy132,yymsp[-5].minor.yy186);
}
break;
** treated as functions that return constants */
yygotominor.yy346.pExpr = sqlite3ExprFunction(pParse, 0,&yymsp[0].minor.yy0);
if( yygotominor.yy346.pExpr ){
- yygotominor.yy346.pExpr->op = TK_CONST_FUNC;
+ yygotominor.yy346.pExpr->op = TK_CONST_FUNC;
}
spanSet(&yygotominor.yy346, &yymsp[0].minor.yy0, &yymsp[0].minor.yy0);
}
yygotominor.yy346.pExpr->x.pList = pList;
}else{
sqlite3ExprListDelete(pParse->db, pList);
- }
+ }
if( yymsp[-3].minor.yy328 ) yygotominor.yy346.pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_NOT, yygotominor.yy346.pExpr, 0, 0);
yygotominor.yy346.zStart = yymsp[-4].minor.yy346.zStart;
yygotominor.yy346.zEnd = yymsp[0].minor.yy346.zEnd;
break;
case 244: /* cmd ::= createkw uniqueflag INDEX ifnotexists nm dbnm ON nm LP idxlist RP */
{
- sqlite3CreateIndex(pParse, &yymsp[-6].minor.yy0, &yymsp[-5].minor.yy0,
+ sqlite3CreateIndex(pParse, &yymsp[-6].minor.yy0, &yymsp[-5].minor.yy0,
sqlite3SrcListAppend(pParse->db,0,&yymsp[-3].minor.yy0,0), yymsp[-1].minor.yy14, yymsp[-9].minor.yy328,
&yymsp[-10].minor.yy0, &yymsp[0].minor.yy0, SQLITE_SO_ASC, yymsp[-7].minor.yy328);
}
}
break;
case 285: /* trigger_cmd_list ::= trigger_cmd SEMI */
-{
+{
assert( yymsp[-1].minor.yy473!=0 );
yymsp[-1].minor.yy473->pLast = yymsp[-1].minor.yy473;
yygotominor.yy473 = yymsp[-1].minor.yy473;
case 287: /* trnm ::= nm DOT nm */
{
yygotominor.yy0 = yymsp[0].minor.yy0;
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"qualified table names are not allowed on INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE "
"statements within triggers");
}
break;
case 296: /* expr ::= RAISE LP IGNORE RP */
{
- yygotominor.yy346.pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_RAISE, 0, 0, 0);
+ yygotominor.yy346.pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_RAISE, 0, 0, 0);
if( yygotominor.yy346.pExpr ){
yygotominor.yy346.pExpr->affinity = OE_Ignore;
}
break;
case 297: /* expr ::= RAISE LP raisetype COMMA nm RP */
{
- yygotominor.yy346.pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_RAISE, 0, 0, &yymsp[-1].minor.yy0);
+ yygotominor.yy346.pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_RAISE, 0, 0, &yymsp[-1].minor.yy0);
if( yygotominor.yy346.pExpr ) {
yygotominor.yy346.pExpr->affinity = (char)yymsp[-3].minor.yy328;
}
#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
/* A syntax error has occurred.
** The response to an error depends upon whether or not the
- ** grammar defines an error token "ERROR".
+ ** grammar defines an error token "ERROR".
**
** This is what we do if the grammar does define ERROR:
**
yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor,yyminorunion);
yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-
+
#else /* YYERRORSYMBOL is not defined */
/* This is what we do if the grammar does not define ERROR:
**
/*
** The sqlite3KeywordCode function looks up an identifier to determine if
-** it is a keyword. If it is a keyword, the token code of that keyword is
+** it is a keyword. If it is a keyword, the token code of that keyword is
** returned. If the input is not a keyword, TK_ID is returned.
**
** The implementation of this routine was generated by a program,
521, 527, 531, 536,
};
static const unsigned char aCode[121] = {
- TK_REINDEX, TK_INDEXED, TK_INDEX, TK_DESC, TK_ESCAPE,
- TK_EACH, TK_CHECK, TK_KEY, TK_BEFORE, TK_FOREIGN,
- TK_FOR, TK_IGNORE, TK_LIKE_KW, TK_EXPLAIN, TK_INSTEAD,
- TK_ADD, TK_DATABASE, TK_AS, TK_SELECT, TK_TABLE,
- TK_JOIN_KW, TK_THEN, TK_END, TK_DEFERRABLE, TK_ELSE,
- TK_EXCEPT, TK_TRANSACTION,TK_ACTION, TK_ON, TK_JOIN_KW,
- TK_ALTER, TK_RAISE, TK_EXCLUSIVE, TK_EXISTS, TK_SAVEPOINT,
- TK_INTERSECT, TK_TRIGGER, TK_REFERENCES, TK_CONSTRAINT, TK_INTO,
- TK_OFFSET, TK_OF, TK_SET, TK_TEMP, TK_TEMP,
- TK_OR, TK_UNIQUE, TK_QUERY, TK_ATTACH, TK_HAVING,
- TK_GROUP, TK_UPDATE, TK_BEGIN, TK_JOIN_KW, TK_RELEASE,
- TK_BETWEEN, TK_NOTNULL, TK_NOT, TK_NO, TK_NULL,
- TK_LIKE_KW, TK_CASCADE, TK_ASC, TK_DELETE, TK_CASE,
- TK_COLLATE, TK_CREATE, TK_CTIME_KW, TK_DETACH, TK_IMMEDIATE,
- TK_JOIN, TK_INSERT, TK_MATCH, TK_PLAN, TK_ANALYZE,
- TK_PRAGMA, TK_ABORT, TK_VALUES, TK_VIRTUAL, TK_LIMIT,
- TK_WHEN, TK_WHERE, TK_RENAME, TK_AFTER, TK_REPLACE,
- TK_AND, TK_DEFAULT, TK_AUTOINCR, TK_TO, TK_IN,
- TK_CAST, TK_COLUMNKW, TK_COMMIT, TK_CONFLICT, TK_JOIN_KW,
- TK_CTIME_KW, TK_CTIME_KW, TK_PRIMARY, TK_DEFERRED, TK_DISTINCT,
- TK_IS, TK_DROP, TK_FAIL, TK_FROM, TK_JOIN_KW,
- TK_LIKE_KW, TK_BY, TK_IF, TK_ISNULL, TK_ORDER,
- TK_RESTRICT, TK_JOIN_KW, TK_JOIN_KW, TK_ROLLBACK, TK_ROW,
- TK_UNION, TK_USING, TK_VACUUM, TK_VIEW, TK_INITIALLY,
- TK_ALL,
+ TK_REINDEX, TK_INDEXED, TK_INDEX, TK_DESC, TK_ESCAPE,
+ TK_EACH, TK_CHECK, TK_KEY, TK_BEFORE, TK_FOREIGN,
+ TK_FOR, TK_IGNORE, TK_LIKE_KW, TK_EXPLAIN, TK_INSTEAD,
+ TK_ADD, TK_DATABASE, TK_AS, TK_SELECT, TK_TABLE,
+ TK_JOIN_KW, TK_THEN, TK_END, TK_DEFERRABLE, TK_ELSE,
+ TK_EXCEPT, TK_TRANSACTION,TK_ACTION, TK_ON, TK_JOIN_KW,
+ TK_ALTER, TK_RAISE, TK_EXCLUSIVE, TK_EXISTS, TK_SAVEPOINT,
+ TK_INTERSECT, TK_TRIGGER, TK_REFERENCES, TK_CONSTRAINT, TK_INTO,
+ TK_OFFSET, TK_OF, TK_SET, TK_TEMP, TK_TEMP,
+ TK_OR, TK_UNIQUE, TK_QUERY, TK_ATTACH, TK_HAVING,
+ TK_GROUP, TK_UPDATE, TK_BEGIN, TK_JOIN_KW, TK_RELEASE,
+ TK_BETWEEN, TK_NOTNULL, TK_NOT, TK_NO, TK_NULL,
+ TK_LIKE_KW, TK_CASCADE, TK_ASC, TK_DELETE, TK_CASE,
+ TK_COLLATE, TK_CREATE, TK_CTIME_KW, TK_DETACH, TK_IMMEDIATE,
+ TK_JOIN, TK_INSERT, TK_MATCH, TK_PLAN, TK_ANALYZE,
+ TK_PRAGMA, TK_ABORT, TK_VALUES, TK_VIRTUAL, TK_LIMIT,
+ TK_WHEN, TK_WHERE, TK_RENAME, TK_AFTER, TK_REPLACE,
+ TK_AND, TK_DEFAULT, TK_AUTOINCR, TK_TO, TK_IN,
+ TK_CAST, TK_COLUMNKW, TK_COMMIT, TK_CONFLICT, TK_JOIN_KW,
+ TK_CTIME_KW, TK_CTIME_KW, TK_PRIMARY, TK_DEFERRED, TK_DISTINCT,
+ TK_IS, TK_DROP, TK_FAIL, TK_FROM, TK_JOIN_KW,
+ TK_LIKE_KW, TK_BY, TK_IF, TK_ISNULL, TK_ORDER,
+ TK_RESTRICT, TK_JOIN_KW, TK_JOIN_KW, TK_ROLLBACK, TK_ROW,
+ TK_UNION, TK_USING, TK_VACUUM, TK_VIEW, TK_INITIALLY,
+ TK_ALL,
};
int h, i;
if( n<2 ) return TK_ID;
** IdChar(X) will be true. Otherwise it is false.
**
** For ASCII, any character with the high-order bit set is
-** allowed in an identifier. For 7-bit characters,
+** allowed in an identifier. For 7-bit characters,
** sqlite3IsIdChar[X] must be 1.
**
** For EBCDIC, the rules are more complex but have the same
** end result.
**
** Ticket #1066. the SQL standard does not allow '$' in the
-** middle of identfiers. But many SQL implementations do.
+** middle of identfiers. But many SQL implementations do.
** SQLite will allow '$' in identifiers for compatibility.
** But the feature is undocumented.
*/
/*
-** Return the length of the token that begins at z[0].
+** Return the length of the token that begins at z[0].
** Store the token type in *tokenType before returning.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3GetToken(const unsigned char *z, int *tokenType){
*tokenType = TK_FLOAT;
}
if( (z[i]=='e' || z[i]=='E') &&
- ( sqlite3Isdigit(z[i+1])
+ ( sqlite3Isdigit(z[i+1])
|| ((z[i+1]=='+' || z[i+1]=='-') && sqlite3Isdigit(z[i+2]))
)
){
/*
** Run the parser on the given SQL string. The parser structure is
** passed in. An SQLITE_ status code is returned. If an error occurs
-** then an and attempt is made to write an error message into
+** then an and attempt is made to write an error message into
** memory obtained from sqlite3_malloc() and to make *pzErrMsg point to that
** error message.
*/
#endif
if( !IN_DECLARE_VTAB ){
- /* If the pParse->declareVtab flag is set, do not delete any table
+ /* If the pParse->declareVtab flag is set, do not delete any table
** structure built up in pParse->pNewTable. The calling code (see vtab.c)
** will take responsibility for freeing the Table structure.
*/
** (2) NORMAL We are in the middle of statement which ends with a single
** semicolon.
**
-** (3) EXPLAIN The keyword EXPLAIN has been seen at the beginning of
+** (3) EXPLAIN The keyword EXPLAIN has been seen at the beginning of
** a statement.
**
** (4) CREATE The keyword CREATE has been seen at the beginning of a
SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_temp_directory = 0;
/*
-** Initialize SQLite.
+** Initialize SQLite.
**
** This routine must be called to initialize the memory allocation,
** VFS, and mutex subsystems prior to doing any serious work with
** SQLite. But as long as you do not compile with SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINIT
** this routine will be called automatically by key routines such as
-** sqlite3_open().
+** sqlite3_open().
**
** This routine is a no-op except on its very first call for the process,
** or for the first call after a call to sqlite3_shutdown.
*/
if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.isInit ) return SQLITE_OK;
- /* Make sure the mutex subsystem is initialized. If unable to
+ /* Make sure the mutex subsystem is initialized. If unable to
** initialize the mutex subsystem, return early with the error.
** If the system is so sick that we are unable to allocate a mutex,
** there is not much SQLite is going to be able to do.
rc = sqlite3OsInit();
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
- sqlite3PCacheBufferSetup( sqlite3GlobalConfig.pPage,
+ sqlite3PCacheBufferSetup( sqlite3GlobalConfig.pPage,
sqlite3GlobalConfig.szPage, sqlite3GlobalConfig.nPage);
sqlite3GlobalConfig.isInit = 1;
}
switch( op ){
/* Mutex configuration options are only available in a threadsafe
- ** compile.
+ ** compile.
*/
#if defined(SQLITE_THREADSAFE) && SQLITE_THREADSAFE>0
case SQLITE_CONFIG_SINGLETHREAD: {
sqlite3GlobalConfig.nLookaside = va_arg(ap, int);
break;
}
-
+
/* Record a pointer to the logger funcction and its first argument.
** The default is NULL. Logging is disabled if the function pointer is
** NULL.
/*
** Set up the lookaside buffers for a database connection.
-** Return SQLITE_OK on success.
+** Return SQLITE_OK on success.
** If lookaside is already active, return SQLITE_BUSY.
**
** The sz parameter is the number of bytes in each lookaside slot.
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
/* Free any existing lookaside buffer for this handle before
- ** allocating a new one so we don't have to have space for
+ ** allocating a new one so we don't have to have space for
** both at the same time.
*/
if( db->lookaside.bMalloced ){
}
/*
-** Another built-in collating sequence: NOCASE.
+** Another built-in collating sequence: NOCASE.
**
** This collating sequence is intended to be used for "case independant
** comparison". SQLite's knowledge of upper and lower case equivalents
/* If there are any outstanding VMs, return SQLITE_BUSY. */
if( db->pVdbe ){
- sqlite3Error(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
+ sqlite3Error(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
"unable to close due to unfinalised statements");
sqlite3_mutex_leave(db->mutex);
return SQLITE_BUSY;
for(j=0; j<db->nDb; j++){
Btree *pBt = db->aDb[j].pBt;
if( pBt && sqlite3BtreeIsInBackup(pBt) ){
- sqlite3Error(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
+ sqlite3Error(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
"unable to close due to unfinished backup operation");
sqlite3_mutex_leave(db->mutex);
return SQLITE_BUSY;
/* The temp-database schema is allocated differently from the other schema
** objects (using sqliteMalloc() directly, instead of sqlite3BtreeSchema()).
** So it needs to be freed here. Todo: Why not roll the temp schema into
- ** the same sqliteMalloc() as the one that allocates the database
+ ** the same sqliteMalloc() as the one that allocates the database
** structure?
*/
sqlite3DbFree(db, db->aDb[1].pSchema);
}else{
p->nBusy++;
}
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
/*
** be invoked every nOps opcodes.
*/
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(
- sqlite3 *db,
+ sqlite3 *db,
int nOps,
- int (*xProgress)(void*),
+ int (*xProgress)(void*),
void *pArg
){
sqlite3_mutex_enter(db->mutex);
** This function is exactly the same as sqlite3_create_function(), except
** that it is designed to be called by internal code. The difference is
** that if a malloc() fails in sqlite3_create_function(), an error code
-** is returned and the mallocFailed flag cleared.
+** is returned and the mallocFailed flag cleared.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(
sqlite3 *db,
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
if( zFunctionName==0 ||
- (xFunc && (xFinal || xStep)) ||
+ (xFunc && (xFinal || xStep)) ||
(!xFunc && (xFinal && !xStep)) ||
(!xFunc && (!xFinal && xStep)) ||
(nArg<-1 || nArg>SQLITE_MAX_FUNCTION_ARG) ||
(255<(nName = sqlite3Strlen30( zFunctionName))) ){
return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
}
-
+
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
/* If SQLITE_UTF16 is specified as the encoding type, transform this
** to one of SQLITE_UTF16LE or SQLITE_UTF16BE using the
#else
enc = SQLITE_UTF8;
#endif
-
+
/* Check if an existing function is being overridden or deleted. If so,
** and there are active VMs, then return SQLITE_BUSY. If a function
** is being overridden/deleted but there are no active VMs, allow the
p = sqlite3FindFunction(db, zFunctionName, nName, nArg, (u8)enc, 0);
if( p && p->iPrefEnc==enc && p->nArg==nArg ){
if( db->activeVdbeCnt ){
- sqlite3Error(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
+ sqlite3Error(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
"unable to delete/modify user-function due to active statements");
assert( !db->mallocFailed );
return SQLITE_BUSY;
**
** If the function already exists as a regular global function, then
** this routine is a no-op. If the function does not exist, then create
-** a new one that always throws a run-time error.
+** a new one that always throws a run-time error.
**
** When virtual tables intend to provide an overloaded function, they
** should call this routine to make sure the global function exists.
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE
/*
** Register a trace function. The pArg from the previously registered trace
-** is returned.
+** is returned.
**
** A NULL trace function means that no tracing is executes. A non-NULL
** trace is a pointer to a function that is invoked at the start of each
return pOld;
}
/*
-** Register a profile function. The pArg from the previously registered
-** profile function is returned.
+** Register a profile function. The pArg from the previously registered
+** profile function is returned.
**
** A NULL profile function means that no profiling is executes. A non-NULL
** profile is a pointer to a function that is invoked at the conclusion of
){
int btFlags = 0;
int rc;
-
+
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
assert( ppBtree != 0);
if( omitJournal ){
/* If the B-Tree was successfully opened, set the pager-cache size to the
** default value. Except, if the call to BtreeOpen() returned a handle
- ** open on an existing shared pager-cache, do not change the pager-cache
+ ** open on an existing shared pager-cache, do not change the pager-cache
** size.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && 0==sqlite3BtreeSchema(*ppBtree, 0, 0) ){
'o', 'u', 't', ' ', 'o', 'f', ' ', 'm', 'e', 'm', 'o', 'r', 'y', 0
};
static const u16 misuse[] = {
- 'l', 'i', 'b', 'r', 'a', 'r', 'y', ' ',
- 'r', 'o', 'u', 't', 'i', 'n', 'e', ' ',
- 'c', 'a', 'l', 'l', 'e', 'd', ' ',
- 'o', 'u', 't', ' ',
- 'o', 'f', ' ',
+ 'l', 'i', 'b', 'r', 'a', 'r', 'y', ' ',
+ 'r', 'o', 'u', 't', 'i', 'n', 'e', ' ',
+ 'c', 'a', 'l', 'l', 'e', 'd', ' ',
+ 'o', 'u', 't', ' ',
+ 'o', 'f', ' ',
's', 'e', 'q', 'u', 'e', 'n', 'c', 'e', 0
};
*/
static int createCollation(
sqlite3* db,
- const char *zName,
+ const char *zName,
u8 enc,
u8 collType,
void* pCtx,
CollSeq *pColl;
int enc2;
int nName = sqlite3Strlen30(zName);
-
+
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
/* If SQLITE_UTF16 is specified as the encoding type, transform this
return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
}
- /* Check if this call is removing or replacing an existing collation
+ /* Check if this call is removing or replacing an existing collation
** sequence. If so, and there are active VMs, return busy. If there
** are no active VMs, invalidate any pre-compiled statements.
*/
pColl = sqlite3FindCollSeq(db, (u8)enc2, zName, 0);
if( pColl && pColl->xCmp ){
if( db->activeVdbeCnt ){
- sqlite3Error(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
+ sqlite3Error(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
"unable to delete/modify collation sequence due to active statements");
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
** then any copies made by synthCollSeq() need to be invalidated.
** Also, collation destructor - CollSeq.xDel() - function may need
** to be called.
- */
+ */
if( (pColl->enc & ~SQLITE_UTF16_ALIGNED)==enc2 ){
CollSeq *aColl = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aCollSeq, zName, nName);
int j;
/*
** This routine does the work of opening a database on behalf of
-** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open16(). The database filename "zFilename"
+** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open16(). The database filename "zFilename"
** is UTF-8 encoded.
*/
static int openDatabase(
flags &= ~( SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE |
SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB |
- SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB |
- SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB |
- SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL |
- SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL |
- SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL |
SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL |
SQLITE_OPEN_NOMUTEX |
SQLITE_OPEN_FULLMUTEX
/* Open the backend database driver */
db->openFlags = flags;
- rc = sqlite3BtreeFactory(db, zFilename, 0, SQLITE_DEFAULT_CACHE_SIZE,
+ rc = sqlite3BtreeFactory(db, zFilename, 0, SQLITE_DEFAULT_CACHE_SIZE,
flags | SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB,
&db->aDb[0].pBt);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
/* The default safety_level for the main database is 'full'; for the temp
- ** database it is 'NONE'. This matches the pager layer defaults.
+ ** database it is 'NONE'. This matches the pager layer defaults.
*/
db->aDb[0].zName = "main";
db->aDb[0].safety_level = 3;
** Open a new database handle.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open(
- const char *zFilename,
- sqlite3 **ppDb
+ const char *zFilename,
+ sqlite3 **ppDb
){
return openDatabase(zFilename, ppDb,
SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE, 0);
** Open a new database handle.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open16(
- const void *zFilename,
+ const void *zFilename,
sqlite3 **ppDb
){
char const *zFilename8; /* zFilename encoded in UTF-8 instead of UTF-16 */
** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation(
- sqlite3* db,
- const char *zName,
- int enc,
+ sqlite3* db,
+ const char *zName,
+ int enc,
void* pCtx,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
){
** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation_v2(
- sqlite3* db,
- const char *zName,
- int enc,
+ sqlite3* db,
+ const char *zName,
+ int enc,
void* pCtx,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*),
void(*xDel)(void*)
** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation16(
- sqlite3* db,
+ sqlite3* db,
const void *zName,
- int enc,
+ int enc,
void* pCtx,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
){
** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed(
- sqlite3 *db,
- void *pCollNeededArg,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ void *pCollNeededArg,
void(*xCollNeeded)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const char*)
){
sqlite3_mutex_enter(db->mutex);
** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed16(
- sqlite3 *db,
- void *pCollNeededArg,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ void *pCollNeededArg,
void(*xCollNeeded16)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const void*)
){
sqlite3_mutex_enter(db->mutex);
/* The following block stores the meta information that will be returned
** to the caller in local variables zDataType, zCollSeq, notnull, primarykey
** and autoinc. At this point there are two possibilities:
- **
- ** 1. The specified column name was rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_"
- ** and there is no explicitly declared IPK column.
**
- ** 2. The table is not a view and the column name identified an
+ ** 1. The specified column name was rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_"
+ ** and there is no explicitly declared IPK column.
+ **
+ ** 2. The table is not a view and the column name identified an
** explicitly declared column. Copy meta information from *pCol.
- */
+ */
if( pCol ){
zDataType = pCol->zType;
zCollSeq = pCol->zColl;
pVfs = sqlite3_vfs_find(0);
if( pVfs==0 ) return 0;
- /* This function works in milliseconds, but the underlying OsSleep()
+ /* This function works in milliseconds, but the underlying OsSleep()
** API uses microseconds. Hence the 1000's.
*/
rc = (sqlite3OsSleep(pVfs, 1000*ms)/1000);
}
}
sqlite3_mutex_leave(db->mutex);
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
/*
/*
** sqlite3_test_control(BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS, xBegin, xEnd)
**
- ** Register hooks to call to indicate which malloc() failures
+ ** Register hooks to call to indicate which malloc() failures
** are benign.
*/
case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS: {
** This action provides a run-time test to see how the ALWAYS and
** NEVER macros were defined at compile-time.
**
- ** The return value is ALWAYS(X).
+ ** The return value is ALWAYS(X).
**
** The recommended test is X==2. If the return value is 2, that means
** ALWAYS() and NEVER() are both no-op pass-through macros, which is the
/* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZATIONS, sqlite3 *db, int N)
**
- ** Enable or disable various optimizations for testing purposes. The
+ ** Enable or disable various optimizations for testing purposes. The
** argument N is a bitmask of optimizations to be disabled. For normal
** operation N should be 0. The idea is that a test program (like the
** SQL Logic Test or SLT test module) can run the same SQL multiple times
**
** If zWord is a keyword recognized by the parser, then return the
** number of keywords. Or if zWord is not a keyword, return 0.
- **
+ **
** This test feature is only available in the amalgamation since
** the SQLITE_N_KEYWORD macro is not defined in this file if SQLite
** is built using separate source files.
rc = (sqlite3KeywordCode((u8*)zWord, n)!=TK_ID) ? SQLITE_N_KEYWORD : 0;
break;
}
-#endif
+#endif
}
va_end(ap);
#ifndef NDEBUG
/*
-** This function is a complex assert() that verifies the following
+** This function is a complex assert() that verifies the following
** properties of the blocked connections list:
**
-** 1) Each entry in the list has a non-NULL value for either
+** 1) Each entry in the list has a non-NULL value for either
** pUnlockConnection or pBlockingConnection, or both.
**
-** 2) All entries in the list that share a common value for
+** 2) All entries in the list that share a common value for
** xUnlockNotify are grouped together.
**
** 3) If the argument db is not NULL, then none of the entries in the
sqlite3 **pp;
assertMutexHeld();
for(
- pp=&sqlite3BlockedList;
- *pp && (*pp)->xUnlockNotify!=db->xUnlockNotify;
+ pp=&sqlite3BlockedList;
+ *pp && (*pp)->xUnlockNotify!=db->xUnlockNotify;
pp=&(*pp)->pNextBlocked
);
db->pNextBlocked = *pp;
db->xUnlockNotify = 0;
db->pUnlockArg = 0;
}else if( 0==db->pBlockingConnection ){
- /* The blocking transaction has been concluded. Or there never was a
+ /* The blocking transaction has been concluded. Or there never was a
** blocking transaction. In either case, invoke the notify callback
- ** immediately.
+ ** immediately.
*/
xNotify(&pArg, 1);
}else{
}
/*
-** This function is called while stepping or preparing a statement
+** This function is called while stepping or preparing a statement
** associated with connection db. The operation will return SQLITE_LOCKED
** to the user because it requires a lock that will not be available
** until connection pBlocker concludes its current transaction.
/*
** This function is called when
-** the transaction opened by database db has just finished. Locks held
+** the transaction opened by database db has just finished. Locks held
** by database connection db have been released.
**
** This function loops through each entry in the blocked connections
}else{
/* This occurs when the array of context pointers that need to
** be passed to the unlock-notify callback is larger than the
- ** aStatic[] array allocated on the stack and the attempt to
+ ** aStatic[] array allocated on the stack and the attempt to
** allocate a larger array from the heap has failed.
**
** This is a difficult situation to handle. Returning an error
** is returned the transaction on connection db will still be
** closed and the unlock-notify callbacks on blocked connections
** will go unissued. This might cause the application to wait
- ** indefinitely for an unlock-notify callback that will never
+ ** indefinitely for an unlock-notify callback that will never
** arrive.
**
** Instead, invoke the unlock-notify callback with the context
** array already accumulated. We can then clear the array and
- ** begin accumulating any further context pointers without
+ ** begin accumulating any further context pointers without
** requiring any dynamic allocation. This is sub-optimal because
** it means that instead of one callback with a large array of
** context pointers the application will receive two or more
** callbacks with smaller arrays of context pointers, which will
- ** reduce the applications ability to prioritize multiple
+ ** reduce the applications ability to prioritize multiple
** connections. But it is the best that can be done under the
** circumstances.
*/
}
/*
-** This is called when the database connection passed as an argument is
+** This is called when the database connection passed as an argument is
** being closed. The connection is removed from the blocked list.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){
**
** Here, array { X } means zero or more occurrences of X, adjacent in
** memory. A "position" is an index of a token in the token stream
-** generated by the tokenizer. Note that POS_END and POS_COLUMN occur
+** generated by the tokenizer. Note that POS_END and POS_COLUMN occur
** in the same logical place as the position element, and act as sentinals
** ending a position list array. POS_END is 0. POS_COLUMN is 1.
** The positions numbers are not stored literally but rather as two more
#ifndef _FTSINT_H
#define _FTSINT_H
-#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
+#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
# define NDEBUG 1
#endif
** When an fts3 table is created, it passes any arguments passed to
** the tokenizer clause of the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement to the
** sqlite3_tokenizer_module.xCreate() function of the requested tokenizer
-** implementation. The xCreate() function in turn returns an
+** implementation. The xCreate() function in turn returns an
** sqlite3_tokenizer structure representing the specific tokenizer to
** be used for the fts3 table (customized by the tokenizer clause arguments).
**
** then argc is set to 2, and the argv[] array contains pointers
** to the strings "arg1" and "arg2".
**
- ** This method should return either SQLITE_OK (0), or an SQLite error
+ ** This method should return either SQLITE_OK (0), or an SQLite error
** code. If SQLITE_OK is returned, then *ppTokenizer should be set
** to point at the newly created tokenizer structure. The generic
** sqlite3_tokenizer.pModule variable should not be initialised by
/*
** Create a tokenizer cursor to tokenize an input buffer. The caller
** is responsible for ensuring that the input buffer remains valid
- ** until the cursor is closed (using the xClose() method).
+ ** until the cursor is closed (using the xClose() method).
*/
int (*xOpen)(
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer, /* Tokenizer object */
);
/*
- ** Destroy an existing tokenizer cursor. The fts3 module calls this
+ ** Destroy an existing tokenizer cursor. The fts3 module calls this
** method exactly once for each successful call to xOpen().
*/
int (*xClose)(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor);
** "OUT" variables identified below, or SQLITE_DONE to indicate that
** the end of the buffer has been reached, or an SQLite error code.
**
- ** *ppToken should be set to point at a buffer containing the
+ ** *ppToken should be set to point at a buffer containing the
** normalized version of the token (i.e. after any case-folding and/or
** stemming has been performed). *pnBytes should be set to the length
** of this buffer in bytes. The input text that generated the token is
**
** The buffer *ppToken is set to point at is managed by the tokenizer
** implementation. It is only required to be valid until the next call
- ** to xNext() or xClose().
+ ** to xNext() or xClose().
*/
/* TODO(shess) current implementation requires pInput to be
** nul-terminated. This should either be fixed, or pInput/nBytes
} *ht;
};
-/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following
+/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following
** structure. All elements are stored on a single doubly-linked list.
**
** Again, this structure is intended to be opaque, but it can't really
** (including the null-terminator, if any). Case
** is respected in comparisons.
**
-** FTS3_HASH_BINARY pKey points to binary data nKey bytes long.
+** FTS3_HASH_BINARY pKey points to binary data nKey bytes long.
** memcmp() is used to compare keys.
**
-** A copy of the key is made if the copyKey parameter to fts3HashInit is 1.
+** A copy of the key is made if the copyKey parameter to fts3HashInit is 1.
*/
#define FTS3_HASH_STRING 1
#define FTS3_HASH_BINARY 2
#define FTS3_MERGE_COUNT 16
/*
-** This is the maximum amount of data (in bytes) to store in the
+** This is the maximum amount of data (in bytes) to store in the
** Fts3Table.pendingTerms hash table. Normally, the hash table is
** populated as documents are inserted/updated/deleted in a transaction
** and used to create a new segment when the transaction is committed.
-** However if this limit is reached midway through a transaction, a new
+** However if this limit is reached midway through a transaction, a new
** segment is created and the hash table cleared immediately.
*/
#define FTS3_MAX_PENDING_DATA (1*1024*1024)
/*
** This section provides definitions to allow the
-** FTS3 extension to be compiled outside of the
+** FTS3 extension to be compiled outside of the
** amalgamation.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_AMALGAMATION
char **azColumn; /* column names. malloced */
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer; /* tokenizer for inserts and queries */
- /* Precompiled statements used by the implementation. Each of these
- ** statements is run and reset within a single virtual table API call.
+ /* Precompiled statements used by the implementation. Each of these
+ ** statements is run and reset within a single virtual table API call.
*/
sqlite3_stmt *aStmt[25];
/* Pointer to string containing the SQL:
**
- ** "SELECT block FROM %_segments WHERE blockid BETWEEN ? AND ?
+ ** "SELECT block FROM %_segments WHERE blockid BETWEEN ? AND ?
** ORDER BY blockid"
*/
char *zSelectLeaves;
u8 bHasDocsize; /* True if %_docsize table exists */
/* The following hash table is used to buffer pending index updates during
- ** transactions. Variable nPendingData estimates the memory size of the
- ** pending data, including hash table overhead, but not malloc overhead.
- ** When nPendingData exceeds nMaxPendingData, the buffer is flushed
+ ** transactions. Variable nPendingData estimates the memory size of the
+ ** pending data, including hash table overhead, but not malloc overhead.
+ ** When nPendingData exceeds nMaxPendingData, the buffer is flushed
** automatically. Variable iPrevDocid is the docid of the most recently
** inserted record.
*/
**
** CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE ex1 USING fts3(a,b,c,d);
** SELECT docid FROM ex1 WHERE b MATCH 'one two three';
-**
+**
** Because the LHS of the MATCH operator is 2nd column "b",
** Fts3Cursor.eSearch will be set to FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH+1. (+0 for a,
-** +1 for b, +2 for c, +3 for d.) If the LHS of MATCH were "ex1"
+** +1 for b, +2 for c, +3 for d.) If the LHS of MATCH were "ex1"
** indicating that all columns should be searched,
** then eSearch would be set to FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH+4.
*/
** A tree of these objects forms the RHS of a MATCH operator.
**
** If Fts3Expr.eType is either FTSQUERY_NEAR or FTSQUERY_PHRASE and isLoaded
-** is true, then aDoclist points to a malloced buffer, size nDoclist bytes,
+** is true, then aDoclist points to a malloced buffer, size nDoclist bytes,
** containing the results of the NEAR or phrase query in FTS3 doclist
** format. As usual, the initial "Length" field found in doclists stored
** on disk is omitted from this buffer.
/*
** Candidate values for Fts3Query.eType. Note that the order of the first
-** four values is in order of precedence when parsing expressions. For
+** four values is in order of precedence when parsing expressions. For
** example, the following:
**
** "a OR b AND c NOT d NEAR e"
/* fts3_init.c */
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3DeleteVtab(int, sqlite3_vtab *);
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitVtab(int, sqlite3*, void*, int, const char*const*,
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitVtab(int, sqlite3*, void*, int, const char*const*,
sqlite3_vtab **, char **);
/* fts3_write.c */
/* fts3_tokenizer.c */
SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3Fts3NextToken(const char *, int *);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable(sqlite3 *, Fts3Hash *, const char *);
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(Fts3Hash *pHash,
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(Fts3Hash *pHash,
const char *, sqlite3_tokenizer **, const char **, char **
);
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Matchinfo(sqlite3_context *, Fts3Cursor *);
/* fts3_expr.c */
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3ExprParse(sqlite3_tokenizer *,
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3ExprParse(sqlite3_tokenizer *,
char **, int, int, const char *, int, Fts3Expr **
);
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3ExprFree(Fts3Expr *);
/************** Continuing where we left off in fts3.c ***********************/
-#ifndef SQLITE_CORE
+#ifndef SQLITE_CORE
SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT1
#endif
-/*
+/*
** Write a 64-bit variable-length integer to memory starting at p[0].
** The length of data written will be between 1 and FTS3_VARINT_MAX bytes.
** The number of bytes written is returned.
return (int) (q - (unsigned char *)p);
}
-/*
+/*
** Read a 64-bit variable-length integer from memory starting at p[0].
** Return the number of bytes read, or 0 on error.
** The value is stored in *v.
int iOut = 0; /* Index of next byte to write to output */
/* If the first byte was a '[', then the close-quote character is a ']' */
- if( quote=='[' ) quote = ']';
+ if( quote=='[' ) quote = ']';
while( ALWAYS(z[iIn]) ){
if( z[iIn]==quote ){
if( zContentCols==0 ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
/* Create the content table */
- fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
+ fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
"CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_content'(%s)",
p->zDb, p->zName, zContentCols
);
sqlite3_free(zContentCols);
}
/* Create other tables */
- fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
+ fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
"CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_segments'(blockid INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, block BLOB);",
p->zDb, p->zName
);
- fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
+ fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
"CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_segdir'("
"level INTEGER,"
"idx INTEGER,"
p->zDb, p->zName
);
if( p->bHasDocsize ){
- fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
+ fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
"CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_docsize'(docid INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, size BLOB);",
p->zDb, p->zName
);
- fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
+ fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
"CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_stat'(id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, value BLOB);",
p->zDb, p->zName
);
zSql = sqlite3_mprintf(
"SELECT 1 FROM %Q.sqlite_master WHERE name='%q%s'",
zDb, zName, zSuffix
- );
+ );
rc = sqlite3_exec(db, zSql, fts3TableExistsCallback, &res, 0);
sqlite3_free(zSql);
*pResult = res & 0xff;
iCol = 0;
for(i=3; i<argc; i++){
if( argv[i]!=zTokenizer ){
- char *z;
+ char *z;
int n;
z = (char *)sqlite3Fts3NextToken(argv[i], &n);
memcpy(zCsr, z, n);
p->azColumn[0] = "content";
}
- /* If this is an xCreate call, create the underlying tables in the
+ /* If this is an xCreate call, create the underlying tables in the
** database. TODO: For xConnect(), it could verify that said tables exist.
*/
if( isCreate ){
return fts3InitVtab(1, db, pAux, argc, argv, ppVtab, pzErr);
}
-/*
+/*
** Implementation of the xBestIndex method for FTS3 tables. There
** are three possible strategies, in order of preference:
**
-** 1. Direct lookup by rowid or docid.
+** 1. Direct lookup by rowid or docid.
** 2. Full-text search using a MATCH operator on a non-docid column.
** 3. Linear scan of %_content table.
*/
int iCons = -1; /* Index of constraint to use */
/* By default use a full table scan. This is an expensive option,
- ** so search through the constraints to see if a more efficient
+ ** so search through the constraints to see if a more efficient
** strategy is possible.
*/
pInfo->idxNum = FTS3_FULLSCAN_SEARCH;
if( pCons->usable==0 ) continue;
/* A direct lookup on the rowid or docid column. Assign a cost of 1.0. */
- if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ
+ if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ
&& (pCons->iColumn<0 || pCons->iColumn==p->nColumn+1 )
){
pInfo->idxNum = FTS3_DOCID_SEARCH;
**
** If there is more than one MATCH constraint available, use the first
** one encountered. If there is both a MATCH constraint and a direct
- ** rowid/docid lookup, prefer the MATCH strategy. This is done even
+ ** rowid/docid lookup, prefer the MATCH strategy. This is done even
** though the rowid/docid lookup is faster than a MATCH query, selecting
- ** it would lead to an "unable to use function MATCH in the requested
+ ** it would lead to an "unable to use function MATCH in the requested
** context" error.
*/
- if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH
+ if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH
&& pCons->iColumn>=0 && pCons->iColumn<=p->nColumn
){
pInfo->idxNum = FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH + pCons->iColumn;
if( iCons>=0 ){
pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iCons].argvIndex = 1;
pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iCons].omit = 1;
- }
+ }
return SQLITE_OK;
}
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab);
/* Allocate a buffer large enough for an Fts3Cursor structure. If the
- ** allocation succeeds, zero it and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise,
+ ** allocation succeeds, zero it and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise,
** if the allocation fails, return SQLITE_NOMEM.
*/
*ppCsr = pCsr = (sqlite3_vtab_cursor *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(Fts3Cursor));
** The buffer pointed to by argument zNode (size nNode bytes) contains the
** root node of a b-tree segment. The segment is guaranteed to be at least
** one level high (i.e. the root node is not also a leaf). If successful,
-** this function locates the leaf node of the segment that may contain the
-** term specified by arguments zTerm and nTerm and writes its block number
+** this function locates the leaf node of the segment that may contain the
+** term specified by arguments zTerm and nTerm and writes its block number
** to *piLeaf.
**
** It is possible that the returned leaf node does not contain the specified
** to be sure.
**
** If an error occurs, an error code other than SQLITE_OK is returned.
-*/
+*/
static int fts3SelectLeaf(
Fts3Table *p, /* Virtual table handle */
const char *zTerm, /* Term to select leaves for */
zCsr += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint32(zCsr, &iHeight);
zCsr += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(zCsr, &iChild);
-
+
while( zCsr<zEnd ){
int cmp; /* memcmp() result */
int nSuffix; /* Size of term suffix */
int nPrefix = 0; /* Size of term prefix */
int nBuffer; /* Total term size */
-
+
/* Load the next term on the node into zBuffer */
if( !isFirstTerm ){
zCsr += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint32(zCsr, &nPrefix);
memcpy(&zBuffer[nPrefix], zCsr, nSuffix);
nBuffer = nPrefix + nSuffix;
zCsr += nSuffix;
-
+
/* Compare the term we are searching for with the term just loaded from
** the interior node. If the specified term is greater than or equal
- ** to the term from the interior node, then all terms on the sub-tree
- ** headed by node iChild are smaller than zTerm. No need to search
+ ** to the term from the interior node, then all terms on the sub-tree
+ ** headed by node iChild are smaller than zTerm. No need to search
** iChild.
**
** If the interior node term is larger than the specified term, then
}
/*
-** This function is used to create delta-encoded serialized lists of FTS3
+** This function is used to create delta-encoded serialized lists of FTS3
** varints. Each call to this function appends a single varint to a list.
*/
static void fts3PutDeltaVarint(
}
/*
-** When this function is called, *ppPoslist is assumed to point to the
+** When this function is called, *ppPoslist is assumed to point to the
** start of a position-list. After it returns, *ppPoslist points to the
** first byte after the position-list.
**
char *pEnd = *ppPoslist;
char c = 0;
- /* The end of a position list is marked by a zero encoded as an FTS3
+ /* The end of a position list is marked by a zero encoded as an FTS3
** varint. A single 0x00 byte. Except, if the 0x00 byte is preceded by
** a byte with the 0x80 bit set, then it is not a varint 0, but the tail
** of some other, multi-byte, value.
**
- ** The following block moves pEnd to point to the first byte that is not
+ ** The following block moves pEnd to point to the first byte that is not
** immediately preceded by a byte with the 0x80 bit set. Then increments
** pEnd once more so that it points to the byte immediately following the
** last byte in the position-list.
** being parsed, or it may point to 1 byte past the end of the offset-list
** (in which case **pp will be 0x00 or 0x01).
**
-** If *pp points past the end of the current offset list, set *pi to
+** If *pp points past the end of the current offset list, set *pi to
** OFFSET_LIST_END and return. Otherwise, read the next varint from *pp,
** increment the current value of *pi by the value read, and set *pp to
** point to the next value before returning.
/*
** If parameter iCol is not 0, write an 0x01 byte followed by the value of
-** iCol encoded as a varint to *pp.
+** iCol encoded as a varint to *pp.
**
-** Set *pp to point to the byte just after the last byte written before
+** Set *pp to point to the byte just after the last byte written before
** returning (do not modify it if iCol==0). Return the total number of bytes
** written (0 if iCol==0).
*/
p2 += n;
/* At this point, both p1 and p2 point to the start of offset-lists.
- ** An offset-list is a list of non-negative delta-encoded varints, each
- ** incremented by 2 before being stored. Each list is terminated by a 0
+ ** An offset-list is a list of non-negative delta-encoded varints, each
+ ** incremented by 2 before being stored. Each list is terminated by a 0
** or 1 value (0x00 or 0x01). The following block merges the two lists
** and writes the results to buffer p. p is left pointing to the byte
** after the list written. No terminator (0x00 or 0x01) is written to
fts3GetDeltaVarint(&p1, &i1);
fts3GetDeltaVarint(&p2, &i2);
do {
- fts3PutDeltaVarint(&p, &iPrev, (i1<i2) ? i1 : i2);
+ fts3PutDeltaVarint(&p, &iPrev, (i1<i2) ? i1 : i2);
iPrev -= 2;
if( i1==i2 ){
fts3ReadNextPos(&p1, &i1);
int iCol1 = 0;
int iCol2 = 0;
assert( *p1!=0 && *p2!=0 );
- if( *p1==0x01 ){
+ if( *p1==0x01 ){
p1++;
p1 += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint32(p1, &iCol1);
}
- if( *p2==0x01 ){
+ if( *p2==0x01 ){
p2++;
p2 += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint32(p2, &iCol2);
}
/* Advance pointer p1 or p2 (whichever corresponds to the smaller of
** iCol1 and iCol2) so that it points to either the 0x00 that marks the
- ** end of the position list, or the 0x01 that precedes the next
- ** column-number in the position list.
+ ** end of the position list, or the 0x01 that precedes the next
+ ** column-number in the position list.
*/
else if( iCol1<iCol2 ){
fts3ColumnlistCopy(0, &p1);
char *pEnd1 = &a1[n1];
char *pEnd2 = &a2[n2];
- assert( mergetype==MERGE_OR || mergetype==MERGE_POS_OR
+ assert( mergetype==MERGE_OR || mergetype==MERGE_POS_OR
|| mergetype==MERGE_AND || mergetype==MERGE_NOT
|| mergetype==MERGE_PHRASE || mergetype==MERGE_POS_PHRASE
|| mergetype==MERGE_NEAR || mergetype==MERGE_POS_NEAR
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-/*
-** A pointer to an instance of this structure is used as the context
+/*
+** A pointer to an instance of this structure is used as the context
** argument to sqlite3Fts3SegReaderIterate()
*/
typedef struct TermSelect TermSelect;
/*
** This function retreives the doclist for the specified term (or term
-** prefix) from the database.
+** prefix) from the database.
**
-** The returned doclist may be in one of two formats, depending on the
+** The returned doclist may be in one of two formats, depending on the
** value of parameter isReqPos. If isReqPos is zero, then the doclist is
-** a sorted list of delta-compressed docids. If isReqPos is non-zero,
+** a sorted list of delta-compressed docids. If isReqPos is non-zero,
** then the returned list is in the same format as is stored in the
** database without the found length specifier at the start of on-disk
** doclists.
if( sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 1)==0 ){
/* The entire segment is stored on the root node (which must be a
** leaf). Do not bother inspecting any data in this case, just
- ** create a Fts3SegReader to scan the single leaf.
+ ** create a Fts3SegReader to scan the single leaf.
*/
rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderNew(p, iAge, 0, 0, 0, zRoot, nRoot, &pNew);
}else{
/* The following call to ReadBlock() serves to reset the SQL statement
** used to retrieve blocks of data from the %_segments table. If it is
- ** not reset here, then it may remain classified as an active statement
- ** by SQLite, which may lead to "DROP TABLE" or "DETACH" commands
+ ** not reset here, then it may remain classified as an active statement
+ ** by SQLite, which may lead to "DROP TABLE" or "DETACH" commands
** failing.
- */
+ */
rc2 = sqlite3Fts3ReadBlock(p, 0, 0, 0);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = rc2;
memset(&tsc, 0, sizeof(TermSelect));
tsc.isReqPos = isReqPos;
- filter.flags = FTS3_SEGMENT_IGNORE_EMPTY
+ filter.flags = FTS3_SEGMENT_IGNORE_EMPTY
| (isPrefix ? FTS3_SEGMENT_PREFIX : 0)
| (isReqPos ? FTS3_SEGMENT_REQUIRE_POS : 0)
| (iColumn<p->nColumn ? FTS3_SEGMENT_COLUMN_FILTER : 0);
}
-/*
+/*
** Return a DocList corresponding to the phrase *pPhrase.
*/
static int fts3PhraseSelect(
if( aOut==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
}else{
- rc = fts3DoclistMerge(mergetype, nNear+nTokenRight, nNear+nTokenLeft,
+ rc = fts3DoclistMerge(mergetype, nNear+nTokenRight, nNear+nTokenLeft,
aOut, pnOut, aLeft, nLeft, aRight, nRight
);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
char *aOut;
int nOut;
- rc = fts3NearMerge(MERGE_POS_NEAR, nNear,
+ rc = fts3NearMerge(MERGE_POS_NEAR, nNear,
pLeft->pPhrase->nToken, pLeft->aDoclist, pLeft->nDoclist,
pRight->pPhrase->nToken, pRight->aDoclist, pRight->nDoclist,
&aOut, &nOut
pRight->aDoclist = aOut;
pRight->nDoclist = nOut;
- rc = fts3NearMerge(MERGE_POS_NEAR, nNear,
+ rc = fts3NearMerge(MERGE_POS_NEAR, nNear,
pRight->pPhrase->nToken, pRight->aDoclist, pRight->nDoclist,
pLeft->pPhrase->nToken, pLeft->aDoclist, pLeft->nDoclist,
&aOut, &nOut
*pnOut = 0;
if( pExpr ){
- assert( pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE
- || pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR
+ assert( pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE
+ || pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR
|| isReqPos==0
);
if( pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE ){
- rc = fts3PhraseSelect(p, pExpr->pPhrase,
+ rc = fts3PhraseSelect(p, pExpr->pPhrase,
isReqPos || (pExpr->pParent && pExpr->pParent->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR),
paOut, pnOut
);
if( 0==(rc = evalFts3Expr(p, pExpr->pRight, &aRight, &nRight, isReqPos))
&& 0==(rc = evalFts3Expr(p, pExpr->pLeft, &aLeft, &nLeft, isReqPos))
){
- assert( pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR || pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_OR
+ assert( pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR || pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_OR
|| pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_AND || pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NOT
);
switch( pExpr->eType ){
Fts3Expr *pLeft;
Fts3Expr *pRight;
int mergetype = isReqPos ? MERGE_POS_NEAR : MERGE_NEAR;
-
+
if( pExpr->pParent && pExpr->pParent->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR ){
mergetype = MERGE_POS_NEAR;
}
pLeft = pExpr->pLeft;
- while( pLeft->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR ){
+ while( pLeft->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR ){
pLeft=pLeft->pRight;
}
pRight = pExpr->pRight;
assert( pRight->eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE );
assert( pLeft->eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE );
- rc = fts3NearMerge(mergetype, pExpr->nNear,
+ rc = fts3NearMerge(mergetype, pExpr->nNear,
pLeft->pPhrase->nToken, aLeft, nLeft,
pRight->pPhrase->nToken, aRight, nRight,
paOut, pnOut
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
- rc = sqlite3Fts3ExprParse(p->pTokenizer, p->azColumn, p->nColumn,
+ rc = sqlite3Fts3ExprParse(p->pTokenizer, p->azColumn, p->nColumn,
iCol, zQuery, -1, &pCsr->pExpr
);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
return fts3NextMethod(pCursor);
}
-/*
-** This is the xEof method of the virtual table. SQLite calls this
+/*
+** This is the xEof method of the virtual table. SQLite calls this
** routine to find out if it has reached the end of a result set.
*/
static int fts3EofMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
return ((Fts3Cursor *)pCursor)->isEof;
}
-/*
+/*
** This is the xRowid method. The SQLite core calls this routine to
** retrieve the rowid for the current row of the result set. fts3
** exposes %_content.docid as the rowid for the virtual table. The
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-/*
+/*
** This is the xColumn method, called by SQLite to request a value from
** the row that the supplied cursor currently points to.
*/
assert( iCol>=0 && iCol<=p->nColumn+1 );
if( iCol==p->nColumn+1 ){
- /* This call is a request for the "docid" column. Since "docid" is an
+ /* This call is a request for the "docid" column. Since "docid" is an
** alias for "rowid", use the xRowid() method to obtain the value.
*/
sqlite3_int64 iRowid;
return rc;
}
-/*
-** This function is the implementation of the xUpdate callback used by
+/*
+** This function is the implementation of the xUpdate callback used by
** FTS3 virtual tables. It is invoked by SQLite each time a row is to be
** inserted, updated or deleted.
*/
** offsets() and optimize() SQL functions.
**
** If the value passed as the third argument is a blob of size
-** sizeof(Fts3Cursor*), then the blob contents are copied to the
+** sizeof(Fts3Cursor*), then the blob contents are copied to the
** output variable *ppCsr and SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise, an error
** message is written to context pContext and SQLITE_ERROR returned. The
** string passed via zFunc is used as part of the error message.
Fts3Cursor **ppCsr /* OUT: Store cursor handle here */
){
Fts3Cursor *pRet;
- if( sqlite3_value_type(pVal)!=SQLITE_BLOB
+ if( sqlite3_value_type(pVal)!=SQLITE_BLOB
|| sqlite3_value_bytes(pVal)!=sizeof(Fts3Cursor *)
){
char *zErr = sqlite3_mprintf("illegal first argument to %s", zFunc);
assert( nVal>=1 );
if( nVal>6 ){
- sqlite3_result_error(pContext,
+ sqlite3_result_error(pContext,
"wrong number of arguments to function snippet()", -1);
return;
}
}
}
-/*
-** Implementation of the special optimize() function for FTS3. This
+/*
+** Implementation of the special optimize() function for FTS3. This
** function merges all segments in the database to a single segment.
** Example usage is:
**
Fts3Table *p = (Fts3Table *)pVtab;
sqlite3 *db; /* Database connection */
int rc; /* Return Code */
-
+
db = p->db;
rc = SQLITE_OK;
fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
/* Load the built-in tokenizers into the hash table */
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
if( sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "simple", 7, (void *)pSimple)
- || sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "porter", 7, (void *)pPorter)
+ || sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "porter", 7, (void *)pPorter)
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ICU
|| (pIcu && sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "icu", 4, (void *)pIcu))
#endif
}
#endif
- /* Create the virtual table wrapper around the hash-table and overload
+ /* Create the virtual table wrapper around the hash-table and overload
** the two scalar functions. If this is successful, register the
** module with sqlite.
*/
- if( SQLITE_OK==rc
+ if( SQLITE_OK==rc
&& SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable(db, pHash, "fts3_tokenizer"))
&& SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3_overload_function(db, "snippet", -1))
&& SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3_overload_function(db, "offsets", 1))
#if !SQLITE_CORE
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_extension_init(
- sqlite3 *db,
+ sqlite3 *db,
char **pzErrMsg,
const sqlite3_api_routines *pApi
){
******************************************************************************
**
** This module contains code that implements a parser for fts3 query strings
-** (the right-hand argument to the MATCH operator). Because the supported
+** (the right-hand argument to the MATCH operator). Because the supported
** syntax is relatively simple, the whole tokenizer/parser system is
-** hand-coded.
+** hand-coded.
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3)
/*
-** By default, this module parses the legacy syntax that has been
+** By default, this module parses the legacy syntax that has been
** traditionally used by fts3. Or, if SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_PARENTHESIS
** is defined, then it uses the new syntax. The differences between
** the new and the old syntaxes are:
**
** b) The new syntax supports the AND and NOT operators. The old does not.
**
-** c) The old syntax supports the "-" token qualifier. This is not
+** c) The old syntax supports the "-" token qualifier. This is not
** supported by the new syntax (it is replaced by the NOT operator).
**
** d) When using the old syntax, the OR operator has a greater precedence
**
** If compiled with SQLITE_TEST defined, then this module exports the
** symbol "int sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses". Setting this variable
-** to zero causes the module to use the old syntax. If it is set to
+** to zero causes the module to use the old syntax. If it is set to
** non-zero the new syntax is activated. This is so both syntaxes can
** be tested using a single build of testfixture.
**
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses = 0;
#else
-# ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_PARENTHESIS
+# ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_PARENTHESIS
# define sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses 1
# else
# define sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses 0
};
/*
-** This function is equivalent to the standard isspace() function.
+** This function is equivalent to the standard isspace() function.
**
** The standard isspace() can be awkward to use safely, because although it
** is defined to accept an argument of type int, its behaviour when passed
** structure of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE containing a phrase consisting of this
** single token and set *ppExpr to point to it. If the end of the buffer is
** reached before a token is found, set *ppExpr to zero. It is the
-** responsibility of the caller to eventually deallocate the allocated
+** responsibility of the caller to eventually deallocate the allocated
** Fts3Expr structure (if any) by passing it to sqlite3_free().
**
** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or SQLITE_NOMEM if a memory allocation
pModule->xClose(pCursor);
}
-
+
*pnConsumed = nConsumed;
*ppExpr = pRet;
return rc;
** Buffer zInput, length nInput, contains the contents of a quoted string
** that appeared as part of an fts3 query expression. Neither quote character
** is included in the buffer. This function attempts to tokenize the entire
-** input buffer and create an Fts3Expr structure of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE
+** input buffer and create an Fts3Expr structure of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE
** containing the results.
**
** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppExpr set to point at the
static int fts3ExprParse(ParseContext *, const char *, int, Fts3Expr **, int *);
/*
-** The output variable *ppExpr is populated with an allocated Fts3Expr
+** The output variable *ppExpr is populated with an allocated Fts3Expr
** structure, or set to 0 if the end of the input buffer is reached.
**
** Returns an SQLite error code. SQLITE_OK if everything works, SQLITE_NOMEM
int nInput = n;
/* Skip over any whitespace before checking for a keyword, an open or
- ** close bracket, or a quoted string.
+ ** close bracket, or a quoted string.
*/
while( nInput>0 && fts3isspace(*zInput) ){
nInput--;
/* At this point this is probably a keyword. But for that to be true,
** the next byte must contain either whitespace, an open or close
- ** parenthesis, a quote character, or EOF.
+ ** parenthesis, a quote character, or EOF.
*/
cNext = zInput[nKey];
- if( fts3isspace(cNext)
+ if( fts3isspace(cNext)
|| cNext=='"' || cNext=='(' || cNext==')' || cNext==0
){
pRet = (Fts3Expr *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(Fts3Expr));
*pnConsumed = (int)((zInput - z) + 1 + nConsumed);
return rc;
}
-
+
/* Check for a close bracket. */
if( *zInput==')' ){
pParse->nNest--;
}
- /* If control flows to this point, this must be a regular token, or
+ /* If control flows to this point, this must be a regular token, or
** the end of the input. Read a regular token using the sqlite3_tokenizer
** interface. Before doing so, figure out if there is an explicit
- ** column specifier for the token.
+ ** column specifier for the token.
**
** TODO: Strangely, it is not possible to associate a column specifier
** with a quoted phrase, only with a single token. Not sure if this was
** an implementation artifact or an intentional decision when fts3 was
- ** first implemented. Whichever it was, this module duplicates the
+ ** first implemented. Whichever it was, this module duplicates the
** limitation.
*/
iCol = pParse->iDefaultCol;
for(ii=0; ii<pParse->nCol; ii++){
const char *zStr = pParse->azCol[ii];
int nStr = (int)strlen(zStr);
- if( nInput>nStr && zInput[nStr]==':'
- && sqlite3_strnicmp(zStr, zInput, nStr)==0
+ if( nInput>nStr && zInput[nStr]==':'
+ && sqlite3_strnicmp(zStr, zInput, nStr)==0
){
iCol = ii;
iColLen = (int)((zInput - z) + nStr + 1);
}
/*
-** Argument ppHead contains a pointer to the current head of a query
+** Argument ppHead contains a pointer to the current head of a query
** expression tree being parsed. pPrev is the expression node most recently
** inserted into the tree. This function adds pNew, which is always a binary
** operator node, into the expression tree based on the relative precedence
/*
** Parse the fts3 query expression found in buffer z, length n. This function
-** returns either when the end of the buffer is reached or an unmatched
+** returns either when the end of the buffer is reached or an unmatched
** closing bracket - ')' - is encountered.
**
** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned, *ppExpr is set to point to the
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
int isPhrase;
- if( !sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses
- && p->eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE && p->pPhrase->isNot
+ if( !sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses
+ && p->eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE && p->pPhrase->isNot
){
/* Create an implicit NOT operator. */
Fts3Expr *pNot = sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(Fts3Expr));
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
goto exprparse_out;
}
-
+
if( isPhrase && !isRequirePhrase ){
/* Insert an implicit AND operator. */
Fts3Expr *pAnd;
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
goto exprparse_out;
}
-
+
if( isPhrase ){
if( pRet ){
assert( pPrev && pPrev->pLeft && pPrev->pRight==0 );
** The first parameter, pTokenizer, is passed the fts3 tokenizer module to
** use to normalize query tokens while parsing the expression. The azCol[]
** array, which is assumed to contain nCol entries, should contain the names
-** of each column in the target fts3 table, in order from left to right.
+** of each column in the target fts3 table, in order from left to right.
** Column names must be nul-terminated strings.
**
** The iDefaultCol parameter should be passed the index of the table column
** Function to query the hash-table of tokenizers (see README.tokenizers).
*/
static int queryTestTokenizer(
- sqlite3 *db,
- const char *zName,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ const char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module **pp
){
int rc;
/*
** This function is part of the test interface for the query parser. It
** writes a text representation of the query expression pExpr into the
-** buffer pointed to by argument zBuf. It is assumed that zBuf is large
+** buffer pointed to by argument zBuf. It is assumed that zBuf is large
** enough to store the required text representation.
*/
static void exprToString(Fts3Expr *pExpr, char *zBuf){
}
/*
-** This is the implementation of a scalar SQL function used to test the
+** This is the implementation of a scalar SQL function used to test the
** expression parser. It should be called as follows:
**
** fts3_exprtest(<tokenizer>, <expr>, <column 1>, ...);
sqlite3 *db = sqlite3_context_db_handle(context);
if( argc<3 ){
- sqlite3_result_error(context,
+ sqlite3_result_error(context,
"Usage: fts3_exprtest(tokenizer, expr, col1, ...", -1
);
return;
}
/*
-** Register the query expression parser test function fts3_exprtest()
-** with database connection db.
+** Register the query expression parser test function fts3_exprtest()
+** with database connection db.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3ExprInitTestInterface(sqlite3* db){
return sqlite3_create_function(
** fields of the Hash structure.
**
** "pNew" is a pointer to the hash table that is to be initialized.
-** keyClass is one of the constants
-** FTS3_HASH_BINARY or FTS3_HASH_STRING. The value of keyClass
+** keyClass is one of the constants
+** FTS3_HASH_BINARY or FTS3_HASH_STRING. The value of keyClass
** determines what kind of key the hash table will use. "copyKey" is
** true if the hash table should make its own private copy of keys and
** false if it should just use the supplied pointer.
/*
** Return a pointer to the appropriate hash function given the key class.
**
-** The C syntax in this function definition may be unfamilar to some
+** The C syntax in this function definition may be unfamilar to some
** programmers, so we provide the following additional explanation:
**
** The name of the function is "ftsHashFunction". The function takes a
/* Resize the hash table so that it cantains "new_size" buckets.
-** "new_size" must be a power of 2. The hash table might fail
+** "new_size" must be a power of 2. The hash table might fail
** to resize if sqliteMalloc() fails.
**
** Return non-zero if a memory allocation error occurs.
count = pEntry->count;
xCompare = ftsCompareFunction(pH->keyClass);
while( count-- && elem ){
- if( (*xCompare)(elem->pKey,elem->nKey,pKey,nKey)==0 ){
+ if( (*xCompare)(elem->pKey,elem->nKey,pKey,nKey)==0 ){
return elem;
}
elem = elem->next;
){
struct _fts3ht *pEntry;
if( elem->prev ){
- elem->prev->next = elem->next;
+ elem->prev->next = elem->next;
}else{
pH->first = elem->next;
}
}
SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(
- const Fts3Hash *pH,
- const void *pKey,
+ const Fts3Hash *pH,
+ const void *pKey,
int nKey
){
int h; /* A hash on key */
return fts3FindElementByHash(pH,pKey,nKey, h & (pH->htsize-1));
}
-/*
+/*
** Attempt to locate an element of the hash table pH with a key
** that matches pKey,nKey. Return the data for this element if it is
** found, or NULL if there is no match.
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is zInput[0..nInput-1]. A cursor
-** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
+** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int porterOpen(
/*
** isConsonant() and isVowel() determine if their first character in
** the string they point to is a consonant or a vowel, according
-** to Porter ruls.
+** to Porter ruls.
**
** A consonate is any letter other than 'a', 'e', 'i', 'o', or 'u'.
** 'Y' is a consonant unless it follows another consonant,
/*
** If the word ends with zFrom and xCond() is true for the stem
-** of the word that preceeds the zFrom ending, then change the
+** of the word that preceeds the zFrom ending, then change the
** ending to zTo.
**
** The input word *pz and zFrom are both in reverse order. zTo
-** is in normal order.
+** is in normal order.
**
** Return TRUE if zFrom matches. Return FALSE if zFrom does not
** match. Not that TRUE is returned even if xCond() fails and
** word contains digits, 3 bytes are taken from the beginning and
** 3 bytes from the end. For long words without digits, 10 bytes
** are taken from each end. US-ASCII case folding still applies.
-**
-** If the input word contains not digits but does characters not
-** in [a-zA-Z] then no stemming is attempted and this routine just
+**
+** If the input word contains not digits but does characters not
+** in [a-zA-Z] then no stemming is attempted and this routine just
** copies the input into the input into the output with US-ASCII
** case folding.
**
}
}
- /* Step 1b */
+ /* Step 1b */
z2 = z;
if( stem(&z, "dee", "ee", m_gt_0) ){
/* Do nothing. The work was all in the test */
- }else if(
+ }else if(
(stem(&z, "gni", "", hasVowel) || stem(&z, "de", "", hasVowel))
&& z!=z2
){
/*
-** Implementation of the SQL scalar function for accessing the underlying
+** Implementation of the SQL scalar function for accessing the underlying
** hash table. This function may be called as follows:
**
** SELECT <function-name>(<key-name>);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
*pzErr = sqlite3_mprintf("unknown tokenizer");
}else{
- (*ppTok)->pModule = m;
+ (*ppTok)->pModule = m;
}
sqlite3_free((void *)aArg);
}
/*
-** Implementation of a special SQL scalar function for testing tokenizers
+** Implementation of a special SQL scalar function for testing tokenizers
** designed to be used in concert with the Tcl testing framework. This
** function must be called with two arguments:
**
**
** The return value is a string that may be interpreted as a Tcl
** list. For each token in the <input-string>, three elements are
-** added to the returned list. The first is the token position, the
+** added to the returned list. The first is the token position, the
** second is the token text (folded, stemmed, etc.) and the third is the
-** substring of <input-string> associated with the token. For example,
+** substring of <input-string> associated with the token. For example,
** using the built-in "simple" tokenizer:
**
** SELECT fts_tokenizer_test('simple', 'I don't see how');
** will return the string:
**
** "{0 i I 1 dont don't 2 see see 3 how how}"
-**
+**
*/
static void testFunc(
sqlite3_context *context,
static
int registerTokenizer(
- sqlite3 *db,
- char *zName,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p
){
int rc;
static
int queryTokenizer(
- sqlite3 *db,
- char *zName,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module **pp
){
int rc;
/*
** Set up SQL objects in database db used to access the contents of
** the hash table pointed to by argument pHash. The hash table must
-** been initialised to use string keys, and to take a private copy
+** been initialised to use string keys, and to take a private copy
** of the key when a value is inserted. i.e. by a call similar to:
**
** sqlite3Fts3HashInit(pHash, FTS3_HASH_STRING, 1);
**
** This function adds a scalar function (see header comment above
** scalarFunc() in this file for details) and, if ENABLE_TABLE is
-** defined at compilation time, a temporary virtual table (see header
-** comment above struct HashTableVtab) to the database schema. Both
+** defined at compilation time, a temporary virtual table (see header
+** comment above struct HashTableVtab) to the database schema. Both
** provide read/write access to the contents of *pHash.
**
** The third argument to this function, zName, is used as the name
** of both the scalar and, if created, the virtual table.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable(
- sqlite3 *db,
- Fts3Hash *pHash,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ Fts3Hash *pHash,
const char *zName
){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1]. A cursor
-** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
+** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int simpleOpen(
** This file is part of the SQLite FTS3 extension module. Specifically,
** this file contains code to insert, update and delete rows from FTS3
** tables. It also contains code to merge FTS3 b-tree segments. Some
-** of the sub-routines used to merge segments are also used by the query
+** of the sub-routines used to merge segments are also used by the query
** code in fts3.c.
*/
*/
#define SQL_DELETE_CONTENT 0
#define SQL_IS_EMPTY 1
-#define SQL_DELETE_ALL_CONTENT 2
+#define SQL_DELETE_ALL_CONTENT 2
#define SQL_DELETE_ALL_SEGMENTS 3
#define SQL_DELETE_ALL_SEGDIR 4
#define SQL_DELETE_ALL_DOCSIZE 5
** Otherwise, an SQLite error code is returned and *pp is set to 0.
**
** If argument apVal is not NULL, then it must point to an array with
-** at least as many entries as the requested statement has bound
+** at least as many entries as the requested statement has bound
** parameters. The values are bound to the statements parameters before
** returning.
*/
/* 10 */ "SELECT coalesce((SELECT max(blockid) FROM %Q.'%q_segments') + 1, 1)",
/* 11 */ "INSERT INTO %Q.'%q_segdir' VALUES(?,?,?,?,?,?)",
- /* Return segments in order from oldest to newest.*/
+ /* Return segments in order from oldest to newest.*/
/* 12 */ "SELECT idx, start_block, leaves_end_block, end_block, root "
"FROM %Q.'%q_segdir' WHERE level = ? ORDER BY idx ASC",
/* 13 */ "SELECT idx, start_block, leaves_end_block, end_block, root "
assert( SizeofArray(azSql)==SizeofArray(p->aStmt) );
assert( eStmt<SizeofArray(azSql) && eStmt>=0 );
-
+
pStmt = p->aStmt[eStmt];
if( !pStmt ){
char *zSql;
if( eStmt==SQL_CONTENT_INSERT ){
- int i; /* Iterator variable */
+ int i; /* Iterator variable */
char *zVarlist; /* The "?, ?, ..." string */
zVarlist = (char *)sqlite3_malloc(2*p->nColumn+2);
if( !zVarlist ){
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
int rc;
if( *pRC ) return;
- rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, eStmt, &pStmt, apVal);
+ rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, eStmt, &pStmt, apVal);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3_step(pStmt);
rc = sqlite3_reset(pStmt);
/*
** Read a single block from the %_segments table. If the specified block
-** does not exist, return SQLITE_CORRUPT. If some other error (malloc, IO
+** does not exist, return SQLITE_CORRUPT. If some other error (malloc, IO
** etc.) occurs, return the appropriate SQLite error code.
**
** Otherwise, if successful, set *pzBlock to point to a buffer containing
** the block read from the database, and *pnBlock to the size of the read
** block in bytes.
**
-** WARNING: The returned buffer is only valid until the next call to
+** WARNING: The returned buffer is only valid until the next call to
** sqlite3Fts3ReadBlock().
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3ReadBlock(
if( pzBlock ){
sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 1, iBlock);
- rc = sqlite3_step(pStmt);
+ rc = sqlite3_step(pStmt);
if( rc!=SQLITE_ROW ){
return (rc==SQLITE_DONE ? SQLITE_CORRUPT : rc);
}
-
+
*pnBlock = sqlite3_column_bytes(pStmt, 0);
*pzBlock = (char *)sqlite3_column_blob(pStmt, 0);
if( sqlite3_column_type(pStmt, 0)!=SQLITE_BLOB ){
/*
** Set *ppStmt to a statement handle that may be used to iterate through
** all rows in the %_segdir table, from oldest to newest. If successful,
-** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs while preparing the statement,
+** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs while preparing the statement,
** return an SQLite error code.
**
** There is only ever one instance of this SQL statement compiled for
&& SQLITE_OK==(rc = xNext(pCsr, &zToken, &nToken, &iStart, &iEnd, &iPos))
){
PendingList *pList;
-
+
if( iPos>=nWord ) nWord = iPos+1;
/* Positions cannot be negative; we use -1 as a terminator internally.
}
if( fts3PendingListAppend(&pList, p->iPrevDocid, iCol, iPos, &rc) ){
if( pList==fts3HashInsert(&p->pendingTerms, zToken, nToken, pList) ){
- /* Malloc failed while inserting the new entry. This can only
+ /* Malloc failed while inserting the new entry. This can only
** happen if there was no previous entry for this token.
*/
assert( 0==fts3HashFind(&p->pendingTerms, zToken, nToken) );
return (rc==SQLITE_DONE ? SQLITE_OK : rc);
}
-/*
-** Calling this function indicates that subsequent calls to
+/*
+** Calling this function indicates that subsequent calls to
** fts3PendingTermsAdd() are to add term/position-list pairs for the
** contents of the document with docid iDocid.
*/
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
}
- /* Execute the statement to insert the record. Set *piDocid to the
- ** new docid value.
+ /* Execute the statement to insert the record. Set *piDocid to the
+ ** new docid value.
*/
sqlite3_step(pContentInsert);
rc = sqlite3_reset(pContentInsert);
*/
static int fts3SegmentMerge(Fts3Table *, int);
-/*
+/*
** This function allocates a new level iLevel index in the segdir table.
** Usually, indexes are allocated within a level sequentially starting
** with 0, so the allocated index is one greater than the value returned
** SELECT max(idx) FROM %_segdir WHERE level = :iLevel
**
** However, if there are already FTS3_MERGE_COUNT indexes at the requested
-** level, they are merged into a single level (iLevel+1) segment and the
+** level, they are merged into a single level (iLevel+1) segment and the
** allocated index is 0.
**
** If successful, *piIdx is set to the allocated index slot and SQLITE_OK
pReader->aNode = (char *)sqlite3_column_blob(pReader->pStmt, 0);
pNext = pReader->aNode;
}
-
+
pNext += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint32(pNext, &nPrefix);
pNext += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint32(pNext, &nSuffix);
/*
** Advance the SegReader to point to the next docid in the doclist
** associated with the current term.
-**
-** If arguments ppOffsetList and pnOffsetList are not NULL, then
+**
+** If arguments ppOffsetList and pnOffsetList are not NULL, then
** *ppOffsetList is set to point to the first column-offset list
** in the doclist entry (i.e. immediately past the docid varint).
** *pnOffsetList is set to the length of the set of column-offset
}
/*
-** Free all allocations associated with the iterator passed as the
+** Free all allocations associated with the iterator passed as the
** second argument.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFree(Fts3Table *p, Fts3SegReader *pReader){
** The second argument to this function is expected to be a statement of
** the form:
**
-** SELECT
+** SELECT
** idx, -- col 0
** start_block, -- col 1
** leaves_end_block, -- col 2
**
** This function allocates and initializes a Fts3SegReader structure to
** iterate through the terms stored in the segment identified by the
-** current row that pStmt is pointing to.
+** current row that pStmt is pointing to.
**
** If successful, the Fts3SegReader is left pointing to the first term
** in the segment and SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise, an SQLite error
int iAge, /* Segment "age". */
Fts3SegReader **ppReader /* OUT: Allocated Fts3SegReader */
){
- return sqlite3Fts3SegReaderNew(p, iAge,
+ return sqlite3Fts3SegReaderNew(p, iAge,
sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 1),
sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 2),
sqlite3_column_int64(pStmt, 3),
}
/*
-** Compare the entries pointed to by two Fts3SegReader structures.
+** Compare the entries pointed to by two Fts3SegReader structures.
** Comparison is as follows:
**
** 1) EOF is greater than not EOF.
/*
** Compare the term that the Fts3SegReader object passed as the first argument
-** points to with the term specified by arguments zTerm and nTerm.
+** points to with the term specified by arguments zTerm and nTerm.
**
** If the pSeg iterator is already at EOF, return 0. Otherwise, return
** -ve if the pSeg term is less than zTerm/nTerm, 0 if the two terms are
#endif
}
-/*
+/*
** Insert a record into the %_segments table.
*/
static int fts3WriteSegment(
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Insert a record into the %_segdir table.
*/
static int fts3WriteSegdir(
/*
** Return the size of the common prefix (if any) shared by zPrev and
-** zNext, in bytes. For example,
+** zNext, in bytes. For example,
**
** fts3PrefixCompress("abc", 3, "abcdef", 6) // returns 3
** fts3PrefixCompress("abX", 3, "abcdef", 6) // returns 2
*/
static int fts3NodeAddTerm(
Fts3Table *p, /* Virtual table handle */
- SegmentNode **ppTree, /* IN/OUT: SegmentNode handle */
+ SegmentNode **ppTree, /* IN/OUT: SegmentNode handle */
int isCopyTerm, /* True if zTerm/nTerm is transient */
const char *zTerm, /* Pointer to buffer containing term */
int nTerm /* Size of term in bytes */
int rc;
SegmentNode *pNew;
- /* First try to append the term to the current node. Return early if
+ /* First try to append the term to the current node. Return early if
** this is possible.
*/
if( pTree ){
** and the static node buffer (p->nNodeSize bytes) is not large
** enough. Use a separately malloced buffer instead This wastes
** p->nNodeSize bytes, but since this scenario only comes about when
- ** the database contain two terms that share a prefix of almost 2KB,
- ** this is not expected to be a serious problem.
+ ** the database contain two terms that share a prefix of almost 2KB,
+ ** this is not expected to be a serious problem.
*/
assert( pTree->aData==(char *)&pTree[1] );
pTree->aData = (char *)sqlite3_malloc(nReq);
** If this is the first node in the tree, the term is added to it.
**
** Otherwise, the term is not added to the new node, it is left empty for
- ** now. Instead, the term is inserted into the parent of pTree. If pTree
+ ** now. Instead, the term is inserted into the parent of pTree. If pTree
** has no parent, one is created here.
*/
pNew = (SegmentNode *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(SegmentNode) + p->nNodeSize);
pTree->zMalloc = 0;
}else{
pNew->pLeftmost = pNew;
- rc = fts3NodeAddTerm(p, &pNew, isCopyTerm, zTerm, nTerm);
+ rc = fts3NodeAddTerm(p, &pNew, isCopyTerm, zTerm, nTerm);
}
*ppTree = pNew;
** Helper function for fts3NodeWrite().
*/
static int fts3TreeFinishNode(
- SegmentNode *pTree,
- int iHeight,
+ SegmentNode *pTree,
+ int iHeight,
sqlite3_int64 iLeftChild
){
int nStart;
/*
** Write the buffer for the segment node pTree and all of its peers to the
-** database. Then call this function recursively to write the parent of
-** pTree and its peers to the database.
+** database. Then call this function recursively to write the parent of
+** pTree and its peers to the database.
**
** Except, if pTree is a root node, do not write it to the database. Instead,
** set output variables *paRoot and *pnRoot to contain the root node.
**
** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and output variable *piLast is
** set to the largest blockid written to the database (or zero if no
-** blocks were written to the db). Otherwise, an SQLite error code is
+** blocks were written to the db). Otherwise, an SQLite error code is
** returned.
*/
static int fts3NodeWrite(
for(pIter=pTree->pLeftmost; pIter && rc==SQLITE_OK; pIter=pIter->pRight){
int nStart = fts3TreeFinishNode(pIter, iHeight, iNextLeaf);
int nWrite = pIter->nData - nStart;
-
+
rc = fts3WriteSegment(p, iNextFree, &pIter->aData[nStart], nWrite);
iNextFree++;
iNextLeaf += (pIter->nEntry+1);
*/
static int fts3SegWriterAdd(
Fts3Table *p, /* Virtual table handle */
- SegmentWriter **ppWriter, /* IN/OUT: SegmentWriter handle */
+ SegmentWriter **ppWriter, /* IN/OUT: SegmentWriter handle */
int isCopyTerm, /* True if buffer zTerm must be copied */
const char *zTerm, /* Pointer to buffer containing term */
int nTerm, /* Size of term in bytes */
}
/*
-** Release all memory held by the SegmentWriter object passed as the
+** Release all memory held by the SegmentWriter object passed as the
** first argument.
*/
static void fts3SegWriterFree(SegmentWriter *pWriter){
** This function is used after merging multiple segments into a single large
** segment to delete the old, now redundant, segment b-trees. Specifically,
** it:
-**
-** 1) Deletes all %_segments entries for the segments associated with
-** each of the SegReader objects in the array passed as the third
+**
+** 1) Deletes all %_segments entries for the segments associated with
+** each of the SegReader objects in the array passed as the third
** argument, and
**
** 2) deletes all %_segdir entries with level iLevel, or all %_segdir
}
/*
-** When this function is called, buffer *ppList (size *pnList bytes) contains
+** When this function is called, buffer *ppList (size *pnList bytes) contains
** a position list that may (or may not) feature multiple columns. This
** function adjusts the pointer *ppList and the length *pnList so that they
** identify the subset of the position list that corresponds to column iCol.
while( 1 ){
char c = 0;
while( p<pEnd && (c | *p)&0xFE ) c = *p++ & 0x80;
-
+
if( iCol==iCurrent ){
nList = (int)(p - pList);
break;
}
/*
-** sqlite3Fts3SegReaderIterate() callback used when merging multiple
+** sqlite3Fts3SegReaderIterate() callback used when merging multiple
** segments to create a single, larger segment.
*/
static int fts3MergeCallback(
}
/*
-** This function is used to iterate through a contiguous set of terms
-** stored in the full-text index. It merges data contained in one or
+** This function is used to iterate through a contiguous set of terms
+** stored in the full-text index. It merges data contained in one or
** more segments to support this.
**
** The second argument is passed an array of pointers to SegReader objects
-** allocated with sqlite3Fts3SegReaderNew(). This function merges the range
+** allocated with sqlite3Fts3SegReaderNew(). This function merges the range
** of terms selected by each SegReader. If a single term is present in
** more than one segment, the associated doclists are merged. For each
** term and (possibly merged) doclist in the merged range, the callback
*/
if( nSegment==0 ) goto finished;
- /* If the Fts3SegFilter defines a specific term (or term prefix) to search
+ /* If the Fts3SegFilter defines a specific term (or term prefix) to search
** for, then advance each segment iterator until it points to a term of
** equal or greater value than the specified term. This prevents many
** unnecessary merge/sort operations for the case where single segment
int nMerge = 1;
/* If this is a prefix-search, and if the term that apSegment[0] points
- ** to does not share a suffix with pFilter->zTerm/nTerm, then all
+ ** to does not share a suffix with pFilter->zTerm/nTerm, then all
** required callbacks have been made. In this case exit early.
**
** Similarly, if this is a search for an exact match, and the first term
** of segment apSegment[0] is not a match, exit early.
*/
if( pFilter->zTerm ){
- if( nTerm<pFilter->nTerm
+ if( nTerm<pFilter->nTerm
|| (!isPrefix && nTerm>pFilter->nTerm)
- || memcmp(zTerm, pFilter->zTerm, pFilter->nTerm)
+ || memcmp(zTerm, pFilter->zTerm, pFilter->nTerm)
){
goto finished;
}
}
- while( nMerge<nSegment
+ while( nMerge<nSegment
&& apSegment[nMerge]->aNode
- && apSegment[nMerge]->nTerm==nTerm
+ && apSegment[nMerge]->nTerm==nTerm
&& 0==memcmp(zTerm, apSegment[nMerge]->zTerm, nTerm)
){
nMerge++;
}
/*
-** Merge all level iLevel segments in the database into a single
+** Merge all level iLevel segments in the database into a single
** iLevel+1 segment. Or, if iLevel<0, merge all segments into a
-** single segment with a level equal to the numerically largest level
+** single segment with a level equal to the numerically largest level
** currently present in the database.
**
** If this function is called with iLevel<0, but there is only one
-** segment in the database, SQLITE_DONE is returned immediately.
-** Otherwise, if successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an error occurs,
+** segment in the database, SQLITE_DONE is returned immediately.
+** Otherwise, if successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an error occurs,
** an SQLite error code is returned.
*/
static int fts3SegmentMerge(Fts3Table *p, int iLevel){
if( iLevel<0 ){
/* This call is to merge all segments in the database to a single
- ** segment. The level of the new segment is equal to the the numerically
+ ** segment. The level of the new segment is equal to the the numerically
** greatest segment level currently present in the database. The index
** of the new segment is always 0.
*/
}else{
/* This call is to merge all segments at level iLevel. Find the next
** available segment index at level iLevel+1. The call to
- ** fts3AllocateSegdirIdx() will merge the segments at level iLevel+1 to
+ ** fts3AllocateSegdirIdx() will merge the segments at level iLevel+1 to
** a single iLevel+2 segment if necessary.
*/
iNewLevel = iLevel+1;
}
memset(apSegment, 0, sizeof(Fts3SegReader *)*nSegment);
- /* Allocate a Fts3SegReader structure for each segment being merged. A
- ** Fts3SegReader stores the state data required to iterate through all
- ** entries on all leaves of a single segment.
+ /* Allocate a Fts3SegReader structure for each segment being merged. A
+ ** Fts3SegReader stores the state data required to iterate through all
+ ** entries on all leaves of a single segment.
*/
assert( SQL_SELECT_LEVEL+1==SQL_SELECT_ALL_LEVEL);
rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_SELECT_LEVEL+(iLevel<0), &pStmt, 0);
}
-/*
+/*
** Flush the contents of pendingTerms to a level 0 segment.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsFlush(Fts3Table *p){
*/
rc = fts3AllocateSegdirIdx(p, 0, &idx);
- /* If no errors have occured, iterate through the contents of the
+ /* If no errors have occured, iterate through the contents of the
** pending-terms hash table using the Fts3SegReader iterator. The callback
** writes each term (along with its doclist) to the database via the
** SegmentWriter handle pWriter.
}
}
sqlite3_reset(pStmt);
- return SQLITE_OK;
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MatchinfoDocsizeGlobal(Fts3Cursor *pCur, u32 *a){
const char *pBlob; /* The BLOB holding %_stat info */
}
}
sqlite3_reset(pStmt);
- return SQLITE_OK;
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
**
** "INSERT INTO tbl(tbl) VALUES(<expr>)"
**
-** Argument pVal contains the result of <expr>. Currently the only
+** Argument pVal contains the result of <expr>. Currently the only
** meaningful value to insert is the text 'optimize'.
*/
static int fts3SpecialInsert(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_value *pVal){
sqlite3_free(aSzIns);
return fts3SpecialInsert(p, apVal[p->nColumn+2]);
}
-
+
/* If this is an INSERT or UPDATE operation, insert the new record. */
if( nArg>1 && rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = fts3InsertData(p, apVal, pRowid);
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Flush any data in the pending-terms hash table to disk. If successful,
-** merge all segments in the database (including the new segment, if
-** there was any data to flush) into a single segment.
+** merge all segments in the database (including the new segment, if
+** there was any data to flush) into a single segment.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Optimize(Fts3Table *p){
int rc;
};
/*
-** The following types are used as part of the implementation of the
+** The following types are used as part of the implementation of the
** fts3BestSnippet() routine.
*/
typedef struct SnippetIter SnippetIter;
};
/*
-** This type is used as an fts3ExprIterate() context object while
+** This type is used as an fts3ExprIterate() context object while
** accumulating the data returned by the matchinfo() function.
*/
typedef struct MatchInfo MatchInfo;
** are part of a sub-tree that is the right-hand-side of a NOT operator.
** For each phrase node found, the supplied callback function is invoked.
**
-** If the callback function returns anything other than SQLITE_OK,
+** If the callback function returns anything other than SQLITE_OK,
** the iteration is abandoned and the error code returned immediately.
** Otherwise, SQLITE_OK is returned after a callback has been made for
** all eligible phrase nodes.
}
/*
-** The argument to this function is always a phrase node. Its doclist
+** The argument to this function is always a phrase node. Its doclist
** (Fts3Expr.aDoclist[]) and the doclists associated with all phrase nodes
** to the left of this one in the query tree have already been loaded.
**
-** If this phrase node is part of a series of phrase nodes joined by
+** If this phrase node is part of a series of phrase nodes joined by
** NEAR operators (and is not the left-most of said series), then elements are
** removed from the phrases doclist consistent with the NEAR restriction. If
** required, elements may be removed from the doclists of phrases to the
-** left of this one that are part of the same series of NEAR operator
+** left of this one that are part of the same series of NEAR operator
** connected phrases.
**
** If an OOM error occurs, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
assert( pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE );
while( rc==SQLITE_OK
- && pParent
- && pParent->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR
- && pParent->pRight==pExpr
+ && pParent
+ && pParent->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR
+ && pParent->pRight==pExpr
){
- /* This expression (pExpr) is the right-hand-side of a NEAR operator.
+ /* This expression (pExpr) is the right-hand-side of a NEAR operator.
** Find the expression to the left of the same operator.
*/
int nNear = pParent->nNear;
/*
** Load the doclists for each phrase in the query associated with FTS3 cursor
-** pCsr.
+** pCsr.
**
-** If pnPhrase is not NULL, then *pnPhrase is set to the number of matchable
-** phrases in the expression (all phrases except those directly or
-** indirectly descended from the right-hand-side of a NOT operator). If
+** If pnPhrase is not NULL, then *pnPhrase is set to the number of matchable
+** phrases in the expression (all phrases except those directly or
+** indirectly descended from the right-hand-side of a NOT operator). If
** pnToken is not NULL, then it is set to the number of tokens in all
** matchable phrases of the expression.
*/
}
/*
-** Advance the position list iterator specified by the first two
+** Advance the position list iterator specified by the first two
** arguments so that it points to the first element with a value greater
** than or equal to parameter iNext.
*/
}
/*
-** Retrieve information about the current candidate snippet of snippet
+** Retrieve information about the current candidate snippet of snippet
** iterator pIter.
*/
static void fts3SnippetDetails(
}
/*
-** Select the fragment of text consisting of nFragment contiguous tokens
+** Select the fragment of text consisting of nFragment contiguous tokens
** from column iCol that represent the "best" snippet. The best snippet
** is the snippet with the highest score, where scores are calculated
** by adding:
**
** (a) +1 point for each occurence of a matchable phrase in the snippet.
**
-** (b) +1000 points for the first occurence of each matchable phrase in
+** (b) +1000 points for the first occurence of each matchable phrase in
** the snippet for which the corresponding mCovered bit is not set.
**
** The selected snippet parameters are stored in structure *pFragment before
}
}
- /* Loop through all candidate snippets. Store the best snippet in
+ /* Loop through all candidate snippets. Store the best snippet in
** *pFragment. Store its associated 'score' in iBestScore.
*/
pFragment->iCol = iCol;
**
** ........X.....X
**
-** This function "shifts" the beginning of the snippet forward in the
-** document so that there are approximately the same number of
+** This function "shifts" the beginning of the snippet forward in the
+** document so that there are approximately the same number of
** non-highlighted terms to the right of the final highlighted term as there
** are to the left of the first highlighted term. For example, to this:
**
**
** This is done as part of extracting the snippet text, not when selecting
** the snippet. Snippet selection is done based on doclists only, so there
-** is no way for fts3BestSnippet() to know whether or not the document
-** actually contains terms that follow the final highlighted term.
+** is no way for fts3BestSnippet() to know whether or not the document
+** actually contains terms that follow the final highlighted term.
*/
int fts3SnippetShift(
Fts3Table *pTab, /* FTS3 table snippet comes from */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pC; /* Tokenizer cursor open on zDoc/nDoc */
const char *ZDUMMY; /* Dummy argument used with tokenizer */
int DUMMY1; /* Dummy argument used with tokenizer */
-
+
zDoc = (const char *)sqlite3_column_text(pCsr->pStmt, iCol);
if( zDoc==0 ){
if( sqlite3_column_type(pCsr->pStmt, iCol)!=SQLITE_NULL ){
if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){
/* Special case - the last token of the snippet is also the last token
** of the column. Append any punctuation that occurred between the end
- ** of the previous token and the end of the document to the output.
+ ** of the previous token and the end of the document to the output.
** Then break out of the loop. */
rc = fts3StringAppend(pOut, &zDoc[iEnd], -1);
}
/* Now that the shift has been done, check if the initial "..." are
** required. They are required if (a) this is not the first fragment,
- ** or (b) this fragment does not begin at position 0 of its column.
+ ** or (b) this fragment does not begin at position 0 of its column.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (iPos>0 || iFragment>0) ){
rc = fts3StringAppend(pOut, zEllipsis, -1);
/*
-** This function is used to count the entries in a column-list (a
-** delta-encoded list of term offsets within a single column of a single
+** This function is used to count the entries in a column-list (a
+** delta-encoded list of term offsets within a single column of a single
** row). When this function is called, *ppCollist should point to the
** beginning of the first varint in the column-list (the varint that
** contains the position of the first matching term in the column data).
}
/*
-** Populate pCsr->aMatchinfo[] with data for the current row. The
+** Populate pCsr->aMatchinfo[] with data for the current row. The
** 'matchinfo' data is an array of 32-bit unsigned integers (C type u32).
*/
static int fts3GetMatchinfo(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
if( pCsr->aMatchinfo==0 ){
/* If Fts3Cursor.aMatchinfo[] is NULL, then this is the first time the
- ** matchinfo function has been called for this query. In this case
+ ** matchinfo function has been called for this query. In this case
** allocate the array used to accumulate the matchinfo data and
** initialize those elements that are constant for every row.
*/
}
sInfo.aMatchinfo = (u32 *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(u32)*nMatchinfo);
- if( !sInfo.aMatchinfo ){
+ if( !sInfo.aMatchinfo ){
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
memset(sInfo.aMatchinfo, 0, sizeof(u32)*nMatchinfo);
/* The returned text includes up to four fragments of text extracted from
** the data in the current row. The first iteration of the for(...) loop
- ** below attempts to locate a single fragment of text nToken tokens in
+ ** below attempts to locate a single fragment of text nToken tokens in
** size that contains at least one instance of all phrases in the query
** expression that appear in the current row. If such a fragment of text
** cannot be found, the second iteration of the loop attempts to locate
assert( nFToken>0 );
for(i=0; i<nSnippet && rc==SQLITE_OK; i++){
- rc = fts3SnippetText(pCsr, &aSnippet[i],
+ rc = fts3SnippetText(pCsr, &aSnippet[i],
i, (i==nSnippet-1), nFToken, zStart, zEnd, zEllipsis, &res
);
}
}
sCtx.iDocid = pCsr->iPrevId;
- /* Loop through the table columns, appending offset information to
+ /* Loop through the table columns, appending offset information to
** string-buffer res for each column.
*/
for(iCol=0; iCol<pTab->nColumn; iCol++){
const char *zDoc;
int nDoc;
- /* Initialize the contents of sCtx.aTerm[] for column iCol. There is
+ /* Initialize the contents of sCtx.aTerm[] for column iCol. There is
** no way that this operation can fail, so the return code from
** fts3ExprIterate() can be discarded.
*/
sCtx.iTerm = 0;
(void)fts3ExprIterate(pCsr->pExpr, fts3ExprTermOffsetInit, (void *)&sCtx);
- /* Retreive the text stored in column iCol. If an SQL NULL is stored
+ /* Retreive the text stored in column iCol. If an SQL NULL is stored
** in column iCol, jump immediately to the next iteration of the loop.
** If an OOM occurs while retrieving the data (this can happen if SQLite
- ** needs to transform the data from utf-16 to utf-8), return SQLITE_NOMEM
- ** to the caller.
+ ** needs to transform the data from utf-16 to utf-8), return SQLITE_NOMEM
+ ** to the caller.
*/
zDoc = (const char *)sqlite3_column_text(pCsr->pStmt, iCol+1);
nDoc = sqlite3_column_bytes(pCsr->pStmt, iCol+1);
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
char aBuffer[64];
- sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(aBuffer), aBuffer,
+ sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(aBuffer), aBuffer,
"%d %d %d %d ", iCol, pTerm-sCtx.aTerm, iStart, iEnd-iStart
);
rc = fts3StringAppend(&res, aBuffer, -1);
/*
** This file contains an implementation of a couple of different variants
-** of the r-tree algorithm. See the README file for further details. The
+** of the r-tree algorithm. See the README file for further details. The
** same data-structure is used for all, but the algorithms for insert and
-** delete operations vary. The variants used are selected at compile time
+** delete operations vary. The variants used are selected at compile time
** by defining the following symbols:
*/
-/* Either, both or none of the following may be set to activate
+/* Either, both or none of the following may be set to activate
** r*tree variant algorithms.
*/
#define VARIANT_RSTARTREE_CHOOSESUBTREE 0
#define VARIANT_RSTARTREE_REINSERT 1
-/*
+/*
** Exactly one of the following must be set to 1.
*/
#define VARIANT_GUTTMAN_QUADRATIC_SPLIT 0
#define RTREE_MAX_DIMENSIONS 5
/* Size of hash table Rtree.aHash. This hash table is not expected to
-** ever contain very many entries, so a fixed number of buckets is
+** ever contain very many entries, so a fixed number of buckets is
** used.
*/
#define HASHSIZE 128
-/*
+/*
** An rtree virtual-table object.
*/
struct Rtree {
int nBytesPerCell; /* Bytes consumed per cell */
int iDepth; /* Current depth of the r-tree structure */
char *zDb; /* Name of database containing r-tree table */
- char *zName; /* Name of r-tree table */
- RtreeNode *aHash[HASHSIZE]; /* Hash table of in-memory nodes. */
+ char *zName; /* Name of r-tree table */
+ RtreeNode *aHash[HASHSIZE]; /* Hash table of in-memory nodes. */
int nBusy; /* Current number of users of this structure */
/* List of nodes removed during a CondenseTree operation. List is
** linked together via the pointer normally used for hash chains -
- ** RtreeNode.pNext. RtreeNode.iNode stores the depth of the sub-tree
+ ** RtreeNode.pNext. RtreeNode.iNode stores the depth of the sub-tree
** headed by the node (leaf nodes have RtreeNode.iNode==0).
*/
RtreeNode *pDeleted;
#define RTREE_COORD_INT32 1
/*
-** The minimum number of cells allowed for a node is a third of the
+** The minimum number of cells allowed for a node is a third of the
** maximum. In Gutman's notation:
**
** m = M/3
#define RTREE_REINSERT(p) RTREE_MINCELLS(p)
#define RTREE_MAXCELLS 51
-/*
+/*
** An rtree cursor object.
*/
struct RtreeCursor {
#define RTREE_GE 0x44
#define RTREE_GT 0x45
-/*
+/*
** An rtree structure node.
**
** Data format (RtreeNode.zData):
** of the node contain the tree depth as a big-endian integer.
** For non-root nodes, the first 2 bytes are left unused.
**
-** 2. The next 2 bytes contain the number of entries currently
+** 2. The next 2 bytes contain the number of entries currently
** stored in the node.
**
** 3. The remainder of the node contains the node entries. Each entry
};
#define NCELL(pNode) readInt16(&(pNode)->zData[2])
-/*
+/*
** Structure to store a deserialized rtree record.
*/
struct RtreeCell {
}
static void readCoord(u8 *p, RtreeCoord *pCoord){
u32 i = (
- (((u32)p[0]) << 24) +
- (((u32)p[1]) << 16) +
- (((u32)p[2]) << 8) +
+ (((u32)p[0]) << 24) +
+ (((u32)p[1]) << 16) +
+ (((u32)p[2]) << 8) +
(((u32)p[3]) << 0)
);
*(u32 *)pCoord = i;
}
static i64 readInt64(u8 *p){
return (
- (((i64)p[0]) << 56) +
- (((i64)p[1]) << 48) +
- (((i64)p[2]) << 40) +
- (((i64)p[3]) << 32) +
- (((i64)p[4]) << 24) +
- (((i64)p[5]) << 16) +
- (((i64)p[6]) << 8) +
+ (((i64)p[0]) << 56) +
+ (((i64)p[1]) << 48) +
+ (((i64)p[2]) << 40) +
+ (((i64)p[3]) << 32) +
+ (((i64)p[4]) << 24) +
+ (((i64)p[5]) << 16) +
+ (((i64)p[6]) << 8) +
(((i64)p[7]) << 0)
);
}
*/
static int nodeHash(i64 iNode){
return (
- (iNode>>56) ^ (iNode>>48) ^ (iNode>>40) ^ (iNode>>32) ^
+ (iNode>>56) ^ (iNode>>48) ^ (iNode>>40) ^ (iNode>>32) ^
(iNode>>24) ^ (iNode>>16) ^ (iNode>> 8) ^ (iNode>> 0)
) % HASHSIZE;
}
** Overwrite cell iCell of node pNode with the contents of pCell.
*/
static void nodeOverwriteCell(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeNode *pNode,
- RtreeCell *pCell,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ RtreeNode *pNode,
+ RtreeCell *pCell,
int iCell
){
int ii;
*/
static int
nodeInsertCell(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeNode *pNode,
- RtreeCell *pCell
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ RtreeNode *pNode,
+ RtreeCell *pCell
){
int nCell; /* Current number of cells in pNode */
int nMaxCell; /* Maximum number of cells for pNode */
** an internal node, then the 64-bit integer is a child page number.
*/
static i64 nodeGetRowid(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeNode *pNode,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ RtreeNode *pNode,
int iCell
){
assert( iCell<NCELL(pNode) );
** Return coordinate iCoord from cell iCell in node pNode.
*/
static void nodeGetCoord(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeNode *pNode,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ RtreeNode *pNode,
int iCell,
int iCoord,
RtreeCoord *pCoord /* Space to write result to */
** to by pCell with the results.
*/
static void nodeGetCell(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeNode *pNode,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ RtreeNode *pNode,
int iCell,
RtreeCell *pCell
){
sqlite3 *, void *, int, const char *const*, sqlite3_vtab **, char **, int
);
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xCreate method.
*/
static int rtreeCreate(
return rtreeInit(db, pAux, argc, argv, ppVtab, pzErr, 1);
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xConnect method.
*/
static int rtreeConnect(
}
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xDisconnect method.
*/
static int rtreeDisconnect(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xDestroy method.
*/
static int rtreeDestroy(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
"DROP TABLE '%q'.'%q_node';"
"DROP TABLE '%q'.'%q_rowid';"
"DROP TABLE '%q'.'%q_parent';",
- pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName,
+ pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName,
pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName,
pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName
);
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xOpen method.
*/
static int rtreeOpen(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_vtab_cursor **ppCursor){
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xClose method.
*/
static int rtreeClose(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){
/*
** Rtree virtual table module xEof method.
**
-** Return non-zero if the cursor does not currently point to a valid
+** Return non-zero if the cursor does not currently point to a valid
** record (i.e if the scan has finished), or zero otherwise.
*/
static int rtreeEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){
return (pCsr->pNode==0);
}
-/*
+/*
** Cursor pCursor currently points to a cell in a non-leaf page.
** Return true if the sub-tree headed by the cell is filtered
-** (excluded) by the constraints in the pCursor->aConstraint[]
+** (excluded) by the constraints in the pCursor->aConstraint[]
** array, or false otherwise.
*/
static int testRtreeCell(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeCursor *pCursor){
double cell_min = DCOORD(cell.aCoord[(p->iCoord>>1)*2]);
double cell_max = DCOORD(cell.aCoord[(p->iCoord>>1)*2+1]);
- assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE
+ assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE
|| p->op==RTREE_GT || p->op==RTREE_EQ
);
switch( p->op ){
case RTREE_LE: case RTREE_LT: bRes = p->rValue<cell_min; break;
case RTREE_GE: case RTREE_GT: bRes = p->rValue>cell_max; break;
- case RTREE_EQ:
+ case RTREE_EQ:
bRes = (p->rValue>cell_max || p->rValue<cell_min);
break;
}
return bRes;
}
-/*
+/*
** Return true if the cell that cursor pCursor currently points to
-** would be filtered (excluded) by the constraints in the
+** would be filtered (excluded) by the constraints in the
** pCursor->aConstraint[] array, or false otherwise.
**
** This function assumes that the cell is part of a leaf node.
RtreeConstraint *p = &pCursor->aConstraint[ii];
double coord = DCOORD(cell.aCoord[p->iCoord]);
int res;
- assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE
+ assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE
|| p->op==RTREE_GT || p->op==RTREE_EQ
);
switch( p->op ){
/*
** Cursor pCursor currently points at a node that heads a sub-tree of
** height iHeight (if iHeight==0, then the node is a leaf). Descend
-** to point to the left-most cell of the sub-tree that matches the
+** to point to the left-most cell of the sub-tree that matches the
** configured constraints.
*/
static int descendToCell(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeCursor *pCursor,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ RtreeCursor *pCursor,
int iHeight,
int *pEof /* OUT: Set to true if cannot descend */
){
}
/*
-** One of the cells in node pNode is guaranteed to have a 64-bit
+** One of the cells in node pNode is guaranteed to have a 64-bit
** integer value equal to iRowid. Return the index of this cell.
*/
static int nodeRowidIndex(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pNode, i64 iRowid){
return -1;
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xNext method.
*/
static int rtreeNext(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xRowid method.
*/
static int rtreeRowid(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, sqlite_int64 *pRowid){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xColumn method.
*/
static int rtreeColumn(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur, sqlite3_context *ctx, int i){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-/*
-** Use nodeAcquire() to obtain the leaf node containing the record with
+/*
+** Use nodeAcquire() to obtain the leaf node containing the record with
** rowid iRowid. If successful, set *ppLeaf to point to the node and
** return SQLITE_OK. If there is no such record in the table, set
** *ppLeaf to 0 and return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs, set *ppLeaf
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xFilter method.
*/
static int rtreeFilter(
- sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
+ sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
int idxNum, const char *idxStr,
int argc, sqlite3_value **argv
){
RtreeNode *pLeaf; /* Leaf on which the required cell resides */
i64 iRowid = sqlite3_value_int64(argv[0]);
rc = findLeafNode(pRtree, iRowid, &pLeaf);
- pCsr->pNode = pLeaf;
+ pCsr->pNode = pLeaf;
if( pLeaf && rc==SQLITE_OK ){
pCsr->iCell = nodeRowidIndex(pRtree, pLeaf, iRowid);
}
}else{
- /* Normal case - r-tree scan. Set up the RtreeCursor.aConstraint array
- ** with the configured constraints.
+ /* Normal case - r-tree scan. Set up the RtreeCursor.aConstraint array
+ ** with the configured constraints.
*/
if( argc>0 ){
pCsr->aConstraint = sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(RtreeConstraint)*argc);
}
}
}
-
+
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
pCsr->pNode = 0;
rc = nodeAcquire(pRtree, 1, 0, &pRoot);
/*
** Rtree virtual table module xBestIndex method. There are three
-** table scan strategies to choose from (in order from most to
+** table scan strategies to choose from (in order from most to
** least desirable):
**
** idxNum idxStr Strategy
** ------------------------------------------------
**
** If strategy 1 or 3 is used, then idxStr is not meaningful. If strategy
-** 2 is used, idxStr is formatted to contain 2 bytes for each
-** constraint used. The first two bytes of idxStr correspond to
+** 2 is used, idxStr is formatted to contain 2 bytes for each
+** constraint used. The first two bytes of idxStr correspond to
** the constraint in sqlite3_index_info.aConstraintUsage[] with
** (argvIndex==1) etc.
**
pIdxInfo->aConstraintUsage[jj].omit = 1;
/* This strategy involves a two rowid lookups on an B-Tree structures
- ** and then a linear search of an R-Tree node. This should be
- ** considered almost as quick as a direct rowid lookup (for which
+ ** and then a linear search of an R-Tree node. This should be
+ ** considered almost as quick as a direct rowid lookup (for which
** sqlite uses an internal cost of 0.0).
- */
+ */
pIdxInfo->estimatedCost = 10.0;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
for(ii=0; ii<(pRtree->nDim*2); ii+=2){
RtreeCoord *a1 = &p1->aCoord[ii];
RtreeCoord *a2 = &p2->aCoord[ii];
- if( (!isInt && (a2[0].f<a1[0].f || a2[1].f>a1[1].f))
- || ( isInt && (a2[0].i<a1[0].i || a2[1].i>a1[1].i))
+ if( (!isInt && (a2[0].f<a1[0].f || a2[1].f>a1[1].f))
+ || ( isInt && (a2[0].i<a1[0].i || a2[1].i>a1[1].i))
){
return 0;
}
#if VARIANT_RSTARTREE_CHOOSESUBTREE || VARIANT_RSTARTREE_SPLIT
static float cellOverlap(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeCell *p,
- RtreeCell *aCell,
- int nCell,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ RtreeCell *p,
+ RtreeCell *aCell,
+ int nCell,
int iExclude
){
int ii;
#if VARIANT_RSTARTREE_CHOOSESUBTREE
static float cellOverlapEnlargement(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeCell *p,
- RtreeCell *pInsert,
- RtreeCell *aCell,
- int nCell,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ RtreeCell *p,
+ RtreeCell *pInsert,
+ RtreeCell *aCell,
+ int nCell,
int iExclude
){
float before;
overlap = cellOverlapEnlargement(pRtree,&cell,pCell,aCell,nCell,iCell);
}
#endif
- if( (iCell==0)
- || (overlap<fMinOverlap)
+ if( (iCell==0)
+ || (overlap<fMinOverlap)
|| (overlap==fMinOverlap && growth<fMinGrowth)
|| (overlap==fMinOverlap && growth==fMinGrowth && area<fMinArea)
){
cellUnion(pRtree, &cell, pCell);
nodeOverwriteCell(pRtree, pParent, &cell, iCell);
}
-
+
p = pParent;
}
}
*/
static RtreeCell *LinearPickNext(
Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeCell *aCell,
- int nCell,
- RtreeCell *pLeftBox,
+ RtreeCell *aCell,
+ int nCell,
+ RtreeCell *pLeftBox,
RtreeCell *pRightBox,
int *aiUsed
){
*/
static void LinearPickSeeds(
Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeCell *aCell,
- int nCell,
- int *piLeftSeed,
+ RtreeCell *aCell,
+ int nCell,
+ int *piLeftSeed,
int *piRightSeed
){
int i;
float maxNormalInnerWidth = 0.0;
/* Pick two "seed" cells from the array of cells. The algorithm used
- ** here is the LinearPickSeeds algorithm from Gutman[1984]. The
+ ** here is the LinearPickSeeds algorithm from Gutman[1984]. The
** indices of the two seed cells in the array are stored in local
** variables iLeftSeek and iRightSeed.
*/
*/
static RtreeCell *QuadraticPickNext(
Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeCell *aCell,
- int nCell,
- RtreeCell *pLeftBox,
+ RtreeCell *aCell,
+ int nCell,
+ RtreeCell *pLeftBox,
RtreeCell *pRightBox,
int *aiUsed
){
*/
static void QuadraticPickSeeds(
Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeCell *aCell,
- int nCell,
- int *piLeftSeed,
+ RtreeCell *aCell,
+ int nCell,
+ int *piLeftSeed,
int *piRightSeed
){
int ii;
/*
** Arguments aIdx, aDistance and aSpare all point to arrays of size
-** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to
+** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to
** (nIdx-1) in no particular order. This function sorts the values
** in aIdx according to the indexed values in aDistance. For
** example, assuming the inputs:
** sorting algorithm.
*/
static void SortByDistance(
- int *aIdx,
- int nIdx,
- float *aDistance,
+ int *aIdx,
+ int nIdx,
+ float *aDistance,
int *aSpare
){
if( nIdx>1 ){
/*
** Arguments aIdx, aCell and aSpare all point to arrays of size
-** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to
+** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to
** (nIdx-1) in no particular order. This function sorts the values
** in aIdx according to dimension iDim of the cells in aCell. The
** minimum value of dimension iDim is considered first, the
*/
static void SortByDimension(
Rtree *pRtree,
- int *aIdx,
- int nIdx,
- int iDim,
- RtreeCell *aCell,
+ int *aIdx,
+ int nIdx,
+ int iDim,
+ RtreeCell *aCell,
int *aSpare
){
if( nIdx>1 ){
int nLeft;
for(
- nLeft=RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree);
- nLeft<=(nCell-RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree));
+ nLeft=RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree);
+ nLeft<=(nCell-RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree));
nLeft++
){
RtreeCell left;
for(i=nCell-2; i>0; i--){
RtreeCell *pNext;
pNext = PickNext(pRtree, aCell, nCell, pBboxLeft, pBboxRight, aiUsed);
- float diff =
- cellGrowth(pRtree, pBboxLeft, pNext) -
+ float diff =
+ cellGrowth(pRtree, pBboxLeft, pNext) -
cellGrowth(pRtree, pBboxRight, pNext)
;
if( (RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree)-NCELL(pRight)==i)
#endif
static int updateMapping(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- i64 iRowid,
- RtreeNode *pNode,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ i64 iRowid,
+ RtreeNode *pNode,
int iHeight
){
int (*xSetMapping)(Rtree *, sqlite3_int64, sqlite3_int64);
RtreeCell leftbbox;
RtreeCell rightbbox;
- /* Allocate an array and populate it with a copy of pCell and
+ /* Allocate an array and populate it with a copy of pCell and
** all cells from node pLeft. Then zero the original node.
*/
aCell = sqlite3_malloc((sizeof(RtreeCell)+sizeof(int))*(nCell+1));
iCell = nodeParentIndex(pRtree, pNode);
pParent = pNode->pParent;
pNode->pParent = 0;
- if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = deleteCell(pRtree, pParent, iCell, iHeight+1))
+ if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = deleteCell(pRtree, pParent, iCell, iHeight+1))
|| SQLITE_OK!=(rc = nodeRelease(pRtree, pParent))
){
return rc;
if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3_reset(pRtree->pDeleteParent)) ){
return rc;
}
-
+
/* Remove the node from the in-memory hash table and link it into
** the Rtree.pDeleted list. Its contents will be re-inserted later on.
*/
static void fixBoundingBox(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pNode){
RtreeNode *pParent = pNode->pParent;
if( pParent ){
- int ii;
+ int ii;
int nCell = NCELL(pNode);
RtreeCell box; /* Bounding box for pNode */
nodeGetCell(pRtree, pNode, 0, &box);
*/
if( pNode->iNode!=1 ){
RtreeNode *pParent = pNode->pParent;
- if( (pParent->iNode!=1 || NCELL(pParent)!=1)
+ if( (pParent->iNode!=1 || NCELL(pParent)!=1)
&& (NCELL(pNode)<RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree))
){
rc = removeNode(pRtree, pNode, iHeight);
}
static int Reinsert(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeNode *pNode,
- RtreeCell *pCell,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ RtreeNode *pNode,
+ RtreeCell *pCell,
int iHeight
){
int *aOrder;
for(ii=0; ii<nCell; ii++){
aDistance[ii] = 0.0;
for(iDim=0; iDim<pRtree->nDim; iDim++){
- float coord = DCOORD(aCell[ii].aCoord[iDim*2+1]) -
+ float coord = DCOORD(aCell[ii].aCoord[iDim*2+1]) -
DCOORD(aCell[ii].aCoord[iDim*2]);
aDistance[ii] += (coord-aCenterCoord[iDim])*(coord-aCenterCoord[iDim]);
}
}
/*
-** Insert cell pCell into node pNode. Node pNode is the head of a
+** Insert cell pCell into node pNode. Node pNode is the head of a
** subtree iHeight high (leaf nodes have iHeight==0).
*/
static int rtreeInsertCell(
** The xUpdate method for rtree module virtual tables.
*/
static int rtreeUpdate(
- sqlite3_vtab *pVtab,
- int nData,
- sqlite3_value **azData,
+ sqlite3_vtab *pVtab,
+ int nData,
+ sqlite3_value **azData,
sqlite_int64 *pRowid
){
Rtree *pRtree = (Rtree *)pVtab;
/* Obtain a reference to the root node to initialise Rtree.iDepth */
rc = nodeAcquire(pRtree, 1, 0, &pRoot);
- /* Obtain a reference to the leaf node that contains the entry
- ** about to be deleted.
+ /* Obtain a reference to the leaf node that contains the entry
+ ** about to be deleted.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
iDelete = sqlite3_value_int64(azData[0]);
}
/* Check if the root node now has exactly one child. If so, remove
- ** it, schedule the contents of the child for reinsertion and
+ ** it, schedule the contents of the child for reinsertion and
** reduce the tree height by one.
**
** This is equivalent to copying the contents of the child into
- ** the root node (the operation that Gutman's paper says to perform
+ ** the root node (the operation that Gutman's paper says to perform
** in this scenario).
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pRtree->iDepth>0 ){
"ALTER TABLE %Q.'%q_node' RENAME TO \"%w_node\";"
"ALTER TABLE %Q.'%q_parent' RENAME TO \"%w_parent\";"
"ALTER TABLE %Q.'%q_rowid' RENAME TO \"%w_rowid\";"
- , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName
- , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName
+ , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName
+ , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName
, pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName
);
if( zSql ){
};
static int rtreeSqlInit(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- sqlite3 *db,
- const char *zDb,
- const char *zPrefix,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ const char *zDb,
+ const char *zPrefix,
int isCreate
){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
for(i=0; i<N_STATEMENT && rc==SQLITE_OK; i++){
char *zSql = sqlite3_mprintf(azSql[i], zDb, zPrefix);
if( zSql ){
- rc = sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, appStmt[i], 0);
+ rc = sqlite3_prepare_v2(db, zSql, -1, appStmt[i], 0);
}else{
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
** table already exists. In this case the node-size is determined by inspecting
** the root node of the tree.
**
-** Otherwise, for an xCreate(), use 64 bytes less than the database page-size.
-** This ensures that each node is stored on a single database page. If the
-** database page-size is so large that more than RTREE_MAXCELLS entries
+** Otherwise, for an xCreate(), use 64 bytes less than the database page-size.
+** This ensures that each node is stored on a single database page. If the
+** database page-size is so large that more than RTREE_MAXCELLS entries
** would fit in a single node, use a smaller node-size.
*/
static int getNodeSize(
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** This function is the implementation of both the xConnect and xCreate
** methods of the r-tree virtual table.
**
**
** The human readable string takes the form of a Tcl list with one
** entry for each cell in the r-tree node. Each entry is itself a
-** list, containing the 8-byte rowid/pageno followed by the
+** list, containing the 8-byte rowid/pageno followed by the
** <num-dimension>*2 coordinates.
*/
static void rtreenode(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
zText = sqlite3_mprintf("{%s}", zCell);
}
}
-
+
sqlite3_result_text(ctx, zText, -1, sqlite3_free);
}
static void rtreedepth(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
- if( sqlite3_value_type(apArg[0])!=SQLITE_BLOB
+ if( sqlite3_value_type(apArg[0])!=SQLITE_BLOB
|| sqlite3_value_bytes(apArg[0])<2
){
- sqlite3_result_error(ctx, "Invalid argument to rtreedepth()", -1);
+ sqlite3_result_error(ctx, "Invalid argument to rtreedepth()", -1);
}else{
u8 *zBlob = (u8 *)sqlite3_value_blob(apArg[0]);
sqlite3_result_int(ctx, readInt16(zBlob));
/*
** Register the r-tree module with database handle db. This creates the
-** virtual table module "rtree" and the debugging/analysis scalar
+** virtual table module "rtree" and the debugging/analysis scalar
** function "rtreenode".
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RtreeInit(sqlite3 *db){
*************************************************************************
** $Id: icu.c,v 1.7 2007/12/13 21:54:11 drh Exp $
**
-** This file implements an integration between the ICU library
-** ("International Components for Unicode", an open-source library
-** for handling unicode data) and SQLite. The integration uses
+** This file implements an integration between the ICU library
+** ("International Components for Unicode", an open-source library
+** for handling unicode data) and SQLite. The integration uses
** ICU to provide the following to SQLite:
**
** * An implementation of the SQL regexp() function (and hence REGEXP
**
** * Integration of ICU and SQLite collation seqences.
**
-** * An implementation of the LIKE operator that uses ICU to
+** * An implementation of the LIKE operator that uses ICU to
** provide case-independent matching.
*/
/*
** Compare two UTF-8 strings for equality where the first string is
-** a "LIKE" expression. Return true (1) if they are the same and
+** a "LIKE" expression. Return true (1) if they are the same and
** false (0) if they are different.
*/
static int icuLikeCompare(
uint8_t c;
/* Skip any MATCH_ALL or MATCH_ONE characters that follow a
- ** MATCH_ALL. For each MATCH_ONE, skip one character in the
+ ** MATCH_ALL. For each MATCH_ONE, skip one character in the
** test string.
*/
while( (c=zPattern[iPattern]) == MATCH_ALL || c == MATCH_ONE ){
**
** A LIKE B
**
-** is implemented as like(B, A). If there is an escape character E,
+** is implemented as like(B, A). If there is an escape character E,
**
** A LIKE B ESCAPE E
**
** is mapped to like(B, A, E).
*/
static void icuLikeFunc(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- int argc,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ int argc,
sqlite3_value **argv
){
const unsigned char *zA = sqlite3_value_text(argv[0]);
if( zE==0 ) return;
U8_NEXT(zE, i, nE, uEsc);
if( i!=nE){
- sqlite3_result_error(context,
+ sqlite3_result_error(context,
"ESCAPE expression must be a single character", -1);
return;
}
** This function is called when an ICU function called from within
** the implementation of an SQL scalar function returns an error.
**
-** The scalar function context passed as the first argument is
+** The scalar function context passed as the first argument is
** loaded with an error message based on the following two args.
*/
static void icuFunctionError(
/*
** Implementation of SQLite REGEXP operator. This scalar function takes
** two arguments. The first is a regular expression pattern to compile
-** the second is a string to match against that pattern. If either
+** the second is a string to match against that pattern. If either
** argument is an SQL NULL, then NULL Is returned. Otherwise, the result
** is 1 if the string matches the pattern, or 0 otherwise.
**
UBool res;
const UChar *zString = sqlite3_value_text16(apArg[1]);
- /* If the left hand side of the regexp operator is NULL,
- ** then the result is also NULL.
+ /* If the left hand side of the regexp operator is NULL,
+ ** then the result is also NULL.
*/
if( !zString ){
return;
}
/* Set the text that the regular expression operates on to a NULL
- ** pointer. This is not really necessary, but it is tidier than
+ ** pointer. This is not really necessary, but it is tidier than
** leaving the regular expression object configured with an invalid
** pointer after this function returns.
*/
}
/*
-** Implementations of scalar functions for case mapping - upper() and
+** Implementations of scalar functions for case mapping - upper() and
** lower(). Function upper() converts its input to upper-case (ABC).
** Function lower() converts to lower-case (abc).
**
** "language specific". Refer to ICU documentation for the differences
** between the two.
**
-** To utilise "general" case mapping, the upper() or lower() scalar
+** To utilise "general" case mapping, the upper() or lower() scalar
** functions are invoked with one argument:
**
** upper('ABC') -> 'abc'
/*
** Implementation of the scalar function icu_load_collation().
**
-** This scalar function is used to add ICU collation based collation
+** This scalar function is used to add ICU collation based collation
** types to an SQLite database connection. It is intended to be called
** as follows:
**
** collation sequence to create.
*/
static void icuLoadCollation(
- sqlite3_context *p,
- int nArg,
+ sqlite3_context *p,
+ int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
sqlite3 *db = (sqlite3 *)sqlite3_user_data(p);
}
assert(p);
- rc = sqlite3_create_collation_v2(db, zName, SQLITE_UTF16, (void *)pUCollator,
+ rc = sqlite3_create_collation_v2(db, zName, SQLITE_UTF16, (void *)pUCollator,
icuCollationColl, icuCollationDel
);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
#if !SQLITE_CORE
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_extension_init(
- sqlite3 *db,
+ sqlite3 *db,
char **pzErrMsg,
const sqlite3_api_routines *pApi
){
**
*************************************************************************
** This file implements a tokenizer for fts3 based on the ICU library.
-**
+**
** $Id: fts3_icu.c,v 1.3 2008/09/01 18:34:20 danielk1977 Exp $
*/
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1]. A cursor
-** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
+** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int icuOpen(
pCsr->aOffset = (int *)&pCsr->aChar[nChar];
pCsr->aOffset[iOut] = iInput;
- U8_NEXT(zInput, iInput, nInput, c);
+ U8_NEXT(zInput, iInput, nInput, c);
while( c>0 ){
int isError = 0;
c = u_foldCase(c, opt);
git.samba.org / lorikeet-heimdal.git / commitdiff